2011

Manuals Brands Autodesk Manuals Other AUTOCAD MAP 3D

Table Of Contents

AutoCAD

Map 3D 2011

User's Guide

April 2010

Summary of content (2180 pages)

PAGE 1

AutoCAD® Map 3D 2011 User's Guide April 2010
PAGE 2

© 2010 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.
PAGE 3

Contents Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Overview of AutoCAD Map 3D Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 The AutoCAD Map 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Map Files and Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Map Files and Display Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview of AutoCAD Map 3D Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 4

Watching the Welcome Screen Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User's Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Help with AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New in This Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Other Sources of Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . Participating in Autodesk Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing This Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 5

Setting Coordinate System Options . . . . . . . . . Setting Coordinate Tracker Options . . . . . . . . . Setting Coordinate Geometry Options . . . . . . . Setting Data Source Options for Drawings . . . . . Setting Data View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Geospatial Feature Editing Options . . . . . Setting Metadata Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting InfoCenter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associating Database Versions with File Extensions Setting Query Options (DWG) . . . . . . .
PAGE 6

Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property . . . . . . . . . Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data . . Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology . . . . . Combining Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing in Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing in LandXML Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing in ASCII Point Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing in LiDAR Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing in Point Cloud Data . . . . . . . .
PAGE 7

Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects . Converting Object Data to Database Links . . . . . . Editing Database Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Link Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Open Source FDO Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4 Managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 . 533 . 536 . 538 . 540 . 543 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 8

Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 Overview of Visualization and Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Display of Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the Display Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Map Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Display Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . Styling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 9

Working with Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727 Overview of Working with Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 727 Editing Data in Attached Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729 Cleaning Up Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . 820 Using Map Editing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926 Working with Polygon Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 10

Overview of Annotating Maps . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Labels to Features . . . . . . . . . . Allowing Labels to Obscure Points . . . . . . Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations . Annotating Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Annotation to Objects . . . . . . Refreshing Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Annotation from Drawings . . .
PAGE 11

Buffering Features in Your Map . . . . . . . Overlaying Two Feature Sources . . . . . . . Analyzing Drawing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies . Performing a Shortest Path Trace . . . . . . . Performing a Best Route Analysis . . . . . . Performing a Flood Trace . . . . . . . . . . . Overlaying Two Topologies . . . . . . . . . . Dissolving a Composite Topology . . . . . . Buffering a Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . Querying a Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 12

Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology . . . . . . . Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF File . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Maps to DWG Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store . . . . . . . . Exporting DWG Data to an Image Format . . . . . . . . . Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data Store and Back Again Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer . . . . . . . Exporting Survey Points to a LandXML File . . . . . . . . Exporting and Printing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 13

Mapping Commands . . . Discontinued Commands Wildcard Characters . . . Improving Performance . Chapter 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519 . 1533 . 1537 . 1538 Expression Evaluator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arithmetic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 14

Insert Annotation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574 New Annotation Template Name dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576 Chapter 16 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577 Publish to MapGuide dialog box . . . . . . Publish to MapGuide Results dialog box . . Define New Object Data Field dialog box . New Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box . . Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box . . Chapter 17 . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 15

Chapter 21 Digitizing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615 MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) . . . . . . Data to Attach dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . Digitize Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Template Data Entry dialog box . . . . . Link Template Key Column Entry dialog box . Chapter 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615 . 1616 . 1617 . 1619 . 1620 Display Manager Dialog Boxes . . . . .
PAGE 16

MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE . . . . MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT . . . . . MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE . . . . . . . MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT . . . . . . . . . MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE . . . . . MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT . . . . . . . MAPPOINTCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . MAPPOLYGONCREATE . . . . . . . . . MAPPOLYGONEDIT . . . . . . . . . . Break Objects at Boundary dialog box . COGO Input dialog box . . . . . . . . Split and Merge Rules dialog box . . . . Trim Objects At Boundary dialog box . Chapter 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 17

Define Link Template dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export to LandXML dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Data Options dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . Import ASCII Points dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LandXML Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . .
PAGE 18

Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779 MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects command) . . MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified Objects command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects command) . Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . Classified Property List dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classify dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 19

Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835 Alternate Font dialog box . . . . . . . . . Change Category dialog box . . . . . . . . Data Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . Define New Category dialog box . . . . . . Define Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . Define Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . Define Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . Hatch Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . Load Internal Query dialog box . . . . . . Location Condition dialog box . . . .
PAGE 20

Project Properties dialog box . . . . Survey Properties dialog box . . . . Point Group Properties dialog box . Field Note Editor . . . . . . . . . . Create Surface dialog box . . . . . . Source Data dialog box . . . . . . . Point Cloud Manager . . . . . . . . Surface Manager . . . . . . . . . . Filter Point Cloud dialog box . . . . Grid Parameters dialog box . . . . . Point Cloud Style dialog box . . . . Chapter 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 21

MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1943 MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction of Topology Link command) . . . . 1943 MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . 1944 MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944 MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1945 MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1946 MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 22

Rename Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1988 Select Data dialog box - Topology Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1989 Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box . . . . 1990 Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1991 Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1992 Topology Dissolve - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box . . 1994 Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 23

List Current Connections . . . List Feature Classes . . . . . . List Feature Layer Properties . Load Layer File . . . . . . . . Perform Overlay . . . . . . . Remove Connection . . . . . Remove Feature Layer . . . . Remove Group . . . . . . . . Remove Map . . . . . . . . . Rename Map . . . . . . . . . Run AutoCAD Command . . Run Workflow . . . . . . . . Save Layer File . . . . . . . . Select Features . . . . . . . . Switch Map . . . . . . . . . . Zoom To Extents . . . . . . . Chapter 41 . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 24

xxiv
PAGE 25

Getting Started Guide 1 This section provides the following: ■ An introduction to the main concepts and features of AutoCAD Map 3D ■ A description of resources for learning more about the program ■ An overview of the available sample data and templates For a tutorial that provides a tour of the application and leads you through the basic steps of creating a map, see Introducing AutoCAD Map 3D 2011.
PAGE 26

The AutoCAD Map 3D Window The main elements of the AutoCAD Map 3D product window The Ribbon. The commands for your mapping tasks. Data Table and Data View. Display attribute data in a table format. Use the Data Table (page 2059) for viewing spatial data and attribute data for geospatial features; use the Data View for viewing attribute data linked to drawing objects. The Task Pane.
PAGE 27

Tell me more ■ To switch between Tool-based, Task-based, and Map Classic workspaces (page 86) ■ To access the Data Table (page 1127) ■ To use the Data View (page 1047) Procedures ■ To set Task Pane options (page 221) ■ To add an item to the status bar ■ To use dynamic input ■ Lesson 2: Take a Quick Tour of AutoCAD Map 3D ■ Set Up Your Work Environment ■ Customizing Your Work Environment (page 84) ■ Workspaces ■ Setting Options (page 216) Tutorial Workflow Related topics Map Files a
PAGE 28

your display map, or add features from a geospatial database. The map file remembers all the connections and which objects you added to the map file. This map contains a photo raster image, building data stored in a SHP file, and parcel data stored in a DWG file. What is the Display Manager? You coordinate the data in your map using the Display Manager. Each set of data is a Display Manager layer. For example, a raster layer can display an aerial photograph of a city.
PAGE 29

It also stores queries, object data, styling information, printing layouts, and any customized settings. Each data set is a layer in the map. Whenever you open a map file, all this information is immediately available to you. What is a data source? A data source is any source of information that can be used in a map.
PAGE 30

What can you do with a finished map? You can share maps even with viewers who do not have access to AutoCAD Map 3D. For example, you can share maps in the following ways: ■ Print maps ■ Save maps as DWFs (which can be viewed with Autodesk Design Review, available from the Autodesk web site) ■ Publish maps to MapGuide ■ Convert all the data to AutoCAD DWG data ■ Post maps on the web Publish to a MapGuide server to share a map on the web.
PAGE 31

■ To create a map with styled drawing layers (page 654) ■ To publish your map (page 1361) ■ Lesson 3: Get Started ■ Create a Map Start to Finish ■ Bring in data from multiple image files to a single layer. ■ Publish a completed map to a MapGuide server.
PAGE 32

This map has Display Manager layers for railroads, roads, parks, the river, and parcels. Each is styled differently. For an introduction to the parts of the AutoCAD Map 3D window, see Lesson 2: Take a Quick Tour of AutoCAD Map 3D. Tell me more ■ Show me how to theme a parcels layer.
PAGE 33

Related topics ■ Overview of the Display Manager (page 634) ■ Creating Multiple Display Maps (page 638) Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects Use AutoCAD Map 3D to work with both CAD objects and geospatial features. You can combine them in your map, edit either type of data, and move data from one format to the other. Combine data from drawing files and geospatial data stores. Geospatial Features A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road or a utility pole.
PAGE 34

original location of the objects and saves edited objects back to their original file. Tell me more ■ Show me how to bring in objects from a set of attached DWG files. ■ Show me how to bring in features from a feature class. ■ Show me how to bring in data from AutoCAD Civil 3D.
PAGE 35

Create and Assign Geographic Coordinate Systems Work with more than 4,000 real-world coordinate systems or define your own custom coordinate system. Use tools such as transform, rubber sheeting, and track coordinates to georeference your AutoCAD design data accurately. Coordinate systems determine how your map is projected in two dimensions. Assign a coordinate system to the drawing to locate it in real space.
PAGE 36

You can enter or select the appropriate coordinate system for the map. Tell me more ■ Show me how to set a map to the coordinate system of the data. ■ To assign coordinate systems (page ?) ■ Exercise 1: Create a map ■ Work with Coordinate Systems ■ Reproject incoming data to a new coordinate system.
PAGE 37

can maintain it in a DWG™ file, convert it to an external file, or move it into a spatial database. DWG Data Maps are saved in DWG format. Open an AutoCAD drawing directly, or attach drawings and query in just the objects you want. ■ Combine feature data from a spatial database with objects from CAD drawings, raw geometry from a spreadsheet, and raster images. ■ Features and objects are automatically transformed to the coordinate system used in the map. Spatial Data Connect to the data to include.
PAGE 38

Raster Images Add aerial photos, contour maps, and DEM surfaces. ■ Georeferenced images are displayed in the correct location. ■ Surface rasters are draped over your elevations. Connect to the data from the Task pane. 14 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide ■ Select the data source. ■ Select the feature classes to add to your map. ■ Each feature class you add becomes a layer in the Display Manager.
PAGE 39

The layers in Display Manager (page 2060) represent the data sources to which this map is connected. The Data Table (page 2059) lets you edit the information for individual items in a layer. Import Data You can import data, rather than connecting to it. Importing breaks the connection to the source and adds a “snapshot” of the data to your map. If the data changes after that, you will not see any changes in your map unless you import the data again. There is no way to update imported data in its source.
PAGE 40

When you import data, you can structure it in your map. Assign data to layers or object classes. Add attribute data to object data tables. Assign a coordinate system. Specify that points come in as points, text, or blocks. You can read, write, and convert data between standard formats.
PAGE 41

When you join a database to a feature layer, the properties from both data stores are available to that layer for theming and other purposes. Add Survey Data Bring in points you exported from Autodesk Civil 3D (LandXML) or ASCII data from a GPS device.
PAGE 42

Add Point Cloud Data Bring in point cloud (page 2071) data from LiDAR (page 2066) Aerial Survey (.LAS) files or ASCII (.XYZ) files.
PAGE 43

GIS Skills Related topics ■ Bring in data from multiple image files to a single layer. ■ Access data published on a public web server. ■ Bring in point data from a Microsoft Access database. ■ Bring in a subset of features using a query.
PAGE 44

Use the powerful, high-precision AutoCAD tools to edit a feature, then save your changes back to the data source. Lock Data for Secure Editing For geospatial features, you can choose how to save your changes. Set an option to save changes to the original source automatically, or work offline and update the feature source when you finish editing. Check out a feature to lock it for other users (if the feature source supports this option). Check it back in to make it available again.
PAGE 45

Drawing objects selected for editing in a save set (the red circle in the illustration) are locked so others cannot edit them. Spatial Data Type Locking Capability Oracle and ArcSDE Individual features are locked when you check them out. Attached drawings (DWG) Individual objects are locked when you query them into the map. Clean Up Drawings Using Drawing Cleanup tools, you can automate the correction of common drafting and digitizing errors.
PAGE 46

Review, mark, and correct errors interactively. Use Coordinate Geometry Commands Create and measure simple coordinate geometry (COGO) for lines, curves, closed polylines, and polygons. When drawing plats and existing conditions, input geometry in terms of bearing, direction, deflection, and azimuth angle.
PAGE 47

Use the Deflection And Distance COGO command to specify a point by supplying a deflection angle and a distance from another point. Use the COGO Input dialog box to enter coordinates manually or select them in the drawing or in the Data Table. The Inverse Report option gives you information about the relationship between existing points. Tell me more Video Procedures ■ Show me how multi-user editing of drawing files works. ■ Show me how to edit features stored in a database or data store.
PAGE 48

Related topics ■ Create new features from existing AutoCAD objects. ■ Working with Features (page 683) ■ Working with Drawing Objects (page 727) ■ Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings (page 730) ■ Cleaning Up Drawing Data (page 765) ■ Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands (page 1027) Search and Filter Data Using DWG query functionality, multiple users can access, search, and edit the same sets of DWG files or base maps simultaneously.
PAGE 49

Use queries to filter data as you add it to your map. You can also filter data after you add it to your map. For example, use a query to select a subset of data. Use geospatial and DWG queries to find a feature or object based on its location, its properties, or attribute data linked to it from another source.
PAGE 50

Apply a query to any feature layer in the Display Manager. Tell me more ■ Show me how to run a query on a set of attached DWG files. ■ Show me how to run a query on a feature class.
PAGE 51

■ Bring in a subset of features using a query. ■ Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map (page 309) ■ Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351) ■ Finding and Selecting Features (page 1206) ■ Finding and Querying Drawing Objects (page 1218) GIS Skills Related topics View and Edit Attribute Data Attribute data is non-geometry data about a drawing object or feature.
PAGE 52

■ Display attribute data on your map as text. ■ View and edit attribute data for features using the Data Table. Data Table Use the Data Table to highlight data for specific features in your map. AutoCAD Map 3D maintains the link between spatial data and attribute data; when you update the attribute data, the updates are dynamically reflected in your drawing. The Data Table displays geometry and attribute data for a feature. You can search and theme features based on any data in the feature source.
PAGE 53

Link attribute data to drawing objects, then highlight objects in your map by selecting the linked data in the table. Tell me more ■ Show me how to view the contents of an SDF file. ■ To display the Data Table ■ To use the Data View ■ Data Table and Data View ■ Attach Attribute Data to Drawing Objects ■ Add Attribute Data Based on Constraints ■ Join Attribute Data to a Geospatial Feature ■ Convert styled DWG objects to features.
PAGE 54

■ Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects (page 521) Use Metadata View, create, and edit metadata (the who, what, when, where, why, and how) about your spatial information. View and edit metadata. Publish metadata in standard formats including International Organization for Standardization (ISO) (19115 and 19139) and Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC). Share your data with other people in your organization or externally with contractors and regulatory agencies.
PAGE 55

■ Lesson 6: Generate Metadata for a Classified Drawing ■ Create a Feature Map ■ Create a CAD Map ■ View and interpret metadata. ■ Create metadata for your map. ■ Creating and Viewing Metadata (page 1486) ■ Overview of Sharing Metadata (page 1510) Tutorial Workflow GIS Skill Related topics Organize Data Organize objects in your drawing by the real-world features that they represent (for example, roads, parcels, cables, or water pipes).
PAGE 56

The Object Class tab of the Properties palette displays the properties associated with the class of the selected object. If you are an AutoCAD Map 3D subscriber, you can download free industry-specific toolkits. These toolkits fast-track the classification process. To enroll in or visit the Subscription Center, click at the top right of the application window. in the InfoCenter area Feature Classes for Geospatial Data FDO features use schemas to define their feature classes and feature properties.
PAGE 57

Use the Schema Editor to create or edit properties in a feature class. Tell me more ■ Show me how to append a feature class to an SDF file.
PAGE 58

■ Edit a schema (SDF) ■ Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page 117) ■ Overview of Object Classification (page 981) ■ Overview of Working with Schemas (page 594) GIS Skills Related topics Style Data Use styles to change the appearance of objects and features in your map. ■ Assign visual properties to object groups, or to objects that match certain criteria. ■ Create complex styles, such as roads with a thick black line with a double yellow stripe down the middle.
PAGE 59

Style Drawing Objects and Features Style layers in Display Manager (page 2060) to change the appearance of your map. Style Surfaces Visualize and analyze large-scale topographic information—digital elevation models (DEM) and ESRI GRID files. ■ Show elevation, slope, and aspect. ■ Create contours. ■ Perform sunlight studies with hill shading. ■ Drape aerial photographs and vector data on topography data. ■ Publish the results to 3D DWF files for viewing in free Autodesk® Design Review software.
PAGE 60

Style raster surfaces to show elevation. Styling Point Cloud Data Style point cloud (page 2071) data by classification, elevation, LiDAR intensity, and RGB values.
PAGE 61

Tell me more Video Procedure ■ To apply styles to points (page 646) ■ To apply styles to areas (page 650) ■ To apply styles to lines (page 649) ■ To style point data by classificationIn the Display Manager, right-click the point cloud layer or gr... (page 677) ■ Lesson 2: Style Map Features ■ Style and Label a Linear Feature ■ Hide and show features as you zoom in and out. ■ Replace points in the map with symbols. ■ Set transparency for parcels or other features.
PAGE 62

■ Locate specific coordinate points and measure the geodetic distance between points. ■ Visually communicate relative values and scale with themed displays. ■ Create contour maps to help you analyze 3D terrain. ■ Use raster-based theming to analyze elevation, slope, and aspect, drape map data over surfaces and view the data in 3D, and more. ■ Create buffer zones based on feature properties and select objects based on their proximity to a buffer.
PAGE 63

Theme Data Use color themes to show the elevation of terrain or illustrate the population density of counties. The colors give the viewer an immediate sense of the population distribution in California Create themes by varying the style based on an attribute of the feature; for example, change the color of parcels based on their size.
PAGE 64

Analyze Surfaces Create contour maps and analyze geospatial data by exaggerating elevations or looking at maps in different light conditions. Create Buffers Use buffers to analyze features by proximity.
PAGE 65

The buffer in this map defines an area within 1000 feet of the river. You can use the buffer to see which parcels lie within the flood zone. Overlay Two Feature Layers Use overlays to compare two feature classes or layers.
PAGE 66

This map overlays two layers (a flood zone and an enterprise zone). You can use the overlay to see where the two intersect. That area becomes a new layer, which you can style and save out to a file and use as a separate data store. Tell me more Video Procedures ■ Show me how to color surfaces based on elevation. ■ Show me how to theme a parcels layer. ■ Show me how to create a buffer zone around a parcel. ■ Show me how to join attribute data to features.
PAGE 67

GIS Skills Related topics ■ Join attribute data to features. ■ Color a surface by elevation and adjust hill shading. ■ Change the elevation ranges for a surface. ■ Analyze the slope and aspect of a site. ■ Select features by location using a buffer.
PAGE 68

Use Bulk Copy to convert data from one geospatial format to another. The Spatial Data File (SDF) The spatial data file (SDF) format lets you store geometry and attribute information in a file-based geospatial format. SDF can hold more information and has faster performance than DWG. SDF supports rich geometry, multiple tables, and spatial indexing.
PAGE 69

The circle represents an SDF file with a single schema that defines three feature classes: valves, pipes, and hydrants. ■ Use Data Connect to connect directly to an SDF file. Any edits you make are made to the SDF file. ■ If you import data from SDF, the imported data becomes drawing objects in your map and the live connection to the SDF file is broken. Importing is one way to convert the data from SDF to DWG.
PAGE 70

■ To create a schema (page 598) ■ Other ways to move data into SDF format (page 1417) ■ To copy data from one feature source to another (page 621) ■ To import data from other formats (page 381) ■ Tutorial: Managing Data From Different Sources ■ Manage Data ■ Create a GIS data store (SDF) to be populated from various sources ■ Bulk copy data from a SHP file to an SDF file ■ Edit a schema (SDF) ■ Limit what can be entered in a field ■ About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Sch
PAGE 71

Share Data AutoCAD Map 3D makes it easy to share data, both within and outside your organization. When you edit data in the original source, your changes are immediately visible to others in your organization. Send Maps to the Field The original map in AutoCAD Map 3D is at the top. On the lower left, the map appears in Autodesk MapGuide Studio. On the right, the map is displayed in a web browser. ■ Plot/print single-page or multi-page maps to paper or to a file.
PAGE 72

■ Use map books to divide a large map into tiles, which are rendered on separate pages. You can include a legend, title, and other information on each page. You can produce maps with insets using map books. ■ Publish maps to the internet using Autodesk MapGuide® Enterprise software. All layers, layer definitions, dynamic labels, queries, filters, and styles (including point, line, raster, and other styles) in your map are published.
PAGE 73

Procedures ■ To publish your map (page 1361) ■ To export drawing objects to other file formats (page 1408) ■ To print and export attribute data (page 1472) ■ Lesson 7: Publish Your Map ■ Print and Publish Data ■ Publish a completed map to a MapGuide server. ■ Create a map book with appropriate-scale tiling for a city. ■ Produce a multi-sheet DWF file for a map book.
PAGE 74

Within a session, you can switch between workspaces. Customize Your Maps Customize map settings and optionally save the resulting map as a template. For each map, you can do the following: ■ Set the coordinate system ■ Attach drawing files ■ Save and organize drawing queries in a library ■ Define annotation templates ■ Set up object data ■ Attach external data and link it to drawing objects Create and Use Automated Workflows Automate a task that involves multiple activities with workflows.
PAGE 75

■ Overview of Setting Options (page 217) ■ Overview of Workflows (page 275) Extend Functionality Using Open Source and API Extensibility Using Open Source With the power of FDO Data Access Technology, you can take advantage of the open source world. FDO extends data access. Third party and open source FDO providers support data stores not currently supported by Autodesk. (For example, there are FDO providers for ESRI Personal Geodatabase and PostGIS).
PAGE 76

Data Preparation Data Conversion Data Access Show me how to bring multiple image files onto a single layer Show me how to run a query on a feature class Data Editing Show me how to draft a new feature for an existing feature class Show me how to edit features stored in a database or data store Show me how to edit features using automatic check-out Show me how to add a point using distance/distance Show me how to add a point using bearing/bearing Show me how to split a parcel feature Show me how to create n
PAGE 77

Show me how to create a calculated field Styling and Theming Features Show me how to make a layer visible only at a certain scale range Show me how to create a second scale range for a road layer Show me how to replace points with symbols Show me how to label features Show me how to label features with automatic resizing Show me how to set the number of decimal places for labels Show me how to create a text layer and add text Show me how to edit text Show me how to rotate text Show me how to make the featu
PAGE 78

Show me how to find the shortest path between two points Show me how to do an overlay analysis using two topologies Show me how to create an overlay analysis for features Show me how to create a buffer zone around a parcel Show me how to use a buffer zone to select parcels Show me how to create overlapping buffer zones Show me how to use a location query with multiple buffers Sharing Data with Others Show me how to export a layer to SDF Show me how to import a layer from SDF Show me how to save a layer to
PAGE 79

Using InfoCenter InfoCenter connects you to Help files and online resources. To look up information 1 Type a word or phrase in the InfoCenter field. 2 To add a location (file or document) to search, click the arrow next to Search (the magnifying glass) and select Add Search Location. For example, search the Help, the New Features Workshop, and specified files at one time. You can also search a single file or location. 3 Click Search.
PAGE 80

Subscription resources provide interactive product features over the Internet. Each time you access subscription resources from Subscription Center in an Autodesk product, product information (such as the serial number, version, language, and the subscription contract ID) is sent to Autodesk for verification that your product is on subscription. Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent to subscription resources to monitor how they are being used and how they can be improved.
PAGE 81

See also: ■ Setting InfoCenter Options (page 242) ■ Using the Help (page 57) ■ Getting Help with AutoCAD (page 58) ■ Using Other Sources of Information (page 59) Using the Help AutoCAD Map 3D Help contains the AutoCAD Help, AutoCAD Map 3D User’s Guide, Reference Guide, Getting Started Guide, and additional information. To display Help ■ . Click Click the question mark to display the User’s Guide. Click the down arrow to select a document to view.
PAGE 82

■ Quick Reference — The commands you need for this task, and where to find them on the menus and toolbars. Use the tabs in the left pane to find information: Contents The Contents groups topics by subject. Browse by selecting and expanding topics. If you use the Index or Search tabs to find a topic, the Contents tab updates to show you where that topic is. Both AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD Help topics are listed in the Contents.
PAGE 83

New in This Release ■ The Readme contains updates about this release of AutoCAD Map 3D, including late-breaking product news and known software issues. View the Readme. ■ New Features Workshop — View a series of graphical topics designed to help you learn about the new features in AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD. Click Help ➤ New Features Workshop. Using Other Sources of Information To see the resources available to help you learn AutoCAD Map 3D, see Learning Resources.
PAGE 84

■ FDO Provider for ODBC API Reference ■ FDO Provider for Raster API Reference ■ FDO Provider for WMS API Reference Specialized AutoCAD Manuals ■ Some AutoCAD manuals, such Build Your World and Getting Started, are available on the product CD. For information on printing these manuals, see Printing This Documentation (page 61). Online Resources ■ Product Support Resources— Get answers quickly and efficiently through email or get Product Support phone numbers.
PAGE 85

For information on custom training, authorized Autodesk training centers, how-to tips, and learning tools (such as Autodesk Courseware), go to Training Resources. e-Learning With Autodesk Subscription, you get the latest releases of Autodesk software, incremental product enhancements, personalized web support from Autodesk technical experts, and self-paced e-Learning. Subscription services are available to subscription members only (available in countries/regions where Autodesk subscriptions are offered).
PAGE 86

4 Click Print. AutoCAD Map 3D Sample Data and Templates Use sample data to experiment with map techniques before deploying your own data. AutoCAD Map 3D sample data includes the following: ■ Symbol sets ■ Templates ■ Map elements, such as north arrows, scale bars, and legends Use these elements to create maps quickly and easily, enhance new and existing maps, promote standards, and improve consistency. They can also serve as the basis for developing your own templates and data.
PAGE 87

Sample Real-World Data With Autodesk Subscription, you get any new upgrades of your Autodesk software and any incremental product enhancements, if these are released during your subscription term. Product enhancements may include extensions, bonus packs or other rich content for AutoCAD Map 3D software. To learn more, visit http://www.autodesk.com/subscription. For all data connections to be correct and connected automatically, copy your sample data to this location: C:\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 Sample Data.
PAGE 88

© IGN - 2007 Institut Geographique National (IGN) provides a comprehensive set of sample data for Haute-de-Seine. ■ NAVTEQ data NAVTEQ provides data sets for 3-km x 3-km areas of seven sample cities from around the world. NAVTEQ data is used in a broad range of location-based applications, navigation products, and mapping sites. The sets include vector data, street centerline map data, and much more.
PAGE 89

■ DigitalGlobe ImageConnect ImageConnect is a plug-in you can install on top of AutoCAD Map 3D. It allows you to bring in georeferenced satellite and aerial photos from the DigitalGlobe online image server. ImageConnect is a quick, cost-effective way to add high-resolution imagery to your maps. ■ Map Book Templates These templates are installed with AutoCAD Map 3D. These map book templates are installed with AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 90

■ More 3D elevation data AutoCAD Map 3D sample data includes additional DEMs to experiment with. ■ Sample maps These maps use sample data from NAVTEQ, Intermap Technologies, and DigitalGlobe. There are also real-world maps from Redding, Grand Forks, Crater Lake, and more. ■ Symbols The sample data includes a copy of the symbol sets, north arrows, and scale bars that are installed with AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 91

When you create a series of maps, templates save time and improve consistency. AutoCAD Map 3D comes with two types of templates: ■ Templates for creating new maps There are four templates available to choose from: map2d.dwt, map2diso.dwt, map3d.dwt, map3diso.dwt. The templates settings optimize 2D and 3D display for metric (ISO) and imperial (ANSI) units, respectively. Click ➤ New ➤ Drawing. Select a template from the list. Templates provided with AutoCAD Map 3D include map2d.dwt and map3d.dwt.
PAGE 92

Map book templates provided with AutoCAD Map 3D include Elegant, Classic, and original designs. You can use both types of templates as-is or adapt them to suit your needs. Templates are available in \Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Application Data\Autodesk\ AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R17.2\enu\Templates If you are an AutoCAD Map 3D subscriber, you can download free industry-specific toolkits. These toolkits include specialized templates.
PAGE 93

Symbols for Water, Gas, Electric, and Emergency Response AutoCAD Map 3D comes with sample symbol sets customized for water networks, gas utilities, electric utilities (North America), and emergency response planning. You can use the sample symbols as-is or as a basis for developing your own symbols. Using symbols can promote standardization and consistency in your organization, and can also improve communication by using familiar symbology. Each set of symbols comes in a separate DWG file.
PAGE 94

To set up the symbols for easy drag-and-drop into your maps, you can add them to a Tool Palette. Symbols for General Use AutoCAD Map 3D has sample symbols for general-purpose use, such as points of interest, transportation, and local government. Like the industry symbols (page 69), general-purpose symbols are usable as-is, or as a basis for developing new symbols. Using symbols can help promote standardization and consistency in your organization, and can improve communication by using familiar symbology.
PAGE 95

The general-use symbols are available in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\Sample\Symbols. North Arrows, Scale Bars, and Other Map Elements Sample north arrows and scale bars (both metric and imperial) are available as dynamic blocks for you to insert into your maps. These north arrows are examples from the Symbols folder. These scale bars are examples from the Symbols folder. Because they are in dynamic block format, these symbols are easy to scale, rotate, and color.
PAGE 96

The legend style on the left appears in your onscreen map. The legend style on the right appears in the published version. Geospatial Data Available for Purchase You can add raster elevation data to 3D maps, vector data, such as land plots or points of interest, or satellite imagery. Autodesk partners with leading geospatial data providers to provide a geodata portal with high-resolution, precision, geospatial data. Get data quickly, easily, and at lower cost. Visit the geodata portal at http://www.
PAGE 97

This data is from Intermap Technologies, NAVTEQ, and DigitalGlobe. Tutorial Sample Files The tutorials are accessible from the Help menu. After installation, the tutorial sample files are located in Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\Help\Map 3D Tutorials. The tutorials advise you to copy the sample files to your My Documents folder so you do not modify the original files. AutoCAD Samples AutoCAD provides sample drawings, sheet sets, blocks, VBA examples, and more.
PAGE 98

74
PAGE 99

User's Guide This section explains AutoCAD Map 3D’s features by introducing concepts, providing step-by-step procedures, and providing quick reference information. For information on AutoCAD commands, refer to the AutoCAD Help.
PAGE 100

76
PAGE 101

2 Setting Up Overview of Setting Up You can customize AutoCAD Map 3D and set up each map file you create to make your work easier and more productive. The following tables summarize your setup options on a product-wide and map-wide basis. On a product-wide level... Use this method... To get this result... Set up user access. Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ The system administrator assigns login names and passwords to users, and specifies what each user can do within the product.
PAGE 102

On a product-wide level... Set up object classification. Use this method... 1 Select a sample object for the object class. 2 Attach an object definition file. 3 On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Object Classes. Click Define Object Class. Set up for digitizing 1 Configure the digitizer in the AutoCAD Options dialog box. 2 Register the map using the TABLET command. 3 Set digitizing specifications in the Digitize Setup dialog box. 4 Use the MAPDIGITIZE command To get this result...
PAGE 103

On a product-wide level... Use this method... To get this result... Customize and automate import and export operations. Edit the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad. Modify the .ini files that specify import and export settings. See Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264). On a map-wide basis... Use this method... To get this result... Assign a coordinate system.
PAGE 104

On a map-wide basis... Use this method... To get this result... Define annotation templates. Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Define Define the information to display in a drawing object annotation and the layout of that information. Then you can attach instances of the annotation to drawing objects in your drawing. See Defining Annotation Templates (page 190) Template. Set up object data. Object Data. Create tables with fields for text and numerical information.
PAGE 105

Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D You can customize AutoCAD Map 3D to make your work easier and more productive. Your changes affect all future sessions of AutoCAD Map 3D. See also: ■ Overview of Setting Up Your Map File (page 139) ■ Setting Options (page 216) The following table summarizes your customization options. To do this... Assign a coordinate system. Use this method... To get this result...
PAGE 106

To do this... Use this method... To get this result... tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ Run. Define annotation templates. Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Define Template. Set up object data. Object Data. Create tables with fields for text and numerical information. Attach records from the table to objects. See Creating an Object Data Table (page 200). Drag the database file from Windows Explorer to the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
PAGE 107

To add a new user 1 Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ ➤ User Administration. 2 In the User Administration dialog box (page 1934), under User Profile, in the Login Name box, enter a name for the user. The login name must be unique. It is not case sensitive. Use any characters except the following: " / \ [ ] : ; | = , + * ? < > 3 In the Password box, enter a password for the user. Passwords are case sensitive.
PAGE 108

Quick Reference MAPUSERADMIN Performs administrative functions Menu Setup menu ➤ User Administration Command Line MAPUSERADMIN Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ User Admin Dialog Box User Administration dialog box Customizing Your Work Environment Your work environment – that is, the way the ribbon, menus, toolbars, and dockable windows are laid out – is saved in a workspace. You can customize a workspace to look and function just the way you want, or create a workspace.
PAGE 109

■ To add ribbon, menu, and toolbar options (page 85) ■ To add entire ribbon tabs, menus, or toolbars to a workspace (page 86) ■ To switch between Tool-based, Task-based, and Map Classic workspaces (page 86) ■ To restore the default colors (page 86) ■ To show the command line interface for a particular workspace (page 87) ■ To hide the map status bar (page 87) ■ To enable Update Edits Automatically by default (page 88) ■ To disable connection pooling by default (page 88) To create a new works
PAGE 110

3 Under Command List, click and drag the tool you want to include to the item in Customizations In All CUI Files. 4 Click Apply. 5 Click OK. To add entire ribbon tabs, menus, or toolbars to a workspace 1 In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All CUI Files, select the workspace you want to modify. 2 Under Workspace Contents, click Customize Workspace. 3 In the Customizations In All CUI Files tree, check the items you want to include. 4 Click Done. 5 Click OK.
PAGE 111

Window Element list. For example, for the Map background, select Model Tab Background. 4 From the Color list, click Select Color. 5 In the Select Color dialog box, click the Color Books tab, and then select AutoCAD Map 3D Colors from the Color Book list. The AutoCAD Map 3D color book displays the default colors used in the application. You can select a color or use the color book as a reference. It does do not control the defaults in the application; do not attempt to modify it.
PAGE 112

To enable Update Edits Automatically by default 1 At the Command prompt, enter mapeditsetautodefault 2 Enter active. To disable connection pooling by default 1 At the Command prompt, enter mapconnectionpooling. 2 Enter deactive. To turn file selection dialog boxes on or off NOTE If you use scripts to automate some AutoCAD Map 3D functions, you may find it useful to turn off dialog boxes . 1 At the Command prompt, enter filedia. 2 To turn on dialog boxes , enter 1. To turn off dialog boxes , enter 0.
PAGE 113

Customizes the AutoCAD settings Menu Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options Command Line OPTIONS Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT Specifies the default setting for updating edits to the feature source automatically Command Line MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT MAPSTATUSBAR Toggles the Map status bar on and off Command Line MAPSTATUSBAR MAPCONNECTIONPOOLING Toggles connection pooling on and off Command Line MAPCONNECTIONPOOLING Creating New Coordinate Systems AutoCAD Map 3D co
PAGE 114

See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143) ■ Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing (page 147) To define coordinate systems ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To define a coordinate system (page 92) To define a datum (page 94) To define an ellipsoid (page 95) To create a coordinate system category (page 97) To modify or delete a coordinate system (page 98) To modify or delete a datum (page 99) To modify or delete an ellipsoid (page 100) To edit or delete a coordinate system category (page 101) O
PAGE 115

For this item... Define, delete, or modify using this method...
PAGE 116

False Origin When defining a custom coordinate system, you may want to enter a false origin, with northing and easting values. For example, if you are using the Transverse Mercator projection, and the central meridian bisects the mapping region, half of the X coordinates are negative values. Coordinate system definitions usually include an offset called the false origin that is added to all coordinates to make them positive. The X coordinate of this offset is called the false origin easting.
PAGE 117

If you are creating a new coordinate system based on an existing coordinate system, you must change the code before you can change any of the other information. 5 Enter a description. AutoCAD Map 3D displays the description in the Coordinate Systems In Category list of the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box. 6 In the Units box, select the units to use for this coordinate system.
PAGE 118

When defining a custom datum, select the conversion technique, either Molodensky, Bursa/Wolfe, or Seven Parameter Transformation. After choosing the conversion technique, specify the appropriate conversion parameters for the technique you chose. See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143) ■ Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103) ■ Defining an Ellipsoid (page 95) To define a datum 1 Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Define Global Coordinate System.
PAGE 119

If you use the Bursa/Wolfe or Seven Parameter Transformation conversion method, fill in all four edit boxes under Rotation Angle From WGS-84 In Arc Seconds. Quick Reference ADEDEFCRDSYS Defines a global coordinate system Menu Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Defining an Ellipsoid You can define a new ellipsoid (page 2062) based on your own data or use a predefined ellipsoid as a basis for creating your own.
PAGE 120

■ Under Coordinate System Type on the General tab of the Define Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Non-Geodetic. Click Define. 2 In the Ellipsoid Manager dialog box, click Define. 3 In the Define Ellipsoid dialog box, enter a code and description for the ellipsoid (page 2062). The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
PAGE 121

■ Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90) ■ Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103) To create a coordinate system category 1 Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Define Global Coordinate System. 2 In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, click Category Manager. 3 In the Coordinate System Category Manager, click New. 4 Type a name in the Category Name box.
PAGE 122

Modifying or Deleting a Global Coordinate System You can modify or delete any coordinate systems that you define. You cannot modify or delete predefined coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D. See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143) ■ Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90) ■ Creating a Coordinate System Category (page 96) To modify or delete a coordinate system 1 Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Define Global Coordinate System.
PAGE 123

Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Modifying or Deleting a Datum You can modify or delete any datum (page 2059) that you define. You cannot modify or delete predefined datums supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D. If you modify or delete a datum that you have defined, you must also modify or delete any coordinate systems that reference that datum.
PAGE 124

7 Enter the appropriate conversion parameters for the conversion technique you selected. Quick Reference ADEDEFCRDSYS Defines a global coordinate system Menu Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Modifying or Deleting an Ellipsoid You can modify or delete any ellipsoid (page 2062) that you define. You cannot modify or delete predefined ellipsoids supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 125

4 If you are modifying an ellipsoid, enter a code and description for the ellipsoid. To modify a predefined ellipsoid, you must change the code before you can change the other ellipsoid properties. 5 Under Calculation Method, select a calculation method. 6 Enter the appropriate ellipsoid dimension parameters for the calculation method you selected.
PAGE 126

3 In the Coordinate System Category Manager, select a category. 4 To modify the category, click Edit. To delete the category, click Remove. 5 If you are modifying the category, do one or more of the following: ■ To remove coordinate systems from the category, click the coordinate system names in the list under the Category Name box. Click Remove. ■ To add coordinate systems to the category, click the coordinate system names in the list under the Available Categories list. Click Add.
PAGE 127

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To set up a new grid data file for France (page 109) To set up a new grid data file for Australia or New Zealand (page 110) To use the new high accuracy GDA94 datum (page 111) To use version 2 of the Canadian National Transformation (page 112) To use version 1 of the Canadian National Transformation (page 113) To modify a coordinate system definition file (page 116) Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues When converting between certain coordinate systems in North America, France, A
PAGE 128

To do this... See this topic...
PAGE 129

■ Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103) ■ Grid Data Files for the United States (page 105) ■ Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109) ■ Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page 110) To set up a new grid data file 1 When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate S
PAGE 130

The following is a list of NADCON grid data files. Files (.las and .los) NADCON (North American Datum Conversion) Area/State conus NAD27 to NAD83 United States (USA) - lower 48 states including EEZ alaska Alaska to NAD83 Alaska hawaii Old Hawaiian to NAD83 Hawaii prvi Puerto Rico to NAD83 Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands stlrnc St. Lawrence Island to NAD83 St Lawrence: off the coast of Alaska stpaul St. Paul Island to NAD83 St Paul: Pribiloff Islands off the coast of Alaska stgeorge St.
PAGE 131

Files (.las and .
PAGE 132

For more information about NADCON grid data files, refer to the National Geodetic Survey web site.
PAGE 133

you add references to such municipal grid data files to the French grid data catalog file, AutoCAD Map 3D will automatically use them as appropriate. Points within the boundaries of the municipal grids will be transformed using the local grid data, and points outside those boundaries will be transformed using national grid data.
PAGE 134

Area Transformation Grid Data File (GSB) GDC File New Zealand New Zealand nzgd2kgrid9911.gsb Nzgd49ToNzgd2K.gdc For more information about Australia and New Zealand coordinate systems, go to http://www.ga.gov.au.
PAGE 135

global coordinate reference frame and is directly compatible with the Global Positioning System (GPS). Due to differences in the way the two datums were created, the GDA94 coordinates of a point appear to be about 200 meters northeast of the AGD coordinates of the same point. The precise size and orientation of the difference varies from place to place. For more technical information on the GDA, go to http://www.icsm.gov.
PAGE 136

Datum Shift Issues for North American Users If the source and destination coordinate systems use different datums, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically performs a datum (page 2059) shift. Within North America, this is most often a shift between the NAD27 and NAD83 datums. For United States users, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the freely distributable NADCON grid data files (page 105) supplied by USGS. Canadian users can use either version 1 or version 2 of the Canadian National Transformation supplied by Geomatics Canada.
PAGE 137

Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems\Canada, and give it the name Ntv2_0.gsb. 3 Using a text editor such as Notepad, open Nad27ToNad83.gdc (located by default in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems folder). 4 Delete the initial pound sign (#) from the line that begins: #.\Canada\Ntv2_0.gsb. To use version 1 of the Canadian National Transformation 1 Obtain a copy of the data file. 2 Copy it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Applica
PAGE 138

File Description QLD_1299.gsb. Default fallback datum: ASTRLA84-7P. GeoidHeight.gdc Grid Data Catalog file for determining the geoid height for any position in the United States. Default data files are GEO96AN.GEO, GEO96AS.GEO, GEO96HW.GEO, GEO96NC.GEO, GEO96NE.GEO, GEO96NW.GEO, GEO96PR.GEO, GEO96SC.GEO, GEO96SE.GEO, and GEO96SW.GEO. Fallback datum definition is not recommended. Nad27ToNad83.gdc Grid Data Catalog file for transformations within North America. Default data files: Conus.l?s, Alaska.
PAGE 139

File Description Rgf93ToNtf.gdc Grid Data Catalog file for transformations between the RGF93 and NTF datums used within France. Default grid data file: gr3df97a.txt. Default fallback datum: NTFG. Vertcon.gdc Grid Data Catalog file for computing the modeled difference in orthometric height between the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD 88) and the National Geodetic Vertical Datum of 1929 (NGVD 29) for a given location specified by latitude and longitude. Default grid data files: VERTCONC.
PAGE 140

File Description .gsb files * Grid data files for Canada, Australia, and New Zealand. Both latitude and longitude shifts (as well as accuracy values) are incorporated into a single .gsb file. The file structure also supports the concept of multiple grids, and subgrids within a major grid. .las and .los files * Grid data files for United States geography.
PAGE 141

See also: ■ Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page 117) ■ Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 995) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To set up object classification (page 118) To define an object class (page 120) To base a new object class on an existing class (page 123) To specify that an object class can be used only as a base class (page 124) To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 125) To modify an object class definition (page 127) To create a new object classification file
PAGE 142

■ Understanding Object Classification (page 983) NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551) To set up object classification ■ Determine the standard objects for your organization. ■ Determine the hierarchy of object classes.
PAGE 143

FEATUREDEF Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing Menu Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class. Icon Define Object Class Command Line FEATUREDEF Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class Dialog Box Define Object Classification dialog box NEWDEF Creates a new object class definition file Menu Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ New Definition File.
PAGE 144

NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551) Editing Object Class Definitions To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class Privileges (page 82). WARNING Only one person should edit object class definitions at a time. If two people edit at the same time, one set of edits may be lost.
PAGE 145

2 If an object definition file is not attached, enter attachdef at the command prompt and attach the file. 3 On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Object Classes. Click Define Object Class. 4 When prompted to select a sample object, select the sample object. Press Enter. 5 In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1785), enter a name and a description. 6 To base this object class on an existing object class (page 123), select the existing object class from the Based On list.
PAGE 146

Quick Reference FEATUREDEF Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing Menu Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class. Icon Define Object Class Command Line FEATUREDEF Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class Dialog Box Define Object Classification dialog box Using Base Object Classes You can create hierarchies of object classes.
PAGE 147

When you select all objects in a base class, objects in object classes based on that class are also selected. Using Object Classes as Base Classes Only Sometimes when you create a base class, you intend to use it only as a base for other object classes and not to create objects in drawings. For example, you may not want the to use the Roads object class to create roads. You want people to create roads using the Primary Roads and Secondary Roads classes that are based on the Roads class.
PAGE 148

4 Add any additional properties you want, and finish defining the object class. To specify that an object class can be used only as a base class 1 Define the object class (page 120). 2 In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1785), select Use As Base Object Classification Only. Users can select objects using the base object class, but they cannot create objects using it.
PAGE 149

settings do not match the range, the object is created using the specified default value. When users edit the values for properties associated with the object class, they can only values that are within the allowable range. (This applies only if you edit the properties using the Object Class Data tab of the Properties palette.) When users classify existing objects, they can skip objects whose values are not within the specified range.
PAGE 150

■ To enter a range of numbers, enclose the first and last numbers in square brackets and separate the numbers with a comma, for example: [3,7] ■ You can combine a range with additional values, for example: 1,[3,7],9 ■ To delete a range, enter two dashes ( "--" ). Range values are case sensitive. For example, if you specify "Road" as an allowable value in the range, "ROAD" will not match this value and will be considered outside of the range.
PAGE 151

Modifying an Object Class Definition To add properties to an object class definition, you must have a sample object that includes the properties you want to add. NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551) Notes and Warnings When you rename an object class, you change the name only in the object classification file. Any objects tagged with the object class name are unchanged.
PAGE 152

3 On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click the object class whose definition you want to modify. Click Define Object Class. 4 Select the sample object. This object must be classified with the object class you want to modify. 5 In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1785), modify properties. ■ You cannot change the object type used for the feature. ■ On the Properties List tab, select or clear properties you want to include in the definition.
PAGE 153

NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551) As a general rule, you want to use the same object classification file across all your drawings. This ensures that you have the same object class definitions for all source drawings attached to a drawing.
PAGE 154

Quick Reference NEWDEF Creates a new object class definition file Menu Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ New Definition File.
PAGE 155

■ Configuring the Digitizer (page 131) ■ Registering the Map (page 133) ■ Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 136) To prepare for digitizing 1 Configure the digitizer. (page 132) 2 Register the map. (page 136) 3 Set the digitizing specifications.
PAGE 156

To configure the digitizing tablet, you define screen pointing areas. A screen pointing area is a rectangular region on the digitizer surface within which the digitizer acts like a mouse and can access windows, menus, and dialog boxes. You can configure two screen pointing areas, one fixed and one floating. When you digitize, the fixed screen pointing area is disabled. To access the menus from the digitizer, use the floating screen pointing area.
PAGE 157

When you complete digitizing, return to the Options dialog box and select the Digitizer And Mouse option to use both input devices.
PAGE 158

The crosses in this illustration mark the digitizer calibration points. Choosing the Number of Calibration Points Selecting a maximum of nine points is a good rule; specifying more only increases computation time with little increase in precision. If the original is not badly distorted, four corner points and some intermediate points are sufficient. It is more important to distribute the points evenly around the whole map than to concentrate more points in an area.
PAGE 159

amounts along a perspective projection. This is the best option for orthophotos. The TABLET command calculates the errors associated with the available transformation options, depending on how many points you digitized. When the calculations are complete, or when you cancel the calculations, a table showing the results of your calibration appears.
PAGE 160

■ Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073) To register the map 1 Tape the map on the tablet. The map on the tablet should be flat, with no bumps or wrinkles, and securely fastened. 2 Start the TABLET command and use the CAL option. 3 Digitize the control points of the map, and enter X and Y coordinate values for the locations. 4 When you complete the control points, press Enter. Wait for the calculations to complete. 5 At the prompt, enter the calibration option to use.
PAGE 161

Label Point A label point is the point used to insert text to describe the digitized object. You can specify a label point for each object as you digitize. Layer Plan the layers you will use in your drawing. A layer is a logical grouping of data, which simplifies organizing and viewing data. For more information, look up "layers, creating" in the help index. Each object that represents a different type of map data should go on a separate layer.
PAGE 162

Width Linear objects that contain three-dimensional information cannot have a width. See also: ■ Registering the Map (page 133) ■ Configuring the Digitizer (page 131) ■ Digitizing Objects (page 1073) ■ Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073) To set digitizing specifications 1 At the command prompt, enter mapdigisetup. 2 In the Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1617), select an object type. Select Nodes to digitize points or blocks. Select Linear to digitize polylines.
PAGE 163

Quick Reference MAPDIGISETUP Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects Menu Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize Setup.
PAGE 164

The following table summarizes your customization options for a map file. To do this... Assign a coordinate system. Use this method... To get this result... Click Map Setup tab ➤ Co- Specify the coordinate system used for attached drawings and for the current drawing. See Assigning Coordinate Systems (page 142) ordinate System panel ➤ As- sign. Attach drawings. Drag the drawing file from Windows Explorer to the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
PAGE 165

To do this... Set up object data. Use this method... To get this result... Click Map Setup tab ➤ At- Object Data. Create tables with fields for text and numerical information. Attach records from the table to objects. See Creating an Object Data Table (page 200). Drag the database file from Windows Explorer to the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane. Attach a database to your map and link records from that table to objects in your map. See Attaching a Data Source (page 208).
PAGE 166

See also: ■ Setting Multi-user Options (page 226) ■ Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights (page 82) To log in to AutoCAD Map 3D 1 Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ ➤ User Login. 2 In the User Login dialog box (page 1937), for Login Name, enter the login name provided to you by your system administrator. 3 In the Password box, enter your password. The default superuser login name is SuperUser (case insensitive) and the password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive).
PAGE 167

See also: ■ Defining Coordinate Systems (page 89) ■ Grid Data Files and Datum Shifts (page 102) To assign coordinate systems ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To use coordinate systems with maps (page 145) To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing (page 146) To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing (page 147) To determine if a coordinate system is geodetic (page 149) To turn off a global coordinate system (page 150) To see the assigned coordinate system for a source drawing (page 151) To transform the
PAGE 168

The coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D include the Universal Transverse Mercator System and the State Plane coordinate systems used in the USA, as well as many international coordinate systems used around the world. For a complete listing of supported systems, see the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box. Tell me more ■ Show me how to assign a coordinate system to my map. ■ Show me how to set a map to the coordinate system of the data.
PAGE 169

To use coordinate systems with maps ■ Assign a coordinate system (page 145) to your current drawing and to the source drawings.
PAGE 170

See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143) ■ Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing (page 152) ■ Viewing the Assigned Coordinate System for a Source Drawing (page 151) ■ Removing an Assigned Coordinate System (page 150) ■ Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90) ■ Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103) To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing 1 Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Assign.
PAGE 171

Menu Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System Icon Assign Coordinate System Command Line ADESETCRDSYS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Coordinate System Dialog Box Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing You must specify a coordinate system for the current drawing to take advantage of the coordinate transformation capabilities in AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 172

of available coordinate systems. You can also search for coordinate systems by code or description using the Search box. Click Properties to view the properties of the selected coordinate system. 3 Click OK.
PAGE 173

See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143) ■ Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing (page 152) ■ Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90) ■ Defining a New Datum (page 93) ■ Defining an Ellipsoid (page 95) To determine if a coordinate system is geodetic 1 Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Assign. 2 In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1598), under Current Drawing or Source Drawings, click Select Coordinate System.
PAGE 174

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Coordinate System Dialog Box Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box Removing an Assigned Coordinate System For ADE data, using the AutoCAD Map 3D coordinate systems requires many complex calculations that can decrease performance when querying objects from attached drawings and saving back the objects. With FDO data these calculations are unnecessary, so there is no performance impact.
PAGE 175

Dialog Box Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box Viewing the Assigned Coordinate System for a Source Drawing If the current drawing has an assigned coordinate system, you can view the code in the Drawing Settings dialog box.
PAGE 176

Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing You can transform an existing map from one coordinate system to another by querying the objects from the attached source drawing into the current drawing. The original source drawing is unchanged, but the objects in the current drawing use the new coordinate system.
PAGE 177

Quick Reference ADEDRAWINGS Manages the drawing set Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set Icon Define/Modify Drawing Set Command Line ADEDRAWINGS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box ADEQUERY Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query Icon Define Query Command Line AD
PAGE 178

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Coordinate System Dialog Box Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box Attaching Drawings When you attach a drawing to the current drawing, you can work with any objects and data in that drawing, edit them, and save them back to the attached drawing. NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
PAGE 179

Aligning Attached Drawings If an attached drawing has a global coordinate system assigned to it, objects from that drawing are automatically converted to their appropriate size and location in the current drawing. If an attached drawing does not have a global coordinate system assigned to it, you can specify how to align objects from that drawing when they are copied into the current drawing.
PAGE 180

■ Viewing Information about Attached Drawings (page 171) ■ Viewing Objects in the Save Set (page 752) NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). To create a drawing set 1 If necessary, create a drive alias (page 161). 2 Attach the drawings (page 157) you plan to use with the project. 3 Activate the drawings (page 160) to query.
PAGE 181

Attaching a Drawing NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). Nested Drawings If you attach a drawing that has other drawings already attached to it, those other drawings appear in the list as nested drawings. You can query objects from nested drawings. If a top-level drawing is not active, you cannot see or activate nested drawings.
PAGE 182

See also: ■ Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154) ■ Viewing Information about Attached Drawings (page 171) ■ Viewing Objects in the Save Set (page 752) ■ Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163) NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). To attach drawings ■ Drag the file from Windows Explorer to the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
PAGE 183

Quick Reference ADEDRAWINGS Manages the drawing set Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set Icon Define/Modify Drawing Set Command Line ADEDRAWINGS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Activating a Drawing When you run a query to retrieve objects from attached drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D retrieves objects only from active drawings.
PAGE 184

To activate a drawing ➤ In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click the drawing name. Click Activate. NOTE To activate a nested drawing, you must first activate the drawing to which it is attached. To activate a group of drawings 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Drawing Set. 2 Select the drawings to activate. 3 Click Activate.
PAGE 185

assign the same drive alias to the server, such as ProjectMaps, you can specify the location of the attached drawings by this drive alias. AutoCAD Map 3D provides a default drive alias called C. To store drawings in a location other than drive C, create a drive alias for the location. NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). Geospatial connections do not require drive aliases.
PAGE 186

Quick Reference ADEDEFCRDSYS Defines a global coordinate system Menu Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box ADEDRAWINGS Manages the drawing set Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set Icon Define/Modify Drawing Set Command Line ADEDRAWINGS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Opening an
PAGE 187

NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). To open an active attached drawing 1 Do one of the following: ■ Deactivate (page 160) the attached drawing. ■ Close the drawing containing the attached drawing. 2 To open the drawing, click ➤ Open ➤ Drawing.
PAGE 188

See also: ■ Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154) ■ Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351) ■ ■ ■ ■ To create a drawing description (page 166) To set transformation options (page 169) To set save back extents (page 170) To view information about attached drawings (page 172) Overview of Modifying Attached Drawing Settings You can specify how attached drawings work with the current drawing. You can also view information about attached drawings.
PAGE 189

To do this... Use this method... Specify save back extents that are different from the drawing extents. In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Vew information about attached drawings such as the number and type of objects, symbol tables, object data tables, and object classes. Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Drawing Set.Click the Drawing Settings tab. See Setting Save Back Extents (page 170). In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Drawings. Click Statistics.
PAGE 190

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Statistics Dialog Box Drawing Statistics dialog box Creating a Drawing Description Providing a description for an attached drawing helps you and other users identify the drawing more easily. TIP You can filter a drawing list by the drawing description. For example, when you are selecting drawings to Quick View, you could display only drawings with the word 'sewer' in their description. NOTE Drawing descriptions apply to drawings only.
PAGE 191

Manages the drawing set Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set Icon Define/Modify Drawing Set Command Line ADEDRAWINGS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Setting Transformation Options Set simple transformation options to specify how to adjust the scale, rotation, and XY offset of objects retrieved from an attached drawing.
PAGE 192

You can rotate objects from attached drawings so they match the rotation of the current drawing. Example: You have individual maps for each square-mile sector. You create a drawing that encompasses a 5-square mile area, and you attach each of the square-mile maps. You set the appropriate offset for each attached map so it appears correctly in the current drawing. If you save edited objects back to attached drawings, the objects are restored to their original rotation, scale, and offset.
PAGE 193

NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To set transformation options 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Drawing Set. 2 Click Drawing Settings. 3 In the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1923), select the drawing whose objects you want to transform. 4 Under Simple Transformation, select On/Off. 5 In the Scale box, enter the scale factor to scale the objects.
PAGE 194

Icon Define/Modify Drawing Set Command Line ADEDRAWINGS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Setting Save Back Extents For an attached drawing, you can specify save back extents that are different from the drawing extents. This is useful if you save objects back to attached drawings based on their location.
PAGE 195

5 Specify the boundary by using your pointing device or by entering coordinates on the command line. When you finish specifying the boundary, press Enter. 6 Click Apply. TIP To view the save back extents, click Show <. NOTE Simple transformations modify the default save back extents but do not affect user-defined save back extents.
PAGE 196

■ Object Classes — Displays object classes used in the selected drawings and the number of objects in each object class. NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To view information for geospatial feature data, see Getting Information about Features (page 1125). See also: ■ Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154) ■ Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351) ■ Editing Data in Attached Drawings (page 729) NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only.
PAGE 197

Menu Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Statistics Command Line ADEDWGSTAT Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Statistics Dialog Box Drawing Statistics dialog box Setting Up a Query Library You can save and organize your drawing queries in the query library. NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map (page 309).
PAGE 198

Overview of Using the Query Library If you plan to run a query more than once, you can save it. Once you have saved a query, you can run it anytime. ■ Saving a Query (page 176)— Save the current query to the query library or to an external file. ■ Running a Saved Query (page 178)— Run a query saved in the query library. Each drawing has a query library where you can organize your saved queries into categories.
PAGE 199

You can assign the query to a different category, change the name, description, or location of the query, or add an external query to the library. 4 If you have modified the settings for an existing query, click Update. If you have added a new query, click Add. 5 Click OK.
PAGE 200

Runs externally saved queries Menu Edit menu ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run External Query Command Line ADERUNXQUERY Saving a Query If you plan to use a query more than once, you can save it. You can save the query with the current drawing, or you can save it to an external file. Saving to an external file is useful if you want to share a query with another user or use it in another drawing.
PAGE 201

■ Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180) NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map (page 309). To save a query 1 Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query. 2 Make sure the query to save is the current query. If it is not, modify the current query or click load a different query. 3 Click Save Query.
PAGE 202

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Running a Saved Query After you save queries, you can load, revise, and execute them. NOTE If you plan to modify an externally saved query before executing it, do not set Auto Execute in the Save Current Query dialog box. That way, when you run the query, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the query in the Define Query dialog box but does not execute it.
PAGE 203

3 Select the query in the Available Queries list. 4 Click Execute Query. To run a query from Map Explorer 1 On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click the query name. 2 Do one of the following: ■ Click Execute As Preview to execute the query as a preview query, regardless of whether it was defined as a preview, draw, or report mode query. ■ Click Execute As Defined to execute the query using the query mode with which it was defined.
PAGE 204

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Execute As Preview-or- Right-click Current Query ➤ Execute As Defined-or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As Preview-or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As Defined Dialog Box Run Library Query dialog box ADERUNXQUERY Runs externally saved queries Menu Edit menu ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run External Query Command Line ADERUNXQUERY Adding an External Query to Your Library You can list an external query in the query library.
PAGE 205

2 In the Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1858), select a category. 3 Under Selected Query, make sure that the Query Type is set to External. 4 Click Browse. Select the file that contains the external query. 5 Specify a name and description for the query. 6 Click OK. To execute the query, click Create tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ Run.
PAGE 206

See also: ■ Overview of Queries (page 1235) ■ Executing Drawing Queries (page 1287) ■ Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180) NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map (page 309). To add a category to the query library 1 Click Create tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ Library.
PAGE 207

3 Click OK. Quick Reference ADEQUERYLIB Maintains the library of queries Menu Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library Icon Query Library Command Line ADEQUERYLIB Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Query Library ➤ Administration Dialog Box Query Library Administration dialog box Editing a Saved Query Once you have saved a query to the query library, you can reload the query at any time to review it or revise it. If you save the query to an external file, it is saved as an AutoLISP script.
PAGE 208

NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map (page 309). To edit a query saved with the current drawing 1 On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click a query name. Click Edit. The Define Query dialog box (page 1838) appears with the selected query loaded. 2 Modify any conditions (page 1258). 3 Modify any property alterations (page 1286). 4 In the Define Query dialog box, click Save.
PAGE 209

Quick Reference ADEQUERY Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query Icon Define Query Command Line ADEQUERY Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Setting Up Annotation Templates NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only.
PAGE 210

■ Exercise 3: Add labels ■ Lesson 6: Create a Legend ■ Style and Label a Linear Feature ■ Label features and optimize placement. ■ Create and edit a legend. ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ Setting Up Annotation Templates (page 185) Workflow GIS Skill Related topics To set up annotation templates NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
PAGE 211

Labeling Objects Using Annotation Templates Use annotation to label drawing objects with data values, such as the following: ■ Attributes, such as object data (page 2070) or linked external data (page 2062) ■ Display properties, such as line weight ■ Geometric values, such as line direction ■ Graphics, such as arrows, static text, or other geometry, added with standard AutoCAD drawing commands NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only.
PAGE 212

Refresh or Update command to apply your changes to the annotations that use the template you changed. Using Annotation Templates from XREFs To use an annotation template stored in another drawing, use the XBIND command to attach that drawing as an XREF. Block names in the XREFed drawing have a prefix that consists of the XREF drawing file name followed by a vertical bar.
PAGE 213

Related topics ■ Create and edit a legend. ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ Setting Up Annotation Templates (page 185) See also: ■ Overview of Annotation (page 1100) NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091). To set up annotation 1 Define an annotation template. (page 192) 2 Attach annotation to objects.
PAGE 214

Icon Define Annotation Template Command Line MAPANNTEMPLATE Dialog Box Define Annotation Template dialog box MAPANNTEXT Creates and edits annotation text Icon Edit Annotation Text Command Line MAPANNTEXT Dialog Box Annotation Text dialog box Defining Annotation Templates An annotation template can include text and graphics. NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
PAGE 215

Tell me more Video Procedure Tutorial ■ Show me how to label features. ■ Show me how to label features with automatic resizing. ■ Show me how to place a legend in the map and specify its contents. ■ Show me how to edit the table style for a legend.
PAGE 216

NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091). To define an annotation template 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Define Template. 2 In the Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 1572), click New. You can change the other settings in this dialog box later in the procedure. 3 In the New Annotation Template Name dialog box (page 1576), type a name for the template, and click OK.
PAGE 217

Click box, click Click to create an expression. Within the Edit Expression dialog to select from a list of available properties and attributes. to use a value from within the Block Editor. If you select ByBlock for Color or Lineweight, the settings in the Define Annotation Template dialog box will be used. ■ Click OK to return to the Block Editor. 6 In the Block Editor, click a location for this tag.
PAGE 218

Quick Reference MAPANNTEMPLATE Defines and modifies annotation templates Menu Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ä¶. Icon Define Annotation Template Command Line MAPANNTEMPLATE Dialog Box Define Annotation Template dialog box MAPANNTEXT Creates and edits annotation text Icon Edit Annotation Text Command Line MAPANNTEXT Dialog Box Annotation Text dialog box Changing Annotation Templates You can change the contents of an existing template.
PAGE 219

Procedure Tutorial ■ Show me how to place a legend in the map and specify its contents. ■ Show me how to edit the table style for a legend. ■ To label features (page 1093) ■ To insert annotation (page 1103) ■ To create a legend (page 1118) ■ Tutorial: Annotating Your Map ■ Exercise 3: Add labels ■ Lesson 6: Create a Legend ■ Style and Label a Linear Feature ■ Label features and optimize placement. ■ Create and edit a legend.
PAGE 220

To change an annotation template 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Define Template. 2 In the Template Name list, click the template to change. 3 Do one or more of the following: ■ Click Copy to make a copy of the template. ■ Click Rename to rename the template. ■ Click Edit Template Contents to modify the text or graphical elements of the template. ■ Change any properties or insertion options.
PAGE 221

Dialog Box Annotation Text dialog box Deleting Annotation Templates You can delete an annotation template only if you first delete all references to that template from the drawing. NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091). See also: ■ Overview of Annotation (page 1100) ■ Deleting Annotation from Drawings (page 1108) NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only.
PAGE 222

Quick Reference MAPANNTEMPLATE Defines and modifies annotation templates Menu Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ä¶. Icon Define Annotation Template Command Line MAPANNTEMPLATE Dialog Box Define Annotation Template dialog box Setting Up Object Data Object data is attribute data that is attached to individual objects and stored in tables in the drawing. To use object data, first define the format for the table, and then create each record as you attach it to an object.
PAGE 223

■ To rename or remove an object data table (page 203) Overview of Setting Up Object Data Object data tables store text and numerical information related to an object. NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes (properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with Feature Sources (page 582).
PAGE 224

Icon Define Object Data Command Line ADEDEFDATA Dialog Box Define Object Data dialog box Creating an Object Data Table You can create multiple object data tables in a single drawing. For example, you can create one table with pipe flow information and a separate table with inspection information. NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes (properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125).
PAGE 225

To create an object data table 1 Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ Define Object Data. 2 In the Define Object Data dialog box (page 1805), select a table to modify, or click New Table to create a new table. ■ If you select an existing table, the Object Data Fields list displays fields already defined for the table. ■ If you click New Table, enter a name for the new table. 3 To create a new data field, fill in the Field Definition area: ■ Enter a name and description for the field.
PAGE 226

Modifying an Object Data Table You can add, modify, and delete fields in newly defined object data tables until you perform a save operation (either saving objects back to source drawings or saving the current drawing). Once you perform a save operation, only a Superuser can modify the table. Also, if you have already queried any object from a source drawing, you cannot modify an object data table. When you modify an object data field, AutoCAD Map 3D updates all instances of the field attached to objects.
PAGE 227

NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes (properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with Feature Sources (page 582). To modify an object data table 1 Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ Define Object Data. 2 In the Define Object Data dialog box (page 1805), for Table, select the object data table to modify. 3 Click Modify.
PAGE 228

NOTE When you delete an object data table from a drawing, the table is deleted from all attached, active source drawings. Quick Reference ADEDEFDATA Defines object data Menu Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data Icon Define Object Data Command Line ADEDEFDATA Dialog Box Define Object Data dialog box Using Data from Feature Sources A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road, a utility pole, or a river. Features are stored in a spatial database or file.
PAGE 229

To set up data sources for drawings NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features (page 507).
PAGE 230

NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features (page 507).
PAGE 231

NOTE If you connect your database using the dbConnect command, the instructions in this section of the Help will not work . For information on using the dbConnect command and features, look up "dbconnect" in the help index.
PAGE 232

Menu File menu ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Detach External Records Command Line MAPDETACHDB Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Detach Dialog Box Source dialog box MAPDISCONNECTDB Disconnects an attached, connected database Menu File menu ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Disconnect From External Records Command Line MAPDISCONNECTDB Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Disconnect-or- To disconnect all data sources: Right-click Data Sources ➤ Disconnect All Dialog Box Disconnec
PAGE 233

NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features (page 507). Tips You can set an option (page 235) to have AutoCAD Map 3D prompt you for the database version each time you attach a data source or you can specify a default version. AutoCAD Map 3D stores the UDL (Universal Data Link) (page 2078) files in a specific directory.
PAGE 234

2 In the Attach Data Source dialog box, select the file location and type. You can attach databases with the following extensions: .udl, .db, .dbf, .mdb, and .xls. 3 Click Attach. AutoCAD Map 3D creates the necessary configuration files and attaches the database. For information on using specific database types with AutoCAD Map 3D, see the AutoCAD help.
PAGE 235

exists in the data source directory, you can attach the data source to any drawing. For most data sources, AutoCAD Map 3D creates the UDL file automatically when you attach a database. However, for some database types, you must create the UDL file manually. When you edit or create a UDL file, you use the Microsoft Windows Data Link Properties dialog box. For more information on using this dialog box, refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 236

■ Microsoft Visual FoxPro By default, AutoCAD Map 3D connects to Microsoft Access using the Jet provider, which does not require a DSN. If you want to connect to Microsoft Access using the ODBC driver, you must create a DSN. For information on creating a DSN, refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation.
PAGE 237

To configure a data source automatically ➤ Drag and drop one of the following database types onto the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane: ■ Microsoft Access ■ dBASE ■ Microsoft Excel (must have at least one named range; do not use DATABASE or other reserved words as a range name) ■ Paradox ■ Microsoft Visual FoxPro To configure a data source manually 1 At the command prompt, enter mapconnectdb. 2 Type a name for the data source and click OK. The data link file will have the same name.
PAGE 238

NOTE If you have more than one copy of a UDL file, be sure to edit the copy in the AutoCAD Map 3D data links directory. Quick Reference EXPERT Controls whether certain prompts are issued (system variable) Command Line EXPERT MAPCONFIGDB Configures the connection to an external data source Menu Click Setup ➤ Create/Edit a Source of Data ➤ External Records.
PAGE 239

■ Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146) NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features (page 507). To connect a data source ■ On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, double-click the data source. To disconnect a data source ■ Right-click the data source. Click Disconnect.
PAGE 240

Setting Options You can change many settings that affect the work environment, how the program starts up, whether users must log in, and settings for your current drawings, data sources, and more.
PAGE 241

Overview of Setting Options The following table summarizes the options you can set and where these settings are located. To change settings for... Go to... Default display of the Task Pane AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤ Task Pane (page 1909) tab. The current drawing AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤ Current Drawing (page 1909) tab.
PAGE 242

To change settings for... Go to... Raster images Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879) Import defaults mapimport.ini (page 271) and mapforeignfileproperties.ini (page 274) Export defaults mapexport.ini (page 269) To use the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ angle-arrow. 2 Click a tab. 3 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), modify options. 4 Click OK to save the settings.
PAGE 243

Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options MAPDOCKWSPACE Docks and undocks the Task Pane Command Line MAPDOCKWSPACE Task Pane Double-click the title bar (floating) or the double bar at the top of the pane (docked) Dialog Box MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command) MAPWSPACE Shows or hides the Task Pane Menu View menu ➤ Task Pane Command Line MAPWSPACE Task Pane Right-click a blank area ➤ Close Dialog Box MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command) MAPWSREFRESH Redisplays the Task Pane Command Line
PAGE 244

Dialog Box Setting Coordinate Geometry Options MAPIOPTIONS Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options, paths, and memory settings Menu Setup menu ➤ Raster Options Command Line MAPIOPTIONS Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box Setting Task Pane Options You can specify what to display in the Task Pane and what displays when you start the program.
PAGE 245

■ To hide or display the Task Pane at startup (page 221) ■ To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session (page 221) ■ To refresh Map Explorer (page 221) ■ To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane (page 222) To set Task Pane options 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ angle-arrow. 2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Task Pane tab.
PAGE 246

To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane 1 Right-click the title bar of the Task Pane and choose Transparency. 2 In the Transparency dialog box, adjust the transparency level. 3 Click OK.
PAGE 247

Redisplays the Task Pane Command Line MAPWSREFRESH Task Pane Right-click a blank area ➤ Refresh Dialog Box MAPWSREFRESH Setting Drawing Options You can specify general settings and coordinate transformation options for the current drawing. If you are working with drawings that use different global coordinate systems, AutoCAD Map 3D standardizes the drawings based on the global coordinate system of the the current drawing.
PAGE 248

text and blocks so that their size or scale measures in feet rather than meters. If you do not select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D does not adjust the size or scale of text and block objects. For example, if you have a block that is 5 meters long in the source drawing, it will be 5 feet long when you bring it into the current drawing.
PAGE 249

Select Adjust Elevations to adjust the elevation (Z axis) of objects when you select For Changes In Units and For Map Distortion under Adjust Sizes And Scales. Data Source Options Set any of the following options: ■ Select Reconnect Data Source When Drawing Opens to reconnect the databases that were connected the last time you quit AutoCAD Map 3D. ■ In the Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List box, enter the number of SQL conditions to store in the SQL condition history list.
PAGE 250

Menu Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options Icon Options Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Setting Multi-user Options You can specify options that affect how AutoCAD Map 3D operates for all users, across all drawings. For example, you can set login or object locking options. The system administrator controls these settings.
PAGE 251

You cannot change the Enable Object Locking option while drawings are attached. If this option is not selected, only one user at a time can attach a drawing. Object locking is recommended on networked systems to avoid conflicts when querying and editing. If you are working on a stand-alone system, you do not need object locking. See also: ■ Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D (page 141) ■ Sharing Attached Drawings (page 731) NOTE Object locking affects drawing files only.
PAGE 252

Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Setting System Options You can specify options that affect the operation of a single installation of AutoCAD Map 3D. NOTE If you have enabled Force User Login (page 226) on the Multi-User Options tab, you must log in as a Superuser to set System Options. The default superuser login name is SuperUser (not case sensitive) and the password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive). Log File Options ■ Select Log File Active to create a log file for AutoCAD Map 3D messages.
PAGE 253

The number of drawings that AutoCAD Map 3D can open in memory at the same time depends on several factors. These include the size of the drawings, amount of memory, and your system setup. The number you specify here does not limit the number of active drawings. AutoCAD Map 3D opens and closes files in memory as it needs them. If your system has a lot of memory, you can enter a larger number (up to 200) to make queries go faster.
PAGE 254

Quick Reference MAPOPTIONS Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options Menu Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options Icon Options Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Setting Coordinate System Options You can set several options to determine how AutoCAD Map 3D performs coordinate system transformations and responds when you open drawings with embedded coordinate system definitions. These options apply only to the current drawing.
PAGE 255

your dictionary. You can choose to always add the definitions, never add the definitions, or have AutoCAD Map 3D prompt you each time. Units Specify the units to use when displaying geodetic distance.
PAGE 256

Icon Options Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Setting Coordinate Tracker Options You can track multiple coordinate systesm in your map using the Track Coordinates Dialog Box (page 1601). The Track Coordinates dialog box contains one or more Coordinate Trackers that display the coordinates of the cursor as you move around your map.
PAGE 257

■ Lettering Scheme: specify the lettering scheme for MGRS coordinates. Use AA (MGRS-New) for the WSG84 datum. Use AL (MGRS-Old) for older datums. ■ Digitization Location: For the digitization location within a given MGRS square, specify left top, center top, right top, left center, center, right center, left bottom, center bottom, or right bottom. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference MAPTRACKCS Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any coordinate system Menu Analyze menu ➤ Track Coordinate Sytem.
PAGE 258

■ Create a text log for coordinate geometry entered through the COGO Input dialog box (page 1668). See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands (page 1027) To set coordinate geometry options 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ COGO drop-down ➤ COGO Options. 2 In the Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box (page 1917), set any of the following options.
PAGE 259

Command Line MAPCGAZBASE MAPCGSETUP Specifies coordinate geometry settings Menu At the Command prompt, enter mapcgsetup. Icon COGO Options Command Line MAPCGSETUP Dialog Box Setting Coordinate Geometry Options Setting Data Source Options for Drawings You can specify several options for attaching data sources for drawing objects. NOTE These options affect drawing data only. They do not affect geospatial feature data sources.
PAGE 260

NOTE These options affect drawing data only. They do not affect geospatial feature data sources. ■ To set data source options (page 236) ■ To change the expert setting (page 236) ■ To change the default data link file directory (page 236) To set data source options 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ angle-arrow. 2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908): ■ On the Task Pane (page 1909) tab, select the items to display on the Map Explorer tab.
PAGE 261

Quick Reference OPTIONS Customizes the AutoCAD settings Menu Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options Command Line OPTIONS Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options MAPOPTIONS Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options Menu Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options Icon Options Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Setting Data View Options Data View options apply to a single user's AutoCAD Map 3D environment.
PAGE 262

■ Show All Tables In One Data View: Opens only one Data View window. When you open a new table, the previous table is automatically closed. Data Views You can specify the behavior of the Data View. ■ Open In Read-Only Mode: Opens the Data View in read-only mode. When this option is selected, you cannot edit data in the Data View. ■ Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing: Saves all formatting changes, such as column width, font, color, or borders, that you make in the Data View.
PAGE 263

Quick Reference OPTIONS Customizes the AutoCAD settings Menu Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options Command Line OPTIONS Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options MAPOPTIONS Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options Menu Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options Icon Options Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Setting Geospatial Feature Editing Options You can specify options for editing geospatial features.
PAGE 264

■ Feature Checkout Options: You can check out geospatial features with as drawing objects or geospatial features.
PAGE 265

2 In the Feature Editing Options dialog box (page 1929), select the options you want. If you select the checkin prompt, specify the prompt interval in minutes. 3 Click OK. Quick Reference MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS Specifies options for editing features Icon Feature Edit Options Command Line MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS Dialog Box Feature Editing Options dialog box Setting Metadata Options AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 supports FGDC metadata down to the feature source and object class levels.
PAGE 266

■ To set Latitude/longitude precision, click the Preference tab and set the number of digits that display after the decimal point for your reported latitude and longitude values from 0 to 10. Both values are 6 by default. 4 Click OK.
PAGE 267

When you drag and drop a database onto the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, you can select the version of the database used to create the database. By default, AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you each time to specify the version that was used. If you created all your databases with a specific version of the software, you can set an option to select that version automatically.
PAGE 268

Menu Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options Icon Options Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Setting Query Options (DWG) You can set several options that determine how queries run, how they appear onscreen, and how they are saved. NOTE These options affect drawing queries only.
PAGE 269

Options you set on the Save Back tab apply only to the current drawing. Each time you open this drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect other drawings. On the System Tab You can specify a default directory for externally saved queries. See also: ■ The Task Pane ■ Overview of Queries (page 1235) NOTE These options affect drawing queries only.
PAGE 270

Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Using Associative Hatch You can set an option to specify whether hatch objects created by property alteration queries and thematic mapping are associative. NOTE This option affects drawing objects only. Hatch patterns used in thematic maps.
PAGE 271

■ When you add an associative hatch object to the save set, all its boundary objects are added automatically. If any of the boundary objects are locked, the hatch is not added to the save set. ■ When you remove an associative hatch object from the save set, boundary objects are removed from the save set automatically. ■ When you add a boundary object to the save set, hatch objects associated with that boundary are not added to the save set automatically.
PAGE 272

Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Saving Option Settings AutoCAD Map 3D saves your options in one of three places, depending on the option type. ■ Drawing options are saved in the drawing. ■ User and installation options are saved in the acadmap.ini file. On startup, AutoCAD Map 3D searches for the acadmap.ini file first in the current directory, then in all the directories listed in the AutoCAD Map 3D path, and finally in the AutoCAD Map 3D executable directory.
PAGE 273

To set AutoCAD Map 3D options 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ angle-arrow. 2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), modify the options you want. 3 Click OK.
PAGE 274

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To change the image display quality (page 254) To choose an image detach method (page 255) To turn on Shift + left-click (page 256) To set the correlation defaults (page 257) To configure memory for images (page 259) Overview of Setting Raster Image Options Raster image options are available for images you insert using the Raster Extension.
PAGE 275

Menu Setup menu ➤ Raster Options Command Line MAPIOPTIONS Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box Setting the Resource Files Directory Resource files store information about the insertion point, scale, rotation, and density of an image. The Resource File Directory indicates where AutoCAD Map 3D searches for resource files for images you insert with Raster Extension (not those you add with Data Connect). Resource files have the same base name as the raster image with a .res extension.
PAGE 276

5 Click OK to save your changes. Quick Reference MAPIOPTIONS Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options, paths, and memory settings Menu Setup menu ➤ Raster Options Command Line MAPIOPTIONS Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box Changing How Image Frames Are Displayed For images you insert with Raster Extension, you can choose to display the image frame in front of an image, behind an image, or you can hide the frame.
PAGE 277

To change how image frames are displayed 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ angle-arrow. 2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the General tab. 3 Under Display Preferences, select an option from the Image Frame list. ■ Frame Drawn Above Image displays the frame above the image. ■ Frame Drawn Below Image hides the frame behind the image. You can still select the image by selecting the frame. ■ Frames Off hides the frame.
PAGE 278

See also: ■ Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) ■ Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453) ■ Modifying Raster Images (page 489) ■ Changing Image Display Quality and Speed (page 498) ■ Adjusting Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade (page 496) To change the image display quality 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ angle-arrow. 2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the General tab.
PAGE 279

Choosing an Image Detach Method When you delete images you added with Raster Extension, from a map, information about that image is still stored in the map file. To delete this information, detach the image. You can choose whether images are detached automatically when you remove the last instance of the image from the map. This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect.
PAGE 280

Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options, paths, and memory settings Menu Setup menu ➤ Raster Options Command Line MAPIOPTIONS Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box Using Shift + Left-click to Select Images For images you insert with Raster Extension, you can change your selection method. This is useful when you are zoomed in on the image and you cannot see the image frame. This option does not affect images you add with Data Connect.
PAGE 281

Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options, paths, and memory settings Menu Setup menu ➤ Raster Options Command Line MAPIOPTIONS Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box Setting Correlation Defaults Most images have correlation data that is stored in the image file header or in a correlation source file. However, some images may not have any correlation data. For those cases, you can specify default correlation data.
PAGE 282

4 To set an elevation for image frames, type the elevation in the Z insertion point box. This value is useful to establish the elevation of a floor plan image, for example. 5 In the Rotation box, type a default rotation angle for images. The unit of measurement depends on the selected value in the Drawing Units dialog box. 6 In the Scale box, type a default scale for images. Image scale does not change the scale of the vector drawing. 7 In the Density box, type a default density for images.
PAGE 283

If you require additional memory for your images, the Raster Extension uses a temporary swap file. For example, if you insert a 100 MB file, and the Memory Limit is 8 MB, AutoCAD Map 3D stores the remaining 92 MB in a temporary file. You can specify where the swap file is created. You can change the following Raster Extension memory settings: ■ Temporary File Location — The default directory for the temporary swap files is the Windows temp directory.
PAGE 284

4 To change the amount of memory reserved for inserting images, type a new value in the Memory Limit box. Be careful that you do not use all of your system resources. NOTE You can click Default to return this setting to the recommended value. 5 Click OK to accept the changes. You must quit and restart AutoCAD Map 3D for these settings to take effect.
PAGE 285

Overview of Customizing Import and Export Use profiles and .ini files to customize and automate import and export. To customize or automate this... Use this method... Export settings Save a profile in the Export dialog box. See Using Profiles (page 262) Import settings Save a profile in the Import dialog box. See Using Profiles (page 262) Export defaults Edit the mapexport.ini file. See Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264) Import defaults Edit the mapimport.ini file.
PAGE 286

Dialog Box Import dialog box Using Profiles To reuse or share your settings, save them as a profile. Export Profiles When you save an export profile, it does not store the current file name or the current selection set. When you load an export profile, if the specified data source doesn't exist, Include Table Data is set to No. Import Profiles When you save an import profile, it does not store the current file name.
PAGE 287

Compatibility with Previous Releases ■ Profiles saved with AutoCAD Map 3D 2004-2007 and versions 4.5, 5, and 6 are compatible with this release. ■ Profiles saved with Autodesk Map 2000 Release 4 or earlier cannot be used with this release. ■ Profiles created in this release may contain additional information that cannot be used with previous releases. Such incompatible profile information is ignored when a profile is used in a previous release.
PAGE 288

Dialog Box Export dialog box MAPIMPORT Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D Menu Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import. Icon Import Map File Command Line MAPIMPORT Dialog Box Import dialog box Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files Some of the defaults for import and export settings are stored in .ini (initialization) files. When you use a new format with AutoCAD Map 3D, the information about that format is added automatically to the .ini files.
PAGE 289

Exporting to ArcView Shape Files If you are exporting to ArcView Shape files, you can treat it as a folder-based format. To do this, you must modify the following items in the MapExport.ini file: ■ Specify that it requires a folder rather than a file. ■ Specify that it requires a prefix name. ■ Specify that it no longer requires a type (point/line/polyline/text). If you modify these items, be sure to modify them only for a driver that supports this change.
PAGE 290

If you want, you can change the settings in the mapimport.ini file so that these formats are considered folder-based formats (you select a folder and all the files in the folder are imported) or single-select formats (only one file can be selected for import). Note that VPF can be folder-based or multi-select only. Importing DGN Cells When you import data from a DGN file, you can specify many of the DGN import options available in Driver Options.
PAGE 291

Where XXX is the code you want to send to the driver. Add the line to the appropriate section of the MapExport.ini file. Incorrect tags will have unpredictable results. Location of the .ini File When exporting, AutoCAD Map 3D looks first for the .ini file in the current directory. If no .ini file is there, it uses the .ini file in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder. To always use the same settings, do not create additional .ini files.
PAGE 292

Use the [DGN_V7_Justification] or [DGN_V8_Justification] section to map the DGN justification to AutoCAD vertical and horizontal modes or AutoCAD attachment.
PAGE 293

■ To change the default seed file for exporting DGN files (page 270) ■ To export DGN files in imperial units rather than metric (page 270) ■ To specify DGN cell import options (page 272) ■ To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as folder-based, multi-select, or file-based (page 271) ■ To import objects using RGB (True Color) colors (page 272) ■ To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages (page 273) ■ To specify object properties (page 274) To export to SHP as folder-ba
PAGE 294

To change the segmentation size for splines, polylines with bulges, arcs, and ellipses 1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad. This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder. 2 Find the [Options] section. 3 To change the segmentation of splines and polylines with bulges, edit the SegmentionDegrees value to the number you want. By default, the value is two degrees.
PAGE 295

2 Find the [DGN_V7] or [DGN_V8]section. 3 Change the default seed file to the seed file you want. For example, change the default seed file to one that specifies imperial units rather than metric: Driver:RUNTIME_MACROS=_SEED,"C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk Shared\GIS\ImportExport\4.0\design\seed3d_ft.dgn" NOTE Make sure to choose a seed file for the appropriate version of DGN. If you export to DGN version 7 using a DGN version 8 seed file, the operation will fail. 4 Save and close the .ini file.
PAGE 296

4 Make sure there is a semicolon at the beginning of the line for the options you do not want to use. The semicolon tells AutoCAD Map 3D to ignore the line. 5 Save and close the .ini file. To specify DGN cell import options 1 Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad. This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder. 2 Find the [DGN_V7_V8] section.
PAGE 297

For any RGB value that exactly matches an ACI, the objects will be imported using the ACI color value. All other objects will use their RGB values. 4 Make sure there is a semicolon at the beginning of the line for the options you do not want to use. The semicolon tells AutoCAD Map 3D to ignore the line. 5 Save and close the .ini file. To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages 1 Open the mapimport.ini or mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad. 2 Find the [GML2] section.
PAGE 298

To specify object properties 1 Open the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad. This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder. 2 For information on each of the settings, refer to the instructions in the file. Quick Reference MAPEXPORT Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format Menu Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
PAGE 299

■ ■ To create a workflow (page 287) To change the display of the Workflow Designer window (page 289) Overview of Workflows Use workflows to automate a set of activities, such as the steps involved in an overlay analysis (page 1309). A workflow specifies the activities to perform and the parameters for those activities. For example, in an overlay, the workflow specifies the feature classes or layers to compare. You can specify that workflows prompt at run time for the values of the parameters.
PAGE 300

NOTE If you do not see the built-in workflows in the drop-down list of workflows, click Open Workflow From File in that list and navigate to the Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\Sample\Workflow folder. Select the .xoml file for the workflow to open. NOTE If you use Windows 7, you must have write access to run a workflow. If you have limited access, AutoCAD Map 3D cannot save the workflow. The workflow must be saved before it is run.
PAGE 301

Quick Reference MAPWORKFLOWOPEN Allows you to use a saved workflow Menu Click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer. Icon Open Workflow Command Line MAPWORKFLOWOPEN MAPWORKFLOWRUN Runs a workflow Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer. Icon Run Workflow Command Line MAPWORKFLOWRUN MAPWORKFLOWCREATE Creates a workflow Menu Click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer. Command Line MAPWORKFLOWCREATE MAPWORKFLOWEDIT Edits a workflow Menu Click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer.
PAGE 302

Running Workflows A workflow automates a set of activities. A workflow can include activities such as the following: ■ Connecting to data ■ Creating a Display Manager layer for a geospatial data store ■ Performing an overlay analysis (page 1309) ■ Chaining to another workflow You can run any workflow, even if you did not create it. Recently used workflows are listed on the Workflow drop-down list, which also contains an option for opening any saved workflow.
PAGE 303

3 If prompted, specify the values for the parameters of the workflow. For example, the Overlay workflow requires you to specify the data store to connect to. If the workflow requires parameters for any of its activities, it displays a prompt. ■ To connect to database, specify login credentials. ■ To connect to a file, select the appropriate provider and click navigate to the file. ■ To connect to a SHP folder instead of a file, select the SHP provider and click the folder icon to specify the folder.
PAGE 304

The workflow performs the activities in its definition and displays the result. For example, the built-in Overlay workflow connects to the specified data stores, performs the overlay, and displays the resulting layers in your map. The overlay itself is saved to the specified SDF file. AutoCAD Map 3D Connects to that SDF file and adds a Display Manager layer for it. The connections appear in Map Explorer and in the Data Connect window. NOTE If the workflow fails, an error message displays.
PAGE 305

Editing or Creating Workflows A workflow automates a set of activities. You can change any existing workflow or create one from scratch. For example, change the predefined Overlay workflow to perform a Union, rather than an Intersect. Create a workflow to connect to a set of data stores and add Display Manager layers for them. Use the Workflow Designer to edit or create workflows. Activities in the workflow appear as a diagram in the Workflow Designer.
PAGE 306

■ Logical commands (such as If/Else and For Each) ■ Workflow structure commands (such as Parallel, Sequence, and Prompt User). For information about the available activities, see Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes (page 2025). Parallel and Sequence Activities In a workflow, parallel activities are independent of one another. For example, when connecting to two data stores, parallel connections ensure that the second connection executes even if the first one fails.
PAGE 307

Bind the parameter for an activity to a property from a previous activity. Adding Activities to Workflows If you can write simple code in a .NET-compliant language, you can add activities to the Workflow Designer. Workflow activities perform predetermined functions based on predetermined sets of inputs. Use the sample activity set (Automation) as a model. Automation contains activities for running AutoCAD Map 3D in an automated fashion, without using the actual application.
PAGE 308

Build your activities in a .NET class library (a .dll file). Place this .dll file in the \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\PlugIns\Workflow\Activities folder and restart AutoCAD Map 3D. The activities then appear in the Workflow Designer. For more information on creating custom workflow activities, see the sdk.doc.main.chm. ■ To edit a workflow (page 284) ■ To create a workflow (page 287) To edit a workflow 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel.
PAGE 309

■ Right-click the activity and click Set Up Parameters. For information about the available activities and their parameters, see Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes (page 2025). For a tutorial on workflows, see Lesson 5: Edit a Predefined Workflow. 6 To bind an activity to the output of a previous activity from the input editor, do the following: ■ In the activity input dialog box for the activity, click the down arrow next to the parameter to bind.
PAGE 310

NOTE There is a shortcut for adding an activity and automatically binding it to the previous activity. Right-click an activity and click the activity to add. For example, right-click an Overlay activity and click Add Feature Layer to create a new Display Manager layer that stores the output of the Overlay operation.
PAGE 311

supported in that version. Then use Save As and change Save As Type to Map 3D 2010 Workflow File. To maintain the version formatting, you must continue to use the 2010 Save As option each time you save the workflow 9 Click to run the workflow from within the Workflow Designer, which validates the activities. As each activity executes successfully, a green check mark appears at the top right corner of the activity box.
PAGE 312

3 To create a workflow that uses a single data store, do the following: ■ Drag the Connect To Data Store activity to the diagram area in the Workflow Designer (where you see Drag And Drop Map Activities Here). ■ Optionally, create a layer for the connection by dragging a Create Feature Layer activity just below it. 4 Add any other desired activities. For information about the available activities and their parameters, see Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes (page 2025).
PAGE 313

Quick Reference MAPWORKFLOWCREATE Creates a workflow Menu Click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer. Command Line MAPWORKFLOWCREATE MAPWORKFLOWEDIT Edits a workflow Menu Click Setup menu ➤ Workflow Designer.
PAGE 314

Pan, zoom, or show the entire workflow. ■ To show or hide the activities panel, click ■ To show or hide the Settings panel for the selected activity, click . In the Settings panel, you can view and edit values for the parameters of the current activity. Click the cell for the parameter to set. Click the browse button that appears to select parameters from a list, if available.
PAGE 315

Bringing In Data 3 Overview of Bringing In Data A map file in AutoCAD Map 3D is a specialized drawing (DWG) file in which you can combine data from many sources.
PAGE 316

■ Map layouts ■ Data from third-party providers, leveraging the power of Open Source AutoCAD Map 3D is your window onto all this data. You have two ways to access data: you can connect to drawing files, geospatial files, or other data sources and view and edit entities in their original sources, saving your changes in the native format; or you can convert the data to DWG format, breaking any connection to the original source. To do this... Use this method...
PAGE 317

To do this... Use this method... To get this result... tab ➤ Import pan- el ➤ Map Import . Join attribute data to features from Oracle, SDF, etc. (page 507) 1 Connect to the source of attribute data (for example, connect to an ODBC source such as a Microsoft Access table) from the Task Pane. Both the original data for the feature layer and the joined data appear in the Data Table. Click Data ➤ Connect To Data. 2 Right-click a layer and click Create A Join.
PAGE 318

To do this... Use this method... Convert geospatial data to drawing data (page 378) ■ Convert SDF files to drawing data (page 387) ■ Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import . Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import . Use this method for the current version of SDF. See Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects (page 378). ■ To get this result... A copy of the data is added to the map in DWG format.
PAGE 319

To do this... Use this method... Add raster images (page 437) in the following formats: DEM, ESRI Grid, DTED, JPEG and JPEG2K , PNG, MrSID, TIFF, ECW 1 In Display Manager, Add raster images in other formats (page 454) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Data click Data ➤ Connect To Data. To get this result... The image appears in your map, where you can style it or move it behind other features. 2 Specify the folder that contains the raster and select the raster. panel ➤ Insert An Im- age.
PAGE 320

Before You Bring In Data Creating a Map When you create a new map file, you do the following: ■ Choose a template. The map2d.dwt template contains the optimal display settings, tools, and views for 2D maps, while the map3d.dwt template is optimized for 3D maps. You can also create your own templates. For information on this, see the AutoCAD Help topic called “Use a Template File to Start a Drawing.” ■ Assign a coordinate system.
PAGE 321

Connect to raster images and surfaces, or use the Raster Extension feature. ■ Attribute data Join additional attributes to GIS features, or add attributes to drawing objects using database linking or object data. ■ Data from AutoCAD Civil 3D Export Civil 3D feature data, such as parcels and alignments, in SDF format. Connect to the resulting SDF file in AutoCAD Map 3D. You can also save surfaces as DEMs in Civil 3D and connect to the resulting DEM files in AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 322

■ Overview of Creating Themes (page 1163) ■ Overview of Creating New Features (page 686) ■ Getting Help with AutoCAD (page 58) To create a map 1 Start a new drawing, choosing either the map2d.dwt or map3d.dwt template, or a custom map template you created. 2 Assign a coordinate system to the map. (page 147) NOTE If you do not assign a coordinate system to the map, data that you bring into the map will appear using its native coordinate system.
PAGE 323

6 Optionally, add open-source or third-party providers (page 540) to access additional data formats, add data from AutoCAD Civil 3D (page 543), or add survey data (page 370). 7 Organize the layers (page 300) that comprise your map. 8 Change the appearance of the map using styles (page 631) and themes (page 1163). NOTE You can create multiple display maps from the same data. See Creating Multiple Display Maps (page 638). 9 Optionally, create new features (page 688) or drawing objects.
PAGE 324

Connect Feature Source Connects a feature source Menu Click File ➤ Connect To Data. Icon Connect Command Line MAPCONNECT Task Pane In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data. Organizing Layers in Your Map Display Manager organizes the data in your map into layers, which you can display and style independently. Each layer contains one type of data.
PAGE 325

You can specify a thumbnail icon for drawing layers, which is used in Display Manager and in any legends you create for this map. This affects drawing layers only, and is not available for feature layers.
PAGE 326

2 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ New Group. 3 To change the group name, select the group then click the existing name. Type a new name and press Enter. 4 Drag layers into the group. NOTE Until you use the Draw Order view to specify a draw order, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the Groups order as a default draw order for the map. Once you use the Draw Order view, changes in the Groups view do not affect the draw order. To change the draw order 1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Draw Order if needed.
PAGE 327

This setting affects both the Display Manager layer and the legend for this map.
PAGE 328

See also: ■ Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map (page 309) ■ Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551) ■ Working with FDO Schemas (page 553) ■ ■ ■ To access data through FDO (page 308) To filter feature data when you add it to a map (page 310) To change the coordinate system assigned to the data you are adding to a map (page 311) To bring in features from Oracle (page 314) To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 to access FDO data stores that were created in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier (page 315) To se
PAGE 329

Overview of Bringing In GIS Features This map of a water distribution system is made up of features stored in a set of SDF files. NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects, see Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351). A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road, a utility pole, or a river. Features are stored in a spatial database or file. The spatial database or file is referred to as a feature source (page 2063).
PAGE 330

properties. For more information about editing schemas, see Working with Schemas (page 593). NOTE WMS and Raster are used to access images, not features. You cannot edit or lock these images, and they do not use schemas. Tell me more ■ Show me how to bring in data from a web server using WMS. ■ Show me how to bring in point data from an ODBC database. ■ Show me how to bring in a subset of features using a query.
PAGE 331

FDO Provider Capabilities You use FDO (page 2062) to connect directly to a data source and work in its native format. Each data source type uses its own FDO provider (page 2063), and each provider has different capabilities. For example, Oracle and ArcSDE support locking on the feature level. When you check out a feature, other users cannot edit it, even though they can view your edits and edit other features in the feature source.
PAGE 332

Feature Source Type Lock Level Versions Persistent Locking Edit Schema SQL Server (page 323) SQL Server Spatial (page 326) None No No Yes SQLite (page 330) File No No Yes WFS (page 346) N/A N/A No No WMS (page 445) N/A N/A N/A N/A Raster (page 437) N/A N/A N/A N/A To access data through FDO NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects, see the procedures for bringing in drawing objects. (page 354).
PAGE 333

8 In the Add Data To Map section, under Schema, select the feature classes to include in your map. If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None. 9 If necessary, click Edit Coordinate Systems to specify the coordinate system for the incoming data (page 311). 10 Click Add To Map.
PAGE 334

You can filter a single layer or multiple layers at one time. You can filter the data by its location in the map or by property conditions that you define. For example, you can add only streets that cross a circle you draw on the map, or only parcels on a particular street. See also: ■ Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216) ■ Creating Expressions - Reference To filter feature data when you add it to a map NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data.
PAGE 335

Quick Reference Connect Feature Source Connects a feature source Menu Click File ➤ Connect To Data. Icon Connect Command Line MAPCONNECT Task Pane In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data. Changing Coordinate Systems If necessary, you can change the coordinate system of data you add to your map. You must specify the original coordinate system for the data.
PAGE 336

Select the entry and click Edit to specify the coordinate system for the surface NOTE To copy the spatial context information to the clipboard (for example, to check against your records or for use with a Technical Support specialist), right-click the entry and click Copy Coordinate System. 7 Click Edit. 8 In the Select Coordinate System dialog box (page 1609), select the coordinate system you saw in the pop-up window.
PAGE 337

■ Create versions of your data. Versioning (page 2078) creates a copy of the data in the data source. Your changes are made to the new version of the data. Versioning is useful for proposed changes or changes that need approval. When the changes are final, you can make your version the current one. ■ Use a data source set up for AutoCAD Map 3D. If your data source schema is not set up to work with AutoCAD Map 3D, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a custom mapping so you can use the data in your map.
PAGE 338

■ Creating a Data Store (page 586) ■ Migrating Data (page 615) ■ Importing From Oracle (page 409) ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641) ■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705) To bring in features from Oracle 1 Make sure that your feature source is set up correctly. 2 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
PAGE 339

10 Click Connect. 11 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map. If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None. 12 Click Add To Map. To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To Map With Query (page 309).
PAGE 340

Bringing In Features from ArcSDE When you view and edit features from an ArcSDE data source, you can do the following: ■ If you use SQL Server or Oracle as the underlying relational database management system for ArcSDE, you can use either Windows or ArcSDE authentication. ■ Select the feature classes to include in your map. ■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map. ■ Style, theme, and edit the features. ■ Lock individual features when you check them out for editing.
PAGE 341

Setting Up ArcSDE for Use with AutoCAD Map 3D To use ArcSDE, install the following DLL files on the computer on which you run AutoCAD Map 3D: For version 9.1 For version 9.2 through 9.3.1 pe91.dll pe.dll sde91.dll sde.dll sg91.dll sg.dll The provider for this data store checks for the latest versions of the DLL files first, and uses them if they are found. If they are not found, it checks for (and uses) the 9.1 versions. The client DLL version should match the server version that is being used.
PAGE 342

See also: ■ Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data (page 579) ■ Importing ESRI ArcSDE Data (page 391) ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641) ■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705) To set up your system for ArcSDE 9.2 (or if you use the 9.1 client and you access the ArcSDE 9.2 server) 1 Install the following DLL files on the computer on which you run AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 343

pe91.dll sde91.dll sg91.dll 2 Add entries in your C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\services file. The entries look like this: esri_92ora 6161/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - Oracle esri_92sql 6161/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - SQLServer 2005 esri_sde 5151/tcp #ArcSDE 9.1- Oracle esri_sde_ss 5152/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - SQLServer 3 If you have trouble connecting, add a new line in your C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts file. The line looks like this: 192.168.0.
PAGE 344

■ To use your ArcSDE login credentials, enter your user name and password and click Login. (If you use SQL Server, ArcSDE will pass your credentials to SQL Server.) 8 Click OK. 9 In Data Connect, under Data Store, enter the database name. If you do not know this name, check with your System Administrator. To select from a list of databases, click the down arrow. AutoCAD Map 3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the available databases.
PAGE 345

■ Use the Oracle Net Manager tool to set up a tnsnames entry for the target database (or update tnsnames.ora manually). ■ Test your connection to the target database using SQL Plus. For a SQL Server database: ■ Install the SQL Native client software on the client machine where you run AutoCAD Map 3D. ■ Open the SQL Server port (for example, 1433) on the database machine firewall. ■ Set the target SQL Server database to support remote connect.
PAGE 346

■ icudt22l.dll 3 Adjust the connection parameters. For an Oracle database, set the following parameters: ■ Server name: Specify the server name or the IP address. ■ Instance name: Enter sde:oracle10g or sde:oracle11g, depending on the version of Oracle on the client. ■ User name: Specify the user name that is valid on the Oracle server. ■ Password: Enter @ where OracleSID is the SID configured in the client in step 1.
PAGE 347

Menu Click File ➤ Connect To Data. Icon Connect Command Line MAPCONNECT Task Pane In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data. Bringing In Features from SQL Server AutoCAD Map 3D supports both SQL Server and SQL Server Spatial (page 326). For SQL Server, both the 2008 version (using the native spatial support that Microsoft added in that version) and the 2005 version (with custom spatial support added by Autodesk) are supported.
PAGE 348

See also: ■ Working with SQL Server Data (page 559) ■ Bringing In Features from SQL Server Spatial (page 326) ■ Creating a Data Store (page 586) ■ Migrating Data (page 615) ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641) ■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705) To bring in features from SQL Server 1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
PAGE 349

If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None. 11 Click Add To Map. To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To Map With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to your map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216). Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map.
PAGE 350

Task Pane In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data. Bringing In Features from SQL Server Spatial AutoCAD Map 3D supports both SQL Server (page 323) and SQL Server Spatial. For SQL Server Spatial, AutoCAD Map 3D supports native SQL Server Spatial data with SQL Server 2008 SP1. If you are using SQL Server 2008, we recommend using the SQL Server Spatial provider.
PAGE 351

NOTE You can customize the SQL Server Spatial FDO provider (page 2063). The API has custom commands to support schema read/write and geospatial and non-geospatial data read/write. For more information, refer to the FDO API Reference and the FDO Provider for SQL Server API Reference. Dealing With Invalid Geometry SQL Server Spatial validates geometry objects that are added to the database. It validates the values of geometry columns after they are added.
PAGE 352

Using Expressions to Find Invalid Geometry SQL Server provides a function called STIsValid() that returns 1 for valid geometries and 0 for invalid geometries. FDO exposes access to that function using a function called IsValid(geometry) at the FDO level. You can use this function in AutoCAD Map 3D and MapGuide when you create an expression to filter or select data.
PAGE 353

2 In the Data Connect window, select Add SQL Server Spatial Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list. 3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection. You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in Map Explorer as the name of the feature source. 4 Enter the Service Name and click Login. The service name is set when you install SQL Server Spatial itself. 5 In the User Credentials dialog box (page 1610), specify the login credentials to use to log into this data store.
PAGE 354

Icon Connect Command Line MAPCONNECT Task Pane In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data. Bringing In Features From SQLite When you view and edit features from a SQLite file, you can do the following: ■ Select the feature classes to include in your map. ■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map. ■ Style, theme, and edit the features. ■ Automatically update the data source with any edits you make. Your edits are visible as soon as another person views the saved data file.
PAGE 355

■ Converting and Exporting (page 1403) ■ Migrating Data (page 615) ■ Editing a Schema (page 610) To bring in features from SQLite 1 In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data. 2 In the Data Connect window, select Add SQLite Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list. 3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection. You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
PAGE 356

Bringing In Features from MySQL When you view and edit features from a MySQL data source, you can do the following: ■ Select the feature classes to include in your map. ■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map. ■ Style, theme, and edit the features. ■ Automatically update the data source with any edits you make. Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source. ■ Use a data store set up for AutoCAD Map 3D or in other applications.
PAGE 357

■ Migrating Data (page 615) ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641) ■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705) To bring in features from MySQL 1 Before connecting to a MySQL database, install the library file libmysql.dll. 2 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data. 3 In the Data Connect window, select Add MySQL Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
PAGE 358

If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None. 12 Click Add To Map. To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To Map With Query (page 309). To filter data after you’ve added the data to your map, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216). Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map.
PAGE 359

Bringing In Features from SHP You can access existing spatial and attribute data in ESRI SHP files, which store both geometry and attributes (data) for features. A single shape can have several separate files: SHP (shape geometry), SHX (shape index), PRJ (projection information), CPG (code page files), IDX (spatial index), and DBF (shape attributes in dBASE format). AutoCAD Map 3D treats each SHP and associated DBF file as a feature class with a single geometry property.
PAGE 360

See also: ■ Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377) ■ Converting and Exporting (page 1403) ■ Working with SHP Data (page 572) ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ To create a map with styled feature layers (page 641) ■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705) To bring in features from SHP 1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data. 2 In the Data Connect window, select Add SHP Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
PAGE 361

If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect additional data to a feature source layer using a join (page 507). Quick Reference Connect Feature Source Connects a feature source Menu Click File ➤ Connect To Data. Icon Connect Command Line MAPCONNECT Task Pane In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data. Bringing In Features from SDF You can access spatial and attribute data in an Autodesk Spatial Data File (SDF).
PAGE 362

You can bring SDF data into your map in three ways: ■ Use Data Connect to view and edit the data directly in the SDF file. Use this method to edit geometry and attributes or to style and theme the data. For information, click the Procedure tab at the top of this Help topic. ■ Import the data into the current map, which converts the SDF data to drawing objects. Use this method to clean the data or to create a DWG file. You can export the objects back to SDF.
PAGE 363

5 Click Connect. 6 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map. If this feature source contains only a single feature class, that feature class is selected automatically. If it contains multiple feature classes, you can right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None. 7 Verify that the coordinate systems are correct. You can change an incorrect coordinate system if necessary (page 311). 8 Click Add To Map.
PAGE 364

Bringing in Features from PostgreSQL/PostGIS The OSGeo FDO provider for PostgreSQL/PostGIS has 32-bit and 64-bit versions on Windows and Linux. For AutoCAD Map 3D, it is certified for PostGIS 1.4.0 with PostgreSQL 8.4. PostGIS adds support for geographic objects to the PostgreSQL object-relational database so that the PostgreSQL server can be used as a back end spatial database for GIS.
PAGE 365

■ gssapi32.dll ■ iconv.dll ■ k5sprt32.dll If you need to replace these files, copy them from the server bin directory (C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\8.4\bin) into the path or the AutoCAD Map 3D\FDO\BIN directory on the computer on which you run AutoCAD Map 3D. For a 64-bit environment For a 64-bit client, the following DLL files are installed in the AutoCAD Map 3D\FDO\BIN directory on the computer on which you run AutoCAD Map 3D: ■ libeay32.dll ■ libpq.dll ■ ssleay32.
PAGE 366

3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection. You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in Map Explorer as the name of the feature source. 4 Enter the Service Name and click Login. The service name is set when you install the PostgreSQL server. 5 In the User Credentials dialog box (page 1610), specify the login credentials to use to log into this data store. 6 In Data Connect, under Data Store, enter the data store name.
PAGE 367

When you view and edit data from an ODBC database, you can do the following: ■ Select the feature classes to include in your map. ■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map. ■ Style, theme, and edit the features. ■ Lock the file when you connect to it. ■ Automatically update the data source with any edits you make. Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source. ■ Define feature classes for any relational database table with X, Y (and, optionally, Z) columns.
PAGE 368

■ To create a DSN in Windows XP (page 345) ■ To access ODBC data (page 344) ■ Lesson 2: Analyze Data With External Information Using Joins ■ Join Attribute Data to a Geospatial Feature ■ Bring in point data from a Microsoft Access database ■ About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas (page 551) ■ Working with ODBC Data (page 576) Procedure Tutorial Workflow GIS Skill Related topics ■ To access ODBC data (page 344) ■ To create a DSN in Windows XP (page 345) ■ To define
PAGE 369

■ Connection String — The connection string specifies the driver and path to use. 5 Under source, specify the table. ■ Data Source Name (DSN) — Click the browse button and select the DSN. ■ Connection String — Specify the driver and path. For a Microsoft Access database, use the format: Driver={Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb)};DBQ=pathname\filename.mdb Where pathname\filename.mdb is the complete path and filename of the Microsoft Access database. Note the curly braces and the space before “(*.
PAGE 370

For example, to create a DSN for an Access database, select Microsoft Access Driver. 5 In the ODBC Microsoft Access dialog box enter information about the data. When you finish, click OK. Click OK again to close the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box. The DSN you defined appears in the DSN list in the Data Connect window. To define the table ranges required to access Excel data 1 In Excel, open the Excel worksheet. 2 Select all the data. 3 Define a named range.
PAGE 371

Once you have located the WFS data you want, determine the URL of the page that serves the published layers. Often, this is not a standard web page that you can open in a browser, but a page that has been programmed using a scripting language such as CGI, PHP, or ASP. See the following for some examples. You paste the address into the Data Connect window in AutoCAD Map 3D to access the data on that page.
PAGE 372

Related topics ■ Working with WFS Data (page 581) ■ Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445) ■ Styling Features (page 639) To bring in features from WFS NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects, see Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351). 1 In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data. 2 In the Data Connect window, select Add WGS Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
PAGE 373

Quick Reference Connect Feature Source Connects a feature source Menu Click File ➤ Connect To Data. Icon Connect Command Line MAPCONNECT Task Pane In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data. Repairing Broken Feature Connections NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects, see Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351). If a data file moves from its original location, you may get an error when you open the map that references that data.
PAGE 374

See also: ■ Using eTransmit (page 1376) To reconnect to feature data without losing styling information NOTE This topic applies to geospatial data. To bring in drawing (DWG) objects, see Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351). 1 In Data Connect, select the data connection that is broken. For example, select SDF_1, if the first SDF connection is broken. 2 For Source File Or Folder, type or browse to the correct data store location. 3 Click Connect, but do not click Add.
PAGE 375

Display Manager tools, and use the mapping and GIS tools available in AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 376

NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). You can include drawing objects in your map so you can view, edit, style, and theme them. You can select objects from the current drawing and from attached drawings. For information about attached drawings, see Attaching Drawings (page 154). Each set of objects you select is stored in a drawing layer (page 2060) in Display Manager. When you create a drawing layer based on...
PAGE 377

In this city map example, there are separate drawing layers for each set of entities comprising the water system. Use the Display Manager check boxes to turn off layers, which hides the objects on that layer, or to turn off styles, which displays the drawing objects on that layer without styles. For more information on styling drawing layers, see Overview of Styling Drawing Layers (page 652). Map Base Objects in the current drawing that are not included in any layer are included in the Map Base layer.
PAGE 378

Tell me more ■ Show me how to run a query on a set of attached DWG files. ■ Show me how to include an AutoCAD layer in Display Manager.
PAGE 379

■ To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data (page 364) ■ To bring in drawing objects based on topology (page 367) Quick Reference ADEQUERY Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query Icon Define Query Command Line ADEQUERY Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Bringing In
PAGE 380

To bring in drawing objects from AutoCAD layers in the current drawing NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data, see procedures for bringing in geospatial data. (page 308). 1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Drawing Layer. 2 In the Select Layers dialog box (page 1631), select the AutoCAD layers that include the objects to display. AutoCAD Map 3D creates a layer in Display Manager for each AutoCAD layer you select.
PAGE 381

In your map, you can create a drawing layer (page 2060) in Display Manager that includes all the objects in an object class in the current drawing. For example, to create a layer that includes all the primary roads, select the PRIMARY_ROADS object class. You can organize layers into groups. Grouping layers lets you quickly turn off the display of all the objects in the group. TIP To select just some of the objects in an object class, use a query to add the objects to your map and combine conditions.
PAGE 382

The new layer appears in Display Manager. All objects in the selected object class are included in this layer. If you selected multiple object classes, multiple layers are created. To see the objects, you may need to zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
PAGE 383

■ To bring in drawing objects by combining query conditions (page 369) ■ Exercise 3: Query in data from the drawing ■ Create a CAD Map ■ Bring in a subset of features using a query ■ Attaching Drawings (page 154) ■ Combining Conditions (page 368) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class (page 356) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers (page 355) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property (page 361) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data (page 363) Tutorial
PAGE 384

2 In the Define Query dialog box (page 1838), click Location. 3 In the Location Condition dialog box (page 1849), select a boundary to determine the type of area to query. Select Fence to specify a new polyline; select Polyline to use an existing polyline. 4 Choose a selection type: ■ Inside includes only objects that are completely inside the boundary. ■ Crossing includes all objects that are inside the boundary or crossing the boundary. 5 If you select the Polyline boundary, specify a polyline mode.
PAGE 385

Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). In your map, you can create a drawing layer (page 2060) in Display Manager that includes objects that have a specific property. You can select from objects in the current map, or from objects in attached drawings. For example, you can select all roads with a dashed linetype.
PAGE 386

■ Bringing in GIS Features (page 303) To bring in drawing objects based on object properties NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data, see procedures for bringing in geospatial data. (page 308). 1 Do one of the following: ■ In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Current Drawing. ■ In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Source Drawing. Be sure you have attached (page 154) the DWG files to query.
PAGE 387

Quick Reference New Display Manager Layer - Query Creates a new query layer in Display Manager Task Pane In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data and then select a query type Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
PAGE 388

■ Combining Conditions (page 368) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers (page 355) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class (page 356) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology (page 367) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location (page 358) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property (page 361) ■ Bringing in GIS Features (page 303) ■ To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data (page 364) ■ To bring in drawing objects based on object data (pag
PAGE 389

4 Specify the location of the data. ■ To retrieve objects based on object class, in the Class list, select the object class of the objects to retrieve. Under Properties, select the specific properties to query. ■ To retrieve objects based on object data, select the table and field to query. If two attached drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
PAGE 390

■ In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Source Drawing. Be sure you have attached (page 154) the DWG files to query. ■ In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Topology. 2 In the Define Query dialog box (page 1838), click SQL. 3 In the SQL Link Condition dialog box (page 1866), select the link template for the table to search.
PAGE 391

Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects. To bring in geospatial data, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). You can create a drawing layer (page 2060) in Display Manager that includes all the objects in a topology. For example, to create a layer that includes all the objects in the Streets topology, select the STREETS topology. You can organize layers into groups.
PAGE 392

2 In the Select Display Element dialog box (page 1631), select the topologies that include the objects to display. AutoCAD Map 3D creates a layer in Display Manager for each topology you select. 3 To group topology layers, select Group Selection. If you combine the layers in a group, you can turn the display of the group on or off. 4 Click OK. The new layer appears in Display Manager. All objects in the selected topology are included in this layer.
PAGE 393

See also: ■ Attaching Drawings (page 154) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers (page 355) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class (page 356) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology (page 367) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location (page 358) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property (page 361) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data (page 363) To bring in drawing objects by combining query conditions NOTE This topic applies to AutoCAD drawing objects.
PAGE 394

3 Before you create the next condition, select a joining operator. ■ And — Finds objects only if both conditions are true. ■ Or — Finds objects if either condition is true. ■ And Not — Finds objects only if the first condition is true and the second condition is false. ■ Or Not — Finds objects if either the first condition is true or the second condition is false. 4 Create the next condition by clicking Query Type. 5 Continue to create conditions.
PAGE 395

LandXML format. Using the bulk copy feature, you can also export points to another data store to create geospatial features. Before you import survey data, create (page 1000) or connect to (page 1000) a Survey Data Store.
PAGE 396

3 Browse to and select the LandXML file you want to import. 4 Click Open. ■ If AutoCAD Map 3D cannot recognize the coordinate system of your LandXML data,the LandXML Coordinate System dialog box (page 1717) appears. Assign a coordinate system by entering the appropriate coordinate system code or selecting one from a list, then click OK. 5 The LandXML file is brought into your Survey Data Store. Quick Reference Import LandXML Data Import LandXML data to a survey data store.
PAGE 397

The Autodesk Uploadable File format is as follows: PNEZD (Point Identification, Y, X, Z, Description). It is a comma-separated format, and uses the # character for comment text. See also: ■ Overview of Working with Survey Data (page 997) ■ Working with Survey Data Stores (page 999) To bring ASCII point data into a Survey Data Store 1 Create (page 1000) or connect to (page 1000) a Survey Data Store. 2 Right-click any node in the Survey Tree on the Survey tab of the Task Pane.
PAGE 398

Import ASCII point data to a survey data store. Task Pane On the Survey tab, right-click a survey data store ➤ Import ASCII Points. Dialog Box Import ASCII Points dialog box Bringing in LiDAR Data You can bring LiDAR (page 2066) point cloud (page 2071) data into your map using the Point Cloud Manager (page 1897). Point clouds are large data sets composed of 3D point data.Geographic LiDAR data is most commonly available in LAS (page 2066) (LiDAR Aerial Survey) or ASCII (.xyz) format.
PAGE 399

Creates and manages indexed point cloud data stores. Command Line MAPPOINTCLOUDMANAGER Dialog Box Point Cloud Manager Bringing in Point Cloud Data You can bring point cloud data into your map from an indexed point cloud data store or from a point cloud drawing object. Point clouds appear as layers in the Display Manager and as AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. For more information on working with AutoCAD drawing objects, see Working with Drawing Objects (page 727).
PAGE 400

■ Filtering Point Cloud Data (page 1024) ■ Exporting Point Cloud Data (page 1451) To add a point cloud to your map 1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Point Cloud Data ➤ From Index File. 2 In the Select Point Cloud Index dialog box, select the index file for the point cloud data store to add to your map 3 Click Open. AutoCAD Map 3D adds a point cloud layer to the Display Manager, and add the point cloud drawing object to your map.
PAGE 401

AutoCAD Map 3D adds a point cloud layer to the Display Manager. To adjust the display density point clouds in your map 1 Click Create ribbon tab ➤ Point Cloud Panel ➤ Point Cloud drop-down list. 2 Adjust the Point Cloud Density slider to the right to increase the display density of your point cloud objects. Adjust the slider to the left to decrease the display density. 3 Alternately, at the command prompt enter pointclouddensity, then enter a value from 1 through 100.
PAGE 402

NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405). See also: ■ Supported Import Formats (page 387) ■ Bringing in GIS Features (page 303) ■ Converting and Exporting (page 1403) ■ Digitizing Maps (page 1617) NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map.
PAGE 403

When you use Data Connect (from Display Manager), you view and edit data in its source. Edits are saved back to the source. The data stays in its original location. When you import data, you make a copy of the data and bring that copy into your map. When you edit the data, you are editing the copy. The original data is unchanged. For some formats, such as MicroStation Design (DGN), Arc/INFO, and SDF 2 (Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 and earlier), you can only import and export the data.
PAGE 404

■ Importing DXF Files (page 391) ■ Importing ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages (page 394) ■ Importing From ESRI ArcSDE (page 391) ■ Importing ESRI Shape Files (page 397) ■ Importing Geographic Markup Language (GML) Files (page 412) ■ Importing MapInfo MIF/MID Files (page 400) ■ Importing MapInfo TAB Files (page 402) ■ MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 (page 405) ■ Oracle (page 409) ■ Importing SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) Files (page 413) ■ Importing VPF (Vector Product Format)
PAGE 405

■ Send GIS Data to AutoCAD ■ Converting and Exporting (page 1403) ■ Bringing in GIS Features (page 303) Workflow Related topics NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
PAGE 406

2 In the Import Location dialog box, under Files Of Type, select the format of the map to import. 3 Select the file or folder to import. Click OK. 4 For formats with additional options, in the Import dialog box, click Driver Options.
PAGE 407

classes defined in your map. For more information about setting up object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification (page ?). ■ Input Coordinate System (page 424)— Specify the coordinate system of the incoming file. If the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a coordinate system assigned to it, incoming objects are converted to the coordinate system of the drawing. ■ Data (page 426)— For each layer, specify how to import data. ■ Points (page 428)— For each layer, specify how to treat incoming point objects.
PAGE 408

contents of a field to all other layers, right-click in the field to copy and click Paste To All Layers. ■ When pasting into Object Class fields, the object class name and the data mappings are pasted separately. The paste data mappings options are available only if the same fields exist in the incoming data for all mapped fields. ■ You cannot copy a "By Data" or "ACAD_TEXT" setting.
PAGE 409

NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405). To style drawing data on import 1 Create a drawing file in AutoCAD Map 3D that defines all the coordinate system, layers, blocks, linetypes, and other elements you need for styling.
PAGE 410

■ Specify the file to import and click OK. 6 In the Import dialog box (page 1711), under Import Properties For Each Layer Imported, specify the import settings for each input layer (sometimes called a theme, level, or file). ■ Drawing Layer (page 419)— Select a target layer for each layer in the incoming file. ■ Object Class (page 421)— Assign incoming objects to an existing object class and map incoming attribute data to the data fields in the object class.
PAGE 411

Menu Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import. Icon Import Map File Command Line MAPIMPORT Dialog Box Import dialog box Supported Import Formats Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) SDF is a native Autodesk file-based geospatial format that is optimized for storing large, classified data sets. You can connect to SDF files (page 338) to edit the original data in its source, or import it to convert the data into AutoCAD drawing objects.
PAGE 412

■ It is very fast, allowing Autodesk applications, such as AutoCAD Map 3D and MapGuide, to read and display tens of thousands of features per second. ■ It provides the power of a database without the overhead and cost of a full relational database management system (RDBMS) such as SQL Server or Oracle. ■ An SDF file can store a single feature class, or it can store multiple feature classes. ■ It is easy to manage, providing access to the database schema.
PAGE 413

Quick Reference MAPIMPORT Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D Menu Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import. Icon Import Map File Command Line MAPIMPORT Dialog Box Import dialog box Importing Autodesk SDF 2 While importing SDF 2 files (Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 and earlier), you can perform coordinate conversions, create object data tables from the key, name, and URL fields, and create hyperlinks on imported objects.
PAGE 414

2 In the Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box, select a file. Click Open. 3 In the Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box (page 1582), under Import Layer, select the target AutoCAD layer for the SDF information. To create a new AutoCAD layer, click Create New Layer. In the New Layer dialog box (page 1579), specify a name for the new layer. 4 Under Coordinate Conversion, select Convert From. Enter a coordinate system code. To select the code from a list, click Select Coordinate System.
PAGE 415

Importing DXF Files You can use DXF files created by other applications to bring information into AutoCAD Map 3D. When you import objects from DXF files, they do not have links to other objects or to data. For example, a polygon that encloses a parcel ID is not linked to the parcel ID except visually. Data imported from a DXF file does not have any links to object data or external databases. You cannot attach a source drawing to a DXF file or attach DXF files to another drawing.
PAGE 416

You can also connect to a live ArcSDE database (page 319) to edit the original data in its source (edits will go into the database). See also: ■ Bringing In Features from ArcSDE (page 316) To import data from an ESRI ArcSDE data source NOTE You can also connect to a live ArcSDE database (page 319)to edit the original data in its source (edits will go into the database). 1 Before moving ArcSDE data into your map, assign a coordinate system to the map.
PAGE 417

■ Object Class (page 421)— Assign incoming objects to an existing object class and map incoming attribute data to the data fields in the object class. The Object Class fields are available only if you have object classes defined in your map. For more information about setting up object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification (page ?). ■ Input Coordinate System (page 424)— Specify the coordinate system of the incoming file.
PAGE 418

Quick Reference MAPIMPORTFDO Import FDO data. Menu Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ FDO Connection. Command Line MAPIMPORTFDO Importing ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages ESRI Arc/INFO coverages can only be imported (and exported). They cannot be accessed using Data Connect. AutoCAD Map 3D supports Arc/INFO version 7.2, 7.3, and 8.x, and E00. Importing Arc/INFO stores coverages on your hard disk as a directory of files. In the coverage directory, each file contains specific data pertaining to the coverage.
PAGE 419

Coverage Feature Drawing Object Point, Arc, and Polygon with FAT (feature allocation table) in dBASE Geometry converted as above, attribute in object data. Annotation Text on _text layer. Text arrows on _textarrow layer. Tics Points on _tic layer, attributes in object data.
PAGE 420

Driver Options You can set the following options when importing ARC/INFO coverages or E00 files: Option Description Text Curves Select Follow, Fit, or Ignore. Optional Feature Types Select Extract Bounds, or Extract Tics. See also: ■ Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264) ■ Exporting To ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages (page 1419) NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map.
PAGE 421

Menu Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import. Icon Import Map File Command Line MAPIMPORT Dialog Box Import dialog box Importing ESRI Shape Files AutoCAD Map 3D supports up to ArcView version 3.2 and 8.x. About SHP Files ESRI SHP files store both geometry and attributes (data) for features. A single shape can have as many as five physical files with the same filename, but different file extensions: ■ .shp— Geometric data.
PAGE 422

folder are included in the import) or a single-select format (only one file can be selected for import). When you connect to or import SHP data, AutoCAD Map 3D checks the geometry to see if there are multiple closed outer loops. If so, it treats the geometry as multi-polygon (a polygon with multiple exterior rings). It does not treat unclosed outer loops as multi-polygon.
PAGE 423

NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405). ■ To import SHP data (page 399) ■ To change the single file/folder default setting for SHP files (page 399) ■ To access and work with SHP files (page 399) To import SHP data ■ Use the Import instructions.
PAGE 424

Icon Import Map File Command Line MAPIMPORT Dialog Box Import dialog box Importing MapInfo MIF/MID Files MIF/MID is a file standard used by MapInfo, a desktop mapping system. AutoCAD Map 3D supports MapInfo up to version 7 MIF/MID files. About MapInfo MIF/MID Files MapInfo MIF/MID format stores both geometry and attributes (data) for features, and is a set of two physical files that work together: ■ .mif— Vector geometric data. A single .mif file can contain many different types of geometry. ■ .
PAGE 425

In MapInfo, polygons are represented as closed areas. When you import polygons into AutoCAD Map 3D, they appear as polygons unless you select Import Polygons As Closed Polylines in the Import dialog box. By default, object colors are imported to their closest ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color. To import object colors using RGB (True Color), edit the mapimport.ini file. To change the default text justification setting for MIF/MID, edit the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file.
PAGE 426

To change the default text justification setting for MIF/MID ■ Edit the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file. Use the [MIF_Justification] section to set justification for MIF. Allowed MIF Justifications are left, center, and right. For more information, see To edit the .ini file (page 274). Quick Reference MAPIMPORT Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D Menu Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
PAGE 427

Importing MapInfo TAB files can only be imported (and exported). They cannot be accessed using Data Connect. By default, AutoCAD Map 3D considers MapInfo TAB a multi-select, file-based format, that is, you select one or more individual .tab files during a single import process.
PAGE 428

NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405). ■ To import from MapInfo TAB (page 404) ■ To import object colors using RGB (True Color) (page 404) ■ To change the default text justification setting for MapInfo TAB (page 404) To import from MapInfo TAB ■ Use the Import instructions. (page 381) To import object colors using RGB (True Color) ■ Edit the mapimport.ini file.
PAGE 429

MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 You can import and export Microstation DGN version 7 and 8. Bentley Systems, Inc., and MicroStation programs use the DGN format. Like DWG, a single DGN file can contain points, lines, areas, text, and other object types. Importing Microstation DGN files can only be imported (and exported). They cannot be accessed using Data Connect. Data-element information is stored in an external database file and linked to graphic objects.
PAGE 430

Option Description select Sub or Master, the UORs in the DGN 7 file are converted to Sub or Master units according to the conversion factor in the DGN file header. When you import the file, one Master or Sub unit (whichever you choose) will become one drawing unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D map. The Unit Ratio value indicates the ratio between the Master and Sub units.
PAGE 431

Option Description If you select Ignore, reference files are not imported and you cannot change the location of the folder. Driver Options for DGN 8 You can set the following options when importing DGN 8 files: Option Description Group Elements By Choose Geometry to group incoming objects by entity type. Choose Level or Level Names to group them by their DGN level or level name. Only levels that contain elements will be imported.
PAGE 432

Option Description arcs in the complex chain become linestrings, and any linkages on the component elements themselves are lost. Linkage Extraction Allows you to extract MSLinks and FRAMME attribute linkage values from the DGN 8 file. For each link, two fields are added to the object data table: mslinks_n, which specifies the key value, and entity_num_n, which specifies the table.
PAGE 433

■ To import DGN files (page 409) To import object colors using RGB (True Color) ■ Edit the mapimport.ini file. For more information, see To edit the .ini file (page 272). To maintain a link to external data when you import DGN files ■ Use a link template to maintain the linkage during import (page 433). To import DGN files ■ Use the Import instructions. (page 381) For driver options, see Design File Input Settings (page 1734).
PAGE 434

NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405). To import data from an Oracle data source 1 Before moving Oracle data into your map, assign a coordinate system to the map.
PAGE 435

setting up object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification (page ?). ■ Input Coordinate System (page 424)— Specify the coordinate system of the incoming file. If the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a coordinate system assigned to it, incoming objects are converted to the coordinate system of the drawing. ■ Data (page 426)— For each layer, specify how to import data. ■ Points (page 428)— For each layer, specify how to treat incoming point objects.
PAGE 436

Import FDO data. Menu Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ FDO Connection. Command Line MAPIMPORTFDO Importing Geographic Markup Language (GML) Files GML (Geography Markup Language) is an OpenGIS® Implementation specification that defines an XML encoding for the transport and storage of geographic information. The specification can be found on the OpenGIS Consortium web site. You can import GML into and export it out of AutoCAD Map 3D. Importing With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can import GML version 2 or version 3.
PAGE 437

NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405). ■ To verify language encoding settings for import from GML (page 413) ■ To import GML files (page 413) To verify language encoding settings for import from GML ■ Make sure the language encoding settings in the mapimport.ini file match the settings in your incoming file. For more information, see Customizing the Import and Export .
PAGE 438

Importing When you select an SDTS catalogue file, AutoCAD Map 3D imports objects and attributes from the dataset specified in the catalogue file. Typically, a dataset is a group of .ddf files with the same filename prefix. AutoCAD Map 3D imports only one record per object. If an object has multiple records attached, only one of the records will be imported. Driver Options SDTS has no import driver options. NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map.
PAGE 439

SQLite is like SHP format in that it contains both spatial data and attribute data. However, unlike SHP, it stores both types of data in a single file rather than a set of files. Advantages SQLite has the following advantages over DWG: ■ It stores and manages an order of magnitude more data than DWG ■ It provides the power of a database without the overhead and cost of a full relational database management system (RDBMS) such as SQL Server or Oracle.
PAGE 440

To access and work with SQLite ■ Connect to SQLite (page 331)– Allows you to view and edit the SQLite data live in its native format. Quick Reference MAPIMPORT Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D Menu Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import. Icon Import Map File Command Line MAPIMPORT Dialog Box Import dialog box Importing VPF (Vector Product Format) Files You can import Vector Product Format (VPF) files into AutoCAD Map 3D. You cannot export to this format.
PAGE 441

Driver Options VPF has no import driver options. See also: ■ Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264) NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405). To change the default so that AutoCAD Map 3D considers VPF a folder-based format ■ Modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file.
PAGE 442

You can import objects into the current drawing area, into an area you define in the map, or import the entire file. NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). To filter the data to specify the area to add to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map (page 309).
PAGE 443

Icon Import Map File Command Line MAPIMPORT Dialog Box Import dialog box Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. By default, AutoCAD Map 3D imports data to an AutoCAD layer with the same name as the layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file) in the input file. If an AutoCAD layer with this name already exists, objects are copied to that layer.
PAGE 444

2 In the Import dialog box (page 1711), review the target drawing layer for each input layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file) in the incoming file. 3 To change the AutoCAD layer, click in the Drawing Layer field for the input layer to change. In the Layer Mapping dialog box (Import) (page 1719), do one of the following: ■ To import objects to an existing AutoCAD layer, click Create on Existing Layer. Click the down arrow and select the layer.
PAGE 445

Icon Import Map File Command Line MAPIMPORT Dialog Box Import dialog box Assigning an Object Class During Import When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. As you import objects, you can assign them to an existing object class in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing and map the incoming attribute data to the object class definition.
PAGE 446

NOTE To make selections in the Object Class column, first define object classes in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. If there are no object classes defined, the fields in the Object Class column are grayed-out. For more information, see Setting Up Object Classification (page 116). 3 For each layer in the incoming file, click in the Object Class field. 4 Select an object class. to map incoming attribute data to the AutoCAD Map 3D object 5 Click class definition.
PAGE 447

This ensures that incoming data will be accurately classified but may require AutoCAD Map 3D to change some of the incoming data values. ■ If you are importing points and have assigned them to an object class with a creation method of Blocks, use the Points column to convert the points to blocks so that the objects can be classified. Object classification does not convert points to blocks for you. For more information, see To specify how to import points (page 428).
PAGE 448

NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). To change the coordinate system when you connect to the data, see Changing Coordinate Systems (page 311). See also: ■ Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377) ■ Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143) To perform a coordinate conversion 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import .
PAGE 449

Menu Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import. Icon Import Map File Command Line MAPIMPORT Dialog Box Import dialog box Importing Attribute Data When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. As you import objects, you can import the attribute data attached to the objects.
PAGE 450

■ External database — Imported data is added to the external database table as new records. ■ External database, link only — If you do not need to add the data to the external database, you can import just the links to the data. When you import links only, the link from the object to the external data are maintained, but the external database is not modified. This is much faster than importing the entire record. This is a good option when importing SHP data.
PAGE 451

Click Select Fields to map incoming fields to fields in the external database table. 5 Click OK to close the Attribute Data dialog box. ■ To import data to object data tables with the same name as the input layer names, right-click the Data column header in the table. Click Use Input Layer Name For Table Name. ■ To import data to an external database, attach the data source and define the link template before you start the import process.
PAGE 452

■ Import points as blocks, using a specified block definition. ■ Import points as blocks, using a block name specified in data attached to the objects. If you import points as blocks, you can choose to import the attribute data with the objects. If an attribute name on the block that is being created matches a field name on the incoming point, the data for that attribute will be imported with the point.
PAGE 453

■ To import points to a block whose name is specified in data stored in the Point Mapping dialog box, on the imported objects, click click Get Block Name From Data, and select the data field to use. During import, AutoCAD Map 3D reads the specified data value for each object. If the data value stored on the object specifies a valid block name, the object is imported to that block.
PAGE 454

If a polygon has attribute data attached, the data is initially attached to the polyline. You must move the attribute data from the polyline to the centroid. See also: ■ Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377) ■ Creating Centroids for Polygons (page 431) To import polygons 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import . attribute data as object data (page 426).
PAGE 455

Menu Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import. Icon Import Map File Command Line MAPIMPORT Dialog Box Import dialog box Creating Centroids for Polygons If you have polygon objects or closed polylines with data attached to them, you can create centroids and move the data to the centroid. This is useful: ■ After you import or digitize objects. ■ Before using editing commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Boundary Break, or Boundary Trim. ■ When working with topology.
PAGE 456

Object data attached to closed polylines (top) and object data moved to centroids (bottom). AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the lines do not intersect each other, and that the area is greater than 0. It then creates a centroid inside each selected polygon or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid. For an object shaped like a figure eight, AutoCAD Map 3D creates one centroid. Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
PAGE 457

NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to features from a feature source. To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines 1 Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Create Centroids. 2 In the Create Centroids dialog box (page 1801), specify whether to create centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects. If only for selected closed objects, select the polygons and closed polylines.
PAGE 458

See also: ■ Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377) ■ Importing Attribute Data (page 425) ■ Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522) To import objects with links to an external database 1 Make sure you have created a link template (page 526) for the external database, and that the database is attached (page 209) and connected. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Map Import . 3 In the Import dialog box (page 1711), click in a field in the Data column.
PAGE 459

Converts object data tables to linked external database tables Menu Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links. Command Line MAPOD2ASE Dialog Box Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box Displaying Attribute Data as Text When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. If you have attribute data attached to the objects you import, you can display that data as text next to the object.
PAGE 460

Quick Reference ADEDRAWINGS Manages the drawing set Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set Icon Define/Modify Drawing Set Command Line ADEDRAWINGS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box ADEQUERY Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query Icon Define Query Command Line AD
PAGE 461

MAPIMPORT Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D Menu Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
PAGE 462

Adding one or more images in the background of your map adds context and gives the map visual appeal. Use the following raster image and surface types in your map.
PAGE 463

Tell me more ■ Show me how to bring multiple images onto a single layer. ■ Show me how to insert an image using a guide. ■ Show me how to bring in data from a web server using WMS.
PAGE 464

To add a raster image to the map 1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data. 2 In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list. If you are adding a WMS image, see Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445). If you are adding an image whose format does not appear in the Data Connect window, see Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453). 3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
PAGE 465

Some image files contain placement information and are placed automatically in your map. For images that do not contain placement information, you are prompted for the location, scale, and insertion point. 11 In Display Manager, make sure that the image layer is in the correct display order. You can move the raster layer below objects and features. ■ In Display Manager, click Groups ➤ Draw Order. (If this button is already labeled Draw Order, you can omit this step.
PAGE 466

elevation, slope, and aspect, and drape map data over surfaces. You can view the data in 3D with walkthrough and flythrough options. See also: ■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 1186) ■ Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445) To add a raster-based surface to your map 1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data. 2 In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
PAGE 467

8 Select the coordinate system you saw in the pop-up window. Click OK twice to return to the Data Connect window. 9 In the Add Data To Map area, select the surfaces to include. If this source contains only a single surface, that surface is selected automatically. If it contains multiple surfaces, you can right-click any of them and select Select All or Select None. 10 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One Layer.
PAGE 468

■ ECW (Enhanced Compressed Wavelet) You can also add surface-based rasters (page 441)such as DEM and ESRI Grid files. NOTE You must use a different process (page 453) to insert an image whose format is not available in Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for an image whose file does not specify it.
PAGE 469

■ To change the coordinate system, click Edit Coordinate Systems and choose the appropriate coordinate system. ■ To change the vertical units, click the current entry to display a down arrow that lets you choose a different one. 8 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single layer. 9 Click Add To Map. 10 If prompted, specify the location, scale, and rotation (page 451) for each image.
PAGE 470

Data from WMS web services can be used to provide background layers for your map. With WMS data, you take the data as it is; you cannot reproject it. The number of Web Map Services (WMS) that implement OpenGIS interfaces on the Internet is increasing all the time, as more organizations adopt the open standards. Once you have located some WMS data, determine the URL of the page that serves the published layers.
PAGE 471

WMS Image Source Description http://demo.deegree.org:8080/deegree/wms? Geospatial data from NGA (U.S.), Intevation (Germany) and OGC (U.S.) http://www.ga.gov.au/bin/getmap.
PAGE 472

The Open GIS Consortium updates the WMS format periodically, so there are multiple versions. AutoCAD Map 3D requests the highest version (currently 1.3.0) by default. If you do not change this setting, the server will provide the highest version it supports. Some servers support multiple WMS versions, each corresponding to a different set of capabilities and resulting layers. If you must use a specific version of the image, select it from the list. The server may or may not support the version you request.
PAGE 473

layer; for example, you can combine images of each county to create a state map. If you combine the images, you must specify a single Image Format, Server CS Code, and Background for the resulting layer. When you select Combine Into One Layer, an Order entry appears next to each selected layer. Click the entry to change the order of the selected images within the combined layer. 11 Click Add To Map. The image is added to your map.
PAGE 474

■ Adding 2D Rasters (page 443) ■ Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445) To make a raster image transparent 1 Add the raster (page 437) to AutoCAD Map 3D. You can use any type of raster, including a WMS image. The image does not need to be transparent or have an opacity setting already. 2 Right-click the layer containing the image and choose Save Layer. Save the layer to a .layer file. 3 Open the resulting .layer file in a text editor, such as Notepad, and find the entry.
PAGE 475

Icon Connect Command Line MAPCONNECT Task Pane In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data. Specifying Image Insertion Point If an image does not contain location information, you can specify its insertion point and rotation so the image is inserted correctly in relation to other data. You can also adjust the scale so it matches the scale of the other data. AutoCAD Map 3D saves the insertion-point setting with the drawing.
PAGE 476

6 In the Image Insertion dialog box specify where to insert the image. You can enter X,Y coordinates for the image, or manually specify the insertion point in the drawing. Each option is described below. To insert the image manually 1 In the Image Insertion dialog box, on the Insertion tab, click Pick. 2 Pick the base point for the frame. You can also type coordinates at the command prompt. 3 Type a rotation angle or pick a point to define the rotation angle.
PAGE 477

50 feet or 1:600, and your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a scale of 1 unit equals 1 inch, enter 600 as the scale. 4 Specify the units for insertion point and density. For bitmaps, the density unit used in the image may be in dots per inch. For satellite photos, the density may be in miles. This unit is also used for the insertion point. For example, if your image was scanned at 300 dpi, then select Inches as the unit.
PAGE 478

NOTE To use this technique to insert some raster image formats, such as ECW and SID, you must first download the free Raster Object Enabler from autodesk.com. NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your map using Data Connect (page 437). This gives you more control over styling and other options.
PAGE 479

To insert raster images ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To insert a raster image (overview) (page 459) To insert a raster image (page 460) To correlate an image during insertion (page 464) To adjust the image frame manually during insertion (page 465) To change the density unit when inserting an image (page 469) To set the default density value and density unit (page 469) To add an image to a new Display Manager layer (page 470) To insert an image from the Command prompt (page 471) Overview of Inserting Raster Images Out
PAGE 480

Inserting a raster image into a city map. Move your cursor over the image to see the results. After you insert the image, you can change the image display order (page 475) to have the features and drawing objects display on top of the image. When you insert an image, AutoCAD Map 3D links the image to the drawing file through a path name or a data-management document ID. When you update a linked image, the updates appear in the drawing.
PAGE 481

Supported Image Formats AutoCAD Map 3D supports the most common image file formats used in computer graphics, document management, mapping, and geographic information systems (GIS). Images can be bitonal, 8-bit gray (grayscale), 8-bit color (indexed color), or 24-bit color (true color). Several image file formats support images with transparent pixels.
PAGE 482

Type Description and version File extension IG4 Image Systems Group 4 .ig4 IGS Image Systems Gray Scale .igs IKONOS 8- or 16-bit satellite imagery JFIF JPEG File Interchange Format .jpg JPEG and JPEG 2000 Joint Photographics Expert Group .jpg LANDSAT FAST L7A Multispectral image format used by the Landsat 7 satellite NITF National Imaging Transmission Format (a multiframe image format commonly used by US federal agencies and NATO) PCX PC Paintbrush Exchange .
PAGE 483

See also: ■ Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) To insert a raster image (overview) 1 To insert an ECW or SID file, you must first download the free Raster Object Enabler from autodesk.com. 2 Locate the image (page 460) to insert. 3 Specify correlation settings (page 464) for the image. 4 Specify image density (page 469). 5 Add the image to a Display Manager layer (page 470).
PAGE 484

Tell me more ■ Show me how to insert an image using a guide. ■ Show me how to transform an image.
PAGE 485

6 To view or modify the image correlation data, select Modify Correlation. 7 Click Open. If Modify Correlation is not selected or if you are inserting more than one image, the Image Correlation dialog box does not appear and the images are inserted using their default correlation information. AutoCAD Map 3D searches in this order for correlation information: ■ World file ■ Resource file (.res extension) ■ Tab file (.
PAGE 486

The image is inserted on the current AutoCAD layer and its correlation data is saved in the drawing file. The next time you open the drawing, the image is displayed automatically using these settings.
PAGE 487

If you modify the correlation settings, AutoCAD Map 3D saves the changes with the drawing. The changes are not saved back to the image file or to the correlation source file. NOTE To modify the settings stored in the image file, use an image-editing application such as . If you modify the original settings in the image, you must reinsert the image to see the changes. Correlation Settings ■ Correlation Source — Displays available correlation sources. (See the Correlation Sources section, following.
PAGE 488

To see how your correlation settings translate to AutoCAD Map 3D units, select the Insertion tab. To preview the settings in the drawing, click Apply. NOTE To modify correlation settings after you insert an image use the Properties palette. Correlation Sources When you insert an image, AutoCAD Map 3D searches for correlation files for the image and displays them in the Correlation Source list of the Image Correlation dialog box. You may see the following sources listed.
PAGE 489

NOTE You can click the frame while the Insert An Image dialog box is open and use the grips to move, scale, or rotate the frame. 3 Click Apply to see your changes. 4 Click OK to insert the image. AutoCAD Map 3D inserts the image on the current layer and saves its correlation data in the drawing file. The next time you open the drawing, the image displays using these settings. TIP If your image is not visible, zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
PAGE 490

2 In the Image Correlation dialog box (page 1873), on the Insertion tab, click Pick. An outline of the frame appears onscreen. This outline reflects the aspect ratio of the image that you are inserting. 3 Pick the base point for the frame. You can also type coordinates at the Command prompt, or, if there is already correlation data for the image, press Enter to accept the existing coordinates. 4 Type a rotation angle or pick a point to define the rotation angle.
PAGE 491

Setting Image Density For some images, the density value and units are already stored in the image file or correlation source. When you use the Insert An Image command to add an image that does not have correlation information, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the settings from the Image Defaults tab in the Raster Extension Options dialog box. NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your map using Data Connect (page 440). This gives you more control over styling and other options.
PAGE 492

density value and Inches as the density unit. Then it was scaled based on its paper scale of 1" = 48". The density units that you select when you insert an image that is not georeferenced should match the units at which the image was scanned. In this case, the units are inches because the image was scanned in dots per inch. NOTE Remember that the scale must be based on the same units. For example, if the scale in the original floor plan is 1" = 4', you must convert both sides to the same unit.
PAGE 493

See also: ■ Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) ■ Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453) To change the density unit when inserting an image 1 Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Insert An Image. 2 In the Insert Image dialog box (page 1878), select the image(s) to insert. 3 Select Modify Correlation. 4 Click Open. 5 Select the Source tab. Select the units. To set the default density value and density unit 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ angle-arrow.
PAGE 494

Adding an Image in a Drawing to a Display Manager Layer You can move an image you inserted directly into the current drawing with the Insert An Image command to a new Display Manager (page 2060) layer. This allows you to position it relative to other Display Manager layers. See also: ■ Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) ■ Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453) To add an image to a new Display Manager layer 1 Insert the image using the Insert An Image command.
PAGE 495

with your images or to use an AutoLISP routine to insert images into your drawing. NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your map using Data Connect (page 440). This gives you more control over styling and other options.
PAGE 496

■ Type the path to the image, the image name, and the file extension, for example: c:\Projects\Images\contour.rlc AutoCAD Map 3D searches for the image on the path that you specify. If it cannot locate the image on this path, then it searches for the image using the Project Files Search Path. NOTE When FILEDIA is set to <0>, you can display the Insert Image dialog box by typing a tilde (~) in response to a command prompt. When AutoCAD Map 3D locates the image, it inserts it into your drawing.
PAGE 497

Managing Raster Images You can view and modify information about images you inserted using the Insert An Image command.
PAGE 498

To do this... Specify the location of an image you inserted using the Insert An Image command, if it has been moved or deleted. Zoom to images you inserted using the Insert An Image command. Use this method... Click ➤ Options. On the Files tab, select Project Files Search Path. Click Add. See Creating a Search Path for Raster Images (page 479). Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image Management. See Zooming to an Image (page 481).
PAGE 499

To display the Image Information dialog box 1 Click the frame of the image to select it. NOTE If you are zoomed in and cannot see the image frame, press Shift + left-click (page 493) to select the image. 2 Right-click the image ➤ Image ➤ Information. To display the Properties palette 1 In the drawing, select the image to modify. 2 Right-click the image. Click Properties.
PAGE 500

■ Raster images and vector objects. You can change the draw order of images and vector objects. By sending an image to the back, the vector objects display on top of the image. Move your cursor over the image to see the results. NOTE If you change the draw order and then undo the change, images may not appear in the correct draw order. Use the REGEN command to display the correct draw order of the images.
PAGE 501

AutoCAD Map 3D always uses this optimization feature and applies it to the draw order of all objects, not just to images. ■ Image selection You can set an option to draw hatch marks over a selected image. Click ➤ Options. Select the Display tab. Under Display Performance, set Highlight Raster Image Frame Only to off. If Highlight Raster Image Frame Only is off, when you select an image, it rises to the top of the display order, obscuring any vectors that cross it.
PAGE 502

2 Do one of the following: ■ Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Bring To Front drop-down ➤ Bring To Front ■ Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Bring To Front drop-down ➤ Send To Back If necessary, use REGEN. NOTE Changes made using Draw Order are reflected in the Image Management dialog box.
PAGE 503

See also: ■ Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) ■ Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453) To change an image name 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image Management. 2 In the Image Manager dialog box, select the image name. 3 Click the image name again to edit it. 4 Enter the new name. 5 Click OK. TIP You can also change the image name by pressing F2 while in the Image Manager dialog box and editing the name.
PAGE 504

NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect (page 440). See also: ■ Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) ■ Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453) To create a search path 1 Click ➤ Options. 2 On the Files tab, select Project Files Search Path. Click Add. A folder named Projectx (where x indicates the next available number) appears under Project Files Search Path. 3 Enter a name for the project.
PAGE 505

Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options Zooming to an Image You can zoom to images you inserted with the Insert An Image command. NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect (page 440). See also: ■ Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) ■ Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453) To zoom to an image 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image Management. 2 In the Image Management dialog box (page 1875), select an image. 3 Right-click the image.
PAGE 506

Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images You can increase redrawing speed by hiding or unloading images you inserted using the Insert An Image command that you do not need in the current drawing session.
PAGE 507

See also: ■ Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) ■ Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453) To do this... Use this method... Hide an image you added using the Insert An Image command. Select and right-click the image frame ➤ Image ➤ Show Image. See Hiding an Image (page 485). Remove an image you added using the Insert An Image command from memory (unload it). At the command prompt, enter externalreferences. Right-click the image and click Unload. See Unloading an Image (page 486).
PAGE 508

Hides or displays a raster image Menu Right-click a selected image frame ➤ Image ➤ Show Image Command Line MAPISHOWIMAGE ERASE Removes objects from a drawing Menu Modify menu ➤ Erase Icon Erase Command Line ERASE Task Pane Select objects to erase.
PAGE 509

Hiding an Image When you hide an image, the image does not display onscreen, nor does it plot. Only the image boundary displays onscreen. However, the image is still loaded in memory, and the image file is still locked on the disk. It cannot be deleted or modified. Hiding images is a convenient way to speed regeneration time. You can redisplay the image when you are ready to plot. This command is not available if you have selected more than one image.
PAGE 510

Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties MAPISHOWIMAGE Hides or displays a raster image Menu Right-click a selected image frame ➤ Image ➤ Show Image Command Line MAPISHOWIMAGE Unloading an Image To conserve memory and enhance performance, unload images that you do not need to view and/or plot.
PAGE 511

2 In the External References palette, right-click the image. 3 Click Unload. This status is saved with the drawing when you close the drawing. Quick Reference IMAGE Manages images Menu Setup menu ➤ Image Management Icon Manage Images Command Line IMAGE Task Pane Select an image. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Image ➤ Image Manager Erasing an Image When you erase an image, that instance of the image is erased from the document. Erasing an image does not delete the image information.
PAGE 512

2 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Erase. If you erase all instances of an image within a drawing, you may be prompted to detach the image (page 489) from the drawing. Quick Reference ERASE Removes objects from a drawing Menu Modify menu ➤ Erase Icon Erase Command Line ERASE Task Pane Select objects to erase.
PAGE 513

■ Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) ■ Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453) To detach an image 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image Management. 2 In the Image Manager dialog box, select the image name. 3 Click Detach. The image is no longer linked to the drawing file, and all instances of the image are removed from the drawing. Quick Reference IMAGE Manages images Menu Setup menu ➤ Image Management Icon Manage Images Command Line IMAGE Task Pane Select an image.
PAGE 514

■ ■ ■ ■ Making an Image Transparent (page 499) Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image (page 501) Modifying Other Image Properties (page 503) Clipping an Image (page 504) To modify raster images ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To select an image by pressing Shift + left-click (page 493) To turn on the Shift + left-click option (page 494) To display image frames (page 495) To change image alignment (page 496) To adjust brightness, contrast, and fade (page 497) To change image display quality (page 498) To
PAGE 515

To do this... Use this method... Display frames for images you added with the Insert An Image command. Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Toggle Frames. See Displaying Image Frames (page 494). Change the alignment and scale of an image you added with the Insert An Image command. At the Command prompt, enter align. See Changing Image Alignment (page 495). Adjust the brightness, contrast, and fade of an image you added with the Insert An Image command. At the Command prompt, enter imageadjust.
PAGE 516

Quick Reference MAPIOPTIONS Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options, paths, and memory settings Menu Setup menu ➤ Raster Options Command Line MAPIOPTIONS Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box MAPIFRAME Makes frames enclosing raster images visible or invisible Menu View menu ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Toggle Frames Command Line MAPIFRAME Dialog Box MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command) ALIGN Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D Command Line ALIGN PROPER
PAGE 517

Command Line IMAGECLIP Task Pane Select an image. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Image ➤ Clip Selecting an Image If an image frame is visible, you can select the image by clicking the frame or by drawing a crossing window around a frame edge. When you select an image by selecting its frame, grips are displayed. NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect (page 440). You can also select an image by placing your cursor over the image and pressing Shift + left-click.
PAGE 518

If you clicked more than one image, the Image Select dialog box (page 1877) appears. This dialog box displays the names of all the images that are inserted into your drawing. The image or images that are already selected are highlighted (not just the images that you selected by pressing Shift + left-click). 3 Click the images in the list to select. Click OK. To select all the images in your drawing, click Select All. To clear the selection set, click Select None.
PAGE 519

NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect (page 440). Hiding an image frame ensures that the image cannot be moved or modified accidentally by a single- or double-click and prevents the frame from being plotted or displayed. When image frames are hidden, clipped images are still displayed to their specified frame limits; only the frame is affected. Showing and hiding image frames affects all images attached to your drawing.
PAGE 520

rotate the image to the vector coordinates. This process performs a simple transformation but does not rubber sheet the image. See also: ■ Moving, Rotating, and Scaling an Object (page 931) To change image alignment 1 At the Command prompt, enter align. 2 Select the image and press Enter. 3 Specify a first source point on the image and a first destination point in the drawing. 4 Specify a second source point on the image and a second destination point in the drawing. 5 Press Enter.
PAGE 521

NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect (page 440). NOTE Bitonal images cannot be adjusted for brightness, contrast, or fade. Bitonal images fade to the current screen background when displayed, and fade to white (the color of most paper) when plotted. See also: ■ Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) ■ Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453) To adjust brightness, contrast, and fade 1 At the Command prompt, enter imageadjust. 2 Select the image to modify.
PAGE 522

Changing Image Display Quality and Speed Changing Image Display Quality You can change image display quality. Draft-quality images may be grainier, but they display more quickly than high-quality images. Changing the image display quality setting affects all images attached to your drawing with the Insert An Image command. NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect (page 440). Hiding Images You can hide an image.
PAGE 523

NOTE If you are zoomed in and cannot see the image frames, press Shift + left-click to select the image or images. 2 Right-click the image. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, select one of the display options. ■ Select Show Image and set it to No if you do not want to display the image. ■ Select Show Clipped and set it to Yes to display any clip boundaries you have made on an image using the imageclip command.
PAGE 524

NOTE The transparency color is stored in the drawing as an AutoCAD Map 3D custom object. If you send the drawing to other users, they can see the transparency color only by opening the drawing in AutoCAD Map 3D or Autodesk Raster Design. If they open the drawing in AutoCAD, they see a message that AutoCAD cannot reference the custom object and will not display the transparent color. You can also change the opacity of an entire raster image, so that the image is translucent and items below it are visible.
PAGE 525

NOTE You can choose the transparency color for grayscale and color images. In bitonal images, the transparency color is always the background color of the image. 5 Click to display the Transparency Color dialog box (page 1883). 6 Click Select and pick the desired color on the image. Click OK. 7 To turn on transparency, select Transparency in the Properties palette and set it to Yes.
PAGE 526

■ Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453) To modify the correlation settings for an image 1 Select the image. 2 Right-click the image. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, do one of the following: ■ To move the image, type new coordinates in the Position X, Y, and Z boxes. This insertion point represents the lower-left corner of the image frame before any rotation is applied. ■ To rotate the image, type a new value in the Rotation box.
PAGE 527

Modifying Other Image Properties Use the Properties palette to modify image properties such as the following: ■ Frame color, layer, linetype, and linetype scale ■ Image brightness, contrast, and fade ■ Location ■ Rotation, width, height, and scale ■ Image transparency and transparency color The settings apply only to the selected images. NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect (page 440).
PAGE 528

Select the desired color or select ByLayer to set the frame color of the image to the color of the layer it is on. The frame color is also the foreground color for bitonal images. Click OK to apply the new color to the selected image or images. ■ Layer — Select the target AutoCAD layer for the image or images. ■ Linetype — Select a linetype for the image frame or frames. Select any linetype that is loaded in your drawing or select ByLayer to use the linetype defined for that layer.
PAGE 529

Image Clip lets you show only the part of an image you require. Move your cursor over the image to see the clipped portion of the image. You can display a clipped image using the clipping boundary, or you can hide the clipping boundary and display the original image boundaries.
PAGE 530

NOTE To clip an image, the image boundary must be visible. See Displaying Image Frames (page 494). A clip boundary is a display-only feature that you can use for viewing and plotting purposes. It does not permanently change image data. When you delete a clipping boundary, the original image boundary is restored. To clip the image permanently, use an image-editing application such as Autodesk Raster Design. NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect (page 440).
PAGE 531

Quick Reference IMAGECLIP Creates new clipping boundaries for an image object Icon Clip Image Command Line IMAGECLIP Task Pane Select an image. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Image ➤ Clip Joining Data to GIS Features You can add properties from a different data source to GIS features in your map using joins. For example, you can join employment rates stored in a Microsoft Access database file to city features stored in an SDF file, or to counties stored in an Oracle database.
PAGE 532

For example, after you join a table of voter turnout data to a map of regions in your area, you can create a theme that varies in appearance, depending on the number of participating voters in each region. With joins, you can keep your data in separate tables, focused on specific topics, instead of in one large database or file. This can ease administration and reduce complexity. Typically, a join connects a separate table of data (a secondary table) to a feature class layer (the primary table).
PAGE 533

■ Edit joined data. (page 517) ■ Export data from the Data Table. (page 520) Creating a Join A join adds the properties from a data table (secondary table) to an existing Feature Class layer (primary table). The original data remains unchanged in its source—the join exists only within your map. The secondary table can be an actual table, such as a named range in an Excel spreadsheet, or the tabular data contained in a feature source, such as an Oracle database or an SDF file.
PAGE 534

Join Keys To be joined, the primary and secondary tables must contain matching fields with common values. These matching fields are the join keys. For example, when joining a data table containing employment rates to a layer representing counties, the join key might be County_Name, if that field is common to both tables. A join key does not need to have the same name in both data sources, but it must have the same data type (numeric, string, Boolean, and so on).
PAGE 535

Using Joins for Calculated Fields You can create a calculated field that uses native data and joined data. For example, if you join assessor data to parcel data, you can create a field that represents the cost per acre for each parcel. You create a calculated field using an expression. Non-matching Data When you create a join, you can specify how to deal with features in the primary table that do not find a match in the secondary table.
PAGE 536

■ Using Joins with Calculated Properties (page 518) ■ Accessing Data from ODBC (page 342) ■ Overview of the Data Table (page 1125) NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects. To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). To create a join 1 Prepare to create a join by doing the following: ■ Ensure the primary and secondary sources share one or more common fields, for example Parcel_ID or County_Name.
PAGE 537

Your selection is the secondary source. If this source contains multiple tables, choose the one to use for the join. 4 In the This Column From The Left Table list, select the join key (the common field or property) for the primary source, for example, Parcel_ID or County_Name. 5 In the Matches This Column From The Right Table list, select the matching field or property in the secondary source. Only fields with matching data types are displayed in the right-hand list.
PAGE 538

Defines a join for feature data. Command Line MAPDEFINEJOIN Task Pane In the Task Pane, right-click a layer ➤ Create Join. Modifying or Removing Joins After you create a join, you can change the settings you specified when you created it. You can remove one (of multiple) joins from a feature layer, or remove all joins from the feature layer at once, restoring the properties for that layer to its native data only. NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects.
PAGE 539

NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects. To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). To modify a join 1 In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer with the join to modify, and select Manage Joins. 2 In the Manage Layer Data dialog box (page 1607), select the join to modify, and click Edit. 3 In the Edit A Join dialog box, change any settings.
PAGE 540

To help you maintain the integrity of your original data, a few limitations apply when editing joined data: ■ When you edit a feature layer that has a one-to-one join (page 2070) in the Data Table, you can change the native feature data (from the primary table) but you cannot change the joined properties (from the secondary table). To edit the joined data, display Map Explorer, expand the data source containing the table to edit, select that table, and click Table.
PAGE 541

NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects. To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). To edit joined data For this type of join or data... Edit Insert Delete One-to-One You can edit the primary table (the native feature data) when you display the Data Table for the feature layer. To edit the secondary table (joined data) open the table in Map Explorer.
PAGE 542

For this type of join or data... Edit Insert Delete ODBC data table You can edit records in Data Table. Not available. Use the source application, such as Microsoft Access, to insert records. Not available. Use the source application, such as Microsoft Access, to delete records. Quick Reference MAPDEFINEJOIN Defines a join for feature data. Command Line MAPDEFINEJOIN Task Pane In the Task Pane, right-click a layer ➤ Create Join.
PAGE 543

NOTE Joins are available for geospatial data only, and not for drawing objects. To join attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). To create a calculated property based on joined data 1 Connect to both data sources and join them, based on a common property. (page 509) 2 In the Display Manager, select the primary source (the feature layer to which you joined the data) and click Table. 3 In the Data Table, click Options ➤ Create A Calculation.
PAGE 544

■ Save a layer to a .LAYER file (page 1469) – When you save a layer to a .layer file, it retains its styling information and pointers to the data source that defines its geometry and attributes (including joined data). You can drag and drop saved layers into any map to reuse them, or use them with MapGuide Enterprise.
PAGE 545

Menu Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Autodesk SDF2 (MapGuide6.x...). Command Line MAP2SDF Dialog Box Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects Link attribute data to objects in your drawing.
PAGE 546

■ Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data (page 363) NOTE Object data applies to drawing objects only. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125).
PAGE 547

Tell me more ■ To link records to objects (page 523) ■ Attach Attribute Data to Drawing Objects ■ Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 204) ■ Creating a Link Template (page 525) Procedure Workflow Related topics NOTE Link templates apply to drawing objects only. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
PAGE 548

Command Line ADEGENLINK Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Generate Links Dialog Box Generate Data Links dialog box (Data View) Link Records to Objects Links the selected records to objects in your drawing Menu In the Data View: Links ➤ Link Records To Objects Icon Link Records to Objects MAPDELETELINKS Deletes database links from objects Menu Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Delete Links Command Line MAPDELETELINKS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link
PAGE 549

Creating a Link Template A link template specifies how to link objects in a drawing to records in a specific database table. NOTE Link templates apply to drawing objects only. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507). A link template specifies the name of the database table and the key columns to use to uniquely identify each record.
PAGE 550

NOTE Before you create a link template, make sure the data source for the table is currently attached (page 209) and connected (page 215). To create a link template 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), right-click the table and click Define Link Template. 2 In the Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) (page 1683), type a name for the link template. 3 Under Key Selection, select the column to use as the key by clicking the check box in the Key column.
PAGE 551

Command Line MAPDEFINELT Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source table or query ➤ Define Link Template Dialog Box Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) Opening a Linked Database Table Once you have a defined a link template for a table, you can open the table as a linked table. When a table is opened as a linked table, AutoCAD Map 3D tracks the relationship between the records in the table and the objects in your drawing. NOTE Link templates apply to drawing objects only.
PAGE 552

Quick Reference MAPVIEWLINK Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to view in the Data View Menu Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ View Linked Table. Command Line MAPVIEWLINK Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ View Linked Table Dialog Box Select Link Template dialog box Manually Linking Database Records to Objects You can create a link between an object in the drawing and a record in a database table.
PAGE 553

NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507). Link Data When you create a link, link data is stored on the object. The link data has two parts: the name of the link template to use, and the actual value to search for in the key column.
PAGE 554

Quick Reference (Data View) Link Records to Objects Links the selected records to objects in your drawing Menu Icon In the Data View: Links ➤ Link Records To Objects Link Records to Objects Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects If information in your drawing, such as object data, text, or block attribute data, matches information in a database table, you can automatically create links from each selected object to a matching record in the database table.
PAGE 555

NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
PAGE 556

8 Select a Database Validation option: ■ None — Creates links without checking to see if a matching record exists in the table ■ Link Must Exist — Creates a link only if the value in the drawing matches the key field value of an existing record. If no record has a matching value, a link is not created for that object. ■ Create If New — Creates a new record in the table if no existing record has a matching value. 9 Click OK.
PAGE 557

9 Enter a to use all blocks or text objects, or enter s to select block or text objects. Quick Reference MAPOD2ASE Converts object data tables to linked external database tables Menu Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
PAGE 558

Field Names in the New Table By default, the fields in the new database table have the same names as the fields in the object data table.
PAGE 559

2 In the Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box (page 1680), under Source Object Data Table, select an object data table. 3 Select Remove Data From Objects Processed to delete the object data after creating the link. 4 Under Target Link Template, select Convert Object Data To Database. 5 Click Define to specify the link template. 6 In the Define Link Template dialog box (MAPOD2ASE) (page 1682), select an available data source. Click Connect. 7 Enter a table name.
PAGE 560

Converts object data tables to linked external database tables Menu Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links. Command Line MAPOD2ASE Dialog Box Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box Editing Database Links To link an object to a different record in a database table, you can either delete the old link and create a new link, or you can edit the link data stored on the object.
PAGE 561

■ Creating a Link Template (page 525) ■ Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 204) NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507). To edit or delete a database link ➤ Link Manager.
PAGE 562

Menu Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Delete Links Command Line MAPDELETELINKS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Delete Links Dialog Box Select Link Templates dialog box MAPLINKMANAGER Edits the link data attached to an object Menu Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Link Manager Command Line MAPLINKMANAGER Editing a Link Template If you rename a database table or change the location of the database, you must edit the link template associated with that datab
PAGE 563

NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features from a feature source. For information on viewing and editing geospatial attributes, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). For information on joining data to a geospatial feature class, see Overview of Joins (page 507). NOTE The following procedure edits the link template in the active drawing. It does not update the asi.
PAGE 564

Command Line MAPDELETELT Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Delete Link Template Dialog Box Select Link Template dialog box MAPPROPSLT Edits the database table name or location in a link template Menu Setup menu ➤ Edit Link Template Properties Command Line MAPPROPSLT Using Open Source FDO Providers To make it easier to extend the capabilities of FDO Data Access Technology used within AutoCAD Map 3D, Autodesk has released FDO as an open source project under the Open Source Geo
PAGE 565

Check http://fdo.osgeo.org and http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908 periodically for additional providers. If you are a developer, you can also create your own data providers. The open source version of FDO Data Access Technology and developer documentation is available on http://fdo.osgeo.org . NOTE FDO Providers from sources other than Autodesk are not supported or warrantied by Autodesk.
PAGE 566

■ Description – Description that will be displayed in the Data Connect window ■ IsManaged – False if the provider was developed using unmanaged code like C++; True if uses managed code. ■ Version – The DLL version number. The version number must match the version number of the DLLs. ■ FeatureDataObjectsVersion – FDO version number ■ LibraryPath - Path to the DLLs for the new provider 7 Save and close providers.xml. 8 Start AutoCAD Map 3D. 9 In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
PAGE 567

Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data You can bring in the following types of data from AutoCAD Civil 3D projects: ■ Features (Alignments, points, parcels, and pipe networks) ■ Surfaces To bring in Civil 3D data, you must first export it from Civil 3D to formats that can be read by AutoCAD Map 3D. The following table lists the AutoCAD Civil 3D features and attributes that are exported to the SDF file.
PAGE 568

Structure ■ Slope ■ Inside Diameter ■ Outside Diameter ■ Shape ■ Elevation at Start ■ Elevation at End ■ Structure Start ■ Structure End ■ Network Name ■ Rim Elevation ■ Structure Name Tell me more ■ Show me how to bring in data from AutoCAD Civil 3D.
PAGE 569

■ To export features from AutoCAD Civil 3D to SDF (page 545) ■ To access the SDF file from a map (page 545) ■ To export surfaces from AutoCAD Civil 3D to DEM (page 545) ■ To access the DEM from a map (page 545) To export features from AutoCAD Civil 3D to SDF 1 Open the project in AutoCAD Civil 3D. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, export the project to SDF. 2 In the Export To SDF dialog box, specify a name for the SDF file. 3 Specify the coordinate system.
PAGE 570

3 Specify information to connect to the DEM file. For more information, see To add a raster-based surface to your map (page 442). Quick Reference Connect Feature Source Connects a feature source Menu Click File ➤ Connect To Data. Icon Connect Command Line MAPCONNECT Task Pane In Display Manager click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
PAGE 571

4 Managing Data Overview of Managing Data Different geospatial data formats have different capabilities. Use the following table to determine the options available for your data stores. NOTE WMS and raster data providers are not covered here. For information about those providers, see Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445) and Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437). NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 572

Oracle PostgreSQL SQL Server SQL Serv- SQLite er Spatial MySQL ODBC SDF SHP ESRI ArcSDE WFS (page 342) (page 337) (page 335) (page 316) (page 346) Style data (page 639) Style data (page 639) Style data (page 639) Style data (page 639) Style data (page 639) Style data (page 639) Style data (page 639) Style data (page 639) Style data (page 639) Style data (page 639) Examine or edit attribute data (page 711) Examine or edit attribute data (page 711) Examine or edit attribute data (pa
PAGE 573

Oracle PostgreSQL SQL Server SQL Serv- SQLite er Spatial MySQL Delete a schema (page 613) Delete a schema (page 613) Delete a schema (page 613) Delete a schema (page 613) Delete a schema (page 613) Delete a schema (page 613) Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615) Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615) Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615) Copy data to/from a different data format (page 618) Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615) Copy d
PAGE 574

Oracle PostgreSQL SQL Server SQL Serv- SQLite er Spatial MySQL ODBC NOTE You can use Bulk Copy to copy ODBC data to a different provider, such as Oracle, MySQL, SQL Server, SDF, and SHP. You can copy data to an ODBC data store, but you must define the target schema properly, and have write permissions.
PAGE 575

About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas Overview of Geospatial Data Geospatial data is organized as follows: ■ Feature: The spatial representation of a real-world entity, such as a specific road or an individual utility pole, that specifies the geometry and other properties of the feature. ■ Feature class: A category of features with rules that define the allowable data types, default values, and constraints for its member features.
PAGE 576

Properties Each feature class has properties that define it. The Pole feature class would have properties such as identification number, name, model, material, height, installation date, and so on. The properties that define a feature class can have data types, default values, and constraints. These can help ensure that a feature meets certain criteria in order to be included in a particular feature class. For example, the “Large Roads” feature class can include a field called “Lanes.
PAGE 577

See also: ■ Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305) ■ Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711) ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ Viewing a Schema (page 608) ■ Migrating Data (page 615) To work with geospatial data NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 578

You can create schemas within AutoCAD Map 3D, or import existing FDO schemas into your maps. NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 579

NOTE Functionality for OSE (the Oracle Spatial OO40, which is similar to OLE DB) is not available in a 64-bit environment. The Oracle library that OSE is built on (Oracle Object for OLE) is 32-bit only. There is no 64-bit version. Before you add features to an Oracle data store, make sure your user privileges for that Oracle data store are adequate and appropriate, and that the data in that data store is accurate and current.
PAGE 580

■ These geometry types: point, line string, polygon, multi-point, multi-line string, multi-polygon, curve string, curve polygon, multi-curve string, multi-curve polygon, linear ring, line string segment, circular arc segment, and ring ■ Multi-geometry Restrictions of Oracle Schemas When you create an Oracle schema, the following restrictions apply: ■ A feature class (page 2063) must define or inherit at least one identity property (page 2071).
PAGE 581

See also: ■ Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551) ■ Setting Up Database Users (page 584) ■ Creating a Data Store (page 586) ■ Bringing In Features from Oracle (page 312) ■ Creating a Join (page 509) ■ Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711) ■ Creating a Schema (page 596) ■ Viewing a Schema (page 608) ■ Editing a Schema (page 610) ■ Migrating Data (page 615) To enable versioning for an Oracle data store 1 You enable versioning with the Oracle SQL*Plus tool, which you use to exec
PAGE 582

Problems can occur if you respond incorrectly to errors you encounter while running a script. 4 Execute the EnableVersioning.sql script in the /FDO/bin/com folder in your AutoCAD Map 3D folder. This will enable the tables for OWM. NOTE The DisableVersioning.sql script in the same folder provides the opposite functionality.
PAGE 583

Working with SQL Server Data AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server version 2005 and SQL Server Spatial (page 561). Both provide comprehensive data support, along with spatial indexing, optimistic concurrency, and read-committed transaction isolation. It uses a revision number for optimistic concurrency. AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server authentication for SQL Server data stores. The FDO (page 2062) User is mapped to the SQL Server login. Grant access to the databases whose data you want to use.
PAGE 584

■ ■ The following geometry types: ■ Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon, curve polygon, multi-curve polygon, circular arc segment ■ Points: point, multi-point ■ Rings: ring, linear ring ■ Line strings: line string, line string segment, multi-line string, curve string, multi-curve string Multi-geometry Restrictions of SQL Server Schemas When you create a SQL Server schema, the following restrictions apply: ■ A feature class (page 2063) must define or inherit at least one identity property (page 2071
PAGE 585

■ Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711) ■ Creating a Schema (page 596) ■ Viewing a Schema (page 608) ■ Editing a Schema (page 610) ■ Deleting Schemas (page 613) ■ Migrating Data (page 615) To work with SQL Server data NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
PAGE 586

■ To read, create, and edit schemas for SQL Server Spatial data stores. AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server authentication and Windows authentication for SQL Server Spatial data stores. The FDO (page 2062) User is mapped to the SQL Server login. Grant access to the databases whose data you want to use. SQL Server Spatial includes two spatial data types: geometry and geography. Geography is used for geodetic data, such as latitude/longitude data. Geometry is meant for all other spatial data.
PAGE 587

■ Unique value constraints ■ Composite unique value constraints ■ Spatial contexts ■ The following geometry types: ■ ■ Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon ■ Points: point, multi-point ■ Line strings: line string, multi-line string Multi-geometry Restrictions of SQL Server Spatial Schemas When you create a SQL Server schema, the following restrictions apply: ■ A feature class (page 2063) must define or inherit at least one identity property (page 2071). ■ M and Z dimensions are not supported.
PAGE 588

■ Bringing In Features from SQL Server (page 323) ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ Creating a Join (page 509) ■ Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711) ■ Creating a Schema (page 596) ■ Viewing a Schema (page 608) ■ Editing a Schema (page 610) ■ Migrating Data (page 615) To work with SQL Server Spatial data NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 589

Working with SQLite Data The OSGeo FDO provider for SQLite is an open-source, file-based provider developed by Autodesk. This read/write provider supports one update user at a time with any number of read users. You can do the following in AutoCAD Map 3D: ■ Create a SQLite data store ■ Connect to a SQLite data store ■ Import from SQLite ■ Export to SQLite ■ Save a Display Manager layer to SQLite Each SQLite data store can contain one schema and a single spatial context.
PAGE 590

■ Standard FDO expressions and filters ■ Parameter binding for all commands (at the API level) Restrictions of SQLite Schemas When you create or modify a SQLite schema, the following restrictions apply: ■ SQLite native data supports only the following base property types: int64, double, string and Geometry. ■ If there is data in the class, you cannot modify the primary key or constraints. ■ Persistent locking and long transactions are not supported.
PAGE 591

Working with MySQL Data AutoCAD Map 3D supports MySQL 5.0.27 In AutoCAD Map 3D, you can create, edit, and delete a MySQL data store (page 2059) or schema (page 2073). You can also use MySQL to access databases created by other applications. AutoCAD Map 3D supports native MySQL geometry, indexing, two-dimensional geometry (compatible with the OGC Simple Feature specification), and spatial query operations, but not transactions. Auto-generated properties are automatically incremented (auto-incremented).
PAGE 592

■ ■ The following geometry types: ■ Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon, curve polygon, multi-curve polygon, circular arc segment ■ Points: point, multi-point ■ Rings: ring, linear ring ■ Line strings: line string, line string segment, multi-line string, curve string, multi-curve string Multi-geometry Restrictions of MySQL Schemas When you create a MySQL schema, the following restrictions apply: ■ A feature class (page 2063) must define or inherit at least one identity property (page 2071).
PAGE 593

■ Creating a Join (page 509) ■ Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711) ■ Creating a Schema (page 596) ■ Viewing a Schema (page 608) ■ Editing a Schema (page 610) ■ Deleting Schemas (page 613) ■ Migrating Data (page 615) To work with MySQL data NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
PAGE 594

NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving data between DWG and SDF format, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628). Characteristics of the SDF File Format The SDF file format has the following characteristics: ■ SDF files can be read on different platforms.
PAGE 595

■ Multi-geometry See also: ■ Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551) ■ Setting Up Database Users (page 584) ■ Creating a Data Store (page 586) ■ Bringing In Features from SDF (page 337) ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ Creating a Join (page 509) ■ Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711) ■ Creating a Schema (page 596) ■ Viewing a Schema (page 608) ■ Editing a Schema (page 610) ■ Deleting Schemas (page 613) ■ Migrating Data (page 615) To work with SDF data NOTE This functional
PAGE 596

■ Edit an SDF schema (page 610) ■ Delete an SDF schema (page 613) ■ Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615) Working with SHP Data The standalone ESRI SHP file format supports GIS data using the following file types: ■ SHP (shape geometry) ■ SHX (shape index) ■ PRJ (projection information) ■ CPG (code page files) ■ IDX (spatial index) ■ DBF (shape attributes in dBASE format) You must have either a SHP or DBF file present to connect to data or work with schemas (page 2073).
PAGE 597

What SHP Schemas Support A SHP schema can support the following: ■ A single geometry type per file ■ Spatial contexts (determined by coordinate system information in the PRJ file) ■ Auto ID generation ■ Null value constraints ■ The following geometry types: ■ Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon NOTE When you connect to or import SHP polygon data, AutoCAD Map 3D checks the geometry to see if there are multiple closed outer loops.
PAGE 598

To work with SHP data NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
PAGE 599

■ Null value constraints ■ Unique value constraints ■ Range constraints ■ List constraints ■ Default values ■ All spatial filters ■ All FDO expression functions Restrictions of PostgreSQL/PostGIS Schemas When you create a PostgreSQL/PostGIS schema, the following restrictions apply: ■ Object properties and association properties are not supported ■ Inheritance is not supported ■ The Byte data type is not supported. Byte properties are converted to Int16.
PAGE 600

■ Edit a PostgreSQL/PostGIS schema (page 610) ■ Delete a PostgreSQL/PostGIS schema (page 613) ■ Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615) Working with ODBC Data To set up a Data Source Name (DSN) for your ODBC data store, you add a DSN in Windows. The configuration options you specify depend on the type of ODBC data store you use. The login ID and password you enter when setting up your DSN are used only for defining the DSN.
PAGE 601

See also: ■ Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551) ■ Accessing Data from ODBC (page 342) ■ Creating a Join (page 509) ■ Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711) NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
PAGE 602

■ TNS Service Name (the service to which you are connecting) ■ User ID (the database to access). The User ID predefines the tables available in AutoCAD Map 3D. It is the equivalent of the OWNER field in an Oracle metaschema. If you do not specify it here, the entire schema of the Oracle instance (based on your user privileges) is used. It is case sensitive and must match the value in the Oracle instance (all uppercase is the usual case).
PAGE 603

■ Join ODBC data to a different feature (page 509) ■ Examine or edit attribute data (page 711) Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data You can connect through ArcSDE to an underlying Oracle or SQL Server database. You can insert, select, update, and delete feature data in existing ArcSDE schemas (page 2073). You cannot create or modify an ArcSDE schema in AutoCAD Map 3D. AutoCAD Map 3D supports ArcSDE 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, and 9.3.1. The 9.3.1 version is available as either a 32-bit or 64-bit provider on Windows.
PAGE 604

NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving data between DWG and ArcSDE format, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628). What ESRI ArcSDE Schemas Support AutoCAD Map 3D uses facilities provided by ArcSDE for long transaction (page 2067) versioning (page 2078) and persistent locking (page 2070).
PAGE 605

To work with ESRI ArcSDE data ■ Add ArcSDE features to your map (page 316) ■ Style ArcSDE features (page 639) ■ Join ArcSDE data to a different feature (page 509) ■ Examine or edit attribute data (page 711) ■ View an ArcSDE schema (page 608) Working with WFS Data An OGC Web Feature Service (WFS) provides access to geographic features that are stored in an opaque data store (page 2059) in a client/server environment.
PAGE 606

See also: ■ Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551) ■ Bringing In Features from WFS (page 346) ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ Creating a Join (page 509) NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. There is no equivalent for drawing objects.
PAGE 607

Tell me more ■ Show me how to create a new SDF file and import a schema.
PAGE 608

2 Do one of the following: ■ Create a database datastore. (page 588) ■ Create an SDF or SHP data store. (page 589) NOTE You can also delete a data store. (page 593) Setting Up Database Users You can use the FDO User Manager utility that comes with AutoCAD Map 3D to set up database users for Oracle, SQL Server, PostgreSQL/PostGIS, and MySQL. NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 609

that the user has sufficient privileges to work with the data. If you use Oracle Workspace Manager, you must use separate users to create the data store and to access the data store, because locking is tracked by individual user and will not be effective if everyone connects as the same data store user.
PAGE 610

4 After you are connected, follow the instructions on the screen. If you are adding a user, enter the user name and password. New users you create with this utility automatically have the roles and privileges required by the AutoCAD Map 3D FDO functionality. However, FDO User Manager allows you to grant some additional privileges. Use commas to separate the role names, with no spaces. You can enter ? to see a list of roles.
PAGE 611

If you have DWG data that you want to move to a feature source (page 2063), see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628). When you create a data store, you specify the minimum and maximum X and Y spatial extents for new data store in the Create Data Store Dialog Box (page 1747). This is especially important if you later use Bulk Copy (page 615) to move data to that data store. You must make sure that the data you are moving are inside the extents of the destination data store.
PAGE 612

■ Importing and Exporting a Schema (page 606) ■ Migrating Data (page 615) ■ Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628) Instructions for creating a data store are different for database data stores and for file-based data stores. NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
PAGE 613

If you are creating an FDO-enabled data store for SQL Server Spatial, see Creating FDO-Enabled SQL Server Spatial Data Stores (page 590). 8 Click OK. If the data store is created successfully, you see a confirmation message prompting you to edit its schema. Use the Schema Editor to create (page 596) or import (page 606) the schema for the data store. You are connected to the new data store automatically.
PAGE 614

The new data store is created when you click Apply in the Schema Editor. You are connected to it automatically. Creating FDO-Enabled SQL Server Spatial Data Stores You can create a SQL Server data store in native SQL Server format (page 559) and you can create an extended SQL Server Spatial data store (page 561) with FDO metadata. NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 615

limitations in SQL Server. The data itself is not altered and can still be queried by an external application. You can later delete the metadata table. NOTE It is recommended that you use FDO-enabled schemas only if you need their additional capabilities. Otherwise, choose the default, non-FDO-enabled schema. Selecting a Coordinate System for a Spatial Context Once you create a data store, you create and apply a schema to it. The schema defines the table and columns into which you will put data.
PAGE 616

the WKT to the Mentor version. The WKT specified in the file takes precedence over the WKT in the SQL Server catalog. NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial formats, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
PAGE 617

The Concept tab for this topic describes issues concerning geometric and geogra[hic properties, as well as issues with coordinate systems for SQL Server Spatial data stores. You are connected to the new data store automatically. Deleting a Feature Source When you delete a feature source (page 2063), you remove all of its data and stylization information from layers in the current map that reference its data store. The data store (page 2059) itself is unaffected.
PAGE 618

NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
PAGE 619

■ Add a New Feature Class to an FDO Data Source ■ Create a GIS data store (SDF) to be populated from various sources ■ Edit an existing schema (SDF) ■ Limit what can be entered in a field ■ About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas (page 551) ■ Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551) ■ Creating a Data Store (page 586) GIS Skill Related topics NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 620

To do this... Use this method... View a schema In the Schema Editor, click any schema (page 2073), feature class (page 2063), or property (page 2071). See Viewing a Schema (page 608) Edit a schema In the Schema Editor, click any schema, feature class, or property. Change any settings. See Editing a Schema (page 610) Delete a schema In the Schema Editor, right-click any schema, feature class, or property. Click Delete.
PAGE 621

and column names when you define a new schema. You cannot map to an existing table. If you are mapping to an existing table or view in another data store (page 2059), make sure all column overrides correctly map to existing columns. If you map to a table or view with a different owner, have the owner of that table grant access to the FDO data store. You can create a local view that selects from the other table, and map to the local view, but this may not be necessary.
PAGE 622

To create a schema 1 Connect (page 303) to the feature source in which you want to create the schema (page 2073). 2 In Map Explorer, select the feature source (page 2063) in the connection tree (at the top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema. 3 In the Schema Editor (page 1739), expand the Schema tree and do one of the following: ■ To create a schema, select Schemas (the top-most node in the Schema tree) and click New Schema on the Schema Editor toolbar.
PAGE 623

Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor When you create a schema, you can limit the values that are valid for particular properties. The types of constraints supported by AutoCAD Map 3D are described in the following table. Type of Constraint Description Data Table Behavior Range Valid values must be within the range specified. You can include or exclude the minimum and maximum values. For example, you can specify 1-10 inclusive, and then 1 and 10 are both valid.
PAGE 624

NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628). When you edit the properties (page 711) in the Data Table, you can enter only the values allowed by the constraint.
PAGE 625

The Schema Editor checks the provider capability and allows only the constraints supported by that provider. A property that uses constraints can have any data type, except for Boolean (which can have not-null constraints only). You cannot constrain properties with BLOB or CLOB data types. Tell me more ■ Show me how to limit what can be entered in a field.
PAGE 626

2 Ensure that the data type for the property allows the constraint you want. For example, Boolean properties can have not-null constraints only. 3 Do one of the following: ■ To specify a range for the property, set Constraint Type to Range and specify the range values. In the Constraint Type field, click the down-arrow and click Range. Enter a minimum and maximum value for the range and, for each one, specify whether the range is inclusive or exclusive of that value.
PAGE 627

called a “paired constraint”) specifies multiple properties whose combined values are unique. For example, you can constrain the combined Street_Number, Street_Name, and City fields to uniquely identify a building address. ■ Click New (under Specify Constraints (And The Order)). ■ Select the boxes for the properties that must have unique values. The properties designated as unique appear in the list at the bottom of the dialog box.
PAGE 628

Mapping Existing Views to Feature Classes AutoCAD Map 3D automatically displays as classes existing database views that are defined in their native databases. If the view includes geometry, it is displayed as a feature class. The following restrictions apply: ■ You cannot create or modify the view definition within AutoCAD Map 3D. ■ In the Data Table, you can edit data in views only if you have permissions to do so and only if the data store supports editing of view-based data.
PAGE 629

If the view contains a join, columns that identify each row uniquely must also be exposed. If a class has no primary key, you can still expose it in AutoCAD Map 3D, but it will be read only. ■ For Oracle data stores, if there is geometry in the view, there must be an entry in user_sdo_geom_metadata for that geometry. This will provide the spatial context and coordinate system information.
PAGE 630

6 For Table Name, type the name of the view you created in step 1. Click OK. 7 Switch back to the Logical Feature Class tab and type the name, class type, and other required information. 8 Click New Property to add a property. 9 Switch to the Physical Configuration tab. 10 Type the name of the view column (from the view you created in step 1) to map to the new property. Click OK. 11 Switch back to the Logical Property tab and set the property attributes.
PAGE 631

The AutoCAD Map 3D XML schema format is a subset of the Geography Markup Language (GML). For information about GML, go to http://www.opengis.net/gml. GML was standardized by the Open Geospatial Consortium (OGC). For information about OGC, go to http://www.opengeospatial.org. You can also consult the FDO API Reference and The Essential FDO. Tell me more ■ Show me how to create a new SDF file and import a schema.
PAGE 632

See also: ■ Schema Editor (page 1739) NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628). To import an XML or XMI schema 1 Connect to the feature source into which you want to import the schema.
PAGE 633

you open an updateable schema, you can edit (page 610) it. If you change an updateable schema mistakenly, click Cancel to undo (page 614) the changes. Providers that support updateable schemas include Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, SDF, and Oracle. When you open a non-updateable schema, you cannot edit it. NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 634

4 When you finish inspecting the schema, click Cancel to close the Schema Editor. Editing a Schema You can edit a schema (page 2073), feature class (page 2063), or property (page 2071) if the FDO provider (page 2063) supports updateable schemas (for example, Microsoft SQL Server, SQL Server Spatial, MySQL, Oracle, and SDF all support updateable schemas). For more information about data types and supported functionality, see Schema Editor (page 1739).
PAGE 635

If you import an FDO-enabled SQL Server Spatial schema collection into a non-FDO schema connection, Schema Editor will display error messages that tell you which names need to be adjusted. NOTE If you try to set a physical override (for example, name a property column to something other than the property name), you'll see an error message about accessing protected memory. Tell me more ■ Show me how to delete properties from a schema. ■ Show me how to append a feature class to an SDF file.
PAGE 636

See also: ■ Schema Editor (page 1739) NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
PAGE 637

Each provider maps a correspondence between a schema element and a physical object in a feature source. The physical structure of feature sources varies by provider, as do the types of schema mappings and default settings. Oracle, for example, maps each feature class onto a table in the Oracle database where the feature source resides, giving the class and table the same name. You can override these defaults by changing the settings on the Physical Configurations tab.
PAGE 638

■ Importing and Exporting a Schema (page 606) ■ Viewing a Schema (page 608) ■ Editing a Schema (page 610) NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
PAGE 639

NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
PAGE 640

Overview of Migrating Data You can use Bulk Copy to copy data from one feature source (page 2063) to another, either in the same format or in a different one. You can move DWG objects and their attributes to a variety of geospatial formats and, in some cases, move the data back into AutoCAD drawings. Tell me more ■ Show me how to copy data from one data store to another.
PAGE 641

To move data... Use this method... From DWG format to SDF In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export. See Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628). From DWG format to SDF 2 (an earlier version of SDF) From a Display Manager layer to SDF Click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ As SDF 2. See Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format (page 1417). In the Display Manager, right-click a layer ➤ Export Layer Data To SDF.
PAGE 642

■ Upgrade from file-based (SDF or SHP) data storage to multi-user database storage (Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or Oracle), which provides advanced features, such as versioning (page 2078) and long transaction (page 2067). ■ Move joined data and calculated fields into a new data store. ■ Transform coordinate systems easily. For example, you can do any of the following: ■ ■ Assign a coordinate system to a data store that does not have one.
PAGE 643

use schema mappings to rename schema elements that you copy, to be sure they meet the naming rules of the destination data store. You can also pass in a set of schema capabilities to the target data store, so the cloned schemas conform to the capabilities of that data store. When you copy geodetic polygons with clockwise rings to SQL Server Spatial, check Unmatched Data Or Geometric Type Errors as an error type to ignore.
PAGE 644

specify the minimum and maximum X and Y spatial extents for the new data store.) MySQL and Oracle support expanding the extents automatically if incoming data are beyond the scope of the extents. ■ If you do not have adequate rights to the target data store, you must either create a new, empty data store as the target or ask your administrator to grant you the rights required to insert data in the target tables. Tell me more ■ Show me how to copy data from one data store to another.
PAGE 645

■ Fixing Geometry Issues After a Bulk Copy (page 625) ■ Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Information (page 626) ■ Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628) ■ Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer (page 1469) NOTE For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628). To copy data from one feature source to another 1 Connect (page 308) to the source and destination feature source (page 2063) using Data Connect.
PAGE 646

If you select a survey data store, you can select only a survey point group as the source. To copy multiple point groups, copy them one by one. You can also drag the originating feature source onto the target source in the Data Connect dialog box to initiate a Bulk Copy. The item you drag becomes the From entry and the item you drop it on becomes the To entry. 6 If the selected feature source supports versioning, select a version in its Version list.
PAGE 647

the Following Errors During the Copy Process to adjust the geometry and orientation properly. 11 To save the current settings in an XML mapping file, click Save under Schema Mapping. Click Load to open a saved mapping file. NOTE Before loading a mapping file, connect to the source and destination feature sources. 12 To begin the Bulk Copy operation, click Copy Now. The data for the specified schema elements is copied from the source feature source to the destination feature source.
PAGE 648

Source data type Target data type 1 Target data type 2 Int32 Int64 Int64 Int32 Decimal Double Single Single Double Decimal Double Decimal Single Target data type 3 Target data type 4 The following FDO providers (page 2063) support the following data types: Oracle ArcSDE MySQL ODBC SDF SHP WFS SQL Server and SQL Server Spatial Boolean Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Byte Y Y Y Y Y Y Date/Time Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Int16 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Int32 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Int64 Y Y Y Y
PAGE 649

Bulk Copy uses the following rules when copying an auto-generated identifier from the source feature source (page 2063): ■ If the identifier exists in the destination schema (page 2073) and is not auto-generated, the identifier is copied from the source feature source. ■ If the identifier exists in the destination schema and is auto-generated, the identifier is generated by the destination provider.
PAGE 650

NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628). NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about moving data between DWG and geospatial data stores, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
PAGE 651

“Source ConnectionProperty: 'File', Value: 'C:\San Francisco\County\SDF\bayarea_county.sdf' Property: 'ReadOnly', Value: 'false'Target ConnectionProperty: 'File', Value: 'C:\old_version.sdf' Property: 'ReadOnly', Value: 'false'Creating schema 'My_Schema' Property My_Schema:bayarea_county.COUNTY: String length is 0, setting to 255 Property My_Schema:bayarea_county.FIPSSTCO: String length is 0, setting to 255 Inserting class 'My_Schema:bayarea_county' 9 objects inserted Elapsed Time: 0.
PAGE 652

Migrating DWG Data to GIS You can move DWG objects and their attributes to a variety of geospatial formats and, in some cases, move the data back into AutoCAD drawings. NOTE When you export AutoCAD drawing data from AutoCAD Map 3D to a geospatial data store, attributes remain with the geometry data but any visual stylization you applied is lost, due to the different ways that the two environments deal with stylization.
PAGE 653

■ Create ArcSDE Features from Unclassified Drawings ■ Convert styled DWG objects to features ■ About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas (page 551) ■ Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store (page 1461) ■ Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data Store and Back Again (page 1465) Workflow GIS Skill Related topics To move DWG data to a geospatial format 1 Decide whether you will move the data to an existing data store, or create a new data store for it.
PAGE 654

630
PAGE 655

5 Visualization and Styling Overview of Visualization and Styling Style both drawing objects and GIS features to enhance the content of a map and make it easy to read. The methods for styling features and drawing objects are different. For Drawing Objects For Features Description Show or hide the Display Manager (page 635) Show or hide the Display Manager (page 635) Use the Display Manager to style features and drawing objects in your maps, and to adjust the draw order.
PAGE 656

For Drawing Objects For Features Description Create a drawing layer (page ?). Create a feature layer (page 308). A layer is a set of objects. When you add objects to your map, you add them to a Display Manager layer. Each layer can have its own style. Query the current drawing (page 1291) or attached drawings (page 1235) to bring in objects that match certain criteria. Use the Add To Map With Query option to filter the data from the feature source (page 308).
PAGE 657

For Drawing Objects For Features Description the Area Style area of the Style Editor to create a style for a polygon feature layer. Change the display order of layers (page 302). Change the display order of layers (page 302). Layers are drawn from the bottom up. Objects in the layer at the top of the Display Manager are drawn last and appear on top of other objects. If an object is a member of more than one layer, it is drawn based on the highest layer to which it belongs.
PAGE 658

Overview of the Display Manager The Display Manager (page 2060) displays styles for feature layers and drawing object layers. The styles you create for the map do not affect the actual objects in your map or in their original sources. Drawing object layers are listed in italic text. Different operations are available for feature and drawing layers. Right-click a layer to see the available commands.
PAGE 659

Tell me more ■ Show me how to manage layers with draw order and folders. ■ Show me how to include AutoCAD layers in the Display Manager.
PAGE 660

To update the map or a single layer 1 Right-click the Display Manager or an individual layer. 2 Click Update. To refresh the Display Manager ■ On the command line, enter mapwsrefresh. Controlling Display Order Layers in the map are displayed in the order in which they appear in the Display Manager (page 2060) draw order view: layers higher in the list are drawn in front of layers lower down. You can change the display order by moving layers up or down in the list.
PAGE 661

■ To change the order of layers (page 637) ■ To change the draw order (page 302) ■ Exercise 2: Change the order of items in the legend ■ Hide and show features as you zoom in and out ■ Organizing Layers in Your Map (page 300) Procedure Tutorial GIS Skill Related topics ■ To change the order of layers (page 637) ■ To hide or show layers (page 638) ■ To hide or show styles (page 638) To change the order of layers 1 In Display Manager (page 2060), make sure Draw Order is selected.
PAGE 662

To hide or show layers ■ In Display Manager (page 2060), select or clear the check box next to the layer name. To hide or show styles ■ In Display Manager (page 2060), select or clear the check box next to the style name. Setting Map Scale The scale control indicates and sets your current stylization scale. The list includes all the scale ranges (for feature data) and thresholds (for drawing data) defined in the current map.
PAGE 663

NOTE If your map file contains data on its base layer, that data appears on all display maps you create in that file. You can clear the check box for the base layer to hide its data. All display maps in a map file use the same coordinate system. See also: ■ Overview of the Display Manager (page 634) To create multiple display maps 1 Connect (page 291) to the data stores to include in the various maps. You can attach drawings and connect to geospatial feature sources.
PAGE 664

Overview of Styling Features Styles control how features appear on a map. Default styles are applied to features. When you add point and polygon features to the map, they appear with default symbol, line, and fill styles. Polylines are given a default line style. Each layer is given a distinctive color. For example, polygons are filled with a color that is different from other polygon layers that are already in the map. Change the default styles as needed.
PAGE 665

■ To label features (page 1093) ■ Lesson 2: Style Map Features ■ Style and Label a Linear Feature ■ Hide and show features as you zoom in and out. ■ Replace points in the map with symbols. ■ Set transparency for parcels or other features. ■ Label features and optimize placement.
PAGE 666

6 Click a layer in Display Manager and click Style to display the Style Editor. If the feature layer you are styling contains multiple geometry types, each one has its own Style Editor section. 7 Specify a point (page 645), line (page 648), or polygon (page 650) style or define a theme. 8 Optionally: ■ Change the display order (page 637) of layers. Layers at the top of the list appear on top of other layers. ■ Display or hide a geometry in Display Manager.
PAGE 667

To do this... Use this method... Description Create a theme. Use the Style Editor (page 1168). A theme varies the style based on data associated with the object. Change the style as you zoom in or out. Use scale ranges. (page 643) You can define multiple styles and assign each one to a different scale range. Label individual features. Include labels as part of a style and assign a property for the labels.
PAGE 668

The style is applied when the zoom level is greater than or equal to the From value and less than the To value. When setting up adjacent scale ranges, use the same To value as the next range's From value. For example, if one range is 0 - 20,000 set the next range to 20,000 - 40,000. NOTE When setting up multiple scale ranges for a map, make sure that they do not overlap. For example, the ranges 500,000 - 5,000,000 and 2,000,000 10,000,000 overlap.
PAGE 669

3 In the Style Editor, in the Scale Ranges area, under From, enter the lower end of the scale range. Under To, enter the upper end of the scale range. For example, to make a style visible when the map is zoomed anywhere between 1:250,000 and 1:5,000,000, enter 250000 for From and enter 5000000 for To. 4 To add a new scale range, click Add A Scale Range. 5 Specify From and To values. 6 When working with scale ranges: ■ To copy a scale range, select the range and click Duplicate.
PAGE 670

Procedure ■ Show me how to label features. ■ Show me how to label features with automatic resizing. ■ To apply styles to points (page 646) ■ To label features (page 1093) ■ To place fixed labels at points (page 1099) ■ To allow labels to obscure points on the selected layer (page 1097) ■ Exercise 4: Try out the sample data ■ Replace points in the map with symbols. ■ Label features and optimize placement.
PAGE 671

5 In the Style Point dialog box (page 1637), select the Style A Point Symbol check box. 6 For Symbol, click . 7 In the Select A Symbol dialog box, specify a symbol library and a symbol. Click OK. NOTE When creating a block for use as a symbol the Edge color applies to any entities that are defined as ByBlock. The Fill color applies to any entities that are defined as ByLayer. 8 For Size Context, specify the type of units: ■ Select Device Space to specify symbol widths and heights in screen units.
PAGE 672

■ Click Expression. Specify the rotation using a number expression. For more information, see the Creating Numeric Expressions. 15 Click OK. Styling Line Features Specify the thickness, color, and pattern of polyline features. Style a single line or build a composite line with several components and then style each component. For example, to illustrate a highway, create a thick black line and add a thinner, dashed, yellow line. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only.
PAGE 673

■ Allowing Labels to Obscure Points (page 1096) NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. If you are styling a drawing layer, see Creating a Style (page 658). To apply styles to lines 1 In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click a feature layer that contains lines. 2 Click Edit Style. 3 In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style. For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643).
PAGE 674

Styling Area Features Specify the fill style and color, background color, edge style and color, and line thickness used to draw area (polygon) features. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. If you are styling a drawing layer, see Creating a Style (page 658). See also: ■ Defining Scale Ranges (page 643) ■ Adding Labels to Features (page 1091) ■ Allowing Labels to Obscure Points (page 1096) NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only.
PAGE 675

NOTE In polygons with transparent backgrounds, the colors you see on the map may differ from the colors displayed in the preview frame because the preview frame always uses a white background, which may differ from the color beneath the transparent objects in your map. 7 add borders to polygons, select the Apply A Border To The Area check box and then do the following: ■ For Line Pattern, specify the pattern for the area border.
PAGE 676

See also: ■ Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer (page 1469) NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. To save drawing layer styles, see Saving a Display Style in the Library (page 664). To load a LAYER file ■ Drag and drop the LAYER file from Windows Explorer to the Display Manager (page 2060). Styling Drawing Layers When you define a style for a drawing layer, you specify how AutoCAD Map 3D displays drawing objects on that layer.
PAGE 677

TIP For better performance, create a new display map rather than modifying the default map. There are circumstances when the default map is automatically displayed, and if this map has a lot of objects, it could take a while to display. ■ A single map can have many drawing layers. ■ You can specify a different style for each drawing layer in your map, and combine multiple styles for a single layer. ■ You can create a theme for a drawing layer.
PAGE 678

■ Symbol or image used to represent objects ■ Adding hatch ■ Adding text ■ Adding annotation See also: ■ Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 350) ■ Creating Multiple Display Maps (page 638) ■ Setting Map Scale (page 638) ■ Theming Drawing Data (page 1176) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
PAGE 679

To Do This Click Description In Map Task Pane. the Task Pane, click Display Manager. Create a drawing layer In the Display Manager, A drawing layer is a set of objects. Each layer can have its own style. See Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 350). click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data. Click the type of layer to create. Query objects in the current drawing In the Display Manager, A query lets you define conditions to select specific objects.
PAGE 680

To Do This Click Description Turn a style on or off Select or clear the check box next to the style name in the Display Manager. When a style is turned off, drawing objects are displayed without styles. Create a new scale threshold In the Display Manager, Use scale thresholds to change drawing layer styles as you zoom in or out, for example, turn text off as you zoom out. Close the lock icon on the Status Bar to link scale and style. click Tools ➤ Show Thresholds.
PAGE 681

Quick Reference Update Display Manager Refreshes the current display Task Pane Right-click the Display Manager. Click Update Styling a Drawing Layer When you define a style for a layer, you specify how objects on that layer appear in the current display map. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
PAGE 682

Symbol styles can be combined only with other symbol styles. Themes cannot be combined with any other styles. 4 You can save your style (page 665) in the Display Library. 5 If your map does not look exactly as desired, modify the style (page 663). Quick Reference New Display Manager Style Creates a new Display Manager style Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a layer ➤ Add Style ➤ (select a style type) Creating a Style You can define a style for a drawing layer in a map.
PAGE 683

You can create more than one style for a drawing layer. The styles overlay each other. Style Types Entity Specifies color, linetype, linetype scale, line weight, and plotstyle for drawing objects using this style. Annotation Adds annotation, such as text, blocks, images, and information based on object properties, to drawing objects using this style. Hatch Adds hatch to drawing objects using this style. Symbol Uses symbols such as blocks or annotation to represent drawing objects using this style.
PAGE 684

All the properties of the style are displayed on the Display tab of the Properties palette, where you can view or modify them. See also: ■ Saving a Display Style in the Library (page 664) ■ Referencing a Library Style (page 666) ■ Creating Themes for Drawing Layers (page 1178) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
PAGE 685

2 Select the style. 3 If the Properties palette is not already visible, right-click the layer and select Properties. 4 On the Display tab of the Properties palette, specify style settings. NOTE When entering an expression, you may need to select an item from the list first. Click to display the Edit Expression dialog box (page 1574). NOTE Some drawing objects might not be styled. The Display Manager does not style drawing objects that have been queried into the current drawing using a standard Query.
PAGE 686

See also: ■ Creating a Style (page 658) NOTE If the layer has a symbol style applied, you can only combine it with other symbol styles. You cannot combine a theme with any other styles. NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640). To add a display style to a layer 1 Select the layer. 2 Do one of the following: ■ Create a new style. (page 660) ■ Copy (page 665) an existing style.
PAGE 687

Modify style settings on the Properties palette. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. If you are styling a geospatial feature layer, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640). Style Referencing If a style references another style, any changes to the style in one location are automatically reflected in any other locations where the style is used. If you turn off referencing for a style, any additional changes you make to that style do not affect the other locations.
PAGE 688

To hide the drawing objects in a layer ■ Clear the check box next to the layer name in Display Manager. Quick Reference PROPERTIES Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties Saving a Display Style in the Library If you plan to use a style more than once, you can save it in the Display Library.
PAGE 689

■ Referencing a Library Style (page 666) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. To save and reuse styles for geospatial features, see Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers (page 651). To save a style to the Display Library 1 In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the style to save ➤ Copy. 2 If the Display Library is not already displayed, in the Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Library. 3 On the Display Styles tab of the Display Library, right-click, and choose Paste.
PAGE 690

Task Pane In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Library or Hide Library Copy Display Manager Style Copies a Display Manager style Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the style ➤ Copy Referencing a Library Style When you use a style from the library, the style in the layer references the style in the Display Library. Example: The Display Library has a style called "Pipes" that colors drawing objects blue. Reference this style from any pipe layer.
PAGE 691

2 Select the style in the Display Library. 3 Drag it onto the drawing layer to style in the Display Manager. To turn off style referencing 1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click the style for which to turn off referencing. 2 If the Properties palette is not already displayed, right-click the style. Click Properties. 3 On the Display tab of the Properties palette, under Style, click the box next to Reference and select No. NOTE Once you turn off referencing for a style, you cannot turn it back on.
PAGE 692

■ Viewing Styles at All Scale Thresholds (page 669) ■ Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 350) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. To use scale ranges with geospatial features, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643). To create or modify a scale threshold 1 Zoom the drawing to the scale factor for which you want to create or modify the threshold. 2 To display the Threshold list, in the Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Thresholds.
PAGE 693

Quick Reference New Display Manager Scale Threshold Creates a new Display Manager scale threshold Task Pane In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Thresholds. Click the thin down arrow next to the Threshold list and choose Duplicate.
PAGE 694

For the layer Roads, the drawing layer styles display more information as you zoom in. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To use scale ranges with geospatial features, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643). See also: ■ Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold (page 667) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. To use scale ranges with geospatial features, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643).
PAGE 695

TIP You can add a style to a layer by dragging and dropping it from the Display Library or another scale threshold. Quick Reference Compare Display Manager Scale Thresholds For the selected layer, lists the Display Manager styles for each scale threshold Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the layer and choose Compare Thresholds Styling Raster Images You can style and view rasters brought into your map with Data Connect.
PAGE 696

To do this... Use this method... Adjust brightness and contrast for images you added with Data Connect. Select the raster and, in the Style Editor under Raster Style, do one of the following: ■ To adjust brightness, enter a value between -50 and 50 in the Brightness box. ■ To adjust contrast, enter a value between -50 and 50 in the Contrast box. See Changing Brightness, Color, or Transparency for Raster Images (page 672) Display an image you added with Data Connect in grayscale or color.
PAGE 697

See also: ■ Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) ■ Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453) ■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 1186) ■ Modifying Raster Images (page 489) NOTE If you added an image using the Insert An image command, you cannot use this procedure. See Modifying Raster Images (page 489) instead. ■ To adjust brightness and contrast in a raster image (page 673) ■ To set transparency for a single color.
PAGE 698

To display your image in color or grayscale 1 In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the layer ➤ Edit Style. 2 In the Style Editor, under Raster Style, click the Style drop-down box. 3 Select Color or Grayscale. 4 If you select grayscale, adjust the range for grayscale mapping with the Cell Minimum and Cell Maximum values. 5 Click Apply. Viewing Raster Images When you zoom in on a raster image AutoCAD Map 3D automatically requeries the image from the source to improve the display.
PAGE 699

2 Right-click the image layer. Click Zoom To Extents. Quick Reference ZOOM Increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport Menu View menu ➤ Realtime Icon Zoom Command Line ZOOM Styling Point Clouds You can style point cloud (page 2071)s based on Classification, Elevation, Intensity, and RGB color values. AutoCAD Map 3D has default settings for each style category except RGB. You can modify or change the style settings in the Point Cloud Style dialog box (page 1902).
PAGE 700

The Point Cloud Style dialog box LAS (page 2066) is an industry standard file format defined by the American Society of Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing that includes a system of point classification. A processed LAS file may have points classified as bare earth, high or low vegetation, building, and so on. LAS files may also contain LiDAR intensity values (laser pulse return intensity) and Red/Green/Blue color values (if there is ancillary color data from a camera accompanying the LiDAR scan).
PAGE 701

NOTE If you are working with a point cloud index created using AutoCAD commands (.PCG file), you can only style by elevation and RGB values.
PAGE 702

AutoCAD Map 3D applies the default Elevation styling to your point cloud. 2 To change the default Elevation style, right-click the point cloud layer, then select Set Style. 3 In the Point Cloud Style dialog box (page 1902), on the Elevation tab, select the number of rules to include in the style range. By default, AutoCAD Map 3D uses five rules. The style range rules are distributed evenly across the range of elevation values in your point cloud.
PAGE 703

To style point data by RGB values ■ In the Display Manager, right-click the point cloud layer you want to style, then select Style By ➤ RGB.
PAGE 704

680
PAGE 705

Creating and Editing Data 6 Overview of Creating and Editing Data AutoCAD Map 3D works on two types of objects: features and drawing objects. ■ Features are GIS objects stored in external files and databases. Display and edit them in your map and then save the changes back to the original source. Use the options described in Working with Features (page 683). ■ Drawing objects are AutoCAD objects stored within a map or retrieved from attached drawings using queries.
PAGE 706

For features... For drawing objects... Use a query to filter one or more layers. See Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216). Query in drawing objects that match specified criteria and store them on a separate drawing layer (page 368). Other objects become part of the Map Base layer. Edit features by checking them out and using AutoCAD and AutoCAD Map 3D commands. See Checking Out Features (page 695), Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704), and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713).
PAGE 707

For features... For drawing objects... Work with attribute data in the Data Table. See Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711). Work with object data in an object data table. See Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061). Work with joined external data in the Data Table. See Editing Joined Data (page 515). Work with linked external data in Data View. See Overview of Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Objects (page 1048). Use special commands available only for features.
PAGE 708

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To create new features (page 686) To check in features (page 694) To check out features automatically (page 696) To check out features (page 696) To cancel check out (page 698) To update edits automatically (page 700) To edit features (page 701) To work offline (page 722) To return online (page 722) To clear the cache (page 723) To rebuild the cache (page 723) To create a new version (page 725) To activate a version (page 725) To commit changes back to the data store (page 7
PAGE 709

■ MySQL and SQL Server do not support feature level locking or persistent locking. Locks are released when the connection is closed. ■ SDF does not support locking. Be very careful when working in a multiuser environment. ■ SHP supports file locking only as long as you are connected to the data. When you close your map, break the connection, or go offline, the file is unlocked. Tell me more ■ Show me how to draft a new feature for an existing feature class.
PAGE 710

Related topics ■ Bringing in GIS Features (page 303) ■ Checking Out Features (page 695) NOTE These procedures are for geospatial features only. For information about working with drawing objects, see To work with drawing objects (page 727). To edit features 1 Attach the data source. (page 308) 2 If you do not have Auto Checkout turned on, check out the feature. (page 696) 3 Do one or both of the following: ■ Use feature-editing commands to make your changes.
PAGE 711

NOTE If the feature class for a layer does not provide automatically generated IDs for new features, AutoCAD Map 3D will not create new features on the layer. To create new features in this case, turn off Update Edits Automatically (page 698) . AutoCAD Map 3D will hold the features in a queue instead of attempting to save them to the source immediately. Feature IDs are generated in the queue. Tell me more ■ Show me how to draft a new feature for an existing feature class.
PAGE 712

■ Create a new feature from a drawing object’s geometry (page 691). Creating New Point and MultiPoint Features If you have point feature layers in your drawing, you can create new point and multipoint features. Multipoint features are multiple points that behave like a single point feature. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about creating drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
PAGE 713

For MultiPoint features, specify the location of each point. 3 For MultiPoint operations, press Enter to complete the operation. The new feature is added to the Data Table. To add information to the feature, see Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711). 4 Check in the new features. For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693). Creating New Polygon and MultiPolygon Features If you have polygon feature layers in your drawing, you can create new Polygon and MultiPolygon features.
PAGE 714

■ In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the feature layer for the new feature ➤ Create ➤ New MultiPolygon feature_name. Here, feature_name is the name of the Polygon or MultiPolygon feature layer. 2 When prompted, specify the location for the new Polygon or MultiPolygon feature. 3 Use the command line or right-click to complete the new feature. For more information, see MAPPOLYGONCREATE (page 1663) and MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE (page 1660). 4 Press Enter to complete the operation.
PAGE 715

To create a new LineString or MultiLineString feature 1 Do one of the following: ■ In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the feature layer for the new feature ➤ Create ➤ New LineString feature_name. ■ In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the feature layer for the new feature ➤ Create ➤ New MultiLineString feature_name. Here, feature_name is the name of the LineString or MultiLineString feature layer. 2 When prompted, specify the location for the new LineString or MultiLineString feature.
PAGE 716

■ Add DWG Data to an Existing Feature Source ■ Create new features from existing AutoCAD objects. ■ Overview of Working with Features (page 684) ■ Checking In Features (page 693) ■ Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713) Workflow GIS Skill Related topics NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about creating drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
PAGE 717

Quick Reference New Feature from Geometry Creates a new feature from drawing object geometry Menu Icon Click Create ➤ New Feature from Geometry. New Feature From Geometry Command Line MAPCREATEFEATUREFROMGEOMETRY Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer. Click New Feature from Geometry Checking In Features Checking in features saves your changes and additions to the feature source and releases any locks. Check in features before giving a map to someone else to edit.
PAGE 718

■ Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature Source ■ Draft new features for an existing feature class. ■ Check out features to edit in the field and update the database later. ■ Overview of Working with Features (page 684) ■ Updating Edits Automatically (page 698) Workflow GIS Skill Related topics NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about locking and unlocking drawing files, see Methods for Object Locking (page 731).
PAGE 719

Select Checked-Out Features Selects features that have been checked out to edit Menu Click Edit ➤ Select Checked-Out Features. Icon Select Checked-Out Features Command Line MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer Checking Out Features Checking out features makes them available to edit. By default, features are checked out automatically when you edit them. Check in features before giving a map to someone else to edit.
PAGE 720

■ Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature Source ■ Check out features to edit in the field and update the database later. ■ Overview of Working with Features (page 684) ■ Updating Edits Automatically (page 698) ■ Working Offline (page 721) Workflow GIS Skill Related topics NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about locking and unlocking drawing files, see Methods for Object Locking (page 731).
PAGE 721

Command Line MAPAUTOCHECKOUT Check Out Feature Checks out selected features and makes them available for editing Menu Click Edit ➤ Check-Out. Icon Check-Out Features Command Line MAPCHECKOUT MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS Specifies options for editing features Icon Feature Edit Options Command Line MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS Dialog Box Feature Editing Options dialog box Canceling Checkout You can cancel the checkout of all, selected, or erased features. You can also cancel the checkout of features by layer.
PAGE 722

NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about locking and unlocking drawing files, see Methods for Object Locking (page 731). To cancel check out 1 Click Feature Edit tab ➤ Edit Set panel ➤ Cancel Feature Check-out. 2 When prompted, click one of the following options: Option Description All Cancels check out of all features Erased Cancels check out of all erased features Layer Prompts for a layer and cancels check out of all features on the selected layer.
PAGE 723

NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about saving changes back to attached drawing files, see Setting Save Back Options (page 763). When Update Edits Automatically is off (the default), your changes remain local until you check them in. If you turn on Update Edits Automatically, AutoCAD Map 3D immediately attempts to save any edits you have made to checked-out features back to the feature source. If updating fails for any reason, the setting remains off.
PAGE 724

offline, or if the feature source provider does not support persistent locking. In such cases, you cannot overwrite the other user’s changes to the features. Instead, turn Update Edits Automatically off and choose Cancel Checkout for the features that have conflicts. See also: ■ Customizing Your Work Environment (page 84) ■ Working Offline (page 721) ■ Canceling Checkout (page 697) NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only.
PAGE 725

Check In Feature Checks in features, saves your changes and additions to the feature source, and releases locks Menu Click Edit ➤ Check-In.
PAGE 726

■ Change entries in the Data Table ■ Change entries in the Properties palette Edit the same feature properties in the Data Table or Properties palette. Edits in the Properties palette apply to all selected features in the selected layer. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about editing native drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help. To edit this... Use this method...
PAGE 727

Tell me more ■ Show me how to edit features stored in a database or data store. ■ Show me how to check out features for editing in the field. ■ To edit features (page 701) ■ Lesson 5: Find and Edit Features ■ Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature Source ■ Work Offline from an Enterprise Database ■ Edit feature geometry directly in a SHP file using CAD tools. ■ Check out features to edit in the field and update the database later.
PAGE 728

Quick Reference MAPDATATABLE Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data Menu Click Edit ➤ Data Table. Icon Table Command Line MAPDATATABLE Task Pane In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table button Dialog Box Data Table Dialog Box PROPERTIES Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit geometry, direction, and resistance for selected topology objects Menu Click Modify ➤ Properties. Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select objects.
PAGE 729

NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about editing native drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help. See also: ■ Updating Edits Automatically (page 698) ■ Editing Features (page 701) ■ Checking Out Features (page 695) ■ Checking In Features (page 693) NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about editing native drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
PAGE 730

are determined by the rules specified in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669). You can choose to ignore the rules specified in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669) by turning on Ignore Split and Merge Rules. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about splitting drawing objects, see Splitting Polygon Objects (page 968). Split Prompt Options When you split a feature, you are prompted during the operation.
PAGE 731

The line segment inside the polygon becomes a line feature (shown in blue on the right). The line segments outside the polygon become a multiline feature (shown in red). Tell me more ■ Show me how to split a parcel feature.
PAGE 732

NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. For information about splitting drawing objects, see To split a polygon object (page 969). To split a feature 1 Optionally, specify split rules. NOTE To set these rules (page 1669), in the Data Table click Options ➤ Set Split and Merge Rules. 2 Optionally, specify split prompts. NOTE To set these options (page 1929), in the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Feature Edit tab ➤ Edit Set Panel ➤ angle arrow. 3 Select the feature.
PAGE 733

NOTE To change the default setting for Ignore Split And Merge Rules, at the Command prompt, type MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES (page 1653) and specify Yes or No as the default. To set split prompt options 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Feature Edit tab ➤ Edit Set Panel ➤ angle arrow, or enter mapfeatureeditoptions at the Command prompt. 2 In the Feature Editing Options dialog box (page 1929), select the Split Prompt Options you want. 3 Click OK.
PAGE 734

rules specified in this dialog box, turn on Ignore Split and Merge rules (see To turn Ignore Split And Merge Rules on or off (page 708)). You can merge two or more features of the same class into one feature. You can also merge features with drawing objects. You can specify a new or existing feature ID for the resulting feature. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about working with drawing objects, see the AutoCAD Help.
PAGE 735

4 Click Feature Edit tab ➤ Split/Merge panel ➤ Merge Feature . 5 Follow the MAPFEATUREMERGE (page 1651) prompts to specify whether the resulting feature will use a new or existing feature ID. 6 Check in the merged feature. For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693). Quick Reference MAPFEATUREMERGE Merges features and assigns feature property values for the resulting feature Menu Click Feature Edit tab ➤ Split/Merge panel ➤ Merge Feature.
PAGE 736

NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about editing attributes associated with drawing objects, see Working with Attribute Data and Object Data (page 1047).
PAGE 737

Some data fields are “constrained” to allow only certain values. When you enter values for constrained fields, you are prompted to enter only valid values. For example, the prompt might tell you to enter only values between one and ten. 4 Check in the revised features. For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693). 5 Close the Data Table window when you are finished. Quick Reference MAPDATATABLE Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data Menu Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
PAGE 738

Use PEDIT on a single or multipart feature. You can edit polygonal features and linear features (with or without M or Z values), but not point features. You can use the Join option to connect linear features. For single linear features, the feature ID for the first feature you selected is used for the resulting feature. For multipart linear features, you can join only features whose end points touch; the first selected feature is updated using the current Merge rules.
PAGE 739

Related topics ■ Extracting Feature Geometry (page 715) ■ Updating Feature Geometry (page 716) ■ Checking Out Features (page 695) ■ Checking In Features (page 693) ■ Updating Edits Automatically (page 698) NOTE You can use these commands, as well as all other AutoCAD commands, on drawing objects in AutoCAD Map 3D. To edit features with AutoCAD commands 1 If you do not have Auto Checkout turned on, check out the feature. For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
PAGE 740

See also: ■ Editing Features (page 701) ■ Checking Out Features (page 695) ■ Checking In Features (page 693) ■ Updating Feature Geometry (page 716) NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. There is no equivalent for drawing objects. To extract feature geometry 1 Check out the feature. For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 695). 2 Right-click the feature. Click Extract Geometry From Feature.
PAGE 741

You can use this command to combine spatially connected entities. For example, you can use a line and an arc to update the geometry of a single feature (resulting in one linestring or polyline). If the data store of a feature does not support curves, this command transforms the curves into line segments. For polygons, this command allows you to work on the boundary geometry instead of the polygon itself. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. There is no equivalent for drawing objects.
PAGE 742

Quick Reference Update Feature from Geometry Merges new or existing drawing object geometry with a feature Menu Click Modify ➤ Advanced Feature Editing ➤ Update Feature from Geometry. Icon Update Feature Geometry Command Line MAPUPDATEFEATUREGEOMETRY Viewing and Editing Feature Properties View and edit the properties for one or more selected features in the Properties palette. The properties are the same as those you can edit in the Data Table.
PAGE 743

selected layers. For example, if you selected features that are stored on four different layers, select one of those layers to see its properties only. However, any features that were selected on the other layers remain selected. To set the value for a property to “NULL,” click in the value field and select from the drop-down list in that field. If does not appear in the list, the property cannot have a null value. NOTE Do not enter the text string “Null.
PAGE 744

Drawing objects are listed by their geometry type. For example, to see only the properties for the line objects you selected, select Lines from the list. ■ To see the properties for a single selected layer, or to switch between selected layers, click the entry for Layer under Filter By Layer. Select a layer. For example, if you selected features that are stored on four different layers, select one of those layers to see its properties only.
PAGE 745

Menu Click Modify ➤ Properties. Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select objects. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties Working Offline When you work offline, AutoCAD Map 3D caches all your feature data connections. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. For information about working with shared drawing files, see Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings (page 730). Clear the cache periodically to improve performance.
PAGE 746

■ Check out features to edit in the field and update the database later. ■ Bringing in GIS Features (page 303) ■ Editing Features (page 701) ■ Checking Out Features (page 695) ■ Checking In Features (page 693) GIS Skill Related topics NOTE These procedures are for geospatial features only. For information about working with shared drawing files, see Use these techniques for object locking.
PAGE 747

2 Check in the checked out features. For more information, see Checking In Features (page 693). To clear the cache 1 Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ angle-arrow. 2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), click the System tab. 3 Click Clear Cache. Click OK. To rebuild the cache ➤ Right-click a feature layer in Display Manager ➤ Refresh Layer. Quick Reference MAPWORKOFFLINE Caches all checked-out features so you can work without being connected.
PAGE 748

Support for versioning depends on the feature source. However, the following guidelines apply to most feature sources that support versioning: ■ Features queried from one version of the feature source can be saved back to that version only. If you plan to edit features, be sure to query the features from the version where you plan to save the edits. ■ Objects locked in one version of the feature source are automatically locked in all versions (if the feature source supports locking).
PAGE 749

See also: ■ Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305) ■ Overview of Working with Features (page 684) ■ To create a new version (page 725) ■ To activate a version (page 725) ■ To commit changes back to the data store (page 726) ■ To discard a version (page 726) NOTE These procedure are for geospatial features only. For information about working with shared drawing files, see Use these techniques for object locking. (page 731).
PAGE 750

To commit changes back to the data store 1 Check in all features, or cancel checkout for them. 2 In Map Explorer (page 2068), right-click the feature source and click Manage Versions. 3 In the Manage Versions dialog box (page 1748), select the version and click Merge. This option is available for child versions only. If you merge the active version, its parent version is activated and then the selected version is merged and removed from the Version tree. You cannot merge a version if it has children.
PAGE 751

2 If necessary, close the Manage Versions dialog box (page 1748) and correct the error. 3 Redisplay the dialog box to make sure that the error has been cleared.
PAGE 752

■ Exercise 3: Query in data from the drawing ■ Find and Edit Objects in Attached Drawings ■ Edit DWG files in a multi-user environment. ■ Clean up duplicates, gaps, and other accuracy problems in DWG files. ■ Create a network topology to show how lines are connected.
PAGE 753

To do this... Use this method... Edit and save objects in attached drawings. Query objects from attached drawings into the current map, or edit objects from attached drawings and save them back. (page 737) Correct common map errors resulting from surveying, digitizing, and scanning errors, and remove unnecessary detail. Use drawing cleanup. (page 767) Use topology to analyze a set of objects and data and their relationship. Create node, network, or polygon topologies.
PAGE 754

■ ■ ■ Turning On Object Locking (page 733) Finding Out Who Locked an Object (page 734) Releasing All Locked Objects for a Specific User (page 736) See also: ■ Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings (page 737) NOTE These procedures are for drawing objects only. For information about locking geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
PAGE 755

■ Find and Edit Objects in Attached Drawings ■ Edit DWG files in a multi-user environment. ■ Turning On Object Locking (page 733) ■ Finding Out Who Locked an Object (page 734) ■ Releasing All Locked Objects for a Specific User (page 736) Workflow GIS Skill Related topics NOTE These procedures are for drawing objects only. For information about locking geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 696). Use these techniques for object locking. To do this... Use this method...
PAGE 756

Quick Reference MAPOPTIONS Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options Menu Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options Icon Options Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ADEWHOHASIT Displays the current owner of a selected locked object Menu Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Who Has It?.
PAGE 757

Turning On Object Locking If object locking is enabled, two network AutoCAD Map 3D users can edit different objects in the same drawing at the same time, but cannot edit the same object at the same time. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about locking geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 695). Any objects that you add to the save set are locked.
PAGE 758

Quick Reference MAPOPTIONS Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options Menu Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options Icon Options Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Finding Out Who Locked an Object Use the Who Has It operation at any time to find out who locked an object. NOTE If the DWK file has been deleted, the user names are no longer available.
PAGE 759

■ Find and Edit Objects in Attached Drawings ■ Edit DWG files in a multi-user environment. ■ Turning On Object Locking (page 733) ■ Sharing Attached Drawings (page 729) ■ Releasing All Locked Objects for a Specific User (page 736) Workflow GIS Skill Related topics NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. For information about locking geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 696).
PAGE 760

Releasing All Locked Objects for a Specific User If a system failure occurs while objects are locked, you must manually release the object locks. However, only a superuser (page 2075) can remove locks set by other users. NOTE If a drawing is activated in another user's drawing, you will not be able to release locks in that drawing. When you remove locks, the object is also removed from the save set. You can restore the locks by adding the objects to the save set again.
PAGE 761

If you have superuser privileges, you can select a user name and remove all the locks set by that user.
PAGE 762

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To save the edited objects back to their attached source drawings (page 749) To add objects to the save set and lock the objects (page 751) To view objects in the save set (page 752) To save queried objects back to attached source drawings (page 754) To save new objects to attached drawings (page 756) To save objects to the current drawing (page 757) To save objects to a new drawing (page 758) To remove objects from the save set and unlock the objects (page 759) To redefine block de
PAGE 763

■ Edit DWG files in a multi-user environment. ■ Overview of Queries (page 1235) ■ Editing Data in Attached Drawings (page 729) ■ Cleaning Up Drawing Data (page 765) ■ Using Map Editing Tools (page 926) ■ Working with Polygon Objects (page 954) GIS Skill Related topics NOTE These procedures are for drawing objects only. For information about saving geospatial feature data back to its source, see Checking In Features (page 694). To do this... Use this method...
PAGE 764

To do this... Use this method... Add objects to the save set and lock the objects Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Add To Save Set. See Adding an Object to the Save Set (page 750) View objects in the save set Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Show Objects In Save Set. See Viewing Objects in the Save Set (page 752) Save objects back to attached source drawings Add objects to the save set. Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Save To Source.
PAGE 765

Quick Reference ADEZEXTENTS Zooms to display the drawing extents Menu Click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
PAGE 766

Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings Menu File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items To Save Set Icon Add Objects to Save Set Command Line ADESELOBJS Dialog Box ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command) ADEREMOBJS Removes objects from the save set so they aren't saved to source drawings Menu File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Remove Items From Save Set Icon Remove Objects from Save Set Command Line ADEREMOBJS Dialog Box ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set
PAGE 767

SAVEAS Saves an unnamed drawing with a file name or renames the current drawing Menu File menu ➤ Save As Command Line SAVEAS MAPOPTIONS Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options Menu Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options Icon Options Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Zooming to the Extents of Selected Drawings Use Zoom Extents to zoom the current drawing to the extents of the selected source drawings.
PAGE 768

The drawing coordinates in the lower-left corner of the screen reflect the new extents of the current drawing.
PAGE 769

NOTE You can also zoom to the extents of a particular geospatial feature layer in the Display Manager. Right-click the layer and click Zoom To Extents. See also: ■ Setting Save Back Extents (page 170) To zoom to the extents of selected drawings 1 In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings. Click Zoom Extents. 2 In the Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box (page 2014), select the drawings to view. 3 Click OK. The command zooms the current drawing to the extents of the selected source drawings.
PAGE 770

NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. Quick View shows all objects in the selected source drawings. You can plot the results of a Quick View. NOTE Quick View displays objects but does not bring them into the drawing. The display contains one selectable picture for each source drawing. To bring objects into the current drawing, define a query that copies the objects from the source drawing into the current drawing.
PAGE 771

2 In the Quick View Drawings dialog box (page 2013), select the drawings to quick view. To control the display of nested drawings, select them individually. 3 To filter the list of active drawings on the basis of file names, descriptions, or both, click Filter, specify the filter, and click OK. Then select Filter. 4 Select Zoom To The Extents Of Selected Drawings to see the extents of all the drawings to review with Quick View. 5 Click OK. The objects in the active source drawing appear.
PAGE 772

Example: You have separate drawings for each quadrant of a town. You create a main drawing and attach the other drawings, and then view all water mains in the town or all emergency routes. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature data with a query, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map (page 309). You can save the queried objects back to their attached drawings by adding them to the save set before you edit them.
PAGE 773

3 Edit the objects. To save the edited objects back to their attached source drawings ➤ Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Save To Source.
PAGE 774

Adding an Object to the Save Set If you modify an object that was queried from an attached drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you to add the object to the save set, which locks the object. If an object is locked, other users cannot modify the object. TIP Lock the objects before you edit them. This ensures that other users are not modifying the same objects. To lock an object before editing, manually add the object to the save set.
PAGE 775

■ AutoCAD Map 3D cannot save edits back to a detached drawing. If you query and edit objects from an attached drawing, do not detach that drawing from the current drawing before you perform the save back operation. ■ If you decide you do not want to save changes to an object back to the attached source drawing, remove the object from the save set. The changes are maintained in the current drawing, but are not saved back to the attached drawing.
PAGE 776

Quick Reference ADESELOBJS Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings Menu File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items To Save Set Icon Add Objects to Save Set Command Line ADESELOBJS Dialog Box ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command) Viewing Objects in the Save Set Objects that you have added to the save set are locked. You can highlight these locked objects in your drawing. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 777

Quick Reference ADESHOWOBJS Displays the objects in the save set Menu File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Show Items In Drawing Save Set Icon Show Objects in Save Set Command Line ADESHOWOBJS Dialog Box ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command) Saving Queried Objects Back to Attached Drawings Objects saved back to their attached drawings replace the original objects. AutoCAD Map 3D lets you save objects to attached drawings in read-only directories.
PAGE 778

To save queried objects back to attached source drawings 1 To make sure that objects are in the save set, click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Show Objects In Save Set. Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ the objects to save. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Add To Save Set. Select ➤ Save To Source. 3 In the Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1887), select Save Queried Objects. 4 Click OK.
PAGE 779

to the drawings extents. You can change the save back extents of attached drawings. The newly created arc crosses three tiled attached drawings. It is saved to the first drawing in the list of attached drawings. Drawings are listed in the order in which you attach them. ■ Layer — Saves new objects to attached drawing layers that use the same names as the current drawing layers on which the objects lie.
PAGE 780

To save new objects to attached drawings 1 To add the objects to the save set, click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Add To Save Set. Enter n to add all new objects to the save set, or enter s and select the objects to add. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Save To Source. 3 In the Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1887), select Save Newly Created Objects. 4 Specify the Save Order. 5 Select the drawings to save objects to. 6 Click OK.
PAGE 781

If you edit one of these queried objects, you can save the edited object back to the attached drawing, or you can save the edited object to the current drawing. If you save an object to the current drawing, the original object is unchanged in the attached drawings. TIP When you close the current drawing, the association between queried objects and their attached drawings is removed. If you want to save changes back to the original drawing, you must save back before you close the current drawing.
PAGE 782

Menu File menu ➤ Save Command Line SAVE Saving Objects to a New Drawing When you save objects to a new drawing, you create a copy of the current drawing, including objects, options, queries, and attached drawings. If you queried objects from attached drawings, the original objects are unchanged in the attached drawings. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To save geospatial feature edits to a new data store, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
PAGE 783

Saves an unnamed drawing with a file name or renames the current drawing Menu File menu ➤ Save As Command Line SAVEAS Removing an Object from the Save Set Manually removing an object from the save set releases the lock on the object. Generally, when you edit an object that was queried in from an attached drawing, that object is locked so no one else can edit it. When you save objects back to attached drawings, the locks are automatically removed.
PAGE 784

Quick Reference ADEREMOBJS Removes objects from the save set so they aren't saved to source drawings Menu File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Remove Items From Save Set Icon Remove Objects from Save Set Command Line ADEREMOBJS Dialog Box ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set command) Solving Problems When Saving Back to Attached Drawings Several issues can arise when you save queried objects back to attached drawings. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 785

Saving Back Dimensions If you set a global coordinate system or use the Transform editing tool, you might have problems saving back dimensions. If you use a location query to retrieve one or more dimensions and save the dimension back to the attached source drawings, you might find that another location query will not retrieve the dimension. In this case, you should detach the source drawing and reattach it before repeating the location query.
PAGE 786

3 Under Save Back To Source Drawings, select Redefine Block Definitions On Save Back. 4 Click OK. To save back individual block components 1 Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Add To Save Set. 2 Select all the block components. 3 Press Enter. To check that the hatch pattern is in the save set 1 Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Show Objects In Save Set. 2 If the hatch pattern is not highlighted, make sure that all boundary objects are added to the save set.
PAGE 787

Icon Show Objects in Save Set Command Line ADESHOWOBJS Dialog Box ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command) MAPOPTIONS Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options Menu Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options Icon Options Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Setting Save Back Options A number of options affect how queried objects are saved back to attached drawings or feature sources.
PAGE 788

Use this option if you plan to save some edited objects, but not others, back to attached drawing or feature source. ■ Add Objects Automatically Without Prompting — When you edit an object that was retrieved from an attached drawing or feature source, the object is automatically added to the save set. Use this option if you plan to save most modified objects back to attached drawings and feature sources. NOTE To add new objects to attached drawings, add them to the save set manually.
PAGE 789

4 Click OK. Quick Reference MAPOPTIONS Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options Menu Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options Icon Options Command Line MAPOPTIONS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Cleaning Up Drawing Data Use Drawing Cleanup to correct common map errors resulting from surveying, digitizing, and scanning errors. You can also remove unnecessary detail from complex maps. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 790

■ To select cleanup actions and set options (page 787) Overview of Cleaning Up Maps Use Drawing Cleanup to correct common geometry errors resulting from surveying, digitizing, and scanning before you define a topology, perform a map analysis, plot a map, or export to a geospatial data format. You can also remove unnecessary detail from complex maps. Example: You digitized paper maps and now some street intersections do not align correctly. You want clean the maps before you create a topology.
PAGE 791

Tell me more ■ Show me how to clean up errors in my data ■ Lesson 2: Clean Up Your Drawings ■ To clean up drawing data (page 765) ■ Add DWG Data to an Existing Feature Source ■ Clean up duplicates, gaps, and other accuracy problems in DWG files. ■ Correction Methods (page 782) ■ Cleanup Actions (page 787) ■ Overview of Editing a Topology (page 852) Video Tutorial Procedure Workflow GIS Skill Related topics WARNING To edit topologies, use the topology editing commands (page 851).
PAGE 792

4 In the Drawing Cleanup (page 1591) dialog box, follow these steps: ■ Selecting and Anchoring Objects (page 770). Select the objects to include in the cleanup operation and the objects to anchor. Click Next. ■ Setting Cleanup Options (page 773). Select cleanup actions and set the parameters for each action you select. Specify whether to correct errors automatically or to review and confirm each correction. Click Next. ■ Converting Objects After Cleanup (page 776).
PAGE 793

Performs drawing cleanup operations Menu Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup Icon Drawing Cleanup Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Step 1: Selecting and Anchoring Objects Start by selecting the objects to include in the cleanup. You can automatically select all objects or select objects manually. You also select the objects to anchor. Anchored objects are reference points and are not altered or moved; objects being cleaned are moved towards anchored objects.
PAGE 794

To select and anchor objects for drawing cleanup 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. 2 On the Select Objects Page (page 1595), under Objects To Include In Drawing Cleanup, select the objects to clean up. ■ Choose the method to use for selecting objects. Click Select All to select all objects. Click Select Manually to select individual objects. ■ To limit object selection to objects on specific layers or in specific object classes, specify the layers and object classes to include.
PAGE 795

Icon Drawing Cleanup Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options As you clean up a map, you select one or more cleanup actions to perform. Each cleanup action detects a different type of map error, for example, duplicate objects, undershoots, or zero-length objects. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. For best results, run Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines individually.
PAGE 796

Order of Cleanup Actions The order of cleanup actions can produce different results. Specify the order by moving cleanup actions up or down in the list. The action at the top of the list is performed first. Setting Cleanup Options Set the options for each cleanup action individually. For more information, see the individual help topics about each cleanup action. Understanding the Tolerance Setting Tolerance is the minimum distance allowed between linear objects or nodes.
PAGE 797

For example, a tolerance of 10 would eliminate dangles less than 10 meters long; but in some cases, such dangles might be the correct mapping of a short pipe or street. See also: ■ Overview of Cleaning Up Maps (page 766) ■ Select Actions Page (page 1588) ■ Overview of Cleanup Actions (page 788) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 798

■ Dissolve Pseudo Nodes (page 807) ■ Erase Dangling Objects (page 809) ■ Simplify Objects (page 811) ■ Zero-Length Objects (page 815) ■ Weed Polylines (page 816) 5 To review detected errors before correcting them, under Options, select Interactive. To have AutoCAD Map 3D correct all detected errors without further input from you, select Automatic. NOTE Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines are not interactive operations. AutoCAD Map 3D makes these changes automatically during cleanup. 6 Click Next.
PAGE 799

Step 3: Specifying How to Convert Objects After Cleanup As you clean up a map, you can specify how to treat the original objects after the cleanup operation is complete. ■ Modify Original Objects — Uses the original layer and as much of the original data as possible. For example, linear objects are extended where necessary. ■ Retain Original And Create New Objects — Keeps the original objects and creates new objects on a layer you specify.
PAGE 800

See also: ■ Overview of Cleaning Up Maps (page 766) ■ Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page 117) ■ Cleanup Methods Page (page 1585) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To specify how to convert the objects after cleanup 1 On the Cleanup Methods Page (page 1585), under Cleanup Method, specify how to treat the objects after the conversion process is complete. NOTE Creating new objects may increase file size significantly.
PAGE 801

Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Step 4: Setting Up Markers for Interactive Mode When you review errors interactively, AutoCAD Map 3D places error markers on detected errors to help you locate the errors more quickly and evaluate whether they need correction. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. If you correct an error, the marker is removed.
PAGE 802

Set the type and color of markers used to mark errors. ■ If you correct errors automatically, errors are not marked. ■ The markers used in drawing cleanup are the same as those used when creating a polygon topology. Before beginning either operation, existing markers are removed.
PAGE 803

NOTE The Error Markers page is available only if you select Interactive in Step 2 (page 773). NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To set up markers for interactive mode 1 To remove markers placed by an earlier cleanup operation, on the Error Markers Page (page 1587), select Erase Markers When Cleanup Starts. This is useful if you repeat the cleanup process to catch errors missed in the first pass.
PAGE 804

Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Saving Cleanup Settings as a Profile Once you have specified the settings for drawing cleanup, you can save them as a profile for later use. Profiles are also useful when you automate the drawing cleanup process with scripts. Drawing cleanup profiles are saved as *.dpf files. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 805

To save Drawing Cleanup settings as a profile 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. 2 Specify the settings to save. 3 Click Save. 4 In the Save Drawing Cleanup Profile dialog box, enter a name for the profile. Click Save. To load an existing drawing cleanup profile 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. 2 Click Load. 3 In the Select Drawing Cleanup Profile dialog box, select the profile to load. 4 Click Open. The settings from the selected profile are made current.
PAGE 806

Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Correction Methods You can correct errors automatically or review each error and decide how to fix it. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. See also: ■ Overview of Cleaning Up Maps (page 766) ■ Step 3: Specifying How to Convert Objects After Cleanup (page 775) ■ Step 4: Setting Up Markers for Interactive Mode (page 777) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 807

NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To correct errors automatically 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. 2 On the Drawing Cleanup - Select Objects Page (page 1595), select the objects to clean and the objects to anchor. Click Next. 3 In the Select Actions Page, select cleanup actions by adding them to the Selected Actions list. Specify the cleanup parameters for each action. 4 In the Options area, select Automatic.
PAGE 808

to better examine them. Correct errors one at a time or correct all the errors detected for a selected cleanup action as a single action. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. You can configure error markers (page 777) on the Drawing Cleanup - Error Markers Page (page 1587). You can also indicate whether to maintain markers both from earlier cleanup operations and after the current cleanup operation.
PAGE 809

■ When you fix an error or group of errors, it may affect the errors further down the list. For example, if you break two crossing objects and create four new, shorter objects, the new objects may be shorter than the tolerance specified for Erase Short Objects tolerance. Drawing Cleanup would detect these as new, additional errors and add them to the list. ■ Objects are not updated visually until you close the dialog box. When you review the new errors, objects will not appear in their corrected state.
PAGE 810

7 To save your settings in a profile (page 781), click Save. 8 Click Finish to run the cleanup process and review the list of detected errors in the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box (page 1593). In the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box (page 1593), the first cleanup action with detected errors is selected. All other actions are shaded. Cleanup actions are listed in the order specified on the Drawing Cleanup - Select Actions Page (page 1588).
PAGE 811

■ To skip an error, click Next. 11 You can highlight and zoom to errors in the map by setting the following options under Zoom Settings: ■ To zoom to selected errors dynamically, select Auto Zoom. ■ To indicate the percent of the drawing display that selected error occupies, enter a value in the Zoom % box. For example, specify 100% to zoom the display to the extents of the selected error, or specify 60% to display more of the drawing outside the selected error.
PAGE 812

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To break crossing objects (page 799) To extend undershoots (page 801) To extend objects to their apparent intersection (page 803) To snap clustered nodes (page 806) To dissolve pseudo nodes (page 808) To erase dangling objects (page 810) To simplify objects (page 814) To identify zero-length objects (page 815) To weed or add vertices to a 3D polyline (page 819) Overview of Cleanup Actions Drawing Cleanup actions can be used to detect map errors (for example, duplicate objects, undershoot
PAGE 813

Before Drawing Cleanup After Drawing Cleanup Description of Problem Cleanup Action Undershoots Extend Undershoots (page 799) Objects could be extended along their natural paths to intersect at a projected point Apparent Intersection (page 802) Node cluster Snap Clustered Nodes (page 804) Pseudo-nodes Dissolve Pseudo Nodes (page 807) Dangles or overshoots Erase Dangling Objects (page 809) 2D linear object simplification Simplify Objects (page 811) Zero-length objects Zero-Length Objects (pag
PAGE 814

Order of Cleanup Actions The order of cleanup actions can produce different results. Specify the order by moving cleanup actions up or down in the list. The action at the top of the list is performed first. Setting Cleanup Options Set the options for each cleanup action individually. For more information, see the individual help topics about each cleanup action. Cleaning for Topology Some types of errors should be fixed before you create a topology.
PAGE 815

Notes ■ Drawing Cleanup affects objects on layers that are OFF. It does not affect objects on layers that are FROZEN. It is recommended that you use drawing cleanup on a layer-by-layer basis, or on selective sets of layers. Avoid using automatic cleanup for all objects on all layers. ■ All tools except Weed Polylines work in two dimensions only, ignoring Z-values. When you use the 2D tools, Z data (indicating elevations) might be lost when processing objects at different elevations.
PAGE 816

■ To simplify objects (page 814) ■ To identify zero-length objects (page 815) ■ To weed or add vertices to a 3D polyline (page 819) 3 In the Selected Actions list, specify the order in which to perform the cleanup actions. The order is important and can affect your results. The first action in the list will be performed first. To change the order, highlight an action and click the up or down arrow. NOTE For best results, run Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines individually.
PAGE 817

Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Delete Duplicates Delete Duplicates locates objects that share the same start and end points as well as all other points within the tolerance distance. You can delete one of the objects. You can include the following object types: ■ Linear objects ■ Points ■ Blocks ■ Text ■ Mtext WARNING Do not use Delete Duplicates with polygon topology because it deletes important topology data. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 818

NOTE When deleting duplicate edges that are polyline segments, the command deletes lines and arcs before breaking polylines. The command removes only objects with the same geometry, even if the objects are on different layers. See also: ■ Overview of Cleaning Up Maps (page 766) ■ Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options (page 771) ■ Overview of Cleanup Actions (page 788) ■ Overview of Editing a Topology (page 852) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 819

2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Delete Duplicates. Click Add. 3 In the Select Actions list, click Delete Duplicates to display the cleanup parameters for this action. 4 Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly higher than the distance between the objects. Enter a value in the Tolerance box or click Pick to select two points that define the tolerance. 5 Select the object types to include in the Delete Duplicates calculation.
PAGE 820

This action is like the Dissolve Pseudo-Nodes action, except Erase Short Objects removes both the linear object and associated nodes. Depending on your data, use Snap Clustered Nodes next, to correct errors that might result from the Erase Short Objects option. See also: ■ Overview of Cleaning Up Maps (page 766) ■ Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options (page 771) ■ Overview of Cleanup Actions (page 788) ■ Dissolve Pseudo Nodes (page 807) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 821

2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Erase Short Objects. Click Add. 3 In the Select Actions list, click Erase Short Objects to display the cleanup parameters for this action. 4 Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly smaller than the shortest length you want to retain. You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the map and select two points that define the tolerance to use. 5 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
PAGE 822

Closed objects, such as contours and lakes, can be cleaned up with the Break Crossing Objects and Erase Dangling Objects actions. Use Break Crossing Objects to create separate objects, and then use Erase Dangling Objects (page 809) or the ERASE command. Verify that the shape created after editing reflects the intended shape and that a distorted, closed area is not created. NOTE AutoCAD Map 3D does not refer to a tolerance value when breaking crossing objects.
PAGE 823

NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To break crossing objects 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. 2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Break Crossing Objects. Click Add. 3 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings. ■ Break Crossing Objects does not use a tolerance value or other cleanup parameters.
PAGE 824

If one object can be extended to cross the other, it will be extended (while maintaining the same direction) and snapped to a point on the object. If no node exists, one will be created at the intersection. If two objects pass within the specified tolerance and can be snapped without changing their direction, they will be snapped together. If no node exists at that point, one will be created. Undershoots are often found in the same drawing as dangles.
PAGE 825

■ Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options (page 771) ■ Overview of Cleanup Actions (page 788) ■ Erase Dangling Objects (page 809) ■ Break Crossing Objects (page 797) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To extend undershoots 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. 2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Extend Undershoots. Click Add.
PAGE 826

Icon Drawing Cleanup Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Apparent Intersection With Apparent Intersection, you can locate two objects that do not intersect but that could be extended (within a specified tolerance radius) along their natural paths to intersect at a projected point. The tolerance is used as a radius distance from the end of the two links.
PAGE 827

See also: ■ Overview of Cleaning Up Maps (page 766) ■ Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options (page 771) ■ Overview of Cleanup Actions (page 788) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To extend objects to their apparent intersection 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. 2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Apparent Intersection. Click Add.
PAGE 828

5 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings. Quick Reference MAPCLEAN Performs drawing cleanup operations Menu Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup Icon Drawing Cleanup Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Snap Clustered Nodes Use Snap Clustered Nodes to correct multiple nodes near the same point. With Snap Clustered Nodes, you locate nodes within a specified tolerance radius distance of each other and snap them to a single location.
PAGE 829

When using Snap Clustered Nodes, keep in mind the following: ■ Nodes are moved to a single location but are not deleted, which can result in multiple objects at the same location. Use Delete Duplicates to remove duplicate objects. ■ You can anchor objects during object selection so they do not change during the snap operation. Note, however, anchored objects are included in the selection set and will affect the snap point.
PAGE 830

NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To snap clustered nodes 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. 2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Snap Clustered Nodes. Click Add. 3 In the Select Actions list, click Snap Clustered Nodes to display the cleanup parameters for this action.
PAGE 831

Icon Drawing Cleanup Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Dissolve Pseudo Nodes A pseudo-node is an unnecessary node in a geometric link that is shared by only two objects. For example, a long link might be divided unnecessarily into many, smaller links by pseudo-nodes. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 832

NOTE AutoCAD Map 3D does not refer to a tolerance value when dissolving pseudo nodes. When you dissolve a pseudo node on a 2D polyline with different Z values, the first Z-value on the object is used. On a 3D polyline, the Z-value on the first vertex is used. The object remains a 3D polyline. For all other properties, the values on the first object are used. WARNING Using Dissolve Pseudo-Nodes may result in the loss of certain types of data.
PAGE 833

Quick Reference MAPCLEAN Performs drawing cleanup operations Menu Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup Icon Drawing Cleanup Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Erase Dangling Objects Use Erase Dangling Objects to locate an object with at least one end point that is not shared by another object, and erase the object. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 834

A dangle is often caused by inaccurate digitizing where an object extends beyond its intended intersection with a target object. Use Break Crossing Objects (page 797) before using Erase Dangling Objects. See also: ■ Overview of Cleaning Up Maps (page 766) ■ Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options (page 771) ■ Overview of Cleanup Actions (page 788) ■ Break Crossing Objects (page 797) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 835

5 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings. Quick Reference MAPCLEAN Performs drawing cleanup operations Menu Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup Icon Drawing Cleanup Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Simplify Objects When maps are digitized, edges may be defined with more detail than necessary. Use Simplify Objects to reduce unnecessary complexity in contour lines, rivers, and coastlines.
PAGE 836

Setting the Tolerance AutoCAD Map 3D converts a set of connected polyline segments within the same tolerance into a single polyline. You specify the tolerance corridor width. The corridor values vary according to the scale of the map; maps with coordinate values of millions use larger values than those using hundreds. Simplifying linear objects removes as many points as possible from a polyline while keeping it within the original tolerance corridor.
PAGE 837

A coastline simplified at different tolerance settings For best results, follow these guidelines: ■ Run Simplify Objects individually. If you perform Simplify Objects with other cleanup actions, AutoCAD Map 3D performs Simplify Objects first, regardless of its position in the Selected Actions list. ■ Use deleting duplicates (page 793) before simplifying linear objects. ■ If your objects are lines, not plines, use Dissolve Pseudo Nodes to create a single pline.
PAGE 838

To simplify objects 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. 2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Simplify Objects. Click Add. NOTE For best results, run Simplify Objects individually. If you run Simplify Objects with other actions, AutoCAD Map 3D runs Simplify Objects first, regardless of its position in the Selected Actions list. 3 In the Select Actions list, click Simplify Objects to display the cleanup parameters for this action.
PAGE 839

Zero-Length Objects Use Zero-Length Objects to locate lines, arcs, and polylines that have a start point and an end point but have zero-length, or are missing an end point, and erase them. The Zero-Length Objects cleanup action does not evaluate closed polylines. Zero-length objects can be introduced inadvertently when importing data from other applications or when digitizing map data. NOTE AutoCAD Map 3D does not refer to a tolerance value when identifying zero-length objects.
PAGE 840

Performs drawing cleanup operations Menu Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup Icon Drawing Cleanup Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Weed Polylines Use Weed Polylines to add and remove vertices on 3D polylines. This is helpful to control the drawing file size and contour appearance, or to remove redundant information. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 841

Weeding factor parameters Supplementing Factors Use Supplementing Factors to supplement or add vertices along 3D polylines. The supplementing distance is the maximum distance between vertices. If the distance between vertices on a contour is greater than the Supplementing Factors, then points are added along the contour at equal intervals that are less than or equal to the supplementing distance. The smaller the distance, the greater the number of supplemented points.
PAGE 842

Bulge For curves, the bulge value is a ratio of the distance from the arc to the chord divided by half the length of the chord. The bulge factor adds vertices to a polyline curve, creating an approximation of the curve using straight line segments. The length of these segments varies depending on the bulge factor and the degree of curvature. Bulge factor parameters ■ Notes Run Weed Polylines individually.
PAGE 843

To weed or add vertices to a 3D polyline 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. 2 On the Select Objects page, select the 3D polylines from which to remove extra vertices or add vertices. Click Next. 3 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Weed Polylines. Click Add >. NOTE Run Weed Polylines by itself (without other cleanup actions).
PAGE 844

intervals that are less than or equal to the supplementing distance. The smaller the distance, the greater the number of supplemented points. 8 For Bulge, enter the bulge factor value, or click Pick to specify it in the drawing. The bulge factor adds vertices to a polyline curve, creating an approximation of the curve using straight line segments. The bulge value is a ratio of the distance from the arc to the chord divided by half the length of the chord. 9 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
PAGE 845

NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. However, you can use buffers to analyze features by proximity and perform overlay analysis on two geospatial feature layers. See Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1308)and Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1316).
PAGE 846

To create a topology ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To create a topology (page 825) create a node topology (page 827) To create a network topology (page 831) To fix crossing objects (page 839) To create a topology for a land use and land cover map (page 840) To find sliver polygons when you create a polygon topology (page 843) To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843) To specify the direction for a link (page 847) To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology (page 850) Overvie
PAGE 847

An example of network topology is a water-distribution application that traces the flow of water from a pumping station to residences. A street network is another example. For network topologies, you can specify the direction for a link and specify the resistance for a link or node. Polygon Topologies ■ Define polygons that represent enclosed areas such as land parcels and census tracts. A single link defines the common boundary between adjacent areas.
PAGE 848

WARNING Using the BREAK command affects topology. If you use BREAK, you must use MAPTOPOCREATE again to recreate the topology. You might also need to clean up the geometry in the drawing again. Tell me more ■ Show me how to create a network topology. ■ Show me how to load a topology. ■ Show me how to find the shortest path between two points. ■ Show me how to do an overlay analysis using two topologies.
PAGE 849

To create a topology 1 Bring the nodes or links into the current drawing: ■ Attach the drawings containing the objects, then query the objects into the current drawing. ■ Open the drawing containing the objects. 2 Click Create tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ New. 3 In the Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box (page 1969), enter a name and description for the new topology. 4 Under Topology Type, select the topology to create.
PAGE 850

PROPERTIES Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties Creating a Node Topology You can create a node topology with point objects, blocks, or text. A node topology used in association with a network or polygon topology can hold information about junctions and intersections between elements of the topology.
PAGE 851

Object Data for Node Topology Information about a node topology is held in an object data table as shown in this table. Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field SAMPLE_NODE TPMNODE_SAMPLE_NODE ID See also: ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Changing the Appearance of Points (page 869) ■ Creating a Network Topology (page 829) ■ Creating a Polygon Topology (page 833) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 852

4 In the Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box (page 1959), specify the nodes to include in the topology: ■ To include all nodes in the map, click Select All. ■ To manually select the nodes to include, click Select Manually. Click Select Nodes to select the nodes in the map. When you finish selecting nodes, press Enter. ■ To filter (restrict) node selection by layer (only the nodes that are on specified layers will be selected), specify those layers in the Layers box.
PAGE 853

Creating a Network Topology Network topology defines the interconnection of links and, optionally, nodes at link junctions. Networks may contain loops. Network segments have a specified direction. Links can be lines, open polylines, or arcs. You can use information from different layers to define a network topology. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 854

If you create nodes when you create the network topology, the object data table for each node has the following information. Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field SAMPLE_NET TPMNODE_SAMPLE_NET ID RESISTANCE Tell me more ■ Show me how to create a network topology. ■ Show me how to load a topology. ■ Show me how to find the shortest path between two points. ■ Show me how to do an overlay analysis using two topologies.
PAGE 855

■ Performing a Best Route Analysis (page 1328) ■ Performing a Flood Trace (page 1333) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. However, you can use buffers to analyze features by proximity and perform overlay analysis on two geospatial feature layers. See Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1308)and Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1316).
PAGE 856

from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. If the layer is not listed, it may be Frozen, Locked, or Off. To use all layers, enter an asterisk (*). ■ To filter link selection by object class, specify the object classes in the Object Classes box. Only links that belong to the specified object classes will be included in the topology. Layer and object class filters apply to both the automatic and manual selection of links. ■ Click Next.
PAGE 857

For information about adding direction and resistance, see the following topics: Specifying the Direction for a Link (page 845) Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node (page 849) Quick Reference MAPTOPOCREATE Creates a new topology Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Create.
PAGE 858

A polygon in a topology consists of a centroid containing information about the surrounding links. Intersecting links can have nodes. A polygon can contain one or more islands. You cannot create a polygon topology from ellipses or from closed polylines that share an edge or intersection with other polygons. You must explode a closed polyline before you create the topology. You can use information from different layers to define a polygon topology.
PAGE 859

Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field LINKS_QTY The object data table for each link in a polygon topology has the following information. Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field SAMPLE_POLY TPMLINK_SAMPLE_POLY ID START_NODE END_NODE DIRECTION DIRECT_RESISTANCE REVERSE_RESISTANCE LEFT_POLYGON RIGHT_POLYGON If you create nodes when you create the polygon topology, the object data table for each node has the following information.
PAGE 860

■ Querying a Topology (page 1348) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. However, you can use buffers to analyze features by proximity and perform overlay analysis on two geospatial feature layers. See Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1308)and Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1316). To create a polygon topology 1 Do one of the following to bring linework into the current drawing: ■ Attach the drawings containing the linework.
PAGE 861

■ Use the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box (page 1961) to have AutoCAD Map 3D create node objects where needed. Specify the layer and block to use for the new node objects. ■ Use the Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box (page 1962) to select the centroids to use. ■ Use the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog box (page 1960) to create centroids where needed. Specify the layer and block to use for the new centroids.
PAGE 862

Command Line MAPTOPOCREATE Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Topologies ➤ Create Dialog Box Create Topology dialog box Cleaning Data for a Polygon Topology Clean up your data before creating polygon topology; eliminate gaps, intersections, or overlaps between any of the linework in a polygon topology. In addition, eliminate zero length objects or areas with missing centroids. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 863

NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. However, you can use buffers to analyze features by proximity and perform overlay analysis on two geospatial feature layers. See Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1308)and Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1316). To fix crossing objects 1 Use drawing cleanup (page 765) to break the crossing objects. 2 Optionally, detect duplicate centroids, incomplete areas, and sliver polygons (page 841).
PAGE 864

See also: ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Creating a Polygon Topology (page 833) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. However, you can use buffers to analyze features by proximity and perform overlay analysis on two geospatial feature layers. See Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1308)and Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1316). To create a topology for a land use and land cover map 1 Create areas for each type.
PAGE 865

Sliver Polygons A sliver polygon is very long and thin; its perimeter is very large compared to its area. When overlaying two topologies, AutoCAD Map 3D checks for sliver polygons. When creating a new polygon topology, checking for sliver polygons is optional. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. However, when you perform overlay analysis (page 1309)on two geospatial feature layers, you can check for sliver polygons (page 1565).
PAGE 866

Sliver polygons detected during an overlay (the Xs indicate the sliver polygons). Tell me more ■ Show me how to do an overlay analysis using two topologies. ■ To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843) ■ Find which lines are within a particular polygon (overlay analysis.
PAGE 867

■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Overlaying Two Topologies (page 1336) ■ Creating a Polygon Topology (page 833) ■ Correcting or Completing a Topology (page 918) Related topics ■ To find sliver polygons when you create a polygon topology (page 843) ■ To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 868

2 In Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box (page 1999), select Identity as the type of overlay analysis to perform. Click Next. The result topology includes areas that appear in the source topology and areas in the overlay topology that are within the source topology boundary. 3 In the Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology dialog box (page 2007), select the polygon topology to use as the overlay topology. Click Next.
PAGE 869

Performs drawing cleanup operations Menu Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup Icon Drawing Cleanup Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup MAPANOVERLAY Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Overlay.
PAGE 870

Direction Property in the Object data Properties palette value Bi-Directional (two-way) Bi-Directional 846 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data 0
PAGE 871

Direction Property in the Object data Properties palette value Same as created. Movement along the link is allowed only in the direction that the link was created. Forward 1 Reverse of created direction. Movement along the link is allowed only in the opposite direction that the link was created. Reverse -1 The default direction of an arc, or a two-point polyline with an arc segment, is counterclockwise.
PAGE 872

If more than one topology contains the same link, select one of the topologies. Update the other topologies (page 891) later. 3 In the Properties palette, under the Topo properties, choose a setting for the Flow Direction property: ■ Bi-Directional — Movement is allowed in both directions. ■ Forward — Movement is allowed only in the direction that the link was created. ■ Reverse — Movement is allowed only in the opposite direction of the direction that the link was created.
PAGE 873

Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node Direct Resistance is the resistance to travel in the direction that a link was created, while Reverse Resistance is the resistance in the opposite direction along a link. For both types, you can specify a resistance for any link in the network topology. This resistance specifies the difficulty in traversing the link.
PAGE 874

To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology 1 Verify that the network topology containing the link or node is loaded. Be sure to load the topology from the current drawing. You can specify resistance for network topologies only. 2 In the map, double-click the link or node for which you want to specify resistance. If more than one topology contains the same link or node, select one of the topologies. Update the other topologies (page 891) later.
PAGE 875

Command Line MAPEDITRES2 Dialog Box MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command) PROPERTIES Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties Editing Topologies Use the topology editing commands, which are accessible from Map Explorer or the command line, to make changes to a topology without losing the integrity of the topology.
PAGE 876

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To create a link and add it to a topology (page 880) To add an existing link to a topology (page 881) To add a polygon to a polygon topology using existing linework (page 884) To add a polygon to a polygon topology by creating new linework (page 884) To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 887) To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 889) To update a topology (page 892) To retrieve objects to edit (page 894) To edit the objects (page 895) To create closed polylines
PAGE 877

not with geometry. Any incomplete objects are registered, because only complete objects can be edited. To add or insert objects into a topology, the current drawing must be where the topology was created. If the topology was created in a source drawing, you must open that drawing to add objects to the topology. Make the layer containing the topology objects current so new objects have the same properties as objects already in the topology.
PAGE 878

NOTE To edit a topology, use the AutoCAD Map 3D topology edit commands. When you edit a topology, the topology must be loaded from the current drawing. To add an object to a topology, the current drawing must be the drawing where the topology was created. NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 879

MAPAL Adds a link to a topology Command Line MAPAL Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology ➤ Add New Links MAPAN Adds a node to a topology Command Line MAPAN Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Add Node MAPAP Adds a polygon to a polygon topology Command Line MAPAP Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon topology ➤ Add Polygon MAPBL Breaks a link in a topology at a specified point Command Line MAPBL Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a networ
PAGE 880

MAPDL Deletes a link in a topology Command Line MAPDL Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology ➤ Delete Links MAPDN Deletes a node in a topology Command Line MAPDN Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Delete Node MAPDP Deletes a polygon from a polygon topology Command Line MAPDP Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon topology ➤ Delete Polygon MAPDVP Divides a polygon in a polygon topology by allowing you to add a link Command Line MAPDVP Task Pane
PAGE 881

Dialog Box MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command) MAPEDITRES2 Edits the reverse resistance of a link in a network topology Command Line MAPEDITRES2 Dialog Box MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command) MAPIL Inserts a link in a topology Command Line MAPIL Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology ➤ Insert New Link MAPIN Inserts a node in a topology Command Line MAPIN Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Insert Node MAPJL Joins two links in a topolog
PAGE 882

Moves a link in a topology Command Line MAPML Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology ➤ Move Links MAPMN Moves a node in a topology or moves a node at the end of a link in network or polygon topologies Command Line MAPMN Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Move Node MAPMP Merges polygons in a polygon topology Command Line MAPMP Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon topology ➤ Merge Polygon MAPRL Reverses a link in a topology Command Line MAPRL
PAGE 883

Editing a Node You can move a node in a node topology, or move a node at the end point of a link in a network or polygon topology. Moving the node at the end point of a link also moves that end of the chosen link. Edits to nodes and links in a polygon topology change the centroid, the area, and perimeter values. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. When you move a node, AutoCAD Map 3D checks its new location.
PAGE 884

Node option. If you are working with a network or polygon topology, use the MAPAN command. If you retrieve the nodes of a network or polygon topology, but not the connecting links, you can still move the nodes. However, the current topology knows nothing about the connecting links because all the link information is stored on the links, and saving any edited nodes back to the source drawings will create an incorrect topology.
PAGE 885

the object moves 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its current position. In a node topology, if the node's new location is the same as an existing node, specify which node to keep. In a network topology, specify whether to join the links and which node to keep.
PAGE 886

NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. You can do any of the following: ■ Move a link to a new location. ■ Reposition one of the nodes at the end point of a link. Moving the node at the end point of a link moves that end of the chosen link. If you move an end point to the same location as an existing end point, AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you to join the links and specify which node to keep.
PAGE 887

■ To reposition a link (page 863) ■ To join two links, break a link, or reverse a link's direction (page 864) ■ To modify the resistance or direction of a link (page 864) To reposition a node at the end point of a link 1 Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology. 2 Do one of the following: ■ For a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Move End Of Link. ■ For a polygon topology, type MAPMEL on the command line.
PAGE 888

moves 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its current position. To join two links, break a link, or reverse a link's direction 1 Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology. 2 Do one of the following: ■ For a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click a menu option. ■ To join two links in a polygon topology, type MAPJL on the command line. To break a link in a polygon topology, type MAPBL on the command line.
PAGE 889

MAPEDITRES1 Edits the direct resistance of a node or link in a network topology Command Line MAPEDITRES1 Dialog Box MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command) MAPEDITRES2 Edits the reverse resistance of a link in a network topology Command Line MAPEDITRES2 Dialog Box MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command) MAPJL Joins two links in a topology Command Line MAPJL Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology ➤ Join Links MAPMEL Repositions an end point of a link in a topology Co
PAGE 890

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Reverse Link Direction PROPERTIES Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties Editing a Polygon You can divide a polygon into two smaller polygons by drawing a link between two nodes that define the polygon.
PAGE 891

Polygons at the edge of a queried polygon topology cannot be edited. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Creating a Polygon Topology (page 833) ■ Querying a Topology (page 1348) ■ Adding a Polygon (page 882) ■ To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 889) ■ Editing a Link (page 861) ■ Editing a Node (page 859) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 892

4 Specify the node for the second divide point. To merge two polygons into one polygon 1 Open the drawing where the polygon topology was created and load the topology. 2 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Merge Polygon. 3 Specify the link (boundary between two polygons) to remove. 4 Specify the centroid to remove. 5 On the command line, type Y to merge the polygons.
PAGE 893

Changing the Appearance of Points If you create nodes as ACAD_POINT, you can change their appearance. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 894

See also: ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Creating a Node Topology (page 826) ■ Adding a Node (page 877) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To change the appearance of points 1 At the Command prompt, enter ddptype. 2 In the Point Style dialog box, select any of the point modes. You can also change the Point Size to improve the visibility of the points. 3 Click OK. 4 On the command line, enter regen.
PAGE 895

NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 896

Direction Property in the Properties palette Object data value Bi-Directional (two-way) Bi-Directional 0 Same as created. Movement along the link is allowed only in the direction that the link was created. Forward 1 Reverse of created direction. Movement along the link is allowed only in the opposite direction that the link was created. Reverse -1 The default direction of an arc, or a two-point polyline with an arc segment, is counterclockwise.
PAGE 897

See also: ■ Loading or Unloading Topologies (page 906) ■ Adding a Link (page 880) ■ To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 889) ■ Specifying the Direction for a Link (page 845) ■ Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node (page 849) ■ Performing a Shortest Path Trace (page 1324) ■ Performing a Best Route Analysis (page 1328) ■ Performing a Flood Trace (page 1333) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 898

Quick Reference MAPEDITDIR Edits the direction of a link in a network topology Command Line MAPEDITDIR Dialog Box MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) MAPRL Reverses a link in a topology Command Line MAPRL Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Reverse Link Direction PROPERTIES Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object.
PAGE 899

AutoCAD Map 3D uses this resistance when doing a shortest path trace, best route analysis, or flood trace. For an example of using resistance to show travel times, see Performing a Flood Trace (page 1333). You can also specify the Resistance of a node in a network topology, such as setting resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a road network.
PAGE 900

The new resistance values are assigned to the objects. NOTE You can also store a resistance value in object data or an external database. When you run a flood trace, path trace, or best route analysis, specify the location of this data.
PAGE 901

Adding a Node You can add nodes to an existing topology. To add nodes, the current drawing must be where the topology was created and the geometry (point, block, or text object) must already exist. You can add a node to the end of a link or a vertex in network or polygon topologies. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. Adding a node to an existing topology.
PAGE 902

See also: ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Loading or Unloading Topologies (page 906) ■ Deleting Links, Nodes, and Polygons (page 888) ■ Updating a Topology (page 891) ■ Adding a Link (page 880) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To create a node on an existing link 1 Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
PAGE 903

4 Do one of the following: ■ To add a node to a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Add Node. ■ To add a node to a network or polygon topology, type mapan on the command line. 5 When prompted, select the object to use as the node.
PAGE 904

Adding a Link You can add a new or existing link to a network or polygon topology. The current drawing must be where the topology was created. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. Create new links between existing nodes. Add nodes (page 877) as needed. New links cannot cross other links. If you draw a line or arc, it is converted to a polyline.
PAGE 905

5 To finish entering points, press Enter. 6 Optionally, modify the values for resistance (page 850) and direction (page 847). To add an existing link to a topology 1 Open the drawing where the network or polygon topology was created and load the topology. 2 Do one of the following: ■ To add a link to a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Add New Links. ■ To add a link to a polygon topology, type MAPAL on the command line.
PAGE 906

PROPERTIES Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties Adding a Polygon You can add a polygon using existing objects or new linework as a perimeter. To add a polygon to a polygon topology, the current drawing must be where the topology was created. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 907

New polygons can be added to an existing polygon topology. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Creating a Polygon Topology (page 833) ■ Loading or Unloading Topologies (page 906) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 908

To add a polygon to a polygon topology using existing linework 1 Open the drawing where the polygon topology was created and load the topology. To add a polygon to a polygon topology, the current drawing must be the drawing where the topology was created. 2 Do one of the following: ■ In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Add Polygon. ■ Type mapap on the command line. 3 In the map, select the border objects of the polygons to add. 4 Press Enter when you finish selecting polygons.
PAGE 909

Command Line MAPIL Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology ➤ Insert New Link Creating Centroids for Polygons If you have polygon objects or closed polylines with data attached to them, you can create centroids and move the data to the centroid. This is useful: ■ After you import or digitize objects. ■ Before using editing commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Boundary Break, or Boundary Trim. ■ When working with topology. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 910

Object data attached to closed polylines (above) and object data moved to centroids (below). AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the lines do not intersect each other, and that the area is greater than 0. It then creates a centroid inside each selected polygon or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid. For an object shaped like a figure eight, AutoCAD Map 3D creates one centroid. Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
PAGE 911

■ Importing Polygons (page 429) ■ Defining the Text Insertion Point (page 936) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines 1 Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Create Centroids. 2 In the Create Centroids dialog box (page 1801), specify whether to create centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects.
PAGE 912

Deleting Links, Nodes, and Polygons You can delete a node in a node, network, or polygon topology; a link in a network or polygon topology; or a polygon in a polygon topology. When you delete nodes, links, or polygons, object data and external database links may be lost. WARNING Both the topology information and associated objects are deleted. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 913

When you remove a link, any nodes that are not connected to other links are also removed. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Loading or Unloading Topologies (page 906) ■ Adding a Node (page 877) ■ Adding a Link (page 880) ■ Editing a Node (page 859) ■ Editing a Link (page 861) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 914

2 Do one of the following: ■ To delete a node from a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology. Click Delete Node. To delete a node from a network or polygon topology, type MAPDN on the command line. ■ To delete a link from a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology. Click Delete Links. To delete a link from a polygon topology, type MAPDL on the command line. ■ To delete a polygon from a polygon topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology. Click Delete Polygon.
PAGE 915

Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties Updating a Topology Objects in a topology have relationship data stored in an object data table. If you modify the objects using the topology editing commands (page 852), the topology data on the objects is updated.
PAGE 916

To update a topology 1 Verify that the topology containing the objects to update is loaded (page 907). ■ To update nodes in a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Update. To update nodes in a network or polygon topology, type MAPNODUPD on the command line. ■ To update links in a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Update. To update links in a polygon topology, type MAPLINKUPD on the command line.
PAGE 917

Updates a polygon topology Command Line MAPPOLYUPD Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Update Dialog Box MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topology Polygon command) PROPERTIES Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties Editing a Partial Topology In general, when editing a topology, you should retrieve the entire topology.
PAGE 918

Polygons at the edge of a queried polygon topology cannot be edited. See also: ■ Correcting or Completing a Topology (page 918) ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Loading or Unloading Topologies (page 906) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To retrieve objects to edit 1 Open a drawing, attach the source drawings that contain the topology you wish to edit, and make those source drawings active.
PAGE 919

5 In the Load Topology From Source Drawing dialog box (page 1978), make sure that both the Topology Objects options are not selected. Click OK. 6 In the Topology Query dialog box (page 2008), select or define a query. ■ To load an existing query, click Load Query and select the query. ■ To define a new query, click Define Query, and then define a query (page 1353) to retrieve the topology geometry you require. 7 Select Draw mode and execute the query.
PAGE 920

Menu Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load Topology. Icon Load Topology Command Line MAPTOPOLOAD Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Administration ➤ Load Topology Dialog Box Topology Selection dialog box MAPTOPOQUERY Queries topologies Menu Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Topology Query.
PAGE 921

Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties Creating Closed Polylines from a Polygon Topology You can create closed polylines from a polygon topology. This is useful if you want to give data to an AutoCAD user so the user can hatch polygonal areas. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 922

To create closed polylines from a polygon topology 1 Click Create tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ Create Closed Polylines. 2 In the Create Closed Polylines dialog box (page 1953), click Load to load the polygon topology or select from the Name list. All polygons in the selected topology are automatically selected. 3 Under How To Close, specify the layer to create the polylines. 4 Select Group Complex Polygons if you want to create a group containing all the elements of complex areas, such as islands.
PAGE 923

NOTE These procedures are for drawing objects only. There are no equivalents for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 924

When you use these tools, all source drawings associated with a named topology must be attached and active. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. Tell me more ■ Show me how to load a topology. ■ To manage topologies (page 899) ■ Create a network topology to show how lines are connected. ■ Find the shortest path through a network.
PAGE 925

To do this... Use this method... Unload an existing topology. In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name ➤ Administration ➤ Unload Topology. See Loading or Unloading Topologies (page 906) Rename a topology. In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name ➤ Administration ➤ Rename. See Renaming Topologies and Changing Their Descriptions (page 924) Audit or recreate a topology In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click an option from the Administration submenu.
PAGE 926

To do this... Use this method... Highlight all objects in a topology. In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name ➤ Show Geometry. See Highlighting and Identifying Topology (page 909) Highlight the topologies associated with an object. In Map Explorer, right-click the Topologies Delete a topology In Map Explorer, right-click the topology folder ➤ Show Topology. Click an object in the map. See Highlighting and Identifying Topology (page 909) name ➤ Administration ➤ Delete.
PAGE 927

Command Line MAPTOPOUNLOAD Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Administration ➤ Unload Topology Dialog Box Topology Selection dialog box MAPSHOWGEOM Highlights and identifies topologies for the selected object Menu At the Command prompt, enter mapshowgeom. Icon Show Geometry Command Line MAPSHOWGEOM Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Topologies ➤ Show Geometry MAPSHOWTOPO Highlights objects in the selected topology Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Show Topology Geometry.
PAGE 928

Menu In the Classic workspace, click File menu ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set Icon Save to Source Drawings Command Line ADESAVEOBJS Dialog Box Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box ADESELOBJS Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings Menu File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items To Save Set Icon Add Objects to Save Set Command Line ADESELOBJS Dialog Box ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command) MAPTOPOAUDIT Checks that a topology is complete and contains no err
PAGE 929

MAPTOPORECR Reestablishes a topology that was edited with nontopology editing commands such as STRETCH, PEDIT, and MOVE Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Recreate. Icon Recreate Topology Command Line MAPTOPORECR Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Administration ➤ Recreate Dialog Box Topology Selection dialog box MAPANOVERLAY Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Overlay.
PAGE 930

MAPTOPOREN Changes the name and description of a topology Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Rename. Command Line MAPTOPOREN Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Administration ➤ Rename Dialog Box Rename Topology dialog box MAPTOPODEL Removes topology data from objects and optionally deletes the objects Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Delete.
PAGE 931

■ To load a topology (page 907) ■ Create a network topology to show how lines are connected. ■ Find the shortest path through a network. ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Saving Topology to Source Drawings (page 916) ■ Adding an Object to the Save Set (page 750) ■ Saving New Objects to Attached Drawings (page 754) ■ Saving Objects to the Current Drawing (page 756) Procedure GIS Skill Related topics NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 932

■ Audit Geometry of Topology Objects — Select this option to verify that objects for the selected topology are geometrically correct. Any objects that are not correct are highlighted. In Map Explorer, the icon for the topology becomes colorful, indicating that the topology is loaded. To unload a topology ➤ In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name ➤ Administration ➤ Unload Topology. In Map Explorer, the icon for the topology is shaded to indicate it has been unloaded.
PAGE 933

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Administration ➤ Unload Topology Dialog Box Topology Selection dialog box Highlighting and Identifying Topology Using the topology highlighting and identification tools, you can do the following: ■ Show Geometry–Highlight the objects in a topology. Use Show Geometry to show the location and extent of a topology. ■ Show Topology–Identify and highlight the topologies associated with an object.
PAGE 934

Highlight objects in the selected topology. Highlights and identifies topologies for the selected object.
PAGE 935

See also: ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Loading or Unloading Topologies (page 906) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 936

To change the color used for highlighting 1 Click ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, click the Selection tab. 3 From the Selected Grip Color list, select the color to use for highlighting topologies. 4 Click OK. To remove highlighting and restore objects to their original color ■ Press Esc. Quick Reference MAPSHOWGEOM Highlights and identifies topologies for the selected object Menu At the Command prompt, enter mapshowgeom.
PAGE 937

Viewing Topology Data Information about each topology you create is stored in an object data table in the current drawing as shown in this table. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 938

You can also view and edit data associated with the objects in a topology using the Properties palette. For example, for a link in a network topology, you can view general information about the link, such as the ID of the start and end nodes, and you can edit specific information such as the direction, direct resistance, and reverse resistance of a link.
PAGE 939

4 To view the properties of another object, select it in the map. Quick Reference ADEEDITDATA Edits attached object data Menu Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data Icon Edit Object Data Command Line ADEEDITDATA Dialog Box Edit Object Data dialog box PROPERTIES Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object.
PAGE 940

Variance is the average of the squares of any given area, perimeter, or length minus the square of the average. Deviation is the square root of variance. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Loading or Unloading Topologies (page 906) ■ Viewing Topology Data (page 913) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 941

NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. If you retrieved data from source drawings, you can save back the topology information to the source drawings, and also save the current drawing. Future work with the topology should be done in the current drawing with the source drawings active and attached. This method ensures that complete and correct object data associated with the topology is available.
PAGE 942

Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings Menu In the Classic workspace, click File menu ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set Icon Save to Source Drawings Command Line ADESAVEOBJS Dialog Box Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box ADESELOBJS Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings Menu File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items To Save Set Icon Add Objects to Save Set Command Line ADESELOBJS Dialog Box ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command) Correcting or
PAGE 943

If you use a location query to retrieve polygons, make sure that you use a Crossing window. If you are using data that is shared with other users, be sure that you load the topology to ensure that you are using current data. Completing a Topology When you complete a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D looks at the objects and object data in a drawing, and attempts to complete a network or polygon topology by retrieving further drawing objects, such as links and centroids referenced by the topology object data tables.
PAGE 944

when you are exporting data to an external file format that does not support topologies. See also: ■ Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies (page 1319) ■ Querying a Topology (page 1348) ■ Creating a Network Topology (page 829) ■ Editing a Partial Topology (page 893) ■ Sliver Polygons (page 841) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To audit, recreate, or complete a topology ➤ In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name.
PAGE 945

Quick Reference MAPTOPOAUDIT Checks that a topology is complete and contains no errors Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Audit. Command Line MAPTOPOAUDIT Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Administration ➤ Audit MAPTOPOCOMP Completes a network or polygon topology Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Complete.
PAGE 946

Saving and Loading Settings Using Profiles You can save your topology overlay analysis or network analysis (path trace, best route analysis, or flood trace) settings in a profile and use them again later. This can save time if you plan to use the same settings more than once. Profiles are also useful when you automate topology analysis with scripts. Topology profiles are saved as *.tpf files.
PAGE 947

■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Network Analysis. 2 Specify the settings to save. For more information, see Analyzing Drawing Topologies (page 1318). 3 Click Save. 4 In the Save Topology Profile dialog box, enter a name for the profile. Click Save. To load an existing topology profile 1 In any of the Topology Overlay Analysis or Network Topology Analysis dialog boxes, click Load. 2 In the Select Topology Profile dialog box, select the profile to load. Topology profiles are saved as *.
PAGE 948

MAPANTOPONET Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace) Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Network Analysis. Icon Network Analyze Command Line MAPANTOPONET Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis Dialog Box Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box Renaming Topologies and Changing Their Descriptions You can change the name, description, or both of a complete, loaded topology.
PAGE 949

NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To change the name, description, or both of a topology 1 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name ➤ Administration ➤ Rename. You can only rename topologies that are loaded and completely represented. 2 In the Rename Topology dialog box (page 1988), edit the name or description. Click OK. Names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters. Names cannot contain spaces.
PAGE 950

See also: ■ Loading or Unloading Topologies (page 906) ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To delete a topology 1 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name ➤ Administration ➤ Delete. NOTE Load a topology and verify that it is completely represented before deleting it.
PAGE 951

To use Map editing tools ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To use the AutoCAD Map 3D editing tools (page 928) To move, rotate, or scale an object (page 931) To rubber sheet two maps (page 935) To define text location (page 937) To fill a closed polyline with a solid-looking hatch (page 939) To break objects at a boundary (page 941) To save the data back to the source drawings after a boundary break (page 942) To create an enlarged map section (page 943) To trim objects inside a boundary (page 945) To use grips (
PAGE 952

■ To use Map editing tools (page 927) ■ Find and Edit Objects in Attached Drawings ■ Georeference parcels by rubbersheeting. ■ Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351) ■ Editing Topologies (page 851) Procedure Workflow GIS Skill Related topics NOTE These commands work on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713).
PAGE 953

■ Match Map Edges (page 951) Notes and Warnings ■ To perform general and object-specific editing operations, use the AutoCAD editing commands. For more information, see the AutoCAD Help. ■ Do not use any of the methods described above to edit topologies; you might not be able to recreate the topology. Use the topology editing commands (page 851) instead.
PAGE 954

Moves, scales, and rotates a set of objects Menu Modify menu ➤ Transform Command Line ADETRANSFORM Dialog Box ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) MAPBREAK Breaks objects along a selected or defined boundary Menu Modify menu ➤ Boundary Break Icon Boundary Break Command Line MAPBREAK Dialog Box Break Objects at Boundary dialog box MAPCREATECENTROIDS Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid Menu Create menu ➤ Centroids Icon Create Centroids Command Line MAPCREATECENTROIDS Dia
PAGE 955

Moving, Rotating, and Scaling an Object You can simultaneously move, rotate, and scale a group of objects using the Transform editing tool. NOTE This command works on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713). For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help.
PAGE 956

Selected objects are offset by the difference between the original base point and the new point. 7 Define a new rotation and scale, separated by a comma. Selected objects are rotated the difference between the new rotation and the old rotation. They are scaled based on the ratio of the new scale to the old scale.
PAGE 957

The reference map is correct, but the map with new details is severely distorted. By running the Rubber Sheeting command and selecting common control points, the two maps can be correctly aligned. When selecting points for rubber sheeting, select points in order around the perimeter of the object or region to be rubber sheeted. correct incorrect The selected points are treated as the vertices of a polygon, so you will get better results if you select the points sequentially around the perimeter.
PAGE 958

Because rubber sheeting is not a linear transformation, it is difficult to reverse the effects of the transformation and return a drawing to its original state. You should save your drawing before you perform a rubber sheeting operation. Changing Scale Do not rubber sheet two maps drawn at different scales. If you do, the command matches objects and changes the original scaling of text and blocks to match the new scaling, which can change data significantly.
PAGE 959

NOTE This command works on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713). For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help. To rubber sheet two maps 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Rubber Sheet. 2 At the ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command) (page 1648) prompt, for Base point 1, specify the first common feature on map 2, the warped map.
PAGE 960

Defining the Text Insertion Point You can add text to objects using the Alter Properties feature in the Define Query dialog box (page 1838). By default, AutoCAD Map 3D positions the text at the centroid of the object. NOTE This command works on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713). For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help.
PAGE 961

See also: ■ Adding Text to Queried Drawing Objects (page 1276) ■ Dot Variables (page 1546) NOTE This command works on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713). For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help. The label point of an object specifies the starting point for text added during a query property alteration.
PAGE 962

Filling a Closed Polyline You can fill closed polylines in your drawing with solid fills and hatch patterns. For example, you can use one color to show counties with a population over 10,000 and another color to show counties under 10,000. Filling closed polylines NOTE This command works on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713).
PAGE 963

To fill closed polylines automatically with hatch patterns or solid fills when performing queries, use the Alter Properties feature in the Define Query dialog box (page 1838). If you set the Create Associative Hatch Objects option on the Query tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), AutoCAD Map 3D creates associative hatch objects for hatch objects created by the ADEFILLPOLYG command, the ADEQUERY command (using Alter Properties), and the MAPTHEMATIC command (using a fill).
PAGE 964

Breaking Objects at a Closed Boundary Using the Boundary Break option, you can break any objects that cross a given line. This capability lets you save maps back to source drawings with clean edges or plot maps without overlapping borders. It functions like the AutoCAD BREAK command for a selected set of objects and a polyline boundary. NOTE This command works on drawing objects only.
PAGE 965

source drawings as the boundary. Using save back extents combines the extents of all active source drawings as the boundary. The edges of the boundary do not have to form a rectilinear shape. If you are breaking using lines of latitude and longitude, the edges form a trapezoidal shape. Retaining Object Data You can also choose to retain existing attached object data and links to external database records on the objects created by the break.
PAGE 966

5 Under Objects To Break, specify whether to select objects manually or automatically, and whether to use only objects on selected layers. 6 Under Break Method, specify whether to exclude topology objects, and whether to retain object data on the objects. 7 Click OK. 8 In the Confirm Save Back dialog box, click Yes. The objects are broken according to the location of the save back extents. To save the data back to the source drawings after a boundary break 1 Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Save To Source.
PAGE 967

NOTE This command works on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713). For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help. Use Boundary Break to isolate an area, then move and scale up the selected area. This is useful for map inserts. Adding an inset to a map communicates the focus of the map better.
PAGE 968

Quick Reference MAPBREAK Breaks objects along a selected or defined boundary Menu Modify menu ➤ Boundary Break Icon Boundary Break Command Line MAPBREAK Dialog Box Break Objects at Boundary dialog box Trimming Objects at a Boundary Using the Boundary Trim command, you can specify a closed boundary as a trimming edge for a selected set of objects. You can use this option to trim objects inside or outside a boundary.
PAGE 969

See also: ■ Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822) ■ Overview of Polygons (page 955) NOTE This command works on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713). For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help. To trim objects inside a boundary 1 Open a drawing and attach the maps you want. 2 Define and execute a query to retrieve the objects to trim.
PAGE 970

5 Under Objects To Trim, specify whether to select objects manually or automatically, and whether to use only objects on selected layers. 6 Under Trim Method, specify whether to trim inside or outside the boundary. Specify whether to exclude topology objects, and whether to retain object data on the objects. If you select Retain Object Data, object data and external link data is duplicated on each piece of a trimmed object. If data is not retained, it remains attached only to the original location.
PAGE 971

WARNING Using these editing commands to edit a topology can corrupt the topology. Instead, use the Editing topologies (page 851) commands. NOTE This command works on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713). For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help. You can also use object grips to correct errors.
PAGE 972

To select more than one grip, hold down the Shift key as you select each grip. 5 Select a new point. The grip you selected is relocated to the selected point, stretching the rest of the objects associated with that grip. As you move the cursor, it snaps or locks onto an object grip when it moves into the square zone representing the grip. You can use this feature instead of using an object snap such as Endpoint or Midpoint.
PAGE 973

Object data attached to closed polylines (above) and object data moved to centroids (below). AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the lines do not intersect each other, and that the area is greater than 0. It then creates a centroid inside each selected polygon or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid. For an object shaped like a figure eight, AutoCAD Map 3D creates one centroid. Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
PAGE 974

NOTE This command works on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713). For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help. To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines 1 Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Create Centroids.
PAGE 975

NOTE This command works on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713). For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help. Use the edge-matching process on one layer at a time. You might edge match the roads on the two maps first. You can avoid using edge matching by digitizing a complete map in one session, rather than breaking the map into smaller sections.
PAGE 976

4 On the Drawing Cleanup - Select Objects Page (page 1595), click Select All. You can specify the layer(s) you want to use, for example, the layer containing road data, and anchor objects as needed. Click Next. 5 On the Select Actions Page (page 1588), in the Cleanup Actions list, click Snap Clustered Nodes and then click Add. 6 In the Selected Actions list, click Snap Clustered Nodes. Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value just greater than the offset distance between objects.
PAGE 977

Command Line MAPCLEAN Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup Digitizing Points Using Coordinates You can digitize new points in existing maps with precision by using the Track Coordinates feature to specify the exact coordinates of the points. NOTE This command works on drawing objects only. For information about editing geospatial feature data, see Using Feature Editing Commands (page 704) and Using AutoCAD Commands on Features (page 713). For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help.
PAGE 978

■ Press Enter. The appropriate coordinates are entered on the command line. You can continue to enter coordinates. Quick Reference MAPTRACKCS Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any coordinate system Menu Analyze menu ➤ Track Coordinate Sytem.
PAGE 979

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To delete boundaries (page 964) To move boundaries (page 964) To edit nodes on a boundary (page 965) To change the boundary type (page 965) To rebalance the polygon object (page 965) To edit the fill property for the polygon object (page 966) To specify a different color for the polygon fill and outline (page 967) To set the default fill pattern for polygons (page 967) To split a polygon object (page 969) To convert polylines to polygons (page 971) To convert a polygon topolog
PAGE 980

Term Definition Balancing Process of recalculating which boundaries are outer or inner. Nested boundaries are alternately classified as outer and inner. That is, the outermost boundary is classified as an outer boundary. A boundary nested within this boundary is an inner boundary. A boundary nested within the inner boundary is classified as an outer boundary. Inner boundary Nested boundary that is totally within an outer boundary.
PAGE 981

In addition to outer and inner boundaries, there is an Annotation boundary type. This boundary has the characteristics of an inner boundary, but only affects the display of the pattern fill and is ignored when calculating the area or interior of the polygon object. Its primary purpose is to allow you to annotate your drawings without the fill pattern of the polygon obscuring the annotations. The annotation will typically consist of text or blocks.
PAGE 982

Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid Menu Create menu ➤ Centroids Icon Create Centroids Command Line MAPCREATECENTROIDS Dialog Box Create Centroids dialog box MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON Converts closed polylines to polygons Menu At the Command prompt, enter mappolylinetopolygon. Icon Convert Polylines to Polygons Command Line MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONS Converts an existing polygon topology to polygons Menu At the Command prompt, enter maptopologytopolygons.
PAGE 983

Menu Click Modify ➤ Edit MPolygon. Icon Edit Polygon Command Line MAPMPEDIT Dialog Box MAPMPEDIT (Edit Polygon command) MPFILL Sets the default fill for polygons Menu At the Command prompt, enter mpfill. Icon Polygon Fill Settings Command Line MPFILL Dialog Box Polygon Fill Properties dialog box MPOLYGON Create polygon Menu Create ➤ Mpolygon Icon MPolygon Command Line MPOLYGON MPSPLIT Splits an existing polygon into two new polygons Menu At the Command prompt, enter mpsplit.
PAGE 984

Creating Polygon Objects Create polygon objects by selecting existing closed polyline objects and circles, or by specifying points. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about polygonal geospatial feature data, see Creating New Polygon and MultiPolygon Features (page 689). The boundaries of a polygon object can overlap or touch, but they cannot cross.
PAGE 985

5 Enter c to close the polygon. To set the Fill property for polygon objects 1 On the command line, enter mpfill. Press Enter. 2 Enter f. 3 In the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box (page 1824), set the polygon fill properties. These properties are applied to the polygon that you are drawing and all new polygons you create or convert. To fill with... Do this in the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box... Solid ■ Click the Hatch tab. ■ For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
PAGE 986

4 Continue creating the polygon by following the steps in the previous procedure. Quick Reference MPOLYGON Create polygon Menu Create ➤ Mpolygon Icon MPolygon Command Line MPOLYGON Modifying Polygon Objects You can edit a polygon by editing its boundaries (adding, deleting, moving, or disconnecting them), changing its fill properties, moving nodes in a boundary, changing individual boundary types to Inner or Outer, or rebalancing the polygon.
PAGE 987

Filling a Polygon You can change the default fill color and pattern assigned to polygons. For color, you can choose from a variety of colors including true colors and colors from imported color books. For fill pattern, you can select a predefined hatch pattern, define your own hatch pattern, choose a solid color, or define a oneor two-color gradient fill. To style polygons to use one color for the fill and a different color for the outline, create a Display Manager layer for the polygons.
PAGE 988

2 In the drawing area, select the polygon to edit. 3 Enter a. 4 Select the polygon or closed polyline to add to the polygon. The boundary is added to the polygon and assigned an inner or outer boundary type based on its relationship to the rest of the object 5 Repeat Step 2 to add any other boundaries. 6 When the selection is completed, you can rebalance the polygon by entering r. To delete boundaries 1 At the Command prompt, enter mapmpedit (page 1818). 2 Select the polygon to edit.
PAGE 989

To edit nodes on a boundary 1 At the Command prompt, enter mapmpedit (page 1818). 2 Select the polygon to edit. 3 Enter e. 4 Click a boundary object to edit. 5 Click the node to edit. TIP Press the Spacebar to move to the next node. Enter r to remove the node, m to move the node, or i to insert a new node. You can not modify the boundary in a way that would make it cross another boundary in the polygon. For example, you cannot delete a node if that would make the current boundary cross an inner boundary.
PAGE 990

To edit the fill property for the polygon object 1 At the Command prompt, enter mapmpedit (page 1818). 2 Select the polygon to edit. 3 Enter f. 4 In the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box (page 1824), edit the polygon fill properties. These properties are applied to the polygon that you are editing. To fill with... Do this in the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box... Solid ■ Click the Hatch tab. ■ For Pattern Type, select Predefined. ■ For Pattern Name, select Solid.
PAGE 991

To specify a different color for the polygon fill and outline 1 Create a Display Manager layer for the polygons. In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Drawing Layer. 2 Right-click the new layer and click Add Style ➤ Entity. 3 Right-click the Entity Style entry and click Properties. 4 Change the Color for the Entity to the desired outline color. 5 Right-click the layer again and click Add Style ➤ Hatch. 6 Right-click the Hatch Style entry and click Properties.
PAGE 992

MPFILL Sets the default fill for polygons At the Command prompt, enter mpfill. Menu Icon Polygon Fill Settings Command Line MPFILL Dialog Box Polygon Fill Properties dialog box Splitting Polygon Objects You can split an existing polygon into two new polygons. The existing polygon is deleted. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about splitting polygonal geospatial feature data, see Splitting Features (page 705).
PAGE 993

See also: ■ Modifying Polygon Objects (page 962) ■ Setting Polygon Options (page 977) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. For information about splitting polygonal geospatial feature data, see To split a feature (page 708). To split a polygon object 1 On the command line, enter mpsplit (page 1821). Press Enter. 2 Select the polygon to split. 3 Specify the line to split the polygon: ■ To split the polygon by drawing a line, enter d.
PAGE 994

Converting Polylines to Polygons You can convert all, or a selection of, the closed polylines in an existing drawing to polygon objects. When you convert a closed polyline, the original polyline is erased and is replaced with a polygon object. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about converting polygonal geospatial feature data to polygons, see Importing Polygons (page 429).
PAGE 995

Converting Nested Polylines to Polygons This illustration shows a state with lakes as closed polylines. To create a complex polygon with islands, holes, or discontinuous polygons, first use the GROUP command to group the objects that you want to include in the polygon. Then use the MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON command. WARNING When you group objects, only the data from the outermost boundary is maintained. The data from nested objects is lost.
PAGE 996

2 On the command line, enter mappolylinetopolygon (page 1817). Press Enter. 3 If you already had a selection set, the selected closed polylines are converted. If you did not have a selection set, select the polylines to convert. Press Enter. Each closed polyline in the selection set is converted. If the polyline belongs to a group, only the first (outermost) polyline is converted. Other polylines in the group are copied into the polygon as additional boundaries and the polygon is rebalanced.
PAGE 997

This illustration shows a polygon topology. You can create polygons for each polygon in the polygon topology, which is useful when exporting to other formats. This illustration shows lakes as part of a state topology. To create a polygon for the state with "holes" in it for the lakes, select the Group Complex Polygons option. Converting Polygon Topology with Nested Boundaries When you have nested polygons in your topology, you have several options on how to convert them.
PAGE 998

See also: ■ Converting Polylines to Polygons (page 970) ■ Overview of Polygons (page 955) ■ Setting Polygon Options (page 977) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data. To convert a polygon topology to polygons 1 On the command line, enter maptopologytopolygons. Press Enter. 2 In the Create Polygons From Topology dialog box (page 1823), for Name, select the topology to convert. Click Load Topology to select and load the topology.
PAGE 999

When objects are converted to polygons, they use the color or hatch set by the MPFILL command (page 978). Quick Reference MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONS Converts an existing polygon topology to polygons Menu At the Command prompt, enter maptopologytopolygons.
PAGE 1000

Object data attached to closed polylines (above) and object data moved to centroids (below). When you use this feature, AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the selected polygons or closed polylines are clean; that is, that the lines do not intersect each other, and that the area is greater than 0. It creates a centroid inside each selected polygon or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid. For a 'figure eight' object, AutoCAD Map 3D creates one centroid.
PAGE 1001

■ Overview of Polygons (page 955) NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about converting polygonal geospatial feature data to polygons and creating centroids for them, see To import polygons (page 430). To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines 1 Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Create Centroids. 2 In the Create Centroids dialog box (page 1801), specify whether to create centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects.
PAGE 1002

you can select the option to import polygons as polylines. You can also change the default setting for this option. When objects are imported as polygons, they use the default fill color and pattern set by the MPFILL command. Boundaries come in as usual, using the default layer color unless another color is specified in the imported file. You can change the default fill color and pattern assigned to polygons.
PAGE 1003

2 In the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box (page 1824), select the polygon fill properties. To fill with... Do this in the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box... Solid ■ Click the Hatch tab. ■ For Pattern Type, select Predefined. ■ For Pattern Name, select Solid. ■ For Fill Color, select the fill color. Click Select Color to select from a large palette of colors. ■ Click the Hatch tab. ■ For Pattern Type, select Predefined. ■ For Pattern Name, select a pattern. ■ Click the Hatch tab.
PAGE 1004

2 Enter e to view edges only, f to view fill only, or b to view both edges and fill. 3 On the command line, enter regen. Quick Reference MAPUSEMPOLYGON Turns on and off the ability to use mapping polygons Command Line MAPUSEMPOLYGON Dialog Box MAPUSEMPOLYGON MPFILL Sets the default fill for polygons Menu At the Command prompt, enter mpfill.
PAGE 1005

Using Object Classification Use object classification to organize drawing objects in your map based on the real-world objects that they represent. When you create an object using object classification, the object automatically has properties and values assigned to it based on its classification. NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. For information about the classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas (page 551).
PAGE 1006

Use object classification to organize objects in your drawing based on the real-world features that they represent, for example, roads or manholes. When you create an object using object classification, the object automatically has properties and values assigned to it based on its object classification. In addition, you can find or select all objects in an object class. Setting Up Object Classification ■ Start by determining the standard objects you use in your organization.
PAGE 1007

When you select a road in your drawing, the Object Class tab shows all the properties associated with the object class Road. Edit a value by clicking in the box and selecting an item from the list.
PAGE 1008

2 Define an object class (page 120). This step is often performed by the CAD Manager in your organization. 3 Use object classification to standardize the objects in your drawings. ■ Create new objects using object classification (page 987). These new objects are created using the standard properties specified for the object class. ■ Assign an object class to an existing object (page 989). The properties and data associated with the object are changed to match the standards specified for the object class.
PAGE 1009

CLASSIFY Classifies existing objects Menu Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Classify Objects.
PAGE 1010

Command Line MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-clickObject Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects Dialog Box MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects command) MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED Selects all objects that have no classification assigned to them Menu Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Select Unclassified.
PAGE 1011

Dialog Box New Object Class Definition File dialog box UNCLASSIFY Removes classification from an object Menu Click Modify ➤ Unclassify Objects. Icon Unclassify Objects Command Line UNCLASSIFY Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Object Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects Creating Classified Drawing Objects Use object classes to create new objects with a predefined set of properties and values. NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only.
PAGE 1012

See also: ■ Overview of Object Classification (page 981) ■ Editing Object Class Data (page 991) ■ Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 995) NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. For information about the classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas (page 551). To create a classified drawing object 1 In Map Explorer, right-click an object class. Click Create Classified Object.
PAGE 1013

NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. For information about the classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas (page 551). Before you assign an object class, make sure that the properties specified in the object class definition are available in the drawing. For example, if the object class definition specifies a linetype, make sure the specified linetype is loaded into the drawing.
PAGE 1014

If objects do not match the object type of the object class, they are filtered out of the selection set and are not classified. To unclassify an object 1 In Map Explorer, right-click Object Classes. Click Unclassify Objects. 2 Select the objects to unclassify. 3 When you finish selecting objects, press Enter. The object classification tag is removed from the selected objects. Quick Reference CLASSIFY Classifies existing objects Menu Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Classify Objects.
PAGE 1015

Editing Object Class Data Edit object class (page 2069) data for the selected object from the Object Class tab of the Properties palette. NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. For information about the classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas (page 551). If you enter values on the Object Class tab that are outside the allowable range for this property, the value resets to the default value.
PAGE 1016

Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of objects Menu Analyze ➤ Properties Icon Properties Command Line PROPERTIES Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties Selecting Objects by Object Class In your current map, you can create a selection set of objects, based on their object class (page 2069). For example, you could select all Roads. NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only.
PAGE 1017

To select objects in your current map, based on their object class To select this... Use this method... Objects assigned to a specific object class In Map Explorer, right-click the object class name ➤ Select Classified Objects (MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (page 1779)).
PAGE 1018

Quick Reference MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED Selects all classified objects Menu Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Select Features.
PAGE 1019

Attaching an Object Class Definition File The object class definition (page 2069) file includes information on how to create each object class you have defined. You can change the object class definition file that is associated with the current map. Only definitions in the associated definition file can be assigned to objects or used to create new features. NOTE For information on the location of the object class definition file, consult your CAD Manager.
PAGE 1020

Dialog Box Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box Working with Survey Data ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Overview of Working with Survey Data (page 997) Working with Survey Data Stores (page 999) Working with Projects (page 1001) Working with Surveys (page 1002) Working with Point Groups (page 1004) Working with Survey Points (page 1005) Creating Surfaces From Survey Data (page 1009) NOTE Survey data is a particular type of geospatial data. You cannot use survey functionality for drawing objects.
PAGE 1021

■ To create a surface from points in your drawing (page 1011) Overview of Working with Survey Data You can manage survey data on the Survey tab of the Task Pane AutoCAD Map 3D allows you to manage survey point data. NOTE Survey data is a particular type of geospatial data. You cannot use survey functionality for drawing objects.
PAGE 1022

■ Export points to LandXML format ■ Use the Bulk Copy feature to export points to another data store to create geospatial features. For example, if each survey point represents a telephone pole, you can export the points to an SDF file called Telephone_poles.sdf. You can then add Telephone_poles.sdf to your map using Data Connect and work with the point data as geospatial features. Survey data is kept in a dedicated SDF data store.
PAGE 1023

To do this... Use this method... ■ View and Edit Survey Point Data in the Point Table (page 1008) Create geospatial features from survey points. Create Geospatial Features from Survey Points (page 1008) Export survey point data to LandXML. Export Survey Points to LandXML (page 1471) Working with Survey Data Stores Survey data is kept in a dedicated SDF data store.
PAGE 1024

NOTE Survey data is a particular type of geospatial data. You cannot use survey functionality for drawing objects. To create a survey data store 1 On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, click Data ➤ New Survey Data Store. 2 In theNew Data Store dialog box (page 1891) , click section. in the File Location 3 In the Create New Survey Data Store dialog box, enter a name for and select a location to which to save your file, then click Save.
PAGE 1025

Quick Reference Survey Data Store Store survey point data in an SDF file. Task Pane On the Survey tab, click Data ➤ New Survey Data Store to create a new data store. Click Data ➤ Connect to Survey Data Store to connect to an existing survey data store. Dialog Box New Data Store dialog box Working with Projects When you import a LandXML file into AutoCAD Map 3D, it appears in the Survey Tree as a Project. Projects are the primary organizational group within a survey data store.
PAGE 1026

To rename a project 1 Right-click the project you want to rename. 2 Select Rename Project. 3 Enter the new name for the project, then press Enter. To remove a project from a survey data store 1 Right-click the project you want to remove. 2 Select Remove Project. 3 Click Yes in the Confirm Remove Project message box to remove the project from the survey data store. To view or edit project properties 1 Right-click the project and select Properties. The Project Properties dialog box (page 1892) appears.
PAGE 1027

Any points that are not assigned to a point group appear in the Unclassified Points group. For more information on working with ungrouped points, see Working with Survey Points (page 1005). You can add a new point group to a survey, remove a point group from a survey, rename a survey, or remove a survey from a project. You can also view and edit survey properties in the Survey Properties dialog box (page 1893). You cannot create a new survey in AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 1028

To view or edit survey properties 1 Right-click the survey and select Properties. The Survey Properties dialog box (page 1893) appears. 2 To edit survey properties, click the field to edit and enter your data in the Field Note Editor (page 1894). Fields with constrained values will display a drop-down list. Quick Reference Survey Properties View or edit survey properties. Task Pane On the Survey tab, right-click a survey ➤ Properties.
PAGE 1029

To remove a point group from a project or survey 1 Right-click the point group you want to remove. 2 Select Remove Point Group. 3 Click Yes in the Confirm Remove Point Group message box to remove the point group from the project. To view or edit point group properties 1 Right-click the point group and select Properties. The Point Group Properties dialog box (page 1894) appears. 2 To edit point group properties, click the field you wish to edit and enter your data.
PAGE 1030

For information on exporting survey points to a LandXML file, see Exporting Survey Points to a LandXML File (page 1471). NOTE Survey data is a particular type of geospatial data. You cannot use survey functionality for drawing objects. To create survey points 1 Click Edit in the Survey Task Pane toolstrip. 2 Right-click the project, survey, or point group to which you want to add a point. 3 Select Create New Point. 4 Specify the location of the new point on the map.
PAGE 1031

3 Right-click the Points node in the point group to which you want to move the copied points. 4 Select Paste. You can also copy and paste individual points, or a selection of points, using the Point Table. 1 In the Point Table, select the rows containing the points you wish to copy. 2 Right-click the row header (the grey row selection button to the left of the object ID number) for that data and select Copy Points. 3 In the Data drop-down list, select the node to which you wish to paste the copied points.
PAGE 1032

You can also delete selected points from a point group using the Point Table. 1 Click Edit in the Survey Task Pane toolstrip. 2 In the Point Table, select the rows containing the points you wish to delete. 3 Right-click the row header (the grey row selection button to the left of the object ID number) for the selected points and select Delete Points. 4 In the Confirm Delete Points dialog box, click Yes.
PAGE 1033

Creating Surfaces From Survey Data AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 allows you to create GeoTIFF raster surfaces from point data. You can enter point data in a variety of text formats as well as from AcDb point data and block references in your drawing. AutoCAD Map 3Dalso supports LandXML data sources that include a surface element; you cannot use a LandXML data source that contains only points.
PAGE 1034

2 In the Create Surface dialog box (page 1895), click and select File. 3 In the Select a Point File dialog box, select the file format and navigate to your point file. 4 Click Open. 5 In the Formatting section, specify the formatting and vertical (Z) unit of your data file. 6 In the Output File Name field, click and enter a file name and save location. If you do not specify a save location, the raster file will be saved to My Documents.
PAGE 1035

6 In the Output File Name field, click and enter a file name and save location. If you do not specify a save location, the raster file will be saved to My Documents. 7 In the Layer Name field, enter a name for the new Display Manager raster layer. 8 In the Coordinate System Assignment section, specify the coordinate system of the source data. You can either enter the code in the text field, or click to choose from a list. You must specify the coordinate system for each data source you use. 9 Click OK.
PAGE 1036

Creates a 3D raster surface from point data. Command Line MAPCREATESURFACE Dialog Box Create Surface dialog box Working With Point Cloud Data The following sections describe how to work with point cloud data. Overview of Point Clouds Point clouds (page 2071) are large data sets composed of 3D point data. Aerial LiDAR (page 2066) (Light Detection And Ranging) laser scanners are the most common instruments used to collect geographic point cloud data.
PAGE 1037

these survey swaths and filter them by location to get the point cloud data relevant to your map. To use LiDAR data ■ Bring in LiDAR data (page 374) ■ Manage LiDAR data (page 1015) ■ Use LiDAR data to create a point cloud data store (page 1019) Quick Reference MAPPOINTCLOUDMANAGER Creates and manages indexed point cloud data stores. Command Line MAPPOINTCLOUDMANAGER Dialog Box Point Cloud Manager MAPSURFACEMANAGER Creates a 3D raster surface from point cloud data.
PAGE 1038

■ Filter point cloud data (page 1024) ■ Create surfaces from point cloud data (page 1021) ■ Style point cloud data (page 675) ■ Export point cloud data (page 1451) Quick Reference MAPPOINTCLOUDMANAGER Creates and manages indexed point cloud data stores. Command Line MAPPOINTCLOUDMANAGER Dialog Box Point Cloud Manager MAPSURFACEMANAGER Creates a 3D raster surface from point cloud data.
PAGE 1039

Managing LiDAR Data The Point Cloud Manager After you have brought files into the Point Cloud Manager (page 1897), you can gather them into merge groups, specify coordinate systems for your point cloud data store files, and apply filters to control what data will be included in their associated point cloud data store. When you create a Merge Group, AutoCAD Map 3D assigns several LiDAR source files to a single point cloud data store.
PAGE 1040

When you remove a merge group from the Point Cloud Manager, the files contained within the group remain. To remove files from the Point Cloud Manager, select the file and click Remove File. All files added to the Point Cloud Manager appear there until you explicitly remove them. You can apply a filter to your LiDAR source data to control what points are included in your point cloud data store. You can also filter point cloud data after it has been added to your map.
PAGE 1041

2 Enter a new file name and save location, then click Save. To create a merge group 1 In the Point Cloud Manager (page 1897), click Create Group. A new merge group appears in the Point Cloud Manager. 2 To rename the merge group, click in the Source field and enter a new name. 3 Shift-click or control-click to select the source files in the Point Cloud Manager, then drag them into the merge group.
PAGE 1042

2 In the Filter Point Cloud dialog box (page 1900)in the Filter By drop-down box, select one of the following filters: ■ Classification: if your LiDAR data has been classified, you can select which point classes to include in your point cloud data store. Shift-click or control-click to select multiple classes. ■ Elevation: type the elevation ranges you want to include in your point cloud data store. Use hyphens to define ranges and commas to separate them; for example, 150-200, 350-400, 1200-2000.
PAGE 1043

Using LiDAR Data to Create a Point Cloud Data Store Once you have brought your LiDAR data into the Point Cloud Manager (page 1897), you are ready to create a point cloud data store. A point cloud data store is an index file (.ISD) that AutoCAD Map 3D refers to when it creates point cloud objects. These index files can be very large, up to ten times as large as their LAS source files.
PAGE 1044

5 When AutoCAD Map 3D is done creating the index file, a green check mark appears next to the file or merge group name. You can now take one of the following actions: ■ To add the point cloud to your map, click Add to Map. AutoCAD Map 3D adds the point cloud drawing object to your map, and adds a point cloud layer to the Display Manager. ■ To add a group of point clouds to your map, shift-click or control-click to select a group of files, then click Add to Map.
PAGE 1045

Creating Surfaces From Point Cloud Data The Surface Manager You can create a raster-based surface (page 2076) from point cloud data in either GeoTIFF or ESRI ASC format. After you have created your surface, you can view, theme, and analyze it like any other raster-based surface in AutoCAD Map 3D. For more information on working with raster-based surfaces, see Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437), Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 1186), and Styling Raster Images (page 671).
PAGE 1046

See also: ■ Overview of Point Clouds (page 1012) ■ Overview of LiDAR Data (page 1012) ■ Overview of Point Cloud Files and Objects (page 1013) ■ Bringing in LiDAR Data (page 374) ■ Using LiDAR Data to Create a Point Cloud Data Store (page 1019) ■ Managing LiDAR Data (page 1015) ■ Filtering Point Cloud Data (page 1024) ■ Exporting Point Cloud Data (page 1451) To create a surface from a point cloud 1 In the Display Manager, right-click a point cloud layer and select Create Surface.
PAGE 1047

5 To specify what type of surface to create, click the Parameters field. The Grid Parameters dialog box (page 1901) appears. You can: ■ Specify a GeoTIFF or ESRI ASC surface. ■ Specify a file name and save location for the grid file. ■ Specify parameters for cell size, cell units (meters, US feet, Survey feet, International feet), and search radius. These settings affect the resolution of the grid file only.
PAGE 1048

Quick Reference MAPSURFACEMANAGER Creates a 3D raster surface from point cloud data. Command Line MAPSURFACEMANAGER Dialog Box Surface Manager Filtering Point Cloud Data You can filter point clouds by point classification, elevation, LiDAR intensity, and location on your map. You can also create a new point cloud data store from your filtered point cloud data. Filters applied in the Display Manager or Point Cloud Ribbon only control the display of points in your map.
PAGE 1049

To filter point cloud data 1 In the Display Manager, right-click a point cloud layer and select Filter Point Cloud. 2 In the Filter Point Cloud dialog box (page 1900), in the Filter By drop-down box, select one of the following filters: ■ Classification: if your point cloud data has been classified, you can select which point classes to display. Shift-click or control-click to select multiple classes. ■ Elevation: type the elevation ranges you want to display in your map.
PAGE 1050

NOTE By default, AutoCAD Map 3D gives the new index file the same name as the source file. Be sure that you specify a new name for your filtered point cloud data store to avoid overwriting your source file. 3 To cancel the indexing process, click Cancel Processing. 4 When AutoCAD Map 3D is done creating the index file, a green check mark appears next to the file or merge group name. Do one of the following: To add the point cloud to your map, click Add to Map.
PAGE 1051

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To create a point using the COGO Input dialog box transparently (page 1028) To use COGO commands (page 1029) To specify a point using angle and distance (page 1032) To specify a point using bearing and distance (page 1034) To specify a point using bearings from two existing points (page 1036) To specify a point using a deflection angle and a distance (page 1038) To specify a point using distances from two existing points (page 1040) To specify a point using azimuth and distance (page 10
PAGE 1052

See also: ■ Using Angle and Distance to Specify a Point (page 1032) ■ Using Bearing and Distance to Specify a Point (page 1034) ■ Using Bearings from Two Points to Specify a Point (page 1036) ■ Using Deflection and Distance to Specify a Point (page 1037) ■ Using Distances from Two Points to Specify a Point (page 1040) ■ Using Azimuth and Distance to Specify a Point (page 1042) ■ Using Distance and Offset from a Line to Specify a Point (page 1044) ■ Creating an Inverse Report (page 1045) ■ S
PAGE 1053

7 When the transparent command finishes, continue responding to the prompts for the original command. To use COGO commands To do this... Use this method... Use an angle and a distance from another point to create an object. Use COGO to enter angle and distance to specify a point. (page 1032) Use a bearing and a distance from another point to create an object. Use COGO to enter bearing and distance to specify a point. (page 1034) Use bearings from two points to create a point.
PAGE 1054

AD Specifies a point based on angle and distance from a given point Icon Angle/Distance Command Line 'AD Dialog Box COGO Input dialog box BB Specifies a coordinate geometry point using two points and two bearings Menu Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ COGO Drop-down ➤ COGO Input. Icon Bearing/Bearing Command Line 'BB Dialog Box COGO Input dialog box BD Specifies a point based on bearing and distance from a given point Menu Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ COGO Drop-down ➤ COGO Input.
PAGE 1055

Icon Deflection/Distance Command Line 'DD Dialog Box COGO Input dialog box DDIST Specifies a coordinate geometry point using two points and two distances Menu Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ COGO Drop-down ➤ COGO Input. Icon Distance/Distance Command Line 'DDIST Dialog Box COGO Input dialog box ZD Specifies a point based on azimuth and distance from a given point Menu Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ COGO Drop-down ➤ COGO Input.
PAGE 1056

Using Angle and Distance to Specify a Point When creating an object, such as a line or an arc, you can specify a point by specifying an angle and a distance from another point. Select the line from which to measure the angle by selecting an existing line in your drawing, or by specifying a starting and ending point (1 and 2) for the line. Then specify the angle (3) and the distance from the starting point (4).
PAGE 1057

■ For a later point in the object, specify just the ending point for the line. The previous point of the object is the starting point of the line. 4 Enter the angle from the line you just specified to the line that specifies the new point. Click to select the angle on the map. 5 Enter the distance from the starting point to the new point. Click to select the distance on the map. 6 Click Calculate. AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the new point, and previews it on your map.
PAGE 1058

Using Bearing and Distance to Specify a Point When creating an object, such as a line or an arc, you can specify a point by specifying a bearing and a distance from another point. Select a starting point (1) and a quadrant (2). Then specify the bearing angle (3) and the distance from the starting point (4). See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands (page 1027) To specify a point using bearing and distance 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ COGO drop-down ➤ COGO Input.
PAGE 1059

Use the current angular units setting, decimal values, such as 45.1111, or surveyor’s units, such as N 45d3'55" E. 6 Enter the distance from the starting point. Click distance on the map. to select the 7 Click Calculate. AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the new point, and previews it on your map. Click the Pan button to pan to the new point.
PAGE 1060

Using Bearings from Two Points to Specify a Point The bearing/bearing command allows you to specify a point using the projections from two existing lines or points and two bearings.You can also enter the data in segments (point, bearing). Specify the two points and bearings from those points to calculate the location of a third point.
PAGE 1061

5 Repeat steps 3-5 for the second point and bearing. 6 Click Calculate. AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the new point, and previews it on your map. Click the Pan button to pan to the new point. NOTE If you turn on the Prompt For 3D Data Input option in the Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box (page 1917), you can enter an elevation value in the Result section of the COGO Input dialog box (page 1668). 7 Click Create Point.
PAGE 1062

Select the line from which to measure the deflection angle by either selecting an existing line in your drawing, or by specifying a starting and ending point (1 and 2) for the line. Then specify the deflection angle (3) and the distance from the starting point (4). See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands (page 1027) To specify a point using a deflection angle and a distance 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ COGO drop-down ➤ COGO Input.
PAGE 1063

Use the current angular units setting, decimal values, such as 45.1111, or surveyor’s units, such as N 45d3'55" E. 5 Enter the distance from the starting point. Click distance on the map. to select the 6 Click Calculate. AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the new point, and previews it on your map. Click the Pan button to pan to the new point.
PAGE 1064

Using Distances from Two Points to Specify a Point The distance/distance command allows you to calculated a new point using two points and two distances to the new point. You can only select one of the calculated points. Select the first point and distance, then the second point and distance. Choose one of the two intersections to create your new point.
PAGE 1065

4 Select the distance from the first point. Click distance on the map. to specify the 5 Repeat steps 3-5 for the second point and distance. 6 Click Calculate. AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the new point, and previews it on your map. Click the Pan button to pan to the new point.
PAGE 1066

Using Azimuth and Distance to Specify a Point When creating an object, such as a line or an arc, you can specify a point by specifying azimuth and distance from another point. Azimuth is the clockwise angle from the North (or South) meridian. Select a starting point (1). Then specify the azimuth angle (2) and the distance from the starting point (3).
PAGE 1067

4 Enter the azimuth, which is the clockwise angle from the North (or South) meridian to the line of the new direction. Click on the map. to specify the angle Enter the angle using the current angular units setting, decimal values, such as 45.1111, or surveyor’s units, such as N 45d3'55" E. 5 Enter the distance from the starting point to the new point. Click to select the distance on the map. 6 Click Calculate. AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the new point, and previews it on your map.
PAGE 1068

Command Line 'ZD Dialog Box COGO Input dialog box Using Distance and Offset from a Line to Specify a Point You can specify a point using distance and offset from an existing line. You select the line, enter a distance from the start point, and an offset on either side of the line. This command is called Orthogonal/Offset, and it is accessible only from the COGO Input dialog box (page 1668). Select a line, a distance from the start point of the line, and an offset distance.
PAGE 1069

3 Enter the coordinates for the start and end points of the line, or click to select the line on the map. 4 Enter the distance from the start point, or click distance on the map. to specify the 5 Repeat steps 3-4 for the second point and distance. 6 Click Calculate. AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the new point, and previews it on your map. Click the Pan button to pan to the new point.
PAGE 1070

■ Quadrant ■ Horizontal Distance ■ Vertical Distance ■ Slope Distance ■ Vertical Angle ■ Percent Slope See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands (page 1027) To create an inverse report 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ COGO drop-down ➤ COGO Input. 2 In the COGO Input dialog box (page 1668), select the Inverse Report routine. 3 Enter the coordinates for the first point, or click on the map or in the data table.
PAGE 1071

Working with Attribute Data and Object Data To use attribute data and object data ■ ■ To use the Data View (page 1047) To enter and edit object data (page 1061) Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data Use the Data View to view and edit external database tables that are linked to drawing objects. If you have joined data to geospatial features (page 507), use the Data Table to view that information.
PAGE 1072

Overview of Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Objects Use the Data View to view and edit external database tables that are linked to drawing objects. The Data View shows records in an attached database table. Using the Data View, you can sort and filter the records in the table. In addition, if you open the table in Edit mode, you can edit the data in the database table. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 1073

■ To print a database table (page 1475) Quick Reference AutoCommit Automatically saves database changes when the cursor leaves the record Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Auto Commit Commit Manually saves changes when AutoCommit is turned off Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Commit (Data View) Append Adds a new, blank record to the bottom of a database table Menu In the Data View: Records ➤ Append Icon Append Record (Data View) Find Finds specified text
PAGE 1074

(Data View) Header and Footer Specifies header and footer for printing in the Data View Menu In the Data View: File ➤ Header and Footer Dialog Box Header/Footer dialog box (Data View) Format Column Changes the formatting of cells in a column Menu In the Data View: Format ➤ Column Dialog Box Column dialog box (Data View) Page Setup Sets the print options for Data View Menu In the Data View: File ➤ Page Setup Dialog Box Page Setup dialog box (Data View) Print Prints the current view of the databas
PAGE 1075

Unfreezes all columns Menu In the Data View: View ➤ Unfreeze All Columns (Data View) Unfreeze All Columns Unfreezes all columns Menu In the Data View: View ➤ Unfreeze All Columns MAPBROWSELINK Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to edit in the Data View Menu Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ Edit Linked Table.
PAGE 1076

MAPRUNDBQUERY Runs a database query and opens a database table displaying the results of the query in the Data View Menu Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ Execute Query. Command Line MAPRUNDBQUERY Task Pane Double-click the database query. Dialog Box Select Query dialog box MAPVIEWLINK Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to view in the Data View Menu Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ View Linked Table.
PAGE 1077

■ Edit mode: In addition to formatting the table on screen, you can edit the data in the table and add or delete records. Database queries or views are always opened in View mode. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. If you have joined data to geospatial features (page 507), use the Data Table to view that information.
PAGE 1078

Command Line MAPBROWSELINK Task Pane Double-click a link template Dialog Box Select Link Template dialog box MAPBROWSETBL Opens a database table to edit in the Data View Menu Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ Edit Table.
PAGE 1079

Command Line MAPVIEWTBL Task Pane Right-click a table ➤ View Table Dialog Box Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL) Editing a Database Data View displays external data linked to drawing objects. You can edit a table in the Data View as you would any database table. You can add or delete records, or edit a record's values. You can also search a particular column for occurrences of a specific value. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 1080

The AutoCommit setting applies to all tables in the selected data source. See also: ■ Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146) ■ Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522) ■ Creating a Link Template (page 525) ■ Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings (page 205) ■ Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights (page 82) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 1081

Quick Reference AutoCommit Automatically saves database changes when the cursor leaves the record Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Auto Commit Commit Manually saves changes when AutoCommit is turned off Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Commit (Data View) Append Adds a new, blank record to the bottom of a database table Menu In the Data View: Records ➤ Append Icon Append Record (Data View) Sort Sorts records in ascending or descending order based on the sel
PAGE 1082

NOTE To preserve your formatting changes, be sure the Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing option is selected on the Data Source tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908). If this option is not selected, formatting information for the table is removed from the current drawing when you close the Data View. When you detach a data source, AutoCAD Map 3D erases Data View formatting information for all tables in that data source. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 1083

Quick Reference (Data View) Format Column Changes the formatting of cells in a column Menu In the Data View: Format ➤ Column Dialog Box Column dialog box Freezing and Hiding Data View Columns You can freeze and hide columns in the Data View. ■ Freeze columns to make them visible at all times. The selected columns become the left-most columns in the Data View. They are frozen in that position and do not scroll off the screen.
PAGE 1084

2 Select one or more columns. 3 In the Data View, click View menu ➤ Freeze Column. To release frozen columns, in the Data View, select the columns and click View menu ➤ Unfreeze All Columns. To hide columns in the Data View 1 In the Data View, select the column header of the column that you want to hide. 2 Right-click the column header. Click Hide. To redisplay all hidden columns, right-click the grid header in the Data View. Click Unhide All.
PAGE 1085

Entering and Editing Object Data To enter and edit object data ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To attach data to an object (page 1064) To attach multiple records to an object (page 1066) To attach data to objects automatically (page 1067) To display and edit data for a drawing object (page 1069) To delete object data from a drawing object (page 1069) To convert object data to a linked database table (page 1071) Overview of Entering and Editing Object Data Object data is attribute data that is attached to individual objects a
PAGE 1086

To do this... Use this method... ■ Automatically create and attach object data (page 1066) based on existing block attributes or text. ■ Attach object data as you digitize objects (page 1082). See Specifying Object Data for a Drawing Object (page 1063) View or edit object data. Right-click the object ➤ Properties. See Displaying and Editing Object Data for a Drawing Object (page 1068) Delete object data. Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Edit Object Data.
PAGE 1087

Edits attached object data Menu Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data Icon Edit Object Data Command Line ADEEDITDATA Dialog Box Edit Object Data dialog box ADEGENLINK Automatically links objects to object data or external database records Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links Command Line ADEGENLINK Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Generate Links Dialog Box Generate Data Links dialog box MAPOD2ASE Converts object data tab
PAGE 1088

You can attach object data in these ways: ■ Attach object data manually to selected objects (page 1064) by specifying the data values for each object. ■ Automatically create and attach object data (page 1066) based on existing block attributes or text. ■ Attach object data as you digitize objects (page 1082). When you attach object data to queried objects, AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you to add the object to the save set.
PAGE 1089

NOTE If you are attaching data to a polygon and plan to use the data with topology functions, be sure to attach the data to the centroid of the polygon. Topology functions do not use data attached to the polygon border. A record with the specified values is attached to each selected object.
PAGE 1090

To attach multiple records to an object 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Edit Object Data. 2 Select the object to which you want to add a record. 3 In the Edit Object Data dialog box (page 1795), select the attached table to which you want to add a record. 4 Click Insert Record. Record # changes from 1 of 1 to 2 of 2 as AutoCAD Map 3D advances to the newly created record. 5 For each field in the record, update the value as necessary. Select the field in the object data field list.
PAGE 1091

First, you must create the object data table to use for the new data. Then when you perform the Generate Links operation, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically records the existing data in the new object data table. NOTE You cannot create links to objects on layers that are locked, frozen, or turned off. NOTE You cannot attach data to geospatial features, but you can join external data to geospatial features.
PAGE 1092

4 Select a table. If you are creating links for enclosed text, select a table that has only one field. 5 If you are creating links for blocks or enclosed blocks, select the name of the block. 6 Click OK. 7 Enter s to select blocks or text objects, or enter a to use all blocks with the specified name or all text objects.
PAGE 1093

■ Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. To display and edit the attribute data for a geospatial feature, see Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711). To display and edit data for a drawing object 1 Select the object in your drawing. TIP If the drawing contains more than one object in the same location, press Ctrl while you select the object.
PAGE 1094

Quick Reference ADEEDITDATA Edits attached object data Menu Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data Icon Edit Object Data Command Line ADEEDITDATA Dialog Box Edit Object Data dialog box Converting Object Data to a Linked Database Table Object data is an efficient method for storing small amounts of attribute data that you want to associate with drawing objects, but external databases store larger amounts of data more efficiently, and allow for more complex queries.
PAGE 1095

Field Names in the New Table By default, the fields in the new database table have the same names as the fields in the object data table.
PAGE 1096

4 Under Target Link Template, click Define to specify the link template. 5 In the Define Link Template dialog box (MAPOD2ASE) (page 1682), select an available data source. Click Connect. 6 Enter a table name. 7 Specify the fields to use as key fields (columns). To enter more than one field name, separate names with a comma. To select from a list of field names in the object data table, or to rename the fields, click Select to display the Select Link Template Key(s) dialog box.
PAGE 1097

Digitizing Objects To attach attribute data to objects as you digitize them, use the MAPDIGITIZE command.
PAGE 1098

1074 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
PAGE 1099

Planning for Digitizing Before you begin to digitize, consider the following: ■ Suitability of source maps ■ Global coordinate system ■ Tiling maps ■ Layer organization ■ Data storage: internal or external Overview of Digitizing Maps | 1075
PAGE 1100

■ Representation of node, network, and polygon topologies If possible, plan on completing all digitizing for one map in one session because the map media may distort over time. Digitizing Linear Objects Linear objects are objects such as lines, arcs, and polylines. ■ If you plan to use topography later to generate 3D views from digital terrain models, place linear objects at the elevations (Z- values) they represent.
PAGE 1101

■ When you finish digitizing a segment, mark it on the paper map so you do not repeat the digitizing. Double digitizing increases file size. Digitizing Topology When digitizing data that will be used to create a topology, follow these principles to achieve the most accurate results. ■ Boundaries (or other polylines) should be completed with the Near, Intersection, or Endpoint object snaps to ensure that closed areas such as parcels, buildings, and water bodies are in fact complete polygons.
PAGE 1102

of latitude and longitude lines. These points should either appear at the corners of your map sheet or surround the map features to be digitized. Be careful to note on the drawing the location of these reference points and their real-world coordinates. Use these points to register the map with the TABLET command, as described in Registering the Map (page 133). ■ To ensure accuracy, you can also digitize other points such as control points and monument locations that have known positions.
PAGE 1103

Quick Reference OPTIONS Customizes the AutoCAD settings Menu Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options Command Line OPTIONS Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options MAPDIGISETUP Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects Menu Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize Setup. Command Line MAPDIGISETUP Dialog Box Digitize Setup dialog box MAPDIGITIZE Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup Menu Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize.
PAGE 1104

Digitizing Using the MAPDIGITIZE Command Use the MAPDIGITIZE command if you want to use the special options it provides, such as attaching object data as you digitize. NOTE Before you begin digitizing, be sure that you have configured the digitizer, registered the map, and set the digitizing specifications. See Setting Up for Digitizing (page 130). For detailed information on digitizing linear objects, topologies, and control points, or on placing annotations, see Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073).
PAGE 1105

NOTE These processes create drawing objects. To convert the drawing objects into geospatial feature data, see Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357). Quick Reference MAPDIGITIZE Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup Menu Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize. Command Line MAPDIGITIZE Dialog Box MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) Digitizing Using MAPDIGITIZE The MAPDIGITIZE command lets you attach object data or external data as you digitize.
PAGE 1106

2 At the MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) (page 1615) prompt, specify the first point or polyline to digitize. 3 If you selected Attach Data in the Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1617), enter object data for the new object. 4 If you selected Prompt For Label Point in the Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1617), specify a label point for the new object. 5 If you selected Prompt For Rotation, enter the rotation in degrees for the node block. If you selected Prompt For Scale, enter the change in scale.
PAGE 1107

Before you set up for digitizing, the object data table must already exist. See Creating an Object Data Table (page 200). To attach object data as you digitize 1 On the command line, enter MAPDIGISETUP. Press Enter. 2 Under Object Type, select the object type to digitize. 3 Select Attach Data. Click Data To Attach. 4 In the Data to Attach dialog box (page 1616), select the object data table to use. Click OK.
PAGE 1108

MAPDIGITIZE Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup Menu Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize. Command Line MAPDIGITIZE Dialog Box MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize You can attach data in an external database to objects as you digitize. You can select one link template for nodes and another for links (linear objects). Before you begin this process, be sure that the link templates already exist.
PAGE 1109

NOTE These processes create drawing objects. To convert the drawing objects into geospatial feature data, see Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357). See also: ■ Attaching Object Data As You Digitize (page 1082) ■ Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073) To link database records as you digitize 1 On the command line, enter MAPDIGISETUP. Press Enter. 2 Under Object Type, select the object type to digitize. 3 Select Attach Data. Click Data To Attach.
PAGE 1110

8 Click OK. 9 On the command line, enter MAPDIGITIZE to begin digitizing. AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you for a key value for each object. The database validation option you select here determines what happens as you enter a value for each digitized object: ■ Validate —AutoCAD Map 3D checks whether the value you enter exists in the database table. If the value exists, the link data is attached to the object; if the value does not exist, AutoCAD Map 3D requests a new value.
PAGE 1111

Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) Dialog Box MAPDIGISETUP Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects Menu Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize Setup. Command Line MAPDIGISETUP Dialog Box Digitize Setup dialog box MAPDIGITIZE Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup Menu Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize.
PAGE 1112

1088
PAGE 1113

7 Annotating Maps Overview of Annotating Maps Dynamic labels and drawing object annotations are placed automatically next to each feature or drawing object on the related layer. Use Mtext or annotation layers to add text that is not linked to a feature or object. Annotations are notes or other types of explanatory symbols or objects that are commonly used to add information to your map.
PAGE 1114

Annotation Type Works with Description More Information Drawing object annotation Drawing objects Displays selected properties, object data, or linked data on each drawing object Annotating Drawing Objects (page 1100) Annotation layers Maps with feature layers Displays freestanding text features (not related to a specific feature) and is stored in a data table Creating Text Layers (page 1109) AutoCAD text objects Any map Displays freestanding objects (not related to a specific object) created w
PAGE 1115

■ Style and Label a Linear Feature ■ Label features and optimize placement. ■ Create and edit a legend. ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ Setting Up Annotation Templates (page 185) Workflow GIS Skill Related topics Adding Labels Labels mark each feature in the specified Display Manager feature layer. They are defined as part of the feature layer style. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To label drawing objects, see Annotating Drawing Objects (page 1100).
PAGE 1116

For linear features (such as roads or rivers), you can specify one of the following: ■ Multiline (Specifies that the label can have multiple lines of text, but no advanced placement functionality.) ■ Advanced placement (specifies a single-line label which follows a path and shrinks to fit. A single label is used for feature segments that have the same property value.) Multiline labels Advanced placement labels If a feature does not have linear geometry, only multiline labels are available.
PAGE 1117

do not obscure point symbols. You can allow feature labels to obscure point symbols (page 1096). NOTE For performance reasons, the maximum number of labels drawn is 2000. If there are so many labels that geometry would be obscured if they were drawn, AutoCAD Map 3D does not draw them. Tell me more Video Procedure Tutorial ■ Show me how to label features. ■ Show me how to label features with automatic resizing.
PAGE 1118

3 In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style. For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643). 4 In the geometry styling area for the selected scale range, click the box under Feature Label. 5 In the Style Label dialog box (page 1634), make sure the Create A Label check box is selected. 6 For linear features, select Multiline or Advanced Placement. (For all other feature geometries, these choices are grayed and Multiline is used.
PAGE 1119

13 From the Background Style list, select one of the following: ■ Ghosted: Draws an opaque border around each character. Use Background Color to specify a color for the outline. ■ Opaque: Draws a background behind the labels. They are displayed as rectangles with text inside. Use Background Color to specify a color for the rectangles. ■ Transparent: No background is applied to the labels, which are displayed only as text on the map.
PAGE 1120

Allowing Labels to Obscure Points By default, AutoCAD Map 3D does not draw a label (page 1091) if doing so would block a point symbol on another layer. The appearance of the label is evaluated each time you change the zoom level. When you zoom in far enough to allow sufficient space for the label, it is displayed. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To label drawing objects, see Annotating Drawing Objects (page 1100).
PAGE 1121

Tell me more Video ■ Show me how to label features. ■ Show me how to label features with automatic resizing. ■ To allow labels to obscure points on the selected layer (page 1097) ■ To use expressions in labels ■ Tutorial: Annotating Your Map ■ Exercise 3: Add labels ■ Style and Label a Linear Feature ■ Label features and optimize placement.
PAGE 1122

Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations If exact placement of labels is important for a point layer, disable the point layer style and place fixed labels at feature locations. NOTE Fixed labels are always displayed, even if they obscure other labels or features. While feature labels are drawn after all layer features have been drawn, fixed labels are drawn according to the draw order of their layer within a map, and may be obscured by features from other layers.
PAGE 1123

NOTE This procedure is for geospatial features only. To label drawing objects, see Annotating Drawing Objects (page 1100). To place fixed labels at points 1 In Display Manager, right-click the point layer to label and click Edit Style. 2 In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style. For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643). 3 Select the Labels Are Fixed (Not Dynamic) check box.
PAGE 1124

Annotating Drawing Objects Use annotation to label drawing objects with their properties and geometric values. If you have created object data (page 2070) for the objects, or linked external data (page 2062) to them, you can display these attributes in annotation as well. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To label geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
PAGE 1125

Type of information Example Geometric values Dimensions, line direction, etc. Graphics Arrows, static text, or other geometry You define the contents of annotation in an annotation template (page 2055). You can specify values, link them to data sources (such as object data tables or link templates) or define them with expressions. The actual values defined by expressions are determined when the annotation is inserted.
PAGE 1126

Menu Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Delete Icon Delete Command Line MAPANNDELETE Dialog Box Annotation Delete dialog box MAPANNINSERT Adds annotation to objects based on the selected annotation template Menu Create menu ➤ Insert Annotation Icon Insert Annotation Command Line MAPANNINSERT Dialog Box Insert Annotation dialog box MAPANNREFRESH Refreshes existing annotation Menu Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Refresh Icon Refresh Command Line MAPANNREFRESH Dialog Box Annotation
PAGE 1127

Creates and edits annotation text Icon Edit Annotation Text Command Line MAPANNTEXT Dialog Box Annotation Text dialog box MAPANNUPDATE Updates existing annotation Menu Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Update Icon Update Command Line MAPANNUPDATE Dialog Box Annotation Update dialog box Attaching Annotation to Objects After you have defined an annotation template (page 2055), use the MAPANNINSERT command to attach annotation to selected objects in your drawing.
PAGE 1128

2 In the Insert Annotation dialog box (page 1574), select the check box for the annotation template (page 2055) to use. To insert annotations based on multiple templates, select the check box for each template. 3 Optionally, click Advanced to change the default options and properties for the annotation. The information from the Advanced section is applied only to the highlighted template.
PAGE 1129

Refreshing Annotation When you change the expressions in an annotation template (page 2055), you can refresh all existing annotations using that annotation template to apply those changes. The expressions in existing annotations do not update automatically. When you refresh the annotations, you can choose whether to update the string values only or whether to update all properties of the annotation (for example, its position and layer location). NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 1130

■ Full Annotation — Reevaluates any expression-based text, as well as other properties of the annotation (for example, the insertion point and the layer on which the annotation resides). For example, if you use the expression .CENTER to specify the insertion point of the text, the annotation is displayed in the center of the circle. If you resize and move the circle, the Strings Only option changes the text to reflect the new size, but does not change the position of the text.
PAGE 1131

NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To label geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091). See also: ■ Attaching Annotation to Objects (page 1103) ■ Defining Annotation Templates (page 190) ■ Changing Annotation Templates (page 194) NOTE This procedure is for drawing objects only. To label geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091). To update annotation based on a specific template 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Update Annotation.
PAGE 1132

Quick Reference MAPANNUPDATE Updates existing annotation Menu Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Update Icon Update Command Line MAPANNUPDATE Dialog Box Annotation Update dialog box Deleting Annotation from Drawings You can delete all annotation based on a selected annotation template (page 2055). NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To label geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
PAGE 1133

3 Click OK. Quick Reference MAPANNDELETE Deletes all annotation based on the selected template Menu Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Delete Icon Delete Command Line MAPANNDELETE Dialog Box Annotation Delete dialog box Working with Text Layers Creating Text Layers Text layers allow you to control the placement and appearance of text very precisely. The labels that are generated automatically for features on the map (page 1091) are placed dynamically and shift position as you zoom in and out.
PAGE 1134

NOTE The text layer uses expressions to generate text features from corresponding entries in the data store (which you can view using the Data Table (page 2059)). Most users need not modify these expressions, though they offer advanced capabilities for specific uses. Tell me more ■ Show me how to create a text layer and add text. ■ Show me how to edit text on a text layer. ■ Show me how to rotate text.
PAGE 1135

3 In the Specify Coordinate System dialog box, set the coordinate system for the layer. Click OK. The new text layer is added to the Display Manager. The default layer name is Annotation, but you can select that name and type a new one. Quick Reference MAPTEXTLAYERCREATE Creates an annotation layer for freestanding text features Command Line MAPTEXTLAYERCREATE Task Pane In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ New Text Layer Styling a Text Layer After you have added the text layer, specify the text style.
PAGE 1136

■ Annotating with AutoCAD Text Objects (page 1119) ■ Adding Labels to Features (page 1091) ■ Annotating Drawing Objects (page 1100) Related topics To style a text layer 1 In the Display Manager (page 2060), select the text layer. 2 Click Style . 3 In the Style Editor, under Style click . 4 In the Style Text Layer dialog box (page 1640), for Size Context, specify the type of units and then select the appropriate Units. ■ Select Device to specify symbol widths and heights in screen units.
PAGE 1137

For more information on inserting text features, see Adding Text to a Text Layer (page 1113). 7 For Font Name, specify the font to use on the text layer. The Edit Expression button lets you specify an expression for this setting for advanced use cases. 8 For Font Size, leave the "NullValue(SIZE,number)" expression. The initial setting for font height is in mapping units and is based on the existing view. We recommend that you try the suggested height and adjust the number as needed.
PAGE 1138

Procedure ■ To create a text layer (page 1110) ■ To add text to a text layer (page 1114) ■ To style a text layer (page 1112) ■ Add a text layer and edit text. ■ Tutorial: Annotating Your Map ■ Annotating with AutoCAD Text Objects (page 1119) ■ Adding Labels to Features (page 1091) ■ Annotating Drawing Objects (page 1100) GIS Skill Tutorial Related topics To add text to a text layer 1 In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the text layer. Click Create ➤ Create New Annotation.
PAGE 1139

Quick Reference MAPTEXTCREATE Adds text features to an annotation layer Command Line MAPTEXTCREATE Task Pane In the Display Manager, right-click an annotation layer, and click Create ➤ Create New Annotation Dialog Box Edit Text Instance dialog box Editing an Instance on a Text Layer Each text instance is a feature. Check out text features to modify them. Check in text features when you are finished editing. Tell me more ■ Show me how to create a text layer and add text.
PAGE 1140

To edit a text instance 1 Right-click the text instance and click Edit Text Instance. 2 In the Edit Text Instance dialog box (page 1627), select the text to modify. 3 Change the text or apply different styles to the selected characters. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference MAPTEXTEDIT Allows you to edit text features on an annotation layer Command Line MAPTEXTCREATE Dialog Box Edit Text Instance dialog box Adding a Legend A legend lists the styles in your map.
PAGE 1141

sure that the layer with the theme is expanded so that the ranges are visible. To ensure that a layer does not appear in the legend, clear its check box before generating the legend. The legend is always placed in the model view. To include a legend in a layout view for plotting or publishing, create a viewport for the legend and place it at the appropriate location in your layout Legend Style The legend is displayed in a table. By default, legends use the Legend table style.
PAGE 1142

■ To change the icon used for thumbnails (page 1118) ■ To edit titles or text in the legend (page 1118) ■ To edit the Legend table style (page 1119) ■ To update the Legend (page 1119) To create a legend 1 Zoom the drawing to the desired scale threshold. The default legend size is based on the window size when the legend is created. 2 In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Groups ➤ Draw Order. 3 Drag the Display Manager layers into the order in which you want them to appear in the legend.
PAGE 1143

2 In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Tools ➤ Update Legend. 3 To change text in the legend itself (for example, the legend title), double-click the cell containing the text to change and enter new text. NOTE Your changes are discarded if you update the legend again. To edit the Legend table style 1 At the Command prompt, enter tablestyle. 2 In the Table Style dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Select the Legend style and click Modify.
PAGE 1144

1120
PAGE 1145

Analyzing Data 8 Overview of Analyzing Data This map shows some of the various types of analysis available for raster surfaces and features. The analysis tools in AutoCAD Map 3D help turn your raw map data into useful information that can help you answer questions, support decisions, test hypotheses, and reveal patterns that may not be immediately obvious.
PAGE 1146

Tools and methods for analysis vary, depending on whether you are using drawing data or geospatial feature data. For Drawing Objects For Features Description View object properties and attributes. (page 1145) View external data linked to objects. (page 1146) View feature source and attribute data. (page 1125) View native data and data joined to features from a separate source. (page 1134) Drill down to get detailed information about features and objects you want to focus on.
PAGE 1147

For Drawing Objects For Features Description tions. Use contour lines to help you analyze terrain. Compare features that are related spatially using buffer zones and overlays. Tell me more ■ Show me how to join attribute data to features. ■ Show me how to color surfaces based on elevation. ■ Show me how to view and navigate in 3D. ■ Show me how to theme a parcels layer. ■ Show me how to create a network topology. ■ Show me how to create a buffer zone around a parcel.
PAGE 1148

■ Analyze Data ■ Join attribute data to features. ■ Color a surface by elevation and adjust hillshading. ■ Change the elevation ranges for a surface. ■ View a site in 3D. ■ Drape vector and raster layers over a surface. ■ Analyze the slope and aspect of a site. ■ Create a network topology to show how lines are connected. ■ Select features by location using a buffer.
PAGE 1149

■ Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522) To get information about features and objects ■ ■ To get information about features (page 1125) To get information about drawing objects (page 1143) Getting Information about Features To get information about features ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the Data Table (page 1127) To search to select data (page 1131) To create a calculated property (page 1133) To view data for a selected layer (page 1135) To view joined data (page 1135) To view
PAGE 1150

Some data fields are “constrained” to allow only certain values. When you enter values for constrained fields, you are prompted to enter only valid values. For example, the prompt might tell you to enter only values between 1 and 10. You can join attribute data from a separate data source to a layer in the Data Table. You can use native and joined data to form the basis of the new, calculated field. Calculated fields are available only within AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 1151

■ Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature Source ■ Join Attribute Data to a Geospatial Feature ■ Zoom to features by selecting rows in the Data Table (and vice-versa). ■ Calculate fields in the Data Table. ■ Generate a report by exporting records to a spreadsheet. ■ Theme based on individual values.
PAGE 1152

4 The Data Table window displays the properties for the layer you selected. To do this... View data for a feature in your map. Use this method... 1 Select a layer in Display Manager. 2 Click View non-spatial data Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class, or Non-Spatial Data Table (page 1134) . 1 In the Data Table, click the Data menu. 2 Select the non-spatial table to view. Dock the Data Table For more information, see...
PAGE 1153

To do this... Use this method... For more information, see... Highlight areas in your map. In the Data Table, select the row or rows of data to highlight. Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class, or Non-Spatial Data Table (page 1134) Remove highlighting From the Options list in the Data Table, select Select None. Highlighting Features Using the Data Table (page 1136) Zoom to related areas in your map. 1 In the Data Table, click Auto-Zoom (unless it is already on).
PAGE 1154

Icon Table Command Line MAPDATATABLE Task Pane In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table button Dialog Box Data Table Dialog Box Using Expressions to Select Feature Data You can use the Data Table to find geospatial feature data that meets conditions that you specify. For example, you can search for all parcels with an area greater than five acres. When AutoCAD Map 3D completes the search, it highlights the data rows in the Data Table and the associated features on your map.
PAGE 1155

■ Searching For and Selecting Features (page 1214) ■ Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class, or Non-Spatial Data Table (page 1134) ■ Highlighting Features Using the Data Table (page 1136) ■ Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map (page 1138) ■ Zooming to a View Using the Data Table (page 1140) ■ Creating Expressions - Reference Related topics To search to select data 1 Select the geospatial feature layer in Display Manager that contains the data to view.
PAGE 1156

6 To create a complex property evaluation, insert an AND or OR operator, and then insert another property, operator, and value combination. Every operator must be preceded by a property. For example, to find parcels whose last purchase date is after 1990 and before 2005, the expression must look like this: Purchase_Date > 1990 AND Purchase_Date < 2005 7 Validate your expression. 8 To reuse your expression in the future, from the Options list in the Data Table, select Save Expression.
PAGE 1157

it is not saved back to the original data store. Calculated properties are gray in the Data Table, because you cannot edit them. NOTE The Data Table displays attribute data for geospatial features only. To display attribute data for drawing objects, see Overview of Drawing Object Information. (page 1144) There are two special calculations you can perform: finding the area of a polygon and finding the length of a linear feature (or the perimeter of a polygon feature).
PAGE 1158

NOTE You can also create a calculated property from within the Data Table by clicking Options ➤ Create A Calculation. Once you create a calculation, click Options ➤ Manage Calculations to add, edit, or delete calculations. 2 Create the calculation. 3 Click on the toolstrip to open the Data Table window. The column representing the calculated property appears at the far right side of the Data Table.
PAGE 1159

See also: ■ Zooming to a View Using the Data Table (page 1140). ■ Highlighting Features Using the Data Table (page 1136) ■ Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map (page 1138) ■ To view data for a selected layer (page 1135) ■ To view joined data (page 1135) ■ To view unfiltered feature class data (page 1135) ■ To view non-spatial data (page 1136) To view data for a selected layer 1 Select the layer in Display Manager that contains the geospatial feature class data to display.
PAGE 1160

Selecting the Feature Class data source displays all records, including any that are not associated with feature attributes. The selection and highlighting options are not available when viewing this table. To view non-spatial data 1 On the top toolbar, click to open the Data Table window. 2 In the Data drop-down list, select the non-spatial table you want to view. The Data drop-down list will display all non-spatial data for a given connected data source.
PAGE 1161

Tell me more Video ■ Show me how automatic zoom works. ■ Show me how automatic scroll works. ■ To highlight features using the Data Table (page 1137) ■ Lesson 5: Find and Edit Features ■ Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature Source ■ Zoom to features by selecting rows in the Data Table (and vice-versa).
PAGE 1162

To remove highlighting ➤ From the Options list in the Data Table, select Select None. The highlighting is removed from the Data Table and your map. Quick Reference MAPDATATABLE Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data Menu Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
PAGE 1163

■ Edit Features in a Geospatial Feature Source ■ Zoom to features by selecting rows in the Data Table (and vice-versa).
PAGE 1164

Icon Table Command Line MAPDATATABLE Task Pane In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table button Dialog Box Data Table Dialog Box Zooming to a View Using the Data Table You can select rows of data in the Data Table to zoom in directly to data in your map. NOTE The Data Table displays attribute data for geospatial features only. To display attribute data for drawing objects, see Overview of Drawing Object Information. (page 1144) Tell me more Video ■ Show me how automatic zoom works.
PAGE 1165

■ Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map (page 1138) ■ Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class, or Non-Spatial Data Table (page 1134) To zoom to a view 1 In Display Manager, select the layer containing the geospatial feature set to view. 2 Click to open the Data Table window. 3 In the Data Table, click Auto-Zoom (unless it is already on). 4 Select the rows of data to view. AutoCAD Map 3D automatically zooms to the corresponding data.
PAGE 1166

NOTE The Data Table displays attribute data for geospatial features only. To display attribute data for drawing objects, see Overview of Drawing Object Information. (page 1144) Tell me more ■ Show me how to export records for selected features. ■ To export from the Data Table (page 1142) ■ Exercise 5: Export the data to CSV for use in a report ■ Generate a report by exporting records to a spreadsheet.
PAGE 1167

Menu Click Edit ➤ Data Table. Icon Table Command Line MAPDATATABLE Task Pane In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table button Dialog Box Data Table Dialog Box Getting Information About Drawing Objects You can store information about drawing objects in object data tables or in linked external sources. NOTE Object data and linked external sources are available for drawing objects only.
PAGE 1168

You can get information about drawing objects in the following ways. To do this... View and edit object data Use this method... 1 Right-click a drawing object in the map. 2 Click Properties. View and edit object class data. 1 Right-click a classified drawing object in the map. For more information, see... Displaying and Editing Object Data for a Drawing Object (page 1068) Editing Object Class Data (page 991) 2 Click Properties. 3 Click the Object Class tab.
PAGE 1169

To do this... Use this method... For more information, see... 3 In the Data View, click Highlight menu ➤ Highlight Objects. Remove highlighting Highlight records linked to a selected drawing object At the Command prompt, enter regen. 1 Open a linked database table in the Data View. 2 In the Data View, click Highlighting Drawing Objects Linked to a Database Record (page 1225) Highlighting Records Linked to a Selected Object (page 1228) Highlight menu ➤ Highlight Records ➤ Select Object.
PAGE 1170

■ Editing Object Class Data (page 991) To view properties and attributes for a drawing object ■ Right-click an object and click Properties. The Properties palette opens showing all the information contained in the object data of your drawing layer. NOTE Object data is available for drawing objects only. To view information for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125).
PAGE 1171

To view external data linked to drawing objects 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), expand Link Templates and right-click a link template. 2 Click View Linked Table. The Data View window opens. 3 Click the Highlight Linked Objects icon. 4 In your map, select the objects whose data you want to view and press Enter. The Data View window reappears. The records that are linked to the selected objects are highlighted. 5 Use the navigation buttons to move between highlighted records.
PAGE 1172

Overview of Measuring and Tracking Once you have assigned coordinate systems to your map, you can locate specific coordinate points and measure the geodetic distance between points. For example, you can determine the coordinates of a maintainance hole or the centerline of a new road.
PAGE 1173

For all map objects For drawing objects only Description Adding Distances (page 1156) Calculate the total of several disjunct distances between points in your map. Displaying Continuous Distance (page 1158) Add and display the distance between one point and several other points, or between a series of points. in a drawing. Displaying Angle Information (page 1160) Display the acute and obtuse angle between points or intersecting lines.
PAGE 1174

Track Coordinates pane See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143) ■ Attaching Drawings (page 154) ■ Setting Coordinate Tracker Options (page 232) To track coordinates 1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Geo Tools panel ➤ Coordinate Track.The Track Coordinates pane appears. 2 Click the coordinate tracker toolbar. 3 Choose the coordinate system to track in the coordinate tracker drop-down list. If you know the code of the coordinate system you want, you can type the code.
PAGE 1175

3 Choose the coordinate system to track in the coordinate tracker drop-down list. If you know the code of the coordinate system you want, you can type the code. The new coordinate tracker displays the code and description of the coordinate system you selected. 4 Repeat steps 1-3 to add more coordinate trackers to the Track Coordinates pane. The new coordinate tracker displays the code and description of the coordinate system you selected. ■ .
PAGE 1176

Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any coordinate system Menu Analyze menu ➤ Track Coordinate Sytem. Icon Track Coordinates Command Line MAPTRACKCS Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Track Coordinates Measuring Geodetic Distance You can measure the geodetic distance between points in your map. Geodetic distance takes into account the curvature of the Earth.
PAGE 1177

To measure geodetic distance 1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Geo Tools panel ➤ Geo Distance. 2 At the MAPDIST (page 1597) prompt, specify the starting point by clicking in the map or typing the coordinates of the point. 3 At the second prompt, specify the end point by clicking in the map or typing the coordinates of the point. The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you do not see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
PAGE 1178

To measure coordinate geometry ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To add distances (page 1157) To display the distance between points (page 1159) To display angle information (page 1160) To display COGO information for lines and arcs (page 1161) To display the slope between two points (page 1162) Overview of Measuring Coordinate Geometry Use the inquiry commands to extract geometric information from drawing objects such as lines, curves, closed polylines, and polygons.
PAGE 1179

To do this... Use this method... Display the distance between points. Click Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Con- tinuous Distance. See Displaying Continuous Distance (page 1158) Display angle information. Click Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Angle Information. See Displaying Angle Information (page 1160) Display coordinate geometry information for lines and arcs. Click Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Line & Arc Information.
PAGE 1180

Displays the distance between points Menu Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Continuous Distance Icon Continuous Distance Command Line MAPCGCDIST MAPCGANG Displays the angle between lines or points Menu Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Angle Information Icon Angle Information Command Line MAPCGANG MAPCGLIST Displays coordinate geometry information for lines and arcs Menu Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Line and Arc Information Icon Line and Arc Information Command Line MAPCGLIST Adding Distances You can calculate the to
PAGE 1181

You are prompted to enter a number, specify a distance, or select text. Select all the distances you want to add. You can select numeric text in your drawing, click the start and end points of the distance you want to measure, or enter the number directly on the command line. When you press Enter, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the total of all the distances.
PAGE 1182

Quick Reference MAPCGADIST Adds the distances between points Menu Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Add Distances Icon Add Distances Command Line MAPCGADIST Displaying Continuous Distance You can add and display the distance between one point and several other points, or between a series of points in a drawing. NOTE You can perform this operation only on drawing objects. It is not available for geospatial features.
PAGE 1183

■ Setting Coordinate Geometry Options (page 233) ■ Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143) To display the distance between points 1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Continuous Distance. 2 Select Base or Continuous. ■ Base: Always measures the distance from the first point you select to each of the additional points you select. ■ Continuous: Measures the distance from one point to the next. 3 Select two points to display the distance between the points. 4 Select another point.
PAGE 1184

Displaying Angle Information You can display the acute and obtuse angle between points or intersecting lines in a drawing. NOTE You can perform this operation only on drawing objects. It is not available for geospatial features.
PAGE 1185

Displaying COGO Information for Lines and Arcs You can display coordinate geometry for lines and arcs. This information includes line and curve details, area, and coordinates. NOTE You can perform this operation only on drawing objects. It is not available for geospatial features. See also: ■ Setting Coordinate Geometry Options (page 233) ■ Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143) To display COGO information for lines and arcs 1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Line & Arc Information.
PAGE 1186

NOTE You can perform this operation only on drawing objects. It is not available for geospatial features. See also: ■ Setting Coordinate Geometry Options (page 233) ■ Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143) ■ Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 1202) To display the slope between two points 1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ List Slope. 2 Select a line or an arc, or enter p to specify points. 3 If you entered p, specify a starting point and an ending point for the line.
PAGE 1187

To create themes ■ ■ To create a theme for a feature layer (page 1168) To theme drawing data (page 1176) Overview of Creating Themes A theme varies the display of data based on properties or attributes of the data, for example area, length, pavement type, assessed value, temperature, or land use. You can use themes to change colors, line types, symbols, text, or other properties that can help you present map information and tell a story.
PAGE 1188

You can add labels to a theme to label features or drawing objects. You can also add a legend that lists the conditions of the theme and explains the colors, symbols, line patterns, shadings, and annotation used. Tell me more Video Procedures ■ Show me how to theme a parcels layer. ■ Show me how to manually adjust the ranges of a theme. ■ Show me how to theme based on individual values.
PAGE 1189

The method you use to theme data depends on the type of layer on which the data is stored. To theme this type See... of data... Description Feature layers Theming Features (page 1165) Display Manager layers from feature sources such as SDF or Oracle that have been added using Data Connect. Drawing layers Theming Drawing Data (page 1176) AutoCAD layers containing drawing objects from DWG files.
PAGE 1190

A theme showing roads themed by type NOTE For information about theming drawing objects, see Overview of Theming Drawing Data (page 1178). Theme Rules A theme for a feature layer has a set of scale ranges and a rule that corresponds to each one. For example, if you are theming by parcel size, the scale ranges would indicate different parcel sizes.
PAGE 1191

■ Feature labels display the values of a property. For example, you can label parcels with their address or area values. As a layer is drawn, each feature is compared to the rules in the order that they are listed. The first rule for which the feature meets the condition is used to specify the style and legend label for that feature. A default or empty condition applies to all features and defines the style for features that do not meet any of the preceding rules.
PAGE 1192

■ Show me how to theme based on individual values. ■ To create a theme for a feature layer (page 1168) ■ Lesson 2: Style Map Features ■ Analyze Data ■ Choose the right type of theme to suit your data. ■ Manually adjust the ranges of a theme. ■ Theme based on individual values.
PAGE 1193

2 In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to theme. For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643). 3 In the Polygon Style, Point Style, or Line Style area, click New Theme. 4 To analyze features based on values that fall into various numerical ranges, do the following in the Theme dialog box (page 1645): ■ For Property, select the property on which to base the theme.
PAGE 1194

For more information about creating feature labels, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091). To use expressions for labels, see Using Expressions to Label Features. 7 To create legend labels for the theme, do the following: ■ Select the Create Legend Labels check box. ■ For Legend Text, enter the text to appear next to each rule in the legend. For example, if you are theming by size, you could change the legend text to “Square Acreage.” ■ For Label Format, specify how to display the legend label.
PAGE 1195

Theme Options for Polygon Feature Layers When you create a theme for a feature layer whose geometry consists of polygons, the Style Polygon dialog box provides options for changing the visual appearance of the features in the theme. You can change options relating to the fill and border. A polygon feature theme can be transparent so that other map data shows through, for example, another theme or another layer of map data.
PAGE 1196

■ Exercise 6: Display the raster image behind other features ■ Analyze Data ■ Set transparency for parcels or other features. ■ Styling Features (page 639) ■ Overview of Creating Themes (page 1163) ■ Theming Features (page 1165) ■ Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 1202) Tutorial Workflow GIS Skills Related topics NOTE For information about theming drawing objects, see Overview of Theming Drawing Data (page 1178).
PAGE 1197

■ Specify a Background Color, if appropriate. ■ If you want a border, select Apply A Border To The Polygons and choose a line pattern, thickness, and color. 4 Click OK twice. Quick Reference Theme Feature Layer in Display Manager Creates a theme for a feature layer in Display Manager Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Select Edit Style. In the Style Editor, click the New Theme button.
PAGE 1198

NOTE For information about theming drawing objects, see Overview of Theming Drawing Data (page 1178). NOTE For information about theming drawing objects, see Overview of Theming Drawing Data (page 1178). To set styling options for line features 1 Create a theme for a line feature layer (page 1165). 2 In the Theme Lines dialog box, the default Style Range shows the styles that will be used for each rule.
PAGE 1199

Theme Options for Point Feature Layers When you create a theme for a feature layer whose geometry consists of point features, the Style Line dialog box provides options for changing the visual appearance of the features in the theme. You can change options relating to the symbol, color, and size of the points. NOTE For information about theming drawing objects, see Overview of Theming Drawing Data (page 1178).
PAGE 1200

■ Set the size range for the point symbols (width and height). The smallest size will be used for the objects in the lowest scale range and the largest size will be used for the objects in the highest scale range. You can enter a number or use an expression to set size. ■ For Fill Color Range and Edge Color Range, specify the beginning and ending colors for the theme. The intermediate colors will be calculated automatically, but you can adjust them.
PAGE 1201

For example, you can vary the shade of blue used for parcels, depending on the assessed property value of each parcel. Change the color of each parcel based on assessed property value. You can also use predefined themes, called ramps (page 1183). NOTE For information about theming geospatial features, see Theming Features (page 1168).
PAGE 1202

■ Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 1202) NOTE For information about theming geospatial features, see Theming Features (page 1168). To do this... Use this method... Create a theme for a drawing layer. In Display Manager (page 2060) rightclick a drawing layer ➤ Add Style ➤ Theme. See Theming Drawing Data (page 1176) Edit a theme for a drawing layer. In Display Manager (page 2060) rightclick a drawing layer ➤ Edit Theme.
PAGE 1203

NOTE For information about theming geospatial features, see Theming Features (page 1168). Theme Style Example More Information Alter color Alter linetype To assign line width to circles, arcs, or lines, convert the objects to polylines with the drawing cleanup tools. See Cleaning Up Drawing Data (page 765). Alter line weight To assign line width to circles, arcs, or lines, convert the objects to polylines with the drawing cleanup tools. See Cleaning Up Drawing Data (page 765).
PAGE 1204

Theme Style Example More Information Add hatch/fill Tips for Drawing Layer Themes: Hatch Scale (page 1184) Add text Tips for Drawing Layer Themes: Text Height (page 1185) Alter line style To assign line width to circles, arcs, or lines, convert the objects to polylines with the drawing cleanup tools. See Cleaning Up Drawing Data (page 765). Alter block insertion Scale factors for blocks vary according to the plot scale and the size of the block.
PAGE 1205

Theme Style Example Add annotation More Information Tips for Drawing Layer Themes: Annotation (page 1185) Tips for Drawing Layer Themes: Text Height (page 1185) See also: ■ Adding a Legend (page 1116) ■ Theming Features (page 1165) ■ Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 1202) NOTE For information about theming geospatial features, see Theming Features (page 1168).
PAGE 1206

or population. When you display this type of data, you define ranges for the values. 3 Next to the Theme Type list, click Values to specify the data to use for the theme. 4 In the Thematic Values dialog box (page 1644), under Data Values, specify the data to use. For Obtain From, click sources. to choose from a list of data 5 To ignore or exclude certain values in the data, specify them in the Ignore box. These values, while present in the data, may be inappropriate for use in the theme.
PAGE 1207

To change the thumbnail used in the Display Manager 1 Select the layer. 2 Click Display to open Properties palette. 3 On the Display tab of the Properties palette, select the thumbnail preview. For example, choose the polygon icon for parcels or the arc icon for pipes. To add a legend to your drawing ■ In the Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Create Legend.
PAGE 1208

A ramp is a pre-built sequence of styles, such as a set of color gradations or a set of line types. The information required to create the ramp is stored in a separate file in XML format. AutoCAD Map 3D supplies several ramp files that you can use. NOTE For information about theming geospatial features, see Theming Features (page 1168).
PAGE 1209

Examples of hatch patterns with different scales on a map plotted at 1:10000 Using too low a scale for hatch patterns can seriously impair results. For a listing of standard hatch patterns, look up "standard libraries" in the help index. Tips for Drawing Layer Themes: Text Height Scale and height values for fill patterns, text height, and symbol size vary according to the plotting scale you intend to use. The following table shows suitable text heights for different plot scales.
PAGE 1210

within your drawing and define what kind of information you want to be displayed in the annotation, as well as the layout of that information. Annotation templates can include textual values, such as values from object data or object properties such as a line weight, and graphics, such as images and arrows. NOTE For information about theming geospatial features, see Theming Features (page 1168).
PAGE 1211

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To use Constrained Orbit or Swivel (page 1196) To use walk (page 1196) To change the Visual Style (page 1197) To specify hillshading settings (page 1200) To turn hillshading on or off (page 1201) To change the vertical exaggeration (page 1201) To theme a surface to analyze height, slope or aspect (page 1203) To change colors in a themed surface (page 1205) Overview of Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces After you add a raster-based surface to your map (such as a Digital Elevation Model or ESRI
PAGE 1212

■ Color a surface by elevation and adjust hillshading. ■ Change the elevation ranges for a surface. ■ View a site in 3D. ■ Drape vector and raster layers over a surface. ■ Analyze the slope and aspect of a site. ■ Create a contour layer from a surface. ■ Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map (page 441) GIS Skills Related topics Analyze a raster-based surface (such as a Digital Elevation Model or ESRI Grid file) in the following ways.
PAGE 1213

Adding and Modifying Contour Lines You can can add contour lines to a raster-based surface in your map to create a contour or topographic map. You add contour lines to surface layers in Display Manager. With contour lines, each line connects points of equal elevation on the surface. The lines can help you determine the elevation at a specific location on the surface, help clarify and analyze the 3D surface terrain, and help with things like navigation.
PAGE 1214

■ File name of the SDF that will store the contour features Tell me more ■ Show me how to create a contour layer from a surface. ■ To create contour lines (page 1190) ■ Lesson 1: Analyze Data Visually, Using Surfaces ■ Style Surfaces ■ Create a contour layer from a surface.
PAGE 1215

3 In the Contour Elevation Interval list, select the difference in elevation between contour lines, for example, 10, 20, or 50. 4 Select the units (meters or feet) used to measure the elevation in your surface. AutoCAD Map 3D attempts to get this unit from the surface itself, but you can change it. 5 In the Major Contour Every list, select the interval between major (bold) contour lines. For example, if you choose 5, every fifth contour line will be bolded.
PAGE 1216

Quick Reference Create Contours Creates contour lines for 3D raster-based surfaces Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a surface layer, and select Create Contour Layer. Dialog Box Generate Contour dialog box Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces To drape 2D map data over a surface in your map, switch to a 3D view. AutoCAD Map 3D automatically drapes 2D map data and displays everything in 3D, creating a texture map.
PAGE 1217

■ To drape 2D map data over a 3D surface (page 1193) ■ Lesson 1: Analyze Data Visually, Using Surfaces ■ Exercise 4: Try out the sample data ■ Style Surfaces ■ Drape vector and raster layers over a surface. ■ View a site in 3D.
PAGE 1218

Quick Reference Drape 2D Data Over a Surface Switch to a 3D view and 2D data is automatically draped over surfaces in your map Icon Switch to 3D Viewing Surfaces in 3D When working with maps that include 3D data such as raster-based surfaces, display different views in 3D to explore, examine, and analyze the surface from different perspectives.
PAGE 1219

TIP To improve the display of a surface after zooming in, use the Resample Raster option. This resamples / requeries the data so it is as clear as possible, getting rid of things like pixelation. For more information, see Viewing Raster Images (page 674). Tell me more ■ Show me how to view and navigate in 3D. ■ To switch between 2D and 3D (page 1196) ■ Style Surfaces ■ View a site in 3D.
PAGE 1220

To switch between 2D and 3D ■ On the status bar, click to switch to 3D or to switch to 2D. To use 3D Zoom . 1 On the 3D Navigation toolbar, click 3D Zoom The 3D Navigation toolbar opens when you are in 3D viewing mode. 2 Press ENTER, press ESC, or right-click to exit. To use 3D Pan 1 On the 3D Navigation toolbar, click 3D Pan . 2 When the hand cursor appears, hold down the button on your pointing device as you move. 3 If you are using a wheel mouse, hold down the wheel button and move the mouse.
PAGE 1221

4 Wait briefly as the Position Locator palette appears. Review, change settings as needed, and then minimize or close it. 5 Use the keyboard buttons to walk through your surface. For example, use the up arrow key to move forward. 6 Press ENTER or ESC when you are done. To change the Visual Style 1 Enter the VISUALSTYLES command. 2 In the Visual Styles Manager, double-click the sample image of the visual style. The selected visual style is applied to your surface.
PAGE 1222

Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D Icon 3D Constrained Orbit Command Line 3DORBIT 3DFORBIT Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D, using an unconstrained orbit Icon 3D Free Orbit Command Line 3DFORBIT 3DCORBIT Starts an interactive 3D view and sets the objects into continuous motion Icon 3D Continuous Orbit Command Line 3DCORBIT 3DWALK Interactively changes the view of a 3D drawing so that you appear to be walking through the model Icon 3D Walk Command Line 3DWALK 3DSWIVEL
PAGE 1223

Icon 3D Adjust Distance Command Line 3DDISTANCE Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration Hillshading adds shading to 3D surface layers by casting the sun's light across a surface from the direction and angle you specify. Hillshading produces a more realistic image and helps you better understand the magnitude and relationships of the various elevation changes (that is, the bumps and valleys) on the surface.
PAGE 1224

Tell me more ■ Show me how to color surfaces based on elevation. ■ Show me how to adjust the settings for hillshading. ■ To specify hillshading settings (page 1200) ■ Style Surfaces ■ Color a surface by elevation and adjust hillshading.
PAGE 1225

■ ■ For Angle, specify how high in the sky the light is located, such as near the horizon, directly overhead, or somewhere in between. Enter an angle into the edit box, drag the yellow disk to specify an angle, or use Settings Click Settings to specify sun settings in the Sun Properties palette using date, time, and location. Then, redisplay the Hillshade Settings dialog box and click Import. 3 Click OK.
PAGE 1226

Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect You can create a theme to change the display of a surface based on height (elevation), slope, or aspect (direction of slope). Surface Theme Type Illustration Height - Changes the display based on elevation. Slope - Changes the display based on ground slope or steepness. For example, you can use gray to show areas with a slope of less than 10%. Aspect - Varies the display based on the direction of ground slope.
PAGE 1227

Tell me more ■ Show me how to perform a slope analysis of a surface. ■ To theme a surface to analyze height, slope or aspect (page 1203) ■ Style Surfaces ■ Analyze the slope and aspect of a site.
PAGE 1228

5 Specify the other theming option, for example the palette to use. For more information, see Theme dialog box (page 1645). 6 In the Theme dialog box, click OK. 7 In the Style Editor, click Apply. Quick Reference Theme Surface Layer in Display Manager Creates a theme for a surface layer in Display Manager. You can theme on height, slope, or aspect. Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a surface layer. Select Edit Display Style. In the Style Editor, in the Style list, select Theme.
PAGE 1229

Tell me more ■ Show me how to color surfaces based on elevation. ■ To change colors in a themed surface (page 1205) ■ Style Surfaces ■ Color a surface by elevation and adjust hillshading. ■ Change the elevation ranges for a surface.
PAGE 1230

Quick Reference Theme Feature Layer in Display Manager Creates a theme for a feature layer in Display Manager Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Select Edit Style. In the Style Editor, click the New Theme button. Dialog Box Theme dialog box Finding and Selecting Data You can find, select, and filter features and drawing objects in your maps, but the methods you use for features and drawing objects are different.
PAGE 1231

■ ■ ■ To search to select data (page 1212) To search for and select features (page 1214) To filter feature layers (page 1217) Overview of Finding and Selecting Features You can find and focus on a specific subset of features so you do not have to review the entire set of data manually to find what you need. NOTE For information about finding and selecting drawing objects, see Overview of Queries (page 1235) and Using Quick Select to Select Drawing Objects (page 1219).
PAGE 1232

Use Search when you need a more comprehensive way to find features in map. A query is like Search. You define the set of criteria to find and bring in just the data you want. TIP Using a filter can help you improve performance when working with large sets of feature data. You can filter data after you bring it into your map, or you can use Add To Map With Query to apply a filter while you bring in the data.
PAGE 1233

See also: ■ Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711) ■ Bringing in GIS Features (page 308) ■ Overview of Creating Expressions Use these techniques to find and focus on a specific subset of features to work with. NOTE For information about finding and selecting drawing objects, see Overview of Queries (page 1235) and Using Quick Select to Select Drawing Objects (page 1219).
PAGE 1234

Method Description Filter Feature Layers (Data Connect or Display Manager) (page 1216) To reduce the scope of feature layers in your map, you can edit the query that brings in the data. For example, if your map has an SDF layer containing all the parcels in California and you want only the parcels in San Francisco, you can edit the query so that the layer displays only the parcels you want.
PAGE 1235

Finding and selecting parcel features with STNAME = AIRPORT RD Use Filter with Auto-Zoom to magnify the resulting features in the map. To remove a filter, specify another one, or click Clear Filter in the Data Table. Searching to Select Data in the Data Table Use Search To Select in the Data Table to find data that meets conditions that you specify. For example, you can search for all parcels with an area greater than five acres.
PAGE 1236

■ To clear the filter and display all records (page 1212) ■ To search to select data (page 1212) To find a subset of data in the Data Table 1 In Display Manager, select the feature layer to search. For information about creating a new feature layer, see Bringing in GIS Features (page 303). 2 Click . 3 In the Data Table dialog box (page 1613), change the data source in the Data list if necessary. 4 For Filter By, select the column to search, for example, City or Owner Name.
PAGE 1237

3 On the lower bar of the Data Table dialog box (page 1613), click Search To Select. 4 Create an expression for your search. You can create the following types of expressions: ■ Property Evaluation expressions compare the value of a property to a value you specify. For example, you can find parcels with an area greater than a value you specify, or streets with a particular number of lanes. ■ Location Conditions find data based on its location in the map.
PAGE 1238

Task Pane In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table button Dialog Box Data Table Dialog Box Searching For and Selecting Features Use the Search command in AutoCAD Map 3D to find and select features in your map based on their location or properties. NOTE For information about searching for and selecting drawing objects, see Overview of Queries (page 1235). A search specifies a set of conditions (also referred to as criteria or rules) that must be true for a feature to be found and selected.
PAGE 1239

3 In the Search dialog box, click Add Layer to select the layers to search. 4 If you are creating a location condition, click Zoom Extents to zoom the drawing window to the extents of the selected feature classes. 5 Create an expression for your search. You can create the following types of expressions: ■ Property Evaluation expressions compare the value of a property to a value you specify.
PAGE 1240

Dialog Box Searching to Select Feature Layers Filtering Feature Layers Filter one or more feature source layers so that only some of the features appear in your map. NOTE For information about filtering drawing objects, see Overview of Queries (page 1235). To filter the layers, define a query condition or a set of conditions that specify which features you want. The procedure is like performing a search.
PAGE 1241

■ Searching For and Selecting Features (page 1214) ■ Bringing in GIS Features (page 308) ■ Creating Expressions - Reference NOTE For information about searching for and selecting drawing objects, see Overview of Queries (page 1235). To filter feature layers 1 Make sure that you are connected to the feature sources for the feature layers or groups to filter. For more information, see Bringing in GIS Features (page 303). 2 In the Display Manager, select the layer, layers, or group to filter.
PAGE 1242

You can save your expression for reuse. 7 To create a complex property evaluation, insert an AND or OR operator, and then insert another property, operator, and value combination. Every operator must be preceded by a property. For example, to find parcels whose last purchase date is after 1990 and before 2005, the expression must look like this: Purchase_Date > 1990 AND Purchase_Date < 2005 8 Validate your expression. 9 When the expression is complete and valid, click OK.
PAGE 1243

Use these methods to find and select drawing objects. NOTE For information on finding, filtering, and selecting geospatial features, see Overview of Finding and Selecting Features (page 1209). Method Description Quick Select (page 1219) Select drawing objects based on their object properties (such as color), object types, or object classification, or to exclude drawing objects from a selection set.
PAGE 1244

See also: ■ Finding Records in a Database Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1221) ■ Querying Objects from Attached Drawings (page 1235) For more information about AutoCAD layer definitions, please refer to the AutoCAD Help. NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. For information on selecting geospatial features, see Searching For and Selecting Features (page 1214). To select drawing objects using Quick Select 1 Verify that you have drawing objects in your map. 2 Enter the QSELECT command.
PAGE 1245

For more information about using Quick Select to select or exclude drawing objects, please refer to the AutoCAD Help. Finding Records in a Database Linked to Drawing Objects Using the Data View, you can find records in an attached database. If database records are linked to objects in a drawing, you can highlight records linked to objects you select. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1246

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To set other Data View highlighting options (page 1227) To highlight records linked to drawing objects (page 1229) To set the record highlight color (page 1229) To use a SQL filter in the Data View (page 1231) To use a spatial filter in the Data View (page 1234) Overview of Finding Records in a Linked Database After you create a link between a record in the database table and an object in a drawing, you can use the information in the database table to help you analyze, select, and display object
PAGE 1247

To do this... Use this method... See which records are linked to selected objects. Use Data View to highlight the records. (page 1229) Display only records whose data matches the conditions you specify. Use a SQL filter in Data View. (page 1231) Display only records that are linked to drawing objects you select in the drawing. Use a spatial filter in Data View. (page 1234) Print linked data. Print the current contents of Data View. (page 1475) NOTE These procedures apply only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1248

Icon Link Records to Objects (Data View) Zoom Scale Specifies the percent of the drawing display that the selected objects will occupy Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Zoom Scale Dialog Box Zoom Scale dialog box Finding a Database Record Using the Data View, you can search for text strings in a database table. The entered text must match the record exactly. To use Replace, the table must be open in Edit mode and AutoCommit must be turned off. NOTE Data View is for drawing objects.
PAGE 1249

■ Editing a Database (page 1055) ■ Changing the Look of the Data View (page 1057) ■ Finding and Selecting Features (page 1206) To find a database record in the Data View 1 Open a database table in the Data View. See Opening a Database Table (page 1052). 2 Position the cursor in the column you want to search. 3 Do one of the following: ■ In the Data View, click Edit menu ➤ Find. ■ In the Data View, click Edit menu ➤ Replace. 4 In the dialog box, enter the characters to find.
PAGE 1250

Highlight parcels that are linked to selected records in a database table. You can set the following options: ■ Automatically highlight objects linked to the records you select ■ Automatically zoom in on highlighted objects ■ Automatically create a selection set of highlighted objects NOTE Once you set AutoZoom, Zoom Scale, and AutoHighlight, these settings stay in effect for every drawing until you change them. NOTE Use the Data Table to highlight features.
PAGE 1251

To highlight drawing objects linked to a database record 1 Open a linked database table in the Data View. See Opening a Database Table (page 1052). 2 In the Data View window, select a record. 3 In the Data View, click Highlight menu ➤ Highlight Objects. NOTE This command is available only if you selected a link template for the table. Objects that are linked to the selected record are highlighted. To clear the highlighting, enter regen on the Command line.
PAGE 1252

When records are selected or deselected, automatically adjusts the zoom so that the objects linked to the selected records fill the percent of the screen specified by the Zoom Scale command Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Auto Zoom (Data View) Link Records to Objects Links the selected records to objects in your drawing Menu Icon In the Data View: Links ➤ Link Records To Objects Link Records to Objects (Data View) Zoom Scale Specifies the percent of the drawing display that the selected objects will
PAGE 1253

■ Changing the Look of the Data View (page 1057) ■ Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries) (page 1230) ■ Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location (page 1233) ■ Finding and Selecting Features (page 1206) To highlight records linked to drawing objects 1 Open a linked database table in the Data View. See Opening a Database Table (page 1052). 2 In the Data View, click Highlight menu ➤ Highlight Records ➤ Select Object. 3 Select the objects in your drawing.
PAGE 1254

Menu Icon In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Highlight Records ➤ Clear Highlight Clear Highlight (Data View) Highlight Color Selects the color to use to highlight records with the Highlight Records command Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Highlight Color (Data View) Highlight Records Highlights records that match objects you select in the drawing Menu Icon In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Highlight Records ➤ Select Objects Highlight Records (Data View) Show Highlighted Records Only Displays only the current
PAGE 1255

Use a SQL filter to view only records whose data matches specified conditions. NOTE You can also filter records based on the location of linked objects. If both a SQL filter and a spatial filter are defined, the Data View displays only those records that match both filters. You can set an option to determine how many filters AutoCAD Map 3D stores.
PAGE 1256

■ Select an operator. To use wild-card characters, select the LIKE operator. For example, to list only those streets that begin with the letter C, select the LIKE operator and enter C% in the Value box. Wild-card characters can be used only with string values. For information on wild-card characters, refer to the documentation for your database system software. ■ Enter a value or click… to select from the list of possible values. ■ After setting your criteria, click Add.
PAGE 1257

Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location Use a spatial filter to display only records that are linked to drawing objects you select in the drawing. When you apply a spatial filter, the Data View displays only those records that are linked to selected objects in the drawing. NOTE You can also filter records based on the data in the record. If both a SQL filter and a spatial filter are defined, the Data View displays only those records that match both filters.
PAGE 1258

NOTE The following procedure applies only to drawing objects. For information about feature data, see Using Expressions to Select Feature Data (page 1131). In addition, the Spatial Filter command is available only if you have a selected a link template for the table. See Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). To use a spatial filter in the Data View 1 Open a database table in the Data View. See Opening a Database Table (page 1052).
PAGE 1259

(Data View) Spatial Filter Displays only records attached to objects that you select Menu Icon In the Data View: Records ➤ Spatial Filter Spatial Filter Querying Objects from Attached Drawings To query objects from attached drawings ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To create a query to retrieve information from attached drawings (page 1237) To retrieve drawing objects based on their location (page 1241) To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties (page 1244) To retrieve drawing objects based on their obje
PAGE 1260

NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on filtering geospatial feature data, see Using Expressions to Select Feature Data (page 1131). Markup Objects Because markup objects are not stored in the drawing file, you cannot query these objects. To copy them from an attached drawing to the current drawing, open the other drawing directly and copy the markup objects. Then paste them into the current drawing.
PAGE 1261

To create a query to retrieve information from attached drawings 1 Open a drawing. 2 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click the Drawings folder. Click Define/ModifyDrawing Set. 3 Make sure that the drawings you want to query are attached and active. 4 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and then click Define. 5 To zoom to the extents of all active drawings, click Zoom Ext in the Define Query Of Attached Drawings dialog box.
PAGE 1262

Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query Icon Define Query Command Line ADEQUERY Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location Location conditions retrieve drawing objects from a specified location in the drawings.
PAGE 1263

Location Types Fence Point Polygon Window Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1239
PAGE 1264

Location Types All NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on filtering geospatial feature data by location, see Using Expressions to Select Feature Data (page 1131). Tell me more ■ Show me how to run a query on a set of attached DWG files. ■ To retrieve drawing objects based on their location (page 1241) ■ Bring in a subset of features using a query.
PAGE 1265

■ Combining Drawing Query Conditions (page 1255) NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. For information on filtering geospatial feature data by location, see Using Expressions to Select Feature Data (page 1131). To retrieve drawing objects based on their location 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and then click Define. 2 To zoom to the extents of all active drawings, click Zoom Ext. 3 Click Location.
PAGE 1266

Icon Define Query Command Line ADEQUERY Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Finding All Drawing Objects Containing a Specific Property Property conditions retrieve drawing objects based on AutoCAD Map 3D object properties such as color, elevation, layer, or linetype Example: Search for objects on a given layer or of a specified color.
PAGE 1267

objects with an elevation between 21.0 and 47.0, use the following condition statements: Property: ELEVATION > 21 AND Property: ELEVATION < 47 Notes ■ If you query against Object Type and IMAGE is not listed even though you have a raster image in an attached drawing, exit the query dialog boxes. In the Image Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image Management. Management dialog box, click OK. Then define the query again.
PAGE 1268

■ Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific SQL Information (page 1249) ■ Combining Drawing Query Conditions (page 1255) NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. For information on filtering geospatial feature data by property, see Using Expressions to Select Feature Data (page 1131). To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and then click Define. 2 Click Property.
PAGE 1269

Quick Reference ADEQUERY Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query Icon Define Query Command Line ADEQUERY Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data Data conditions retrieve drawing objects based on nongraphic information associated with the objects.
PAGE 1270

If you store pipe diameter information in an object data table, you can use a data condition to retrieve pipe objects based on the diameter information attached to each pipe object. In this case, all pipes with a diameter of 8 or greater are retrieved. Move your cursor over the image to see the results. NOTE You cannot retrieve objects based on constant block attributes.
PAGE 1271

NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on filtering geospatial feature data by property, see Using Expressions to Select Feature Data (page 1131). Keep in mind the following : ■ You must define and attach the data to objects before you can use a data condition. ■ The Database Link option tests the link data stored on the object, not the data in the database table. You can retrieve objects based on data in the linked database table (page 1249).
PAGE 1272

■ Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location (page 1238) ■ Combining Drawing Query Conditions (page 1255) NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. For information on filtering geospatial feature data by property, see Using Expressions to Select Feature Data (page 1131). To retrieve drawing objects based on their object data 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and then click Define. 2 Click Data.
PAGE 1273

6 Click OK. 7 In the Define Query Of Attached Drawings dialog box, select a query mode. 8 Click Execute Query.
PAGE 1274

1250 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
PAGE 1275

Use a query with a SQL condition to retrieve objects based on the value in a linked data base record. In this example, all pads with a phase type of 'C' are retrieved. Move your cursor over the image to see the results. NOTE If you are retrieving objects from attached drawings, you must have the same data base attached in both the attached drawing and the current drawing. You must link SQL data to objects before you can use a SQL query.
PAGE 1276

Specifying a Value The operator and the value define the condition that the value in the table must match. For example, if you select the operator < (less than) and enter a value of 5, the condition retrieves all objects linked to records in which the value in the table is less than five. ■ The value must match the data type of the column. For example, if the column requires a name, enter a text string. ■ Enclose string values in single quotes.
PAGE 1277

■ Exercise 3: Query in data from the drawing ■ Find and Edit Objects in Attached Drawings ■ Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 204) ■ Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522) ■ Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data (page 363) ■ Finding All Drawing Objects Containing a Specific Property (page 1242) ■ Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location (page 1238) ■ Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data (page 1245) ■ Combining Drawing Quer
PAGE 1278

To reuse a condition you defined previously, click History. Select the condition. 6 Click Add Condition to add the condition to the Current SQL Condition list. 7 To add more conditions, select And or Or and create another condition. 8 When you finish building the SQL condition, click OK. 9 In the Define Query Of Attached Drawings dialog box, select a query mode. 10 Click Execute Query.
PAGE 1279

Combining Drawing Query Conditions You can combine query conditions when creating a query to retrieve drawing objects. Example: Combine a property condition with a location condition to find all utility poles within 100 meters of a road. When you combine conditions, use Or to specify the union of the conditions, use And to specify the intersection of the condition, use Not to exclude specific objects from the query. ■ And — Finds objects only if both conditions are true.
PAGE 1280

If conditions are not grouped, Not conditions are evaluated first, then And, and last Or. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on filtering geospatial feature data conditionally, see Using Expressions to Select Feature Data (page 1131).
PAGE 1281

See also: ■ Altering the Properties of Defined Queries (page 1260) ■ Executing Queries (page 1288) ■ To save a query (page 177) Quick Reference ADEQUERY Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query Icon Define Query Command Line ADEQUERY Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Editing a Drawing Query C
PAGE 1282

■ Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific SQL Information (page 1249) ■ Altering the Properties of Defined Queries (page 1260) ■ Executing Queries (page 1288) ■ To save a query (page 177) NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. For information on filtering geospatial feature data conditionally, see Using Expressions to Select Feature Data (page 1131).
PAGE 1283

Icon Define Query Command Line ADEQUERY Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects Use the property alteration feature to modify drawing objects as they are retrieved by a query. NOTE These procedures apply only to drawing objects. For information on altering geospatial feature data, see Editing Features Using the Data Table (page 712).
PAGE 1284

be repaired in red and roads to be inspected in blue. You can alter the width of the polylines to show road widths. You can also add text to identify elements of your drawing. Property alteration involves the following three general steps: ■ Define a query that retrieves the objects you want to alter. ■ Create a property alteration definition that specifies how to alter the retrieved objects. ■ Execute the query in Draw mode. You cannot use property alteration in Preview or Report mode queries.
PAGE 1285

To alter the properties of queried drawing objects 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and then click Define. 2 In the Define Query dialog box (page 1838), load or create a query. 3 Under Options, click Alter Properties. 4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1863), select the property to alter. For example, to change the color of queried objects, select Color. 5 In the Expression area, specify how to alter the property.
PAGE 1286

9 Under Query Mode, select Draw. You cannot use property alteration in Preview mode or Report mode. 10 Click Execute Query. AutoCAD Map 3D performs the query, applies the property alteration definition to the queried objects, and displays the altered objects in the current drawing.
PAGE 1287

See also: ■ Overview of Queries (page 1235) ■ Executing Queries (page 1288) ■ Altering Properties Using Object Properties (page 1264) ■ Altering Object Properties Using Object Data (page 1267) ■ Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data (page 1269) ■ Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern (page 1281) ■ Changing the Color of Blocks (page 1284) ■ Modifying a Property Alteration Definition (page 1285) NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1288

10 Click Execute Query.
PAGE 1289

(* x.scale 2) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on altering geospatial feature data, see Editing Features Using the Data Table (page 712). Dot Variables ■ Use the .Dwgname dot variable to get the drawing name for a queried object. ■ Use the .Elevation dot variable to get the Z-values for objects. ■ Use the .Height dot variable to get the text height for objects.
PAGE 1290

4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1863), under Select Property, select the property to change. For example, if you have color-coded the objects in your drawing and you now want to move objects to layers based on their color, you would select Layer as the property to change. 5 In the Expression area, click Properties and select the property that you want to base the change on. In this example, we want to move objects based on their current color, so select Color.
PAGE 1291

Altering Object Properties Using Object Data You can define a property alteration that modifies queried drawing objects based on data that is stored on the objects, such as object data, attribute data, or link data. NOTE The value stored on the object must be a valid value for the property that you are altering. For example, if you have selected to alter the property Color, the value stored on the object must be a valid color name or number. If the values do not match, use a range table (page 1272).
PAGE 1292

4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1863), under Select Property, select the property to change. For example, if you store pipe diameters as object data, you can display each pipe with a polyline width that matches the pipe diameter. In this example, you would select Width as the property to change. 5 In the Expression area, click Data. 6 Select one of the following: ■ Attribute — Select a block attribute tag. This will appear in the Expression box as @BlockTagName.
PAGE 1293

Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data You can define a property alteration that modifies queried drawing objects based on data stored in a linked database. Using Property Alteration, parcels not zoned for residential are displayed with a magenta solid fill, based on an external database record value. For example, you could retrieve a set of pipes and display each pipe in a color based on the diameter of the pipe.
PAGE 1294

■ Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern (page 1281) ■ Changing the Color of Blocks (page 1284) ■ Modifying a Property Alteration Definition (page 1285) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on altering geospatial feature data, see Editing Features Using the Data Table (page 712). To alter retrieved drawing objects based on linked SQL data 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and then click Define.
PAGE 1295

When you execute the query with Alter Properties selected, AutoCAD Map 3D changes the queried objects based on the value stored in the external database. For more information on connecting to and using external databases, see External Databases (Object Data) (page 206).
PAGE 1296

NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1297

8 In the Define Range Table dialog box, select an operator and a value for the first condition. These determines which objects fall in this range. 9 Specify the return value for the first condition. The return value specifies how to modify the selected property. For example, if you are modifying the color of an object based on its elevation, enter the color in the Return Value box. NOTE In the Expression Value box and Return Value box, you can enter only simple expressions.
PAGE 1298

6 In the Define Range Table dialog box (page 1842), click New. 7 Enter the name Color and click OK to close the New Range Table dialog box. 8 Enter the description Color areas over 6000. 9 In the Condition area, choose the <= operator. 10 In the Expression Value area, enter 6000. 11 In the Return Value area, enter Blue. 12 Click Add. 13 In the Condition area, choose the > operator. 14 In the Expression Value area, leave the 6000 alone. 15 In the Return Value area, enter Red. 16 Click Add.
PAGE 1299

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Defining an Expression Use Expression Evaluator (page 1541) when you want AutoCAD Map 3D to evaluate drawing data from different sources, or to evaluate data that is different for each object, such as object properties, block attributes, or object data attached to the object. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1300

3 Under Options, click Alter Properties. 4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1863), select the property to alter. For example, to change the color of queried objects, select Color. 5 In the Expression area, enter an expression (page 1541). 6 Click Add to add the property alteration to the Current Property Alterations list. 7 When you finish defining the property alteration, click OK. 8 Make sure Alter Properties is selected when you execute the query. 9 Under Query Mode, select Draw.
PAGE 1301

You can control the text, text height, insertion point, justification, text style, layer, color, and rotation for each text object. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on expressions for geospatial feature data, see Using Expressions to Select Feature Data (page 1131). Selected pipes are labeled with their length.
PAGE 1302

To add text to retrieved drawing objects NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. For information on expressions for geospatial feature data, see Using Expressions to Select Feature Data (page 1131). 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and then click Define. 2 Create or load a query that will retrieve the objects you want to add text to. 3 In the Define Query Of Attached Drawings dialog box, click Alter Properties.
PAGE 1303

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Modifying the Text Insertion Point for a Drawing Object The label point of a drawing object specifies the starting point for text added during a query property alteration. The default label point is the centroid of the object. You can redefine the label point. Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Define Text Location.
PAGE 1304

NOTE To use the label point, choose the .LABELPT dot variable in the Define Text dialog box when you create the Property Alteration definition in the Define Query Of Attached Drawings dialog box. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on labelling geospatial feature data, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
PAGE 1305

Quick Reference ADETEXTLOC Specifies a new label point for an object Menu Create menu ➤ Map Labelpoint Location Icon Map Labelpoint Location Command Line ADETEXTLOC Dialog Box ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command) Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern You can specify a hatch pattern to fill closed polylines and circles during the property alteration process. This applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1306

Closed polylines retrieved by a query are filled with a magenta solid hatch pattern. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on changing the fill for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Styling Features (page 640).
PAGE 1307

To fill queried drawing objects with a hatch pattern NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. For information on changing the fill for geospatial feature data, see To apply styles to areas (page 650). 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and then click Define. 2 Create or load a query that will retrieve the objects you want to fill. 3 In the Define Query Of Attached Drawings dialog box, click Alter Properties.
PAGE 1308

Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query Icon Define Query Command Line ADEQUERY Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Changing the Color of Blocks When you use the Color option of the Set Property Alterations dialog box, the colors of objects change to the color you specify.
PAGE 1309

To change the block color in your current drawing NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. For information on changing the color of geospatial feature data, see To apply styles to areas (page 650). 1 Use the INSERT command to add another instance of the block. 2 Explode the new block.
PAGE 1310

See also: ■ Overview of Queries (page 1235) ■ Executing Queries (page 1288) ■ Altering Properties Using Object Properties (page 1264) ■ Altering Object Properties Using Object Data (page 1267) ■ Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data (page 1269) ■ Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern (page 1281) ■ Changing the Color of Blocks (page 1284) To modify a property alteration definition 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and then cli
PAGE 1311

Quick Reference ADEQUERY Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query Icon Define Query Command Line ADEQUERY Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Executing Drawing Queries After you define a query to retrieve drawing objects, you can execute it in Preview, Draw, or Report mode.
PAGE 1312

■ Report Mode — Writes specified information about the objects to a separate file. Once AutoCAD Map 3D copies the objects that meet the query criteria into the current drawing, it does not duplicate those objects if you run the query again. If an object meets the criteria of more than one query, AutoCAD Map 3D retrieves only one copy of that object. Therefore, you will never have multiple copies of the same object in a drawing.
PAGE 1313

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Running a Drawing Query in Preview Mode Preview mode provides a quick preview of the drawing objects the query will display in the current drawing. You can run a query in Preview mode and check the objects the query produces. If there are too few or too many objects, or objects are displayed in the wrong location, revise the query as necessary.
PAGE 1314

To run a drawing query in Preview mode 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and then click Define. 2 Define or load a query. 3 Under Query Mode, select Preview. 4 Click Execute Query. To clear objects queried with Preview mode, use the REDRAW or REGEN commands. You can also click Redraw in the Define Query Of Attached Drawings dialog box.
PAGE 1315

when they are brought into the current drawing depends on the layers in the current drawing: if the layers exist in the current drawing, the objects take on the characteristics of the existing layers; if the layers do not exist, AutoCAD Map 3D creates new layers with the characteristics of the attached drawing layers. AutoCAD Map 3D preserves the status of objects on locked layers when it copies them into the current drawing.
PAGE 1316

AutoCAD Map 3D copies the queried objects from the attached drawings to the current drawing. AutoCAD Map 3D does not duplicate objects that have already been queried into the current drawing.
PAGE 1317

Creating a Drawing Index To reduce the amount of time it takes to perform a drawing query, create an index. Instead of searching all location, property, object data, or database links to find matching data, AutoCAD Map 3D searches only the relevant index. NOTE Whenever you open a drawing that includes database links, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically creates a database link index and keeps it in memory. To save this database index to the drawing, select the Store Links Index In Drawing File option.
PAGE 1318

■ Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific SQL Information (page 1249) ■ Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061) To create a drawing index 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), right-click Drawings. Click Maintenance. 2 In the Drawing Maintenance dialog box (page 1920), under Active Drawings, select the drawings for which you want to create indexes. If another user has activated the drawing, you cannot create an index for it. 3 Click Drawing Index.
PAGE 1319

4 In the Index Maintenance dialog box (page 1931), under Remove Index, select the type of index to remove. To remove an object data index, click Object Data. 5 In the Remove Object Data Index dialog box (page 1933), select the object data table and fields. Click OK. 6 Click OK to confirm. AutoCAD Map 3D removes the index you specified for each of the selected drawings. 7 Click Close.
PAGE 1320

To remove an assigned coordinate system 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), right-click Current Drawing, and then click Coordinate System. 2 In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box, under Current Drawing or under Source Drawings, replace the code with a period (.) in the Code box.
PAGE 1321

As Point Only. To set this and other query options, see Setting Query Options (page 245). Block Attributes and Property Queries When performing Property queries, you can query using block attributes, but not constant attributes. You can define constant attributes that have the same value for every occurrence of the block that contains them. However, Property queries do not recognize constant attributes. Instead, use the block name in the query. You can, however, specify invisible attributes.
PAGE 1322

Queries and Raster Images Raster images attached to drawings using the IMAGEATTACH or MAPIINSERT commands are objects that are part of the drawing. When queried, raster images behave like blocks. Raster images resulting from a paste operation, that is, an OLE frame, are not recognized as objects in queries. When a raster image is queried during a Preview query that includes a coordinate conversion or transformation, the image is not displayed.
PAGE 1323

■ Altering Properties Using Object Properties (page 1264) Property Alteration (Scale and Rotate) In the Property Alteration dialog box, the Scale option applies only to blocks, the Rotate option applies only to text and blocks.
PAGE 1324

Retrieving Groups of Objects When you retrieve a group of objects, AutoCAD Map 3D treats them as separate and independent objects and then restores the group when you save the objects back to the attached drawings, even if you edit the objects in the group. However, if you create a new object in the current drawing, you cannot associate it with the group to be saved back to the attached drawing.
PAGE 1325

Menu In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query Icon Define Query Command Line ADEQUERY Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define -or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit Dialog Box Define Query dialog box Analyzing Feature Classes Use buffers and overlays to analyze feature classes. NOTE These topics apply only to geospatial feature data.
PAGE 1326

Dialog Box Create Buffer dialog box MAPGISOVERLAY Performs overlay analysis of feature classes Menu Click Analyze menu ➤ GIS Overlay. Icon Command Line MAPGISOVERLAY Overview of Analyzing Feature Classes Use buffers and overlays to analyze feature classes. NOTE This functionality applies only to geospatial feature data. For information about using buffers and overlays for drawing objects, see Overlaying Two Topologies (page 1336) and Buffering a Topology (page 1345).
PAGE 1327

Use buffers to analyze features by proximity. Overlays compare two feature classes or layers that are spatially related. Once you select the feature classes to compare and the type of overlay to perform, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a new layer and data store containing the results of the comparison. You can connect to the comparison data store as you would to any other data store.
PAGE 1328

Use overlays to compare two layers that are related spatially. Tell me more ■ Show me how to create a buffer zone around a parcel. ■ Show me how to use a buffer zone to select parcels. ■ Show me how to create overlapping buffer zones.
PAGE 1329

■ Show me how to use a location query with multiple buffers. ■ Show me how to create an overlay analysis for features ■ Lesson 3: Analyze Data by Proximity Using Buffers ■ Lesson 4: Perform a Flood Analysis with Overlay ■ Lesson 5: Edit a Predefined Workflow ■ Find and Select Features Within a Buffer Zone ■ To create a buffer (page 1308) ■ To perform an Overlay operation (page 1316) ■ Select features by location using a buffer. ■ Create overlapping buffer zones around points.
PAGE 1330

Quick Reference MAPFDOBUFFERCREATE Creates a buffer zone around features in your map Menu Click Analyze ➤ Buffer. Command Line MAPFDOBUFFERCREATE Dialog Box Create Buffer dialog box MAPGISOVERLAY Performs overlay analysis of feature classes Menu Click Analyze menu ➤ GIS Overlay. Icon Command Line MAPGISOVERLAY Buffering Features in Your Map Use buffers to analyze features by proximity. Select a geospatial feature in your map and specify the distance for the buffer.
PAGE 1331

Buffer Warnings If you select a very large number of features to buffer, AutoCAD Map 3D will display a warning and give you the option of reducing the number of features in your selection. AutoCAD Map 3D will also display this warning if you have selected features with very complex geometry, or if you have selected merge options for too many features or features with complex geometry.
PAGE 1332

To create a buffer NOTE Thise procedure applies only to geospatial feature data. For information about using buffers for drawing objects, see To buffer a topology (page 1347). 1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Feature panel ➤ Feature Buffer. 2 In the Create Buffer dialog box (page 1559), if you have not already selected the feature or features to buffer, click Select Features to select the features interactively on your map.
PAGE 1333

To change your selection or merge options after receiving a buffer warning 1 In the Buffer Warning dialog box (page 1560), click Change. Proceeding after receiving a buffer warning may take a very long time. 2 In the Create Buffer dialog box (page 1559), do one or both of the following: ■ Click Select Features, then click the features to buffer on your map. ■ Select a new Merge Results option. 3 Click OK.
PAGE 1334

Tell me more ■ Show me how to create an overlay analysis for features ■ Lesson 4: Perform a Flood Analysis with Overlay ■ Lesson 5: Edit a Predefined Workflow ■ To perform an Overlay operation (page 1316) ■ Create an overlay analysis for features.
PAGE 1335

The order of the geometries you select is important. To compare line and polygon geometries, the line geometry must be the Source layer. If you select a polygon geometry as the Source, line geometries are not available as the Overlay. The available choices for Type depend on the geometry in the Source and Overlay. However, if the Source or Overlay is binding data, AutoCAD Map 3D cannot determine the geometry types before it executes the operation.
PAGE 1336

Intersect supports the following geometry types: ■ Intersect: line/line ■ Intersect: line/polygon ■ Intersect: point/polygon ■ Intersect: polygon/polygon Union Union determines the geometry that exists in either the Source or Overlay geometry. Where the geometry intersects, additional features are created. The resulting layer is the sum of the two comparison layers. Use Union to combine two related polygon features.
PAGE 1337

Erase Erase determines the geometry from the Source that does not intersect with the Overlay. The intersecting pieces are discarded. Use Erase to subtract a geometric section from a feature class. For example, find all roads that lie outside the enterprise district, or all hospitals that are outside the flood zone. The resulting layer has the attributes of the Source feature only.
PAGE 1338

Identity supports the following geometry types: ■ Identity: line/polygon ■ Identity: point/polygon ■ Identity: polygon/polygon Clip Like Intersect, Clip creates features from the areas of the Source that overlap with the Overlay. Use Clip to find features that lie within a geometric area. For example, find hydrants within a development, or road segments within a particular neighborhood.
PAGE 1339

■ Clip: point/polygon ■ Clip: polygon/polygon Paste Paste creates new features by pasting the Overlay features onto the Source features. All Overlay features become new features in the resulting layer. In addition, areas of the Source that do not fall within the geometry of the Overlay become features in the resulting layer. Use Paste to combine two overlapping features. For example, add the attributes of city districts to the developments they overlap.
PAGE 1340

The output layer has attributes from both the Source and Overlay. Features resulting from the Source geometry have values for Source attributes, but their Overlay attribute values are NULL. Features resulting from the Overlay geometry have values for Overlay attributes, but their Source attribute values are NULL. Symmetric Difference supports polygon/polygon comparisons only. Symmetric difference: polygon/polygon To perform an Overlay operation NOTE This procedure applies only to geospatial feature data.
PAGE 1341

■ Layer Name: Specify the name of the Display Manager layer that will contain the result of the Overlay operation. ■ Sliver Tolerance: Specify which slivers become separate features and which are joined with a neighboring polygon. Set the units for the tolerance setting, then set the maximum and minimum values. To see recommended values, click Suggest.
PAGE 1342

6 Click Finish to perform the Overlay. The Overlay operation creates a new layer representing the result of the comparison. The new layer is displayed in the map and in Display Manager. The same data is written to the SDF file you specified. To see just the Overlay output, deselect the check boxes for the other layers in Display Manager. Quick Reference MAPGISOVERLAY Performs overlay analysis of feature classes Menu Click Analyze menu ➤ GIS Overlay.
PAGE 1343

NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information about analyzing geospatial feature data, see Overview of Analyzing Feature Classes (page 1302). See also: ■ Creating Topologies (page 821) ■ Loading or Unloading Topologies (page 906) NOTE The following procedures apply only to drawing objects. For information about analyzing geospatial feature data, see To analyze feature classes (page 1305).
PAGE 1344

geological map shows soil types or contour lines. A social map might show the locations of crimes or high-income areas. Before you can analyze a topology, you must create the topology and make sure it is loaded. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information about analyzing geospatial feature data, see Overview of Analyzing Feature Classes (page 1302). Tell me more ■ Show me how to create a network topology. ■ Show me how to load a topology.
PAGE 1345

You can analyze drawing topologies in the following ways: To do this... Use this method... Calculate the shortest path between two points in a drawing or determine the optimal route based on values of resistance and direction. Perform a shortest path trace (page 1326) Calculate the best route from a starting point in the drawing to one or more visit points, and back to the starting point.
PAGE 1346

Quick Reference MAPANBUFFER Creates a buffer around an existing topology Menu Click Analyze ➤ Buffer. Icon Buffer Topology Command Line MAPANBUFFER Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Buffer Dialog Box Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box MAPANDISSOLVE Removes the boundaries between polygons in a topology or the nodes between links that share a specific attribute Menu Click Analyze ➤ Dissolve.
PAGE 1347

Dialog Box Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box MAPANTOPONET Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace) Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Network Analysis. Icon Network Analyze Command Line MAPANTOPONET Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis Dialog Box Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box MAPTOPOLOAD Loads a topology Menu Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load Topology.
PAGE 1348

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Topology Query Dialog Box Topology Query dialog box Performing a Shortest Path Trace Using a network topology, which is made up of drawing objects and their relationship data, you can calculate the shortest path between two points in a drawing or determine the optimal route based on values of resistance and direction. This process is known as a shortest path trace analysis.
PAGE 1349

Using SQL Data in Expressions If you specify an expression that uses SQL data, the Link Template list includes only link templates for the drawing where the topology is loaded: ■ In the source drawing, if you loaded the topology from source drawings ■ In the current drawing, if you loaded the topology from the current drawing.
PAGE 1350

■ Expression Evaluator (page 1541) ■ Expression dialog box (page 1807) To perform a shortest path trace 1 Verify that you have a network topology available and it is loaded. See Creating Topologies (page 821) and To load a topology (page 907). 2 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click a network topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis. 3 In the Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box (page 1983), click Shortest Path. Click Next.
PAGE 1351

linked external database column. The expression will be evaluated for each link. Click (Expression Evaluator) to select data from a list. ■ Link Direction — Specify a direction for the trace. If you leave the box blank, bi-directional (0) is used. ■ Reverse — Select this option to use the reverse of the direction indicated in the Link Direction box. ■ Link Direct Resistance — Specify the resistance to travel in the direction that a link was created.
PAGE 1352

Quick Reference MAPANTOPONET Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace) Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Network Analysis.
PAGE 1353

data field or a field in a linked external database. You then set the Link Direct Resistance property to an expression that uses this speed limit data, for example: (/ .length (* :speed@street_data 5280)) which divides the length of each link by the average speed per foot (where 5280 is the number of feet in a mile). The resulting analysis shows the best route, in terms of time, not distance.
PAGE 1354

NOTE The best route cannot be calculated if the network topology contains negative resistance values or if all resistance values equal "0" (or use expressions that evaluate to zero). In layman's terms, if all resistance values equal zero, every possible route is as good as any other route, and there is no "best" route to travel.
PAGE 1355

■ To discard the point and return to the dialog box, press Esc. ■ To accept the point and specify another point, right-click in the drawing. Click Next Point. 8 In the dialog box, review the start points and visit points you have specified. ■ To double-check the location of a point in the map, highlight the coordinates in the list. Click Preview. ■ To delete a point so that you can define a new one, highlight the coordinates in the list. Click Delete. ■ To add another visit point, return to Step 5.
PAGE 1356

route between two points by entering the expression (/ .length (* :speed@street_data 5280) which divides the length of each link by the average speed per foot (where 5280 is the number of feet in a mile). NOTE The best route cannot be calculated if the network topology contains negative resistance values or if all resistance values equal "0" (or use expressions that evaluate to zero).
PAGE 1357

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis Dialog Box Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box Performing a Flood Trace An analysis that looks out from a point in all directions is called a network flood trace. You can perform a flood trace on a network topology, which is made up of drawing objects and their relationship data. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. There is no equivalent for geospatial feature data.
PAGE 1358

AutoLISP expression for the Link Direct Resistance, and specify the travel time for Maximum Value. This analysis will show the streets that can be reached from a start node within the specified period of time. See also: ■ Specifying the Direction for a Link (page 845) ■ Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node (page 849) ■ Expression Evaluator (page 1541) ■ Expression dialog box (page 1807) NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. There is no equivalent for geospatial features.
PAGE 1359

enter a constant or an expression that references an object data field or linked external database column. The expression will be evaluated for each link. Click (Expression Evaluator) to select data from a list. ■ Link Direction — Specify a direction for the trace. If you leave the box blank, bi-directional (0) is used. ■ Reverse — Select this option to use the reverse of the direction indicated in the Link Direction box.
PAGE 1360

Quick Reference MAPANTOPONET Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace) Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Network Analysis. Icon Network Analyze Command Line MAPANTOPONET Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis Dialog Box Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box Overlaying Two Topologies A powerful form of analysis is possible when you overlay two or more topologies.
PAGE 1361

NOTE All the overlay analysis operators change arcs into a series of line segments; for example, a complete circle consists of 32 segments. In the examples shown above, the result topology is a tessellated (or jagged) circle after overlay analysis. This may affect properties of the result topology, and gives different values, such as area and perimeter. Intersect Intersect operations combine topologies and keep only the common geometry. Intersect acts like the Boolean AND operation.
PAGE 1362

Union Union operations combine polygons with polygons and keep all geometry. Union acts like the Boolean OR operation and can be used only with polygons. For example, you can combine parcels with soils information for property assessment. Use Union to maintain both sets of geometry together and pull them apart as needed. Identity Identity operations work like Union on the source topology and like Intersect on the overlay topology.
PAGE 1363

In addition to any fields you select, overlay analysis creates these object data fields in the resulting topology.
PAGE 1364

2 NOTE Most of the overlay analysis types work only with polygon topologies. For more information about those that work with node or network topologies, see the Concept tab for this topic (page 1336). 3 In the Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box (page 1999), do the following: ■ ■ Select the type of overlay analysis to perform: ■ Intersect — Only areas that appear in both the source and overlay topologies are in the result topology.
PAGE 1365

■ Enter a name and description for the new topology, and specify the layer to place it on. ■ Click Next. 6 In the Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog box, do the following to copy data to the result topology: ■ (Expression For Source Attributes For New Topology, click Evaluator) to select the data from the source topology that you want to include in the resulting topology. You can include fields in an object data table or columns in an external database.
PAGE 1366

Menu Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Overlay. Icon Overlay Topology Command Line MAPANOVERLAY Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Overlay Dialog Box Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box Dissolving a Composite Topology If a topology contains many smaller polygons, you can create a new topology by combining polygons that share the same data value in a specified field. This field is called the dissolve field.
PAGE 1367

Dissolving Network Links When you dissolve a network topology, AutoCAD Map 3D checks nodes between lines to see whether two lines intersect at a specified node and whether the dissolve field is the same. If so, the node is removed, and the two links are joined to form one link. All object fields except for the dissolve and any new topology fields are removed as shown in the following illustration.
PAGE 1368

Any two adjacent polygons or connected lines that have the same value for the specified field or column are combined into a single polygon or line. NOTE When dissolving a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D uses only data that is attached or linked to the centroid of the polygon. It does not use data attached to a polygon border. 4 In the Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box, select Highlight to highlight the resulting topology onscreen. Specify the highlight color.
PAGE 1369

Quick Reference MAPANDISSOLVE Removes the boundaries between polygons in a topology or the nodes between links that share a specific attribute Menu Click Analyze ➤ Dissolve.
PAGE 1370

Use Buffer Analysis to show an area around an existing topology. In this case, the buffer analysis of the power line network topology creates a new polygon topology. For buffering, you create a new polygon topology from an existing node, network, or polygon topology and specify a buffer offset.
PAGE 1371

NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. To perform buffer analysis on geospatial feature data, see To create a buffer (page 1308). To buffer a topology 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click a topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Buffer. 2 In the Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box (page 1992), enter the buffer distance. Click Next. The buffer extends the specified distance from the objects. The buffer offset can be any of the following: ■ Numeric value.
PAGE 1372

6 Click Finish to create the buffer topology. Quick Reference MAPANBUFFER Creates a buffer around an existing topology Menu Click Analyze ➤ Buffer. Icon Buffer Topology Command Line MAPANBUFFER Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Buffer Dialog Box Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box Querying a Topology Use a topology query to retrieve a loaded topology and its associated data from the current drawing or an attached drawing.
PAGE 1373

Creating a Result Topology When you use a topology query, you can hold the retrieved information in the current drawing in three types of topology: ■ None — No information is added to the geometry in the current drawing. ■ Temporary — Information is retrieved and stored in memory as a topology with a name preceded by an asterisk (*). You cannot save back the temporary topology to the queried drawings.
PAGE 1374

Point location queries also retrieve the polygon that includes the point. Object Data Queries Any topology object can be queried using object data, such as node, link, and polygon identifiers; the "from" and "to" node information on links; the left and right side information on links; polygons; and so on. Topology queries can retrieve data such as areas, perimeters, numbers of links, and more.
PAGE 1375

Property Alteration with Topology Queries When you define a property alteration for topology objects, only specific elements of the topology are altered, as shown in the following table.
PAGE 1376

Saving and Using Queries If you plan to use a query more than once, you can save it with the current drawing in the Query Library or to an external file, and edit the query or reuse it. The following table shows the options available with topology queries. Description Procedure Command Save a query In the Define Query Of Attached Drawings dialog box, click Save. See Saving Queries (page 177).
PAGE 1377

■ .PERIMETER — The value of the PERIMETER object data field for each polygon. The Process Sub-Objects option in the Output Report Options dialog box specifies the objects in a report.
PAGE 1378

5 When you click Define Query, the Define Query Of Attached Drawings dialog box opens. Its operation and options are the same for topology and AutoCAD Map 3D queries, except for some options you have in the Property option in the Query Type area. For more information, see Overview of Queries (page 1235). Quick Reference MAPTOPOQUERY Queries topologies Menu Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Topology Query.
PAGE 1379

A temporary topology has a name preceded by an asterisk (*). 2 In the Rename Topology dialog box (page 1988), enter a new name for the topology. To create a permanent topology, do not start the topology name with an asterisk (*). Also note that topology names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore, hyphen, and dollar characters. Names cannot include spaces. 3 Optionally, enter a new description for the topology. 4 Click OK to rename the topology, making it a permanent topology.
PAGE 1380

1356
PAGE 1381

9 Publishing and Sharing Maps Overview of Publishing and Sharing There are many ways to output and share map data. Use the following table to determine which option to use for moving your data from one format to another: To move this data... To this format... Use this option... Entire map Printer, plotter, or file In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot.
PAGE 1382

To move this data... To this format... Use this option... See Publishing to DWF (page 1364) Entire map PDF file In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Export To DWF/PDF panel ➤ Export ➤ PDF. See Publishing to PDF (page 1373) Entire map Web page Entire map Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise At the Command prompt, enter publishtoweb. See Publishing to a Web Page (page 1373) ➤ Publish ➤ Publish To Click MapGuide.
PAGE 1383

To move this data... To this format... Use this option... Drawing data Image formats In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ As Image. See Exporting DWG Data to an Image Format (page 1465) Drawing data DXF ➤ Save As ➤ Other Click Formats See Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF File (page 1458) Geospatial data Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File) In Display Manager, right-click the layer and choose Export Layer Data to SDF or Save Layer.
PAGE 1384

You can also use the following options to share map data: ■ Export data to a GIS format and back into DWG format (page 1465). ■ Convert Display Manager styles to object properties (page 1459). This allows you to share styled maps with users who do not have Display Manager (for example, users of AutoCAD or a previous version of AutoCAD Map 3D). Publishing Maps When you publish a map or map book (page 2067), AutoCAD Map 3D plots it and sends it to an output format.
PAGE 1385

■ To publish your map (page 1361) ■ Lesson 7: Publish Your Map ■ Print and Publish Data ■ Publish a completed map to a MapGuide server. ■ Create a map book with appropriatescale tiling for a city. ■ Produce a multi-sheet DWF file for a map book.
PAGE 1386

To publish to this format... Use this method See Publish a Sheet Set in the AutoCAD Help. A Web page At the Command prompt, enter publishtoweb. See Publishing to a Web Page (page 1373). eTransmit Click ➤ Send ➤ eTransmit. See Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission in the online Help. Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise Click ➤ Publish ➤ Publish To MapGuide. See Publishing to MapGuide (page 1376). Autodesk MapGuide version 6.
PAGE 1387

To add a reference system to a map 1 Switch to the layout tab. 2 On the Layout Tools tab, click . 3 Select the viewport for the reference system. The Create Reference System Dialog Box (page 1602) appears. NOTE You must select a non-rotated, rectangular viewport. 4 In the Create Reference System dialog box, specify the following: ■ Reference System: select a lettering scheme for your reference grid. Use MGRS-AA (MGRS-New) with the WSG84 datum. Use MGRS-AL (MGRS-Old) with older datums.
PAGE 1388

See also: ■ Overview of Map Books (page 1381) To publish to a plotter 1 Save the map. 2 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot 3 Choose a printer or plotter and set any options needed. For information, type “To plot a drawing” in the Search tab of the help. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Menu Click File menu ➤ Plot. Icon Plot a drawing.
PAGE 1389

Overview of Publishing to DWF DWF (Design Web Format™) is an open, secure file format developed by Autodesk for sharing engineering design data. DWF files are highly compressed, so they are small and fast to transmit and view. DWF files are useful for the following: ■ Publishing complex maps that use a variety of feature sources to a compact file that can be used in the field. All information from the original map, including stylization, is represented.
PAGE 1390

Publishing Attribute Data to DWF Before publishing maps to DWF™, you can specify which data to include from the following categories: DWF Publishing Option Description object data (page 198) Data attached to drawing objects classification data (page 117) Information about drawing objects that have been assigned to classes GIS feature sources (page 305) Spatial data objects joins (page 507) Data from records that have been joined to the data for spatial data objects linked records (page 522) from a
PAGE 1391

■ Lesson 7: Publish Your Map ■ Publish to a Georeferenced DWF ■ Produce a multi-sheet DWF file for a map book.
PAGE 1392

NOTE If you clear the Publish Map Information box, the options you checked remain checked, but they are not included in the publish operation. When you check Publish Map Information again, the options are included. 5 Set up (page 1369) and publish the map to DWF (page 1372). Quick Reference MAPDWFOPTIONS Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options for publishing to DWF Menu Click Map ➤ Tools ➤ DWF Publishing Options.
PAGE 1393

By default, DWF files are produced with a vector grid of 1200 dots per inch (DPI), which means the files have roughly the same precision and security as paper. Specify a DPI setting based on how small your objects are, relative to the plot scale. The maximum number of virtual DWF dots allowed on a page is 231 (2,147,483,647 in each dimension). To find the maximum allowed DPI for your map, divide the maximum number of dots (231) by the number of inches of the longest paper dimension.
PAGE 1394

3 Save the map. 4 Click ➤ Publish. NOTE Do not choose an option from the Publish submenu. Click the word Publish in the application menu. 5 In the Publish dialog box, do any of the following: ■ For each item in the Sheets to Publish list, click in the Page Setup/3D DWF field and choose or import a layout from the drop-down list. Make sure the Status column shows no errors. To exclude a sheet from the publish operation, right-click it and choose Remove.
PAGE 1395

Quick Reference PUBLISH Publishes a drawing to DWF format Menu File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish to DWF Icon Publish Command Line PUBLISH Publishing a Map to DWF When you publish to DWF, you create an electronic version of the map that can be displayed using Autodesk® Design Review, which you can download from the Autodesk Design Review page on the Autodesk website.
PAGE 1396

See also: ■ Overview of Publishing to DWF (page 1365) ■ Publishing Attribute Data to DWF (page 1366) ■ Preparing a Map for Publishing to DWF (page 1368) To publish a map to DWF 1 Save the map. 2 Prepare the map for publishing to DWF. See Preparing a Map for Publishing to DWF (page 1369). 3 Click ➤ Publish. NOTE Select the Publish command from Model space to create a georeferenced DWF file. Publishing from Layout space will not work. NOTE Do not choose an option from the Publish submenu.
PAGE 1397

Quick Reference PUBLISH Publishes a drawing to DWF format Menu File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish to DWF Icon Publish Command Line PUBLISH Publishing to PDF Recipients of PDF files can view and print them using Adobe® Reader versions 5 or later. You can publish a single PDF file or multiple PDF files containing separate layouts. See also: ■ Overview of Publishing Maps (page 1360) To publish to PDF 1 Save the map.
PAGE 1398

NOTE You can also use the MapGuide technology to publish map-related data on the web or on an intranet. See also: ■ Overview of Publishing Maps (page 1360) ■ Publishing to MapGuide (page 1376) To publish a map as a web page 1 Save your map. 2 At the Command prompt, enter publishtoweb. 3 Click Create New Web Page and click Next. NOTE Once you create a web page with this wizard, you can choose Edit Existing Web Page.
PAGE 1399

As you select a template from the list, the preview and description update for that option. ■ Review the templates and select the one you want. ■ Click Next. 7 Choose a formatting theme for the web page. As you select a theme from the drop-down list, the preview illustrates it. ■ Review the themes and select the one you want. ■ Click Next. 8 Choose whether to use i-drop™ or not and click Next.
PAGE 1400

12 Click Finish. Using eTransmit When you send a map file to another AutoCAD Map 3D user, it is easy to omit some of the dependent files required to edit that map effectively. You can use eTransmit to package all dependent files for a map (for example, SHP, SDF, and MDB files to which you are connected) and ensure that the recipient has all the required information. Then you can email the resulting file to the recipient, along with a report explaining how to use the files.
PAGE 1401

NOTE If you are using a previous release (Autodesk MapGuide 2008 or earlier), you cannot use this command. Instead, export your map to SDF2 format (page 1469) and send the resulting file to your MapGuide server. Metadata is not included when you publish to MapGuide. You can export metdata from the Metadata Viewer (page 1510). MapGuide and Joined Data If you have joined data to layers that you are publishing, you cannot publish the joined data with this command.
PAGE 1402

■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357) ■ Sharing Metadata (page 1510) ■ Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer (page 1469) ■ Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) (page 387) ■ Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer (page 1469) ■ Importing ESRI Shape Files (page 397) Related topics To publish a map for use with MapGuide 1 Save the map. 2 Click ➤ Publish ➤ Publish To MapGuide. 3 In the Publish to MapGuide dialog box (page 1577), specify the URL for the target website.
PAGE 1403

Menu File ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish to Autodesk MapGuide Command Line MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE Viewing Publish to MapGuide Results When you publish to Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise, you can check the results of the publish operation, including the number of layers that were published and the number that failed. The following types of problems can occur: ■ Layers without assigned coordinate systems may not display correctly in MapGuide.
PAGE 1404

SDF format (which converts the join into a flat table), remove the layers from the map (turning them off is not sufficient), and publish the resulting map. Then copy the SDF containing the joined data layer to the MapGuide server. This places a “static” copy of the data on the server (the features no longer point to the original databases and data). You must reconstruct the map on the server to add the SDF layer back in.
PAGE 1405

■ Errors due to invalid characters: Rename the offending files or folders to avoid invalid characters. 4 Republish.
PAGE 1406

NOTE If a map book becomes dissociated from its sheet set (for example, if you rename the map file after creating a map book), you will be prompted to regenerate the sheet set when you select an existing map book or create a new map book. You can choose the sheet set from the older version of the map file, or you can create a new one. To regenerate the sheet set at any other time, right-click the map book (on the Map Book tab of the Task Pane) and choose Rebuild Sheet Set.
PAGE 1407

■ Tutorial: Creating a Map Book With an Inset ■ Publish to a Map Book ■ Create a map book with appropriatescale tiling for a city. ■ Produce a multi-sheet DWF file for a map book. ■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357) Tutorials Workflow GIS Skills Related topics To create and publish a map book 1 Set up a map book template (page 1385). 2 Identify layout placeholders (page 1388). 3 Create a map book (page 1389). 4 View or edit the map book tiles (page 1397).
PAGE 1408

MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS Creates a new map book from a previously saved map books settings file Command Line MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS Task Pane In the Map Book task pane, click New ➤ Map Book from Settings. Dialog Box Select Map Book Settings dialog box MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS Edits the settings of an existing map book Command Line MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS Task Pane In the Map Book task pane, click Tools ➤ Edit Settings and Rebuild Map Book.
PAGE 1409

Saves map book settings to an external file Command Line MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS Task Pane On the Map Book tab, right-click a map book name ➤ Save Settings. Dialog Box Save Map Book Settings dialog box Setting Up a Map Book Template Every map book requires a template that specifies printer settings (such as paper size and the printer driver to use) and defines the size and position of elements on the page (for example, the legend, title block, and map tiles). A template can contain one or more layouts.
PAGE 1410

this viewport, or you can select an area of your map to use as a legend. This viewport is optional. ■ Adjacent arrows are blocks at each edge of the tile that point to and identify the adjacent tile. Each arrow has a property that specifies the adjacent tile in that direction and displays the name of that tile within the arrow. You can specify the text that appears within the arrowheads. When you generate the map book, you can choose a drawing for an adjacent block.
PAGE 1411

2 Do the following: ■ Right-click a layout tab and choose Rename. Type a new name for this layout. NOTE If you do not see the layout tabs, click ➤ Options ➤ Display tab, check Display Layout and Model Tabs, and create a new layout. ■ Right-click the renamed layout tab. Choose Page Setup Manager to specify plotter and paper information. NOTE This information will be used every time you publish your map book to a plotter. You cannot change these settings at print time.
PAGE 1412

Quick Reference PAGESETUP Displays the Page Setup Manager for a layout Menu File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Page Setup Manager Command Line PAGESETUP Identifying Layout Placeholders You must identify each element in your map book template as a placeholder for a particular type of information. For example, you select the viewport intended for the title and identify it as a title block placeholder.
PAGE 1413

■ Title block 6 When you have identified all the elements, click Close. Quick Reference MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDER Names the viewports and element placeholders in the layout template Command Line MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDER Task Pane On the Map Book tab, click Tools ➤ Identify Template Placeholders. Dialog Box Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box Creating a Map Book You can create a map book from a map you styled in Display Manager or from objects in model space.
PAGE 1414

■ Publish to a Map Book ■ Create a map book with appropriatescale tiling for a city. ■ Produce a multi-sheet DWF file for a map book. ■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357) ■ Overview of Map Books (page 1381) ■ Setting Up a Map Book Template (page 1385) Workflow GIS Skills Related topics To create a map book 1 On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New ➤ Map Book.
PAGE 1415

Quick Reference MAPBOOKCREATE Creates a map book to publish your data Menu In the Map Classic workspace, Click Map ➤ Map Book. Command Line MAPBOOKCREATE Task Pane In the Map Book task pane, click New ➤ Map Book. Dialog Box Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box Rebuilding a Map Book If you make changes to a map book template, you must rebuild the map book to apply the changes.
PAGE 1416

To import a plot map set 1 Open the file that contains the plot map set. 2 On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New ➤ Map Book From Plot Set. 3 Select the plot map set to convert. Click OK. 4 In the Create Map Book dialog box, edit the imported plot map set information as desired. Click OK. Quick Reference MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSET Imports settings from a map plot set Command Line MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSET Task Pane In the Map Book task pane, click New ➤ Map Book from Plot Set.
PAGE 1417

See also: ■ Creating a Map Book (page 1389) ■ Creating New Map Books from Saved Settings (page 1395) ■ Editing Map Book Settings (page 1396) To do this... Use this method... Save map book settings On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, right-click the map book name. Click Save Settings. See Saving Map Book Settings (page 1394) Use saved map book settings On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New ➤ Map Book From Settings.
PAGE 1418

Task Pane In the Map Book task pane, click New ➤ Map Book from Settings. Dialog Box Select Map Book Settings dialog box MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS Edits the settings of an existing map book Command Line MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS Task Pane In the Map Book task pane, click Tools ➤ Edit Settings and Rebuild Map Book. Dialog Box Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box Saving Map Book Settings Map book settings are automatically saved in the map file as soon as you create the map book.
PAGE 1419

Saves map book settings to an external file Command Line MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS Task Pane On the Map Book tab, right-click a map book name ➤ Save Settings. Dialog Box Save Map Book Settings dialog box Creating New Map Books from Saved Settings If you saved the settings for a map book in a Map Book Settings file, you can use those settings for a new map book.
PAGE 1420

Editing Map Book Settings You can edit the settings of an existing map book. See also: ■ Creating a Map Book (page 1389) ■ Saving Map Book Settings (page 1394) ■ Rebuilding a Map Book (page 1391) To edit map book settings 1 On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, select the map book whose settings you want to change, and click Tools ➤ Edit Settings And Rebuild Map Book. 2 In the Edit Map Book dialog box, change the settings as desired. 3 Click Generate.
PAGE 1421

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To view a map book (page 1398) To hide all map books (page 1398) To view map book or tile properties (page 1399) To view a tile (page 1399) To view several tiles (page 1399) To view all tiles (page 1399) To view a layout (page 1400) Overview of Viewing and Editing Map Book Tiles Map books divide a single map into a set of tiles and display each tile on a separate map book page. You use a template to specify the layout of the pages.
PAGE 1422

Viewing a Map Book When you open a map containing one or more map books, none of the map books is current until you select one. When you select a map book, you automatically zoom to its extents and see the tile outlines. If the map book is based on a display map, you will see the stylization associated with that display map.
PAGE 1423

■ Creating a Map Book (page 1389) ■ Overview of Viewing and Editing Map Book Tiles (page 1397) To view map book or tile properties 1 On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, do one of the following: ■ Right-click the map book name. ■ Right-click a tile name. 2 Click Properties. 3 In the Map Book Properties dialog box (page 1830) or the Tile Properties dialog box (page 1831), examine the properties. Viewing Tiles in Model Space You can view selected tiles in model space.
PAGE 1424

Viewing Layouts You can view layouts for selected tiles, one at a time. See also: ■ Overview of Map Books (page 1381) ■ Creating a Map Book (page 1389) ■ Overview of Viewing and Editing Map Book Tiles (page 1397) To view a layout ■ On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, right-click a tile name. Click Zoom Layout. Publishing Map Books You can publish a map book to a DWF file for electronic distribution or to a plotter for a printed map book based on the current plot settings.
PAGE 1425

■ Tutorial: Creating a Map Book With an Inset ■ Publish to a Map Book ■ Produce a multi-sheet DWF file for a map book. ■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357) Tutorials Workflow GIS Skills Related topics ■ Overview of Map Books (page 1381) ■ Creating a Map Book (page 1389) ■ Overview of Publishing to DWF (page 1365) ■ Publishing Attribute Data to DWF (page 1366) ■ Publishing a Map to a Plotter (page 1363) To publish a map book to DWF 1 Save the map.
PAGE 1426

specified in your layout for this map book, so the map book is sent to the plotter as soon as you choose the command. See also: ■ Overview of Map Books (page 1381) ■ Creating a Map Book (page 1389) ■ Publishing a Map to a Plotter (page 1363) To publish a map book to a plotter 1 Save the map. 2 Make sure that you have set up the printer or plotter you want to use. 3 On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, select the map book to publish, and click Tools ➤ Publish To Plotter.
PAGE 1427

2 Click Rename. 3 Type the new name. 4 Press Enter. NOTE Renaming a tile does not rename its associated layout. Delete Map Books or Tiles You can delete tiles from a map book or delete the entire map book. See also: ■ Overview of Map Books (page 1381) ■ Creating a Map Book (page 1389) ■ Rename Map Books or Tiles (page 1402) To delete a map book or tile 1 On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, do one of the following: ■ Right-click the map book to delete. ■ Right-click the tile to delete.
PAGE 1428

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Other ways to move data into SDF format (page 1417) To export DWG data to SDF2 format (page 1418) To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation (page 1421) To export drawing objects to ESRI Arc/INFO (page 1421) To export DWG data to ESRI ArcSDE: (page 1423) To include all object types when exporting drawing objects to ESRI SHP format (page 1427) To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation (page 142
PAGE 1429

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the import method (page 1467) To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the Data Connect method (page 1467) To export layers in SDF or SQLite format (page 1470) To save a layer’s styles and pointers to its data (page 1471) To export survey points to a LandXML file (page 1471) Overview of Converting and Exporting You can share all or some of the drawing objects in your map with users of other software programs by export
PAGE 1430

Data You can export data associated with drawing objects, including object data, block attributes, linked external data, object properties, and topology data. You can also map drawing attributes to feature class properties during export. Choose the data you want on the Data or Feature Class tab of the Export dialog box. NOTE You cannot export metadata using the Export dialog box. Instead, export metadata from the Metadata Viewer. See Sharing Metadata (page 1510).
PAGE 1431

Styled Objects For maps saved or exported from the Display Manager, AutoCAD Map 3D saves or exports original object properties regardless of any map stylizations, except for text. Text entities created by text stylizations are saved or exported. To avoid saving or exporting text entities, turn off any text stylization before exporting your data. For more information, see Overview of the Display Manager (page 634). You can export styled objects to DWG format. See Exporting Maps to DWG Format (page 1459).
PAGE 1432

■ Exchange data with other users by exporting to SDF format. ■ Share styles with other users of AutoCAD Map 3D using .layer files.
PAGE 1433

3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects. To use settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile containing the settings. 4 On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export. ■ To select a subset of objects, click Select manually and choose either Select Objects or Quick Select. ■ To filter the selection to export only objects on specific layers or in specific classes, specify the layers and classes to include.
PAGE 1434

exported as polygons; they will be shapes in the DGN v8 file. You cannot clear the Treat Closed Polylines as Polygons check box. ■ Click Driver Options to set options specific to the export format you specified.
PAGE 1435

Supported Objects When you export drawing data to another format, the following object types are exported: ■ Arc ■ Attribute Definition ■ Text ■ Block Reference (exports as point) ■ Circle ■ Ellipse ■ Face ■ Hatch ■ Line ■ MLine ■ MText ■ Point ■ Polygon ■ Polyline ■ 2dPolyline ■ 3dPolyline ■ Shape ■ Solid ■ Spline ■ Trace ■ Xref (exports as point) Supported Objects | 1411
PAGE 1436

Unsupported Object Types When you export drawing data to another format, the following object types are not exported: ■ Attribute ■ Body ■ Dimension ■ Gradient fill for polygon objects (MPolygons) ■ Image ■ Leader ■ OleFrame ■ Ole2Frame ■ Proxy objects (from other applications) ■ Ray ■ Region ■ Viewport ■ Xline See also: ■ Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405) Supported Formats When you export drawing data to another format, the following formats are supported: ■ Auto
PAGE 1437

■ GML (Geographic Markup Language) (page 1429) (version 3.1.
PAGE 1438

SDF version 2 is still supported by MapGuide 6.5 (and earlier releases), and AutoCAD Map 3D can import and export SDF 2 using a separate import/export interface. Advantages SDF has the following advantages over DWG: ■ It stores and manages an order of magnitude more data than DWG ■ It is very fast, allowing Autodesk applications, such as AutoCAD Map 3D and MapGuide, to read and display tens of thousands of features per second.
PAGE 1439

object data or link templates, an entity may be exported more than once if more than one data table is attached or linked to it. Driver Options SDF has no export driver options. See also: ■ Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264) NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
PAGE 1440

To export drawing objects to SDF 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export. 2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the Autodesk SDF file format and a location for the exported files. Click OK. 3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects. To use settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile containing the settings. 4 On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export.
PAGE 1441

To specify the name for the index property used in export ■ Specify a different name in the MapExport.ini file (page 264), under the FDO_SDF entry, where you see Driver:fdo_index_column. Other ways to move data into SDF format ■ Export to SDF 2 (page 1417) – Imports and exports the data in the previous SDF format to and from DWG. MapGuide versions 6.5 and earlier require this format. ■ Bulk Copy (page 615) – Moves data to and from SDF (version 3) and other geospatial data stores.
PAGE 1442

After creating the SDF 2 file, you can use Autodesk MapGuide Author and Autodesk MapGuide Server to produce the files required to create and deliver web-viewable maps. For information about Autodesk MapGuide SDF and SIF files, refer to the Autodesk MapGuide SDF Loader Help.
PAGE 1443

6 Under Data Expressions, you can create expressions as follows: ■ Use the Key option to define an expression to act as the link between the SDF file and a field in an external database. ■ Use the Name option to define an expression for the SDF Name field. ■ Use the URL option to define an expression to act as a URL (Uniform Resource Locator).
PAGE 1444

NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617). ESRI Arc/INFO stores coverages on your hard disk as a directory of files. The main coverage directory, called the workspace, always includes one subdirectory called INFO. Each coverage is written to its own subdirectory.
PAGE 1445

Driver Options When exporting to E00 or coverage format, you can set the following options: Option Description Coverage Precision Select Double or Single. The default is Double. Compression (available only for E00) Select None, Partial, or Full. Linear Topology Select Create or Bypass. The default is Create. See also: ■ Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264) NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored.
PAGE 1446

■ To filter the selection to export only objects on specific layers or in specific classes, specify the layers and classes to include. ■ To export polygons from a polygon topology, select the topology. ■ To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview Filtered Selection. 5 On the Data or Feature Class tab, click Select Attributes and select the data to export with the objects.
PAGE 1447

Driver Options ESRI ArcSDE has no export driver options. See also: ■ Bringing In Features from ArcSDE (page 316) To export DWG data to ESRI ArcSDE: 1 Query the data you want from the DWG drawing into your map. 2 Connect to the ESRI ArcSDE data store (page 316) to which you want to move the data. 3 Before moving drawing data to ESRI ArcSDE, do the following to your DWG drawing objects: ■ Assign a coordinate system (page 142).
PAGE 1448

All attributes you specify here are included in all the resulting features you export to ESRI ArcSDE. For information on how the choices on this tab determine the properties of the exported feature class, see Exporting to Multiple Classes (page 1439). 8 On the Options tab (page 1704), specify whether to convert the coordinate system during the export process and choose the coordinate system. Specify whether to treat closed polylines as polygons when you export. 9 Click Save.
PAGE 1449

Exporting DWG files can contain multiple geometry types, while SHP files contain only one. Each ESRI SHP file stores a single type of spatial data: point, line, text, or polygon. The text SHP files contain attribute text associated with points. When you create a multi-polygon in AutoCAD Map 3D and then export it to SHP format, it will appear in its native SHP file as a multi-polygon (a polygon with multiple exterior rings).
PAGE 1450

select the Polygon object type and select Treat Closed Polylines As Polygons on the Options tab. All new SHP classes that contain text entities will have a property called TEXTSTRING. To bring this information back into AutoCAD Map 3D, select the import option to import points as text. ■ The Shape Multiclass (page 1443) export option. This is a separate option on the drop-down list in the Export dialog box that exports multiple drawing objects to a set of SHP files in a folder you specify.
PAGE 1451

use the same feature class name, even if those files do not have the appropriate geometry indicator in their file names. For example, exporting parcels would usually result in a file called PARCELS_POLYGON.SHP. However, if the folder contains PARCELS.SHP, AutoCAD Map 3D checks its geometry type and appends to it if it contains polygon information. NOTE If your data meets these criteria but the export operation fails, try deleting the .prj file in the target folder and then retrying the export operation.
PAGE 1452

To export drawing objects to SHP NOTE If you are exporting multiple feature classes, see Exporting To Shape Multiclass (page 1443). 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export. 2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the ESRI Shapefile format and a location for the exported files. Click OK. 3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects.
PAGE 1453

7 Click OK to begin the export process. Exporting To Geographic Markup Language (GML) GML (Geography Markup Language) is an OpenGIS® Implementation specification that defines an XML encoding for the transport and storage of geographic information. The specification can be found on the Open GIS Consortium web site. You can import and export GML in and out of AutoCAD Map 3D. NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored.
PAGE 1454

For more information, see Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264). To export drawing objects to GML 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export. 2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the GML (Geography Markup Language) file format and a location for the exported files. 3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects.
PAGE 1455

Exporting To MapInfo MIF/MID MIF/MID is a file standard used by MapInfo, a desktop mapping system. AutoCAD Map 3D supports MapInfo up to version 7 MIF/MID files. NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
PAGE 1456

To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation ■ Edit the mapexport.ini file. See To edit the .ini file (page 269). To export drawing objects to MapInfo 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export. 2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the MapInfo MIF/MID file format and a location for the exported files. 3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects.
PAGE 1457

7 Click OK to begin the export process. Exporting To MapInfo TAB MapInfo TAB, also referred to as the MapInfo native format, is a two-dimensional format that stores both feature geometry and attributes (data) in a set of physical files that have the following file extensions: NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617). About MapInfo TAB Files ■ .
PAGE 1458

NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617). ■ To change the default text justification setting for MapInfo TAB (page 404) ■ To export drawing objects to MapInfo TAB (page 1434) To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation ■ Edit the mapexport.ini file. See To edit the .ini file (page 269).
PAGE 1459

6 On the Options tab, select the options you want. ■ To perform a coordinate conversion, you must have a coordinate system assigned to the map (page 147). ■ Check Treat closed polylines as polygons (if it is available) unless you want only polygon objects to be exported as polygons. 7 Click OK to begin the export process. Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 You can import and export Microstation DGN version 7 and 8. Bentley Systems, Inc.
PAGE 1460

The seed file you use significantly affects the outcome of the export process. If the design plane coordinate bounds in the seed file do not fully contain the extents of the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D repeats the export operation automatically using the Compute Optimal Seed File option. If the second export operation fails, manually choose a seed file that works for your region and coordinate system. Export Restrictions Closed objects are not filled, even if they were filled originally.
PAGE 1461

Driver Options for DGN 8 You can set the following options when exporting DGN 8 files: Option Description Coordinate Units Select the coordinate units of the features: Master or Sub. Select the unit that matches the default unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. For example, if the default unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing is meters, and you are using a seed file that defines meters as the Master unit, then select Master. The default is the Master unit.
PAGE 1462

4 In the Select Seed File dialog box, navigate to the location of the seed file to use and select the file. NOTE Be sure to specify a seed file designed for the version of DGN you specified in the Export Location dialog box. You cannot use a DGN version 8 seed file when exporting to DGN version 7. 5 Click Open. To change the default seed file 1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad. This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D\R17
PAGE 1463

■ To export polygons from a polygon topology, select the topology. ■ To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview Filtered Selection. 5 On the Data or Feature Class tab, click Select Attributes and select the data to export with the objects. TIP If you are exporting data from an external database, you can export the entire record from the database or just the key fields.
PAGE 1464

■ SQLite (page 1447) NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617). Using the Feature Class Tab on the Export Dialog Box Use the Feature Class tab for attributes that should be associated with all output feature classes.
PAGE 1465

Only the methods relevant to your map are listed. For example, if you did not classify objects in the map, you will not see the Object Classification option.
PAGE 1466

Multiple class export classification method Output Select Attributes End result Dialog Box settings dialog box are also assigned to all output feature classes. The grid automatically fills with the drawing objects and the names of the feature classes to which they will be mapped. To remove any object from the list, deselect its check box. 3 To change the name of the target feature class for an object, click in its Feature Class cell. Select the existing name and enter a new one.
PAGE 1467

Exporting To Shape Multiclass Drawing (DWG) objects can contain multiple geometry types, while SHP files contain only one. However, the Shape Multiclass option lets you export multiple drawing objects to a set of SHP files in a folder you specify. Each resulting SHP will contain the geometry and attributes for a single geometry type.
PAGE 1468

SHP files do not support circular arcs. During export, arcs, splines, and ellipses are converted to segmented polylines. You can change the settings used for segmentation in the mapexport.ini file. You cannot map fields when you export to Shape Multiclass. If you need to map fields, export your DWG data to SDF first, and then use Migrating Data (page 615) Bulk Copy to export the data to SHP.
PAGE 1469

■ To export to a single feature class that uses all the items you specified on the Data tab. (page 1446) To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation ■ Edit the mapexport.ini file. See To edit the .ini file (page 269). To export drawing objects to Shape Multiclass 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export. 2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the Shape Multiclass file format and a location for the exported files. Click OK.
PAGE 1470

■ Check Treat closed polylines as polygons (if it is available) unless you want only polygon objects to be exported as polygons. ■ To create multiple classes, select Multiple Classes and specify what the feature classes will be based on (for example, layer). Your choices on the Options tab and on the Data tab work together to determine how attributes are assigned to the exported feature classes. See the Concept tab in this topic for more information.
PAGE 1471

Exporting To SQLite SQLite is a file-based geospatial format. SQLite is like SHP format in that it contains both spatial data and attribute data. However, unlike SHP, it stores both types of data in a single file rather than a set of files. NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
PAGE 1472

Use the AutoCAD Map 3D cleanup tools to correct any geometry errors introduced during drafting, digitizing, or converting the data before you export it. ■ ■ Add attribute data to objects (page 1047) or classify (page 981) the drawing (DWG) objects you are exporting.
PAGE 1473

■ To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview Filtered Selection. 5 On the Feature Class tab, do the following: ■ To create multiple classes, select Create Multiple Classes Based On A Drawing Object. See Exporting to Multiple Classes (page 1439). ■ Click Select Attributes and select the data to export with the objects. TIP If you are exporting data from an external database, you can export the entire record from the database or just the key fields.
PAGE 1474

Exporting When you export to VML format, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a single HyperText Markup Language (HTML) file with the VML data contained in the region of the HTML. When you export objects, be sure that the objects have a color that will be visible on the target page. For example, if you are exporting to a page with a white background, be sure that the objects themselves are not white.
PAGE 1475

2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the Vector Markup Language (VML) file format and a location for the exported files. 3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects. To use settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile containing the settings. 4 On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export. ■ To select a subset of objects, click Select manually and choose either Select Objects or Quick Select.
PAGE 1476

You can also export point cloud data to the Autodesk SDF format. You can connect to a point cloud SDF file as you would to any SDF data store. Exporting your point cloud data to SDF format is useful for creating geospatial features from LiDAR data. NOTE Because point clouds can contain millions or billions of points, SDF files created from point clouds can be very large. Before you export your point cloud to SDF format, filter the point cloud down to the smallest usable size.
PAGE 1477

pipes drawn with green lines are eight-inch pipes, or that all roads drawn with .25 mm lines are two-lane roads. NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617). Tell me more ■ Show me how to export styled DWG objects. ■ Show me how to view the contents of the SDF file.
PAGE 1478

NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617). To map drawing attributes to feature class properties 1 In the Map Export dialog box (page 1723), click the Feature Class tab. 2 Select the drawing objects you want to map to feature class properties. 3 In the Feature Class column, click the [...] button.
PAGE 1479

Quick Reference MAPEXPORT Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format Menu Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export. Icon Export Map File Command Line MAPEXPORT Dialog Box Export dialog box MAPEXPORTFDO Export to an FDO data store Menu Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ FDO Connection.
PAGE 1480

2 Use the Generate Links (page 1067) command to automatically attach data to objects. In the Generate Data Links dialog box (page 1807), select the Enclosed Text option. This option links the text data to the polyline enclosing the text. Under Data Links, select Create Object Data Records and select the name of the table you created in step 1. Click OK and select the objects you want.
PAGE 1481

Dialog Box Generate Data Links dialog box MAPEXPORT Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format Menu Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export. Icon Export Map File Command Line MAPEXPORT Dialog Box Export dialog box Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology Exporting polygons from a polygon topology is useful when you export data to an external file format that supports polygons.
PAGE 1482

To export polygons from a polygon topology 1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export. 2 In the Map Export dialog box (page 1723), select the topology to export. All complete polygons in the selected topology are automatically selected. 3 Select Group Complex Polygons to group nested polygons into a single, balanced polygon. If you do not select the Group Complex Polygons option, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a separate polygon for each centroid.
PAGE 1483

NOTE All topology information, links to external databases, object data, and civil objects are lost when you use this command. Only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617). See also: ■ Importing DXF Files (page 391) NOTE All topology information, links to external databases, object data, and civil objects are lost when you use this command. Only drawing objects are exported.
PAGE 1484

previous versions of AutoCAD Map 3D and with AutoCAD, and the output drawing can be used by the Sheet Set Manager. Each display layer in your map is saved to a corresponding layer in the target drawing. To output multiple maps based on different zoom scales, you must save individual maps for each desired zoom scale. Tell me more ■ Show me how to export the current map to DWG format.
PAGE 1485

3 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Current Map As DWG. 4 In the Save Current Map To DWG dialog box, specify a location and file name for the exported map and click Save. Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store You can move DWG (drawing object) data into any Oracle database to which you have connected in AutoCAD Map 3D. You can also move DWG data into existing ESRI ArcSDE data stores to which you have connected in AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 1486

Exporting DWG Data to ESRI ArcSDE When you export data to ArcSDE format, you can export only to an existing ArcSDE data store with a complete schema. You cannot create or modify ArcSDE schemas using AutoCAD Map 3D. See also: ■ Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405) ■ Exporting to Multiple Classes (page 1439) ■ Bringing In Features from Oracle (page 312) ■ Importing From ESRI ArcSDE (page 391) ■ Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617) NOTE Only drawing objects are exported.
PAGE 1487

This tab determines how items are selected for export, and not how they are organized in their exported form. You specify how to organize the exported material on the Feature Class tab. 6 On the Feature Class tab, specify which object properties and attributes to export to feature class attributes. All attributes you specify here will be included in all the resulting features you create in Oracle.
PAGE 1488

■ Clean up any geometry errors (page 765). Use the AutoCAD Map 3D cleanup tools to correct any errors introduced during drafting, digitizing, or converting the data. 4 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ To FDO Connection. 5 In the dialog box that appears, choose the data source for the export and click OK. 6 On the Selection tab of the Map Export dialog box (page 1723), specify which objects to export.
PAGE 1489

Exporting DWG Data to an Image Format You can save the drawing objects in the current map to an image format, such as BMP, JPEG, or PNG. The resulting image file will not contain geospatial features. NOTE Only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. If your map includes geospatial features, convert it to DWG format (page 378) before you use this feature. When you export to an image format, you use the Render Output File Dialog Box.
PAGE 1490

Attributes If you connect to the data, rather than import it, and extract the geometry from the feature data, the attributes are lost. Bringing the Data Back Into AutoCAD Map 3D After changes have been made to the data, you can bring it back into AutoCAD Map 3D in one of the following ways: ■ Import the data in DWG format. If anyone changes the data after that, those changes will not appear in your map unless you reimport. Import gives you a "snapshot" of the data at the moment that you import.
PAGE 1491

■ Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405) ■ Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store (page 1461) ■ Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) (page 387) ■ Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects (page 378) ■ To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the import method (page 1467) ■ To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the Data Connect method (page 1467) To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the import method
PAGE 1492

See Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store (page 1461), Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405), and Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) (page 387). If your drawing data has been styled, be sure to check the appropriate properties on the Feature Class tab of the Export dialog box when you export the data. Although the visual styling will not appear in the resulting feature data, you can reconstruct the styling when you reimport the data later.
PAGE 1493

Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer You can save or export information about geospatial layers in Display Manager (including annotation layers) to separate files. Only geospatial features are saved or exported. You can export to SDF or SQLite format. This allows you to package data that is ordinarily stored in a central data store, such as an Oracle database, into a geospatial data file.
PAGE 1494

NOTE You can also export all DWG objects to SDF3 or SQLite format, and you can copy features from one geospatial format to another using Bulk Copy. Tell me more Video ■ Show me how to export a layer to SDF. ■ Show me how to save a layer to a .layer file. ■ To export layers in SDF or SQLite format (page 1470) ■ To save a layer’s styles and pointers to its data (page 1471) ■ Exchange data with other users by exporting to SDF format. ■ Share styles with other users of AutoCAD Map 3D using .
PAGE 1495

3 Click Save. To save a layer’s styles and pointers to its data 1 In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the layer ➤ Save Layer. 2 Specify a name and location for the file. The resulting file will have the extension .layer . 3 Click Save. Exporting Survey Points to a LandXML File You can export survey points from a survey data store to a LandXML file. AutoCAD Map 3D supports LandXML versions 1.0, 1.1, and 1.2.
PAGE 1496

Exporting and Printing Attribute Data To print and export attribute data ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To export from the Data Table (page 1474) To print a database table (page 1475) To set print options (page 1476) To specify the header and footer (page 1476) To apply a filter (page 1476) To create a drawing object report (page 1477) Overview of Exporting Attribute Data You can export attribute data in the following ways: ■ From the Data Table: Attribute data for geospatial features appears in the Data Table.
PAGE 1497

■ Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) (page 1477) Use the following methods to export or print attribute data. To export this type of data... Use this method Geospatial attribute data In the Data Table, select the desired data and click Options ➤ Export. See Exporting from the Data Table (page 1473). External data linked to drawing objects In the Data View, specify print options and click File menu ➤ Print. See Printing from the Data View (page 1474).
PAGE 1498

If you have joined data (page 507) to geospatial features whose data you are exporting, the exported data will include the joined properties. NOTE You can also copy cells from the Data Table and paste them into a spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft Excel. See also: ■ Overview of the Data Table (page 1125) To export from the Data Table 1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), click the feature layer whose data you want to export. 2 Click Table. 3 Filter the display to see the data you want.
PAGE 1499

You can print from a Data View table. NOTE You can also copy cells from the Data View and paste them into a spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft Excel.
PAGE 1500

To set print options 1 In the Data View, click File menu ➤ Page Setup. 2 In the Page Setup dialog box (page 1686), select the print options you want. Click OK. To specify the header and footer 1 In the Data View, click File menu ➤ Header And Footer. 2 In the Header/Footer dialog box (page 1685), set options for headers and footers. Click OK. If you have applied a filter to the table, only the filtered records print.
PAGE 1501

Icon Print Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) To create a drawing object report ■ ■ To run a query in Report mode (page 1477) To create a report template (page 1479) Running a Query in Report Mode You can run a special query on objects in attached drawings to retrieve information about the object properties and object data. You can use Report mode to save the results of the query to a comma-separated file, which you can use in a spreadsheet program or database.
PAGE 1502

3 Under Query Mode, select Report. 4 Click Options. 5 In the Output Report Options dialog box (page 1852), To create a report template (page 1479). Click OK. 6 Click Execute Query.
PAGE 1503

■ topology information ■ SQL data in an external database table ■ block attributes For a complete listing of variables you can use in a template, see Variables (page 1546). TIP Objects that include several elements have multiple entries in the output file. Use the .TYPE dot variable to identify such objects, and edit the output file to remove duplicate references to the object. The report template is saved when you save the query.
PAGE 1504

6 Click Add to add each expression to the Report Template list. 7 Select Process Sub-Objects to create a line in the report for each component of an object, for example, polyline vertices or centroids, links, and nodes in a polygon topology. 8 Select Apply Transformation to apply a transformation to the values displayed report.
PAGE 1505

Working with Metadata 10 Overview of Working with Metadata Metadata is data about data. Geospatial metadata describes your GIS data according to an established standard to help others who use your maps to understand them. Organizing your data according to standards helps you manage it more efficiently, enforces data quality, and facilitates data sharing. In AutoCAD Map 3D, you can automatically generate metadata for DWGs; their resources (page 2072), such as object or feature classes; and non-DWG files.
PAGE 1506

you need not complete any of the fields in the Distribution Information section, even if some fields in that section are mandatory.
PAGE 1507

Information Type Description Requirement Related Editor Metadata Reference Information How current the metadata is, and who maintains it Mandatory Time Period Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) (page 1761) Because GIS data is so general, it remains usable outside the United States when formatted with this standard. For example, the FGDC standard shares many common fields with ISO 19139. To learn more about the FGDC and its GIS metadata standard, visit http://www.fgdc.gov/metadata.
PAGE 1508

GIS Skill ■ View and interpret metadata. ■ Create metadata for your map.
PAGE 1509

Saving time with metadata templates Using metadata templates (page 1491) prevents repetitive data entry, saving time do perform your other job functions. You can save frequently used metadata in a template to reuse as often as necessary. See also: ■ Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756) ■ Updating Metadata (page 1503) To set metadata options 1 Open the Metadata Viewer (page 1751). 2 On the Metadata Viewer (page 1751) toolbar, click Options.
PAGE 1510

Quick Reference MAPMETADATAOPTIONS Displays the Metadata Options dialog box Command Line MAPMETADATAOPTIONS Dialog Box Metadata Options Creating and Viewing Metadata When you open the Metadata Viewer (page 1751) for the first time, metadata (page 2069) is automatically generated and displayed for the current drawing.
PAGE 1511

Tell me more ■ Show me how to view and interpret metadata. ■ Show me how to create and edit metadata. ■ To work with metadata (page 1487) ■ Lesson 6: Generate Metadata for a Classified Drawing ■ Create a Feature Map ■ Create a CAD Map ■ View and interpret metadata. ■ Create metadata for your map.
PAGE 1512

To do this... Use this method... Create metadata for a resource (page In the Metadata Viewer, select the DWG or data source from the Current Drawing tree view. 2072) To create metadata for a non-DWG file 1 In the Metadata Viewer, in the Folder Shortcut area, click Add. 2 Select the file. To add your own style sheet 1 Import the stylesheet. (page 1489) 2 At the top of the Metadata tab (page 1753) click the Style sheet menu.
PAGE 1513

To import a style sheet into the Metadata Viewer 1 Obtain a style sheet in valid XML format. NOTE The use of stylesheets supplied by parties other than Autodesk is subject to the terms and conditions published by the provider of those stylesheets. 2 Save it to the following location: For FGDC ■ C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\Support\Metadata\FGDC\Configuration\Style\ For ISO ■ C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\Support\Metadata\ISO\Configuration\Style\ 3 Open the following file in any text or XML
PAGE 1514

NOTE If your style sheet does not appear in the Stylesheet menu after you perform these steps, restart AutoCAD Map 3D, relaunch the Metadata Viewer, and click Stylesheet again. Quick Reference MAPMETADATAVIEWER Displays the Metadata Viewer Command Line MAPMETADATAVIEWER Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤ View Metadata.
PAGE 1515

■ Set a default template (page 1494) for all metadata you generate from this point on. Quick Reference MAPMETADATAOPTIONS Displays the Metadata Options dialog box Command Line MAPMETADATAOPTIONS Dialog Box Metadata Options Using Metadata Templates You can create or import (upload) an existing metadata (page 2069) template. Metadata templates must be in an XML file, and must comply with the structure of the standard with which you are working. You can apply imported templates to your metadata.
PAGE 1516

■ To import a template (page 1492) ■ To apply a template (page 1492) ■ To rename a template (page 1493) To create a template 1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), select the data source from which you want to create a template. 2 Click Create Template. 3 In the Create Metadata Template dialog box (page 1758), enter a name for your template. 4 Click OK. Your template is saved as an XML file.
PAGE 1517

The template is applied, and the Metadata tab refreshes with the updated metadata. To rename a template 1 On the Metadata Viewer (page 1751) toolbar, click Options. 2 Select a template from the Use Template window. 3 Do one of the following: ■ Click Rename. Enter the new name and press ENTER. ■ Right-click a template in the Use Template window and rename it.
PAGE 1518

■ To export a template (page 1496) ■ To rename a template (page 1493) ■ To remove a template (page 1497) To preview a template 1 On the Metadata Viewer (page 1751) toolbar, click Options. 2 Select the template to preview from the Use Template window. 3 Click Preview. Setting a Default Metadata Template Once you have created or imported templates, you can set the one you use most often as a default.
PAGE 1519

Deactivating Metadata Templates If you have applied a template to your metadata (page 2069), but decide you do not want to use it, you can deactivate it. When you deactivate a metadata template, values that had come from the template are overwritten by values from the data source. Fields that are populated by values from the template, but that do not have corresponding values in the data source are cleared.
PAGE 1520

Exporting Metadata Templates Once you create a metadata (page 2069) template, you can export it as an XML file to share with others in your organization. See also: ■ To create a template (page 1492) ■ To import a template (page 1492) ■ To apply a template (page 1492) ■ To set a default template (page 1494) ■ To deactivate a template (page 1495) ■ To remove a template (page 1497) To export a template 1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), click Options.
PAGE 1521

Removing Metadata Templates If you no longer want a metadata (page 2069) template to be available for use, you can remove it. If you have applied the template to metadata, removing the template does not cause any of the values in that metadata to change. To remove metadata that came from a template, see Deactivating Metadata Templates (page 1495).
PAGE 1522

Editing Metadata Overview of Editing Metadata Although the best practices for creating most metadata (page 2069) are auto-generation (page 2056), updating from the data source, using templates (page 1492), copying and pasting, or importing (page 1510) from similar sources, some data must be entered manually. Metadata Editor (page 1754) provides an interface in which to enter and manage your metadata. Tell me more ■ Show me how to view and interpret metadata. ■ Show me how to create and edit metadata.
PAGE 1523

■ To add a new item to a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor (page 1500) ■ To select an item from a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor (page 1501) ■ To edit an item in a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor (page 1501) ■ To delete an item in a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor (page 1501) ■ To enter text into a free-form field in the Metadata Editor (page 1501) ■ To edit text in a free-form field in the Metadata Editor (page 1502) ■ To delete text in a free-form field (page 1502) To
PAGE 1524

4 ■ Click ■ to the left of a field group to reveal additional fields within that group. ■ Click to contract a field group. 5 Enter the required changes in the appropriate fields. 6 Click Apply to save your changes and continue editing. 7 Click OK to save your changes and close the Metadata Editor. To add a new item to a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor 1 Click the field. A drop-down arrow is displayed. 2 Click the drop-down arrow. A menu is displayed. 3 Click New.
PAGE 1525

5 Click OK. The item is saved, and will appear in the drop-down menu the next time you click the arrow. To select an item from a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor ■ Double-click the item. To edit an item in a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor 1 Click the field. A drop-down arrow is displayed. 2 Click the drop-down arrow. A menu is displayed. 3 Select the item to edit. 4 Click Edit. A compound element metadata editor (page 1758) is displayed, showing the metadata from your selection.
PAGE 1526

To edit text in a free-form field in the Metadata Editor 1 Click the field. A drop-down arrow is displayed. 2 Click the arrow. The field expands. 3 Select the bottom, right-hand corner of the field, and drag it outward until it is the size and shape that you want. 4 Edit the text like you would in a simple text editor. 5 When you are finished, click somewhere else on the screen. The field is no longer displayed. 6 Click OK to save your edits. To delete text in a free-form field 1 Click the field.
PAGE 1527

Updating Metadata You can specify that your metadata (page 2069) is updated automatically, or you can update it manually. Update Automatically If you select the Auto Update check box in the Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756), your metadata will be updated as soon as its data source is updated if the drawing is connected to the data source. If the drawing is not connected, the metadata will update the next time you connect to the source.
PAGE 1528

Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤ View Metadata. Dialog Box Metadata Viewer Copying and Pasting Metadata You can copy metadata (page 2069) from one source and paste it into another. You can copy and paste all the metadata from a data source, but not select parts. Because metadata standards require the metadata for forced-update fields (page 1503) to come directly from their data sources, any pasted metadata that differs from the values in these fields will not be saved.
PAGE 1529

See also: ■ Creating and Viewing Metadata (page 1486) ■ Compound Element Metadata Editors (page 1758) To add a new record to a metadata element ■ Click . To delete a record from a metadata element ■ Click . Quick Reference MAPMETADATAVIEWER Displays the Metadata Viewer Command Line MAPMETADATAVIEWER Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤ View Metadata. Dialog Box Metadata Viewer Working with Compound Metadata Elements Some metadata elements consist of multiple elements.
PAGE 1530

To edit a compound metadata element 1 In the Metadata Editor (page 1754) click a field that displays an ellipsis on the right side of the field. 2 Click the ellipsis . 3 In the compound element editor (page 1758), make the required edits. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference MAPMETADATAVIEWER Displays the Metadata Viewer Command Line MAPMETADATAVIEWER Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤ View Metadata.
PAGE 1531

When you hover over the Record Navigator button, the Record Navigator is displayed. Here, the Record Navigator is transparent because it is not yet storing any records.
PAGE 1532

2 If the fields are populated, and you want to add more values, hover over the Record Navigator button. The Record Navigator is displayed. 3 Click in the Record Navigator. The related fields in the editor are cleared to accept new entries. 4 Enter values into the fields. 5 Click anywhere on the screen to hide the Record Navigator. 6 Click OK to save the new records. To locate a record in the Record Navigator 1 Hover over the Record Navigator button. The Record Navigator is displayed.
PAGE 1533

Auditing Metadata The Metadata Editor (page 1754) has an auditor to help you comply with the metadata (page 2069) standard you are using. The auditor marks empty required fields with auditing symbols that look like caution signs . These symbols also appear on the tabs along the left side of the Metadata Editor to indicate errors in that section. If no auditing symbol is displayed on a tab, the auditor found no errors in that section.
PAGE 1534

Sharing Metadata Overview of Sharing Metadata The best practice for sharing metadata (page 2069) within an organization is to store the source data on a server. This ensures that any metadata that you work with on your local machine remains current. If you save a file-based data source to your local machine, the file that keeps the metadata linked to the source data looks for that data on your machine. This can be problematic if you want to share the metadata file.
PAGE 1535

For Object Classes When you import metadata for an object class (one type of resource (page 2072)), you can either open the DWG (page 2061) file containing that class (and its metadata), or append the metadata for the object class to the metadata for an existing object class in your current drawing. To do so, the metadata of the object class you are importing must have the exact same name as the existing object class.
PAGE 1536

■ Append the source metadata to the current metadata 5 Click OK. To import metadata for Non-DWG files 1 In the Metadata Editor (page 1754), click Import. 2 Browse to, and select the XML file you want to import. 3 Click Open. To import ESRI metadata 1 In ESRI, use ArcCatalog to export metadata in an ESRI profile to the FGDC or ISO standard in XML format. 2 In the AutoCAD Map 3D Metadata Editor (page 1754), click Import Metadata Values.
PAGE 1537

For current drawing classified DWGs For a classified DWG (page 2057) used as the current drawing, the metadata is stored inside the DWG. Because the DWG file stores the location of the data source, the metadata will be updated (page ?) with each data update, or each time it connects to updated data. When you export metadata from a current classified DWG, it is transferred to an MTD file. Although the file has an .mtd extension, its format is XML.
PAGE 1538

4 Click Export. Quick Reference MAPMETADATAVIEWER Displays the Metadata Viewer Command Line MAPMETADATAVIEWER Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤ View Metadata. Dialog Box Metadata Viewer Publishing and Printing Metadata Publishing metadata You can publish metadata (page 2069) to the following file formats: XML, HTML, and TXT. If you publish metadata for an object class or feature source, AutoCAD Map 3D creates an XML file for each object or each feature.
PAGE 1539

To publish metadata 1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), click Publish. 2 Optionally, rename the file. 3 Select a location to save the file. 4 Under Save As Type, select a file type. 5 Click OK. To print metadata 1 In the Metadata Viewer, select a style sheet. 2 Click Print. Quick Reference MAPMETADATAVIEWER Displays the Metadata Viewer Command Line MAPMETADATAVIEWER Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤ View Metadata.
PAGE 1540

1516
PAGE 1541

Reference Guide This section provides comprehensive information about AutoCAD Map 3D commands, expressions and variables, and the dialog boxes where many of the AutoCAD Map 3D settings can be specified.
PAGE 1542

1518
PAGE 1543

Command Reference 11 AutoCAD Map 3D adds its own unique mapping and spatial data management commands to the AutoCAD command set. You get all the power and design capabilities of AutoCAD plus the spatial context needed for mapping. Commands can be accessed using a variety of methods: ■ Enter a command in the drawing area or on the command line. ■ Select the command from the menu. ■ Click the toolbar icon for the command.
PAGE 1544

For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help.
PAGE 1545

Command Description ADESAVEOBJS (page 1887) Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings ADESELOBJS (page 1886) Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings ADESETCRDSYS (page 148) Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing ADESHOWOBJS (page 1887) Displays the objects in the save set ADETEXTLOC (page 937) Redefines the default label point of an object for text ADETRANSFORM (page 932) Moves, scales, and rotates a set of objects ADEWHOHASIT (page 1889) D
PAGE 1546

Command Description MAP2SDF (page 1419) Exports an SDF 2 file for use with Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 or earlier. Same as MAPEXPORTMAPGUIDE.
PAGE 1547

Command Description MAPATTACHDB (page 210) Attaches a data source to a drawing MAPAUTOCHECKOUT (page 696) Automatically checks-out features that are edited MAPBL (page 864) Breaks a link in a topology at a specified point MAPBOOKCREATE (page 1389) Creates a map book to publish your data MAPBREAK (page 942) Breaks objects along a selected or defined boundary MAPBROWSELINK (page 1053) Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to edit in the Data View MAPBROWSETBL (page 1053
PAGE 1548

Command Description MAPCHECKIN (page 694) Saves modified features back to their feature source and unlocks the features in the feature source MAPCHECKOUT (page 696) Makes feature available for editing and if locking is available, sets locks on the source MAPCLEAN (page 768) Performs drawing cleanup operations MAPCLPLINE (page 898) Creates polylines from a polygon topology MAPCOGO (page 1029) Opens the COGO Input dialog box, which allows you to enter coordinate geometry data.
PAGE 1549

Command Description MAPDIGISETUP (page 133) Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects MAPDIGITIZE (page 1082) Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup MAPDISCONNECTDB (page 215) Disconnects an attached, connected database MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (page 1621) Turns on and off the Display Library palette. MAPDIST (page 1153) Measures the geodetic distance between points MAPDL (page 890) Deletes a link in a network topology.
PAGE 1550

Command Description MAPEDITSETAUTO (page 698) Updates feature edits automatically MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT (page 88) Toggles default setting for Update Edits Automatically MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS (page 241) Specifies options for editing features MAPEXPORT (page 1410) Exports data from AutoCAD Map 3D to an external file format MAPEXPORTMAPGUIDE (page 1419) (Same as MAP2SDF) Exports an SDF 2 file for use with Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 and earlier.
PAGE 1551

Command Description MAPIINFO (page 475) View file, image, object property, and correlation information about selected images MAPIINSERT (page 462) Inserts a raster image MAPIL (page 881) Inserts a link in a topology MAPIMANAGE (page 475) View list of images in current drawing, change drawing order, erase or zoom to selected images MAPIMPORT (page 384) Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D MAPIMPORTMAPGUIDE (page 390) (Same as MAPSDFIN) Imports an SDF 2 file from Autodesk MapGuide
PAGE 1552

Command Description MAPMN (page 861) Moves a node in a node topology or moves a node at the end of a link in network or polygon topologies MAPMP (page 868) Merges polygons in a polygon topology MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE (page 1656) Creates a new MultiLineString feature MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT (page 1658) Edits a MultiLineString feature MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE (page 1659) Creates a new MultiPoint feature MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT (page 1659) Edits a MultiPoint feature MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE (page 1660) Creat
PAGE 1553

Command Description MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE (page 1378) Publishes to the new MapGuide technology (Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007 or MapGuide Open Source) MAPRL (page 848) Reverses a link in a network topology.
PAGE 1554

Command Description MAPTEXTLAYERCREATE (page 1111) Creates an annotation layer for freestanding text features MAPTOPOAUDIT (page 921) Checks that a topology is complete and contains no errors MAPTOPOCOMP (page 921) Completes a network or polygon topology MAPTOPOCREATE (page 825) Creates a new topology.
PAGE 1555

Command Description MAPUSERADMIN (page 84) Performs administrative functions MAPVIEWLINK (page 528) Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to view in the Data View MAPVIEWTBL (page 1053) Opens a database table to view in the Data View MAPWORKOFFLINE (page 721) Disconnects you from feature sources and caches all your feature data connections, allowing you to work with a local copy of your feature data.
PAGE 1556

Command Description MAPMPEDIT (page 967) Edits polygons MPFILL (page 980) Sets the default fill for polygons MPOLYGON (page 962) Creates polygons MPSPLIT (page 969) Splits an existing polygon object into two new polygon objects NEWDEF (page 130) Creates a new object class definition file POLYDISPLAY (page 980) Changes the display of polygon edges and fill UNCLASSIFY (page 990) Removes classification from an object ZD (page 1043) Specifies a point based on azimuth and distance from a given p
PAGE 1557

Discontinued Commands The following commands have been discontinued or replaced. Some may still function in this release. However, you should update your scripts to use new commands. Category Discontinued Command Notes Feature Data Objects (FDO) FDOATTACH Discontinued. Not used any more. FDOCONFIGURE Discontinued. Not used any more. FDOCONNECT Discontinued. New command is MAPCONNECT. FDODETACH Discontinued. Not used any more. FDODISASSOCIATE Discontinued. Not used any more.
PAGE 1558

Category Discontinued Command Notes FDOREFRESH Discontinued FDOSCHEMA Discontinued. Not used any more. FDOSHOWOWNER Discontinued. Not used any more. FDOSYSADMIN / SYSADMIN Discontinued MAPSKINMAP Discontinued MAPPLOTTRANSPARENCY Discontinued MAPDISPLAYMANAGER Discontinued MAPIMPORT4 Discontinued MAPEXPORT4 Discontinued Drawing Cleanup ADEDWGCLEAN Discontinued in Autodesk Map 6. New command is MAPCLEAN. Oracle Spatial (Older Method) ORACONNECT Discontinued.
PAGE 1559

Category Topology Discontinued Command Notes ORAUPDATE Discontinued MAPBUFFER Discontinued. New command is MAPANBUFFER MAPCREATE Discontinued. New command is MAPTOPOCREATE MAPDISSOLVE Discontinued. New command is MAPANDISSOLVE MAPFLOOD Discontinued. New command is MAPANTOPONET MAPLINKADD Discontinued. New command is MAPAL MAPLINKDEL Discontinued. New command is MAPDL MAPLINKREV Discontinued. New command is MAPRL MAPNODADD Discontinued. New command is MAPAN MAPNODDEL Discontinued.
PAGE 1560

Category Discontinued Command Notes MAPTOPOADMIN Discontinued. There are several new commands,for example, MAPTOPOLOAD and MAPTOPODEL. For a complete list, see Managing Topologies (page 898). MAPTOPOEDIT Discontinued. There are several new commands, for example, MAPAN, MAPDL, and MAPMP. For a complete list, see Editing Topologies (page 851). MAPTRACE Discontinued.
PAGE 1561

AutoCAD Map 3D displays a message that the command is not allowed during reference editing Wildcard Characters Most dialog boxes and command line entries support the following wildcard characters. These wildcard characters can be used in object data queries and property queries. To use wildcard characters in SQL queries, refer to your database software for a list of supported characters. Wildcard Description # (pound) Matches any numeric digit. @ (at) Matches any alphabetic character. .
PAGE 1562

NOTE Most AutoCAD Map 3D commands are wildcard character-enabled. To use a wildcard character as a literal character, precede the wildcard character with a back quote (`). For example, if you have a layer named "Floor Plan #1," from which you want to query some objects, type Floor Plan `#1 when you create the query. If you select the name from a list box, the back quote is added automatically to the text that appears in any corresponding edit box.
PAGE 1563

Query Attached Drawings to recreate the indexes in this release to ensure that they include any new features, such as color book names. Raster Images To hide an image (page 485) When you hide an image, the image does not display onscreen, nor does it plot. Only the image boundary displays onscreen. Hiding images is a convenient way to speed regeneration time. You can easily redisplay the image when you are ready to plot.
PAGE 1564

DataView performance in scrolling through many records or in highlighting records. Other To erase short linear objects (page 796) Using the Erase Short Objects cleanup action, you can locate any objects shorter than the specified tolerance and erase them. This action reduces the number of unnecessary linear objects and nodes in a map. To simplify objects (page 814) Simplifying linear objects reduces file size and improves performance but also reduces the resolution of the data.
PAGE 1565

Expression Evaluator 12 Use expressions and variables to define data based on other information in your drawings or in external databases. Most places where you can enter an expression, you can use the Expression dialog box to select from a list of available variables. You can combine expressions and variables to create complex expressions.
PAGE 1566

Expression Description (- number number [number] ...) Subtracts the second and following numbers from the first and returns the difference. (* number number [number] ...) Returns the product of all numbers. (/ number number [number] ...) Divides the first number by the product of the remaining numbers and returns the quotient. (abs number) Returns the absolute value of the number. (atan num1 [num2] ) Returns the arctangent of the number expressed in radians.
PAGE 1567

String-Handling Functions The expression evaluator supports the following string-handling functions. The words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable. Expression Description (strcase string [which] ) Returns a string where all alphabetic characters have been converted to uppercase or lowercase. (strcat string1 [string2] ...) Returns a string that is the concatenation of multiple strings. (strlen [string] ...) Returns an integer that is the number of characters in a string.
PAGE 1568

Expression Description (/= numstr [numstr] ...) or (<> numstr [numstr] ...) Returns T if the arguments are not numerically equal, and nil if the arguments are numerically equal. (< numstr [numstr] ...) Returns T if each argument is numerically less than the argument to the right, and returns nil otherwise. (<= numstr [numstr] ...) Returns T if each argument is numerically less than or equal to the argument to the right, and returns nil otherwise. (> numstr [numstr] ...
PAGE 1569

Expression Description (ascii string) Returns the conversion of the first character of a string into its ASCII character code (an integer). (lwtof lineweight [metric] ) Converts the lineweight (first argument) to a real. If the optional second argument is non-nil, returns the lineweight as millimeters, otherwise returns it as inches. (rtos number [mode [precision] ] ) Converts a number into a string. Other Functions The expression evaluator supports the following other functions.
PAGE 1570

Variables Expressions can include many types of variables and expressions. See also: ■ Object Data Variables (page 1549) Dot Variables Use dot variables to represent object properties. For example, use the .LENGTH variable in a property alteration to have AutoCAD Map 3D add text to all lines specifying their length. In an output report, use the .TYPE variable to list the type of objects in your report. Expression Description .ANGLE For most objects, returns the angle in the XY plane.
PAGE 1571

Expression Description .COLOR ACI color of an AutoCAD Map 3D object.Color BYLAYER evaluates as 256.Color BYBLOCK evaluates as 0. .DWGNAME Name of the object's source drawing. Topology queries only: Name of the geometry object's source drawing. .EANGLE Ending angle of an arc object, using radians, interpreted from the coordinate space where the object exists. .EHANDLE Handle of the queried object. .ELEVATION Value for the Z coordinate. .EWIDTH Ending width of a polyline.
PAGE 1572

Expression Description .SANGLE Starting angle of an arc, using radians, interpreted from the coordinate space where the object exists. .SHAPENAME Name of an AutoCAD Map 3D shape. .SIZE Size of an AutoCAD Map 3D shape. .STRING Value of a string (can be the value of an attribute or text). .STYLE Style of a text string or attribute. .SWIDTH Starting width of a polyline. .TAG All AutoCAD Map 3D attribute tags for an object. Usually used with .
PAGE 1573

Expression Description .X3, .Y3, .Z3 Third definition point of a shape or three-dimensional face. If used on any other object, returns nil. .X4, .Y4, .Z4 Fourth definition point of a shape or three-dimensional face. If used on any other object, returns nil. .XSCALE Scale factor along the X axis, interpreted using the coordinate space where the object exists. .YSCALE Scale factor along the Y axis, interpreted using the coordinate space where the object exists. .
PAGE 1574

For example, to retrieve the values in the PRICE column in the table referenced by the link template HOUSES, enter &PRICE@HOUSES. To relate a second table to the table specified in the link template and return a value from one of its fields, use this syntax &[ [ [catalog. ] schema. ] colname@LT [.lnka1, lnka2, ..., lnkaN [.lnkb1, lnkb2, ..., lnkbN ] ] The expression must be entered on one line. ■ The parameters preceding the @ symbol identify the related table.
PAGE 1575

linktemplatevalue1,...,linktemplatevalueN are the key column values obtained from the object. Object Classification Variables The syntax for using an object class property variable in an expression is #ObjectClassName.Category.Property For example, to retrieve the values in the Diameter field of the Pipes table in the PipeRun object class, enter #Piperun.OD:Pipes.Diameter. To retrieve the values in the layer property, which is in the General category, enter #Piperun.General.Layer.
PAGE 1576

Using Color in Expressions When specifying color in an expresssion, you can use any of the following: ■ AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) number ■ RGB triplet ■ color book color AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) You can specify the color using an ACI color name (red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta and white), the ACI index number (0-256), BYLAYER (256), or BYBLOCK (0).
PAGE 1577

Color Book and Color Name You can specify colors using third-party color books (such as Pantone) or user-defined color books. To specify a color book color, enter the name of the color book and the name of the color separated by a comma. Enclose the entire string in single quotation marks. For example, to specify the Pantone process coated cyan, enter 'Pantone(R) process coated, PANTONE Process Cyan C'. When you enter the color book and color name, be sure to type them exactly.
PAGE 1578

■ For real numbers less than one, enter all decimal values with a leading zero; that is, enter .001 as 0.001. ■ When nil is a possible parameter, AutoCAD Map 3D uses zero. ■ The expression evaluator deals only in strings; it does not distinguish between strings and numerics. The expression evaluator converts strings to their numeric values for math operations and converts the results back to strings.
PAGE 1579

Expression Builder 13 Use expressions to filter the geospatial information displayed in your map, to create calculated fields, and to change the styles used for a feature layer based on certain conditions.
PAGE 1580

1556
PAGE 1581

Dialog Boxes 1557
PAGE 1582

1558
PAGE 1583

Analyzing Data Dialog Boxes 14 Create Buffer dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the buffer distance and merging options for buffering features in AutoCAD Map 3D. To create a buffer (page 1308) Analyze tab ➤ Feature panel ➤ Feature Buffer NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To create a buffer for drawing objects, see Buffering a Topology (page 1345).
PAGE 1584

Units Use the measurement units specified by the coordinate system assigned to your map, or choose a different unit from the list. (Specify buffer distance) Click to pick the buffer distance interactively on your map. Output To Layer Specify the Display Manager layer to contain the buffer. If you created other buffers in this map, you can choose one of their layers from the list. By default, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a new layer for your buffer.
PAGE 1585

Change Click to change your feature selection or merge options. Generate Contour dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the settings for new contour lines for a raster-based surface. To create contour lines (page 1190) In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click a surface layer, and select Create Contour Layer NOTE This functionality applies only to raster-based surface data brought into AutoCAD Map 3D using Data Connect. You cannot create a surface from other raster data.
PAGE 1586

Create Contours As Select the type of feature to use when creating contour lines (polyline or polygon). Save Contours Into Filename Enter a name for the new SDF file that will store your contour line features. Hillshade Settings dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the settings for shading applied to raster-based surfaces in AutoCAD Map 3D. To specify hillshading settings (page 1200) Click Analyze tab ➤ Feature panel ➤ Surface Hillshade.
PAGE 1587

Overlay Analysis dialog box Use this dialog to perform spatial and data analysis by overlaying one set of geospatial features with another set of geospatial features. Overlay results use the split rules set in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669). To perform an Overlay operation (page 1316) Analyze tab ➤ Feature panel ➤ Feature Overlay NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To overlay drawing topologies, see Overlaying Two Topologies (page 1336).
PAGE 1588

To use a feature layer, you must add it to your map. To use a feature class, you must connect to its data store, but you need not add it to the map. The geometry in the feature classes or layers you select determines the other choices in the dialog box. You can combine only certain types of geometries. For example, Union, Paste, and Symmetric Difference support polygon/polygon comparisons only. Also, you cannot choose point geometries for both Source and Overlay.
PAGE 1589

Overlay Analysis dialog box - Set Output and Settings page Use this page of the Overlay Analysis dialog box to specify the information about the output layer, and to set tolerance levels for sliver polygons and the evaluation of points. Overlay results use the split rules set in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669). To perform an Overlay operation (page 1316) Analyze tab ➤ Feature panel ➤ Feature Overlay NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only.
PAGE 1590

The Overlay operation checks polygons that fall between the two values to see how wide they are. If they are very narrow, they are merged with a neighboring polygon. NOTE If the resulting polygons are not as desired, try adjusting the tolerance values and repeating the Overlay operation. Minimum Specify a value in the current units. If a polygon is smaller than this value, it merges with a neighboring polygon. Maximum Specify a value in the current units.
PAGE 1591

Output Properties Specify which properties from the Source and (if applicable) Overlay are included in the resulting layer. “All” adds all properties to the resulting layer. “Identifiers” adds only the primary identifiers (primary keys or unique fields, such as Feature_ID). “Non-Identifiers” adds only the non-key attributes (such as Land_Value or Speed_limit, for example). If you add only non-identifiers, the overlay operation generates primary identifiers for the features in the resulting layer.
PAGE 1592

1568
PAGE 1593

Annotation Dialog Boxes 15 Annotation Delete dialog box Use this dialog box to delete one or more annotation templates from the list of available templates. To delete all annotation based on a selected annotation template (page 1108) Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Delete Annotation. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
PAGE 1594

NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091). The Annotation Refresh operation has two options: Strings Only Re-evaluate any expression-based text in the annotation, but change nothing else. Full Annotation Re-evaluate any expression-based text in the annotation, as well as other properties of the annotation, such as the insertion point or the layer on which the annotation resides.
PAGE 1595

Color Select the color for the annotation text. If you select ByBlock, the settings in the Define Annotation Template dialog box will be used. Click specify an expression. to Lineweight Select the lineweight. If you select ByBlock, the settings in the Define Annotation Template dialog box will be used. Click expression. to specify an Text Options Style Select the style for the annotation text. Click to specify an expression. Height Specify the default height of the annotation text.
PAGE 1596

Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Update Annotation. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091). The Annotation Update operation has two options: Retain Regenerates all annotation that uses the selected template, maintaining any advanced settings from the original annotation.
PAGE 1597

Copy Copy the selected annotation template with a new name. Rename Rename the selected annotation template. Delete Delete the selected annotation template. You can delete an annotation template only if you first delete all references to that template from the drawing. Default Properties Layer Select a layer for the annotation. Click to specify an expression. Linetype Select a linetype. Click to specify an expression. Lineweight Select a lineweight for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
PAGE 1598

The resulting values use radians. Your expression can include a conversion from degrees to radians (divide the degree value by 360/(2*pi)). Edit Template Contents Display the Block Editor, where you can specify the contents of the selected annotation template. Edit Expression dialog box Use this dialog box to edit an expression. For information about the Expression Evaluator, see Expression Evaluator (page 1541).
PAGE 1599

NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091). Annotation Template Select one or more annotation templates to use when inserting annotation into your drawing. Basic/Advanced Click Advanced to override the insertion information specified in the annotation template. Insert Options Insertion Point Specify the annotation insertion location. Click drawing, or click to pick a point in the to specify an expression.
PAGE 1600

Color Select a color for the annotation. Click to specify an expression. Match Click to copy the insertion options and properties from an annotation already in the drawing. New Annotation Template Name dialog box Use this dialog box to specify a name for an annotation template. To define an annotation template (page 192) Click Annotate tab ➤ Map Annotation panel ➤ Define Template. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 1601

Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes 16 Publish to MapGuide dialog box Use this dialog box to publish the current display map to Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007, a platform that lets you publish map-related data on the web or on an intranet. To publish a map for use with MapGuide (page 1378) Click ➤ Publish ➤ Publish To MapGuide. Connect To Site Enter the URL for the target website. If the site requires a password, enter your user name and password in the Connect To MapGuide Site dialog box.
PAGE 1602

Publish to MapGuide Results dialog box Use this dialog box to resolve any errors that result from a Publish To MapGuide operation. To resolve MapGuide publishing errors (page 1379) Click ➤ Publish ➤ Publish To MapGuide. View Log Examine the log file to see which layers failed and why. Define New Object Data Field dialog box Use this dialog box to create new fields in existing object data tables when you are importing Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 files into AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 1603

Character Any characters Point Three real numbers separated by commas representing the X, Y, and Z values of a point Real A real number between -1.7E308 and 1.7E308 If you select Integer, numbers are rounded to the nearest whole number. Description Enter a description for the new field. This description appears in the Object Data Fields list. Default Enter the value you will use most often when you assign this data field to an object. The value must match the data type you selected above.
PAGE 1604

Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box Use this dialog box to specify settings for exporting DWG data to Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 files for use with Autodesk MapGuide version 6.5 and earlier. To export DWG data to SDF2 format (page 1418) Click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ As SDF2. NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
PAGE 1605

Preview Filtered Objects Preview the objects that will be exported. In the preview, objects that will be exported are highlighted. To leave the preview and return to this dialog, press Esc. Options Tab SDF Description Enter a description for the SDF 2 file. Data Expression Key to open the Expression Enter an expression for the Key field, or click Chooser dialog box and select an attribute for the Key field.
PAGE 1606

Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box Use this dialog box to specify settings for importing Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 files into AutoCAD Map 3D. To import SDF 2 files (page 389) Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ SDF 2. NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405). Import Layer Import To Layer Import SDF 2 data to a specified layer.
PAGE 1607

URL Select the field in the object data table for the imported SDF 2 URL data. Click the button to define a new field in the object data table for the SDF 2 data. Create Hyperlinks From URL Field Create hyperlinks from the URL expressions in the SDF 2 file. Coordinate Conversion Convert From Enter the coordinate system of the SDF 2 file. This function is available only if the current drawing has an assigned coordinate system.
PAGE 1608

1584
PAGE 1609

Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes 17 Cleanup Methods Page Use this dialog box to specify what to do with the original objects after the cleanup process is complete. To specify how to convert the objects after cleanup (page 776) To save Drawing Cleanup settings as a profile (page 781) Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial features.
PAGE 1610

Use Original Layer Place new objects on the same layer as the source objects. Create On Layer Enter the name of a layer. If the layer does not exist, it will be created. Click Select Layers to select from existing layers. Convert Selected Objects Line To Polyline Convert lines to 2D polylines so you can assign line width to them, use them in thematic maps, or use them in programs that accept only polylines.
PAGE 1611

Displays the Error Markers Page (page 1587) if you selected Interactive on the previous Select Actions page. Finish Perform the drawing cleanup operation using the current settings. Error Markers Page Use this dialog box to specify the marker shape and color for each cleanup action. Specify the marker size, and set options for erasing or maintaining markers before and after cleanup.
PAGE 1612

Marker Size Specify the marker size as a percent of the screen size, usually between 3% and 7%. Blocks And Colors For each operation listed, select a marker shape and color. Other Load Load a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings you saved previously. Save Save your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use. Finish Perform the drawing cleanup operation using the current settings. You can place markers, review errors, and make correction decisions.
PAGE 1613

Cleanup Actions list Select a cleanup action and click Add to add it to the Selected Actions list.
PAGE 1614

Tolerance Specify the radial search distance for locating geometric errors. Enter a value or click Pick to specify a distance in the drawing area. For example, if you set the tolerance to 5 units, two nodes within 10 units of each other are within the tolerance and will be corrected. Rotation Include rotation in the Delete Duplicates calculation for Blocks, Text, or Mtext. Z-Values Include z-values (elevation) in the Delete Duplicates calculation.
PAGE 1615

Bulge For Weed Polylines, enter a value, or click Pick to specify it in the drawing. Bulge adds vertices to a polyline curve, creating an approximation of the curve using straight line segments. Bulge is a ratio of the distance from the arc to the chord divided by half the length of the chord. Options Interactive Review errors and decide how to handle them. For example, you can correct the errors, place marker blocks on them, or ignore them. Automatic Have AutoCAD Map 3D correct errors automatically.
PAGE 1616

Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial features. Drawing Cleanup is a sequence of pages that guide you through specifying the set of objects to include in a drawing cleanup operation, the objects to anchor, the cleanup actions to perform and the settings to use, how to treat the objects after cleanup, and the error marker settings (for interactive mode only).
PAGE 1617

Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box Use this dialog box to step through the errors, review them in the map, decide whether to correct the errors, and place markers on errors that you want to review later. To set up markers for interactive mode (page 779) To review errors before correcting them (page 785) Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial features.
PAGE 1618

Fix All Correct all errors for the selected action. Mark All Mark all errors for the selected action with error markers, making them easily visible in the map. Remove All Skip all errors for the selected action without correcting them, remove any error markers, and go to the next cleanup action in the list. Next Action Go to the next cleanup action in which errors are detected, without correcting errors.
PAGE 1619

Select Objects Page Use this dialog box to select the objects to include in the cleanup process and the objects to anchor. To select and anchor objects for drawing cleanup (page 770) To save Drawing Cleanup settings as a profile (page 781) Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Clean Up. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for geospatial features. If you have previously saved your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file, click Load to reload those settings.
PAGE 1620

Objects that are not in the selected object classes are filtered out. The status line shows how many objects are selected and how many have been filtered out. If your map does not contain object classes, these options are not available. Objects To Anchor In Drawing Cleanup Select the objects to anchor. Anchored objects are used as reference points during cleanup and are not altered or moved; objects being cleaned will be moved towards anchored objects.
PAGE 1621

Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes 18 MAPDIST Use this command to measure the geodetic distance between points in your map. To measure geodetic distance (page 1153) Click Analyze tab ➤ Geo Tools panel ➤ Geo Distance. The geodetic distance is the actual distance along the ground, taking into account the curvature of the Earth. For example, if you have a Mercator map of the world, use this command to measure how many miles wide Greenland is.
PAGE 1622

Azimuth The angle of the line from the first point to the second point, measured at the first point, and expressed in degrees east of north. Delta X, Delta Y These are the same as the DIST command. Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box Use this dialog box to assign a coordinate system before you bring objects or features into the current drawing. To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing (page 147) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Coordinate System panel ➤ Assign.
PAGE 1623

Source Drawings Select the attached drawings, then enter the code for these drawings. Click Select Coordinate System to select from a list of available coordinate systems. To assign a different code to other source drawings, use this command again. You cannot assign a coordinate system to a source drawing if that drawing currently has queried objects in the current drawing.
PAGE 1624

File List Select a drawing in the current directory. Filter Use wild-card characters to filter the display of file names. For example, enter t* to view only file names starting with the letter t. Add Add the selected drawing names to the Selected Drawings list. You can change the drive or folder and continue to add files to the Selected Drawings list. Remove Remove the selected drawing names from the Selected Drawings list. Selected Drawings When you have added all the drawings you want, click OK.
PAGE 1625

Precision Level Specify the level of precision to display. Lettering Scheme Specify the lettering scheme. AA (MGRS-New) is for use with the WGS84 datum. AL (MGRS-Old) is for use with older datums. Digitization Location Specify the digitization location within a given square: left top, center top, right top, left center, center, right center, left bottom, center bottom, or right bottom. Track Coordinates Dialog Box Use this dialog box to track coordinates in your map.
PAGE 1626

Delete Tracker: remove a coordinate tracker form the Track Coordinates dialog box. Create Reference System Dialog Box Use this dialog box to create a reference system for a viewport in paper space. To track coordinates (page 1150) Click Layout Tools tab ➤ Reference System panel ➤ Create. Reference System Select the reference system you want to create: MGRS-AA or MGRS-AL. Current Map Coordinate System The coordinate system of the current map. Current Scale The view scale of the current map.
PAGE 1627

Data Connect Dialog Boxes 19 Create a Join / Edit a Join dialog box Use this dialog box to join a table of attribute data to features in your map so they have more properties. You can also edit an existing join. To create a join (page 512) In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Create A Join. If a join exists, right-click a feature layer ➤ Manage Joins. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only.
PAGE 1628

This Column From The Left Table Select the column(s) from the primary table that will link the primary table to the secondary table. Matches This Column From The Right Table Select the column(s) from the secondary table that will link the tables. This column does not have to have the same name as the column on the left side, but it must have the same data type. Only columns with matching data types are listed.
PAGE 1629

NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To set up new data sources for drawing objects, see Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings (page 205). Click OK to create the new data store with a default schema. You can edit the resulting schema. Data Store Name Enter a name for the new data store. Password Enter a password. Confirm Password Enter your password again to confirm it. Description Enter a description for the new data store. Data Store Coordinate System Click [...
PAGE 1630

NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. To change the coordinate system for attached drawings, see Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing (page 146). Spatial Contexts Select the entry to change. Edit Display the Select Coordinate System dialog box (page 1609), where you can select a different coordinate system for your map. Remove Removes any overrides you applied to the selected entry.
PAGE 1631

NOTE This dialog does not display objects in the edit set for the current drawing. To remove locks for these objects, remove the objects from the edit set. Feature Source Connection dialog box Use this dialog box to connect to an attached feature source. To bring in features from Oracle (page 314) In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 1632

In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer with the join to modify ➤ Manage Joins or Manage Calculations. In the Data Table, click Options ➤ Manage Joins or Manage Calculations . NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To connect drawing objects to an external data source, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). New To create a new join, click New ➤ Join. To create a new calculation, first select the layer whose properties will be used for the calculation.
PAGE 1633

TIP If the status does not list your newly created objects, be sure you have added the objects to the edit set for this feature source. Clear this check box to save only objects that were queried in from the feature source. Select Coordinate System dialog box Use this dialog box to change the coordinate system of data you add to your map. You must specify the original coordinate system for the data.
PAGE 1634

User Credentials dialog box Use this dialog box to log in to data sources that require user credentials. If you do not know your user name and password, check with your System Administrator. To access data through FDO (page 308) In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data ➤ Connect To Data. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. For information about a multi-user environment for drawings, see Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings (page 730).
PAGE 1635

NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. For information about queries for drawings, see Overview of Finding and Querying Drawing Objects (page 1218). Query Statement Enter the expression to use for filtering the data to add to the map.
PAGE 1636

1612
PAGE 1637

Data Table Dialog Box 20 Data Table dialog box Use the Data Table (page 2059) much as you would a database spreadsheet. To find and select features (page 1206) In Display Manager or Map Explorer, click Table. NOTE You can also access a specialized version of the Data Table from the Survey tab on the Task Pane. For Survey data, the Data Table displays survey point data, and is called the Points Table. NOTE The Data Table displays geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 1638

Auto-Scroll Automatically scroll the Data Table to the current selection in your map. Filter by Select a property to use to filter the Data Table, then type a value to use for the filter and click Apply Filter . Clear Filter Double-click to remove the active filter and show all data for this feature layer. Row Enter a row number to scroll the Data Table to that row. Currently selected row numbers appear in this field. Search to Select Select features using a query.
PAGE 1639

Digitizing Dialog Boxes 21 MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) Use this command to digitize nodes and linear objects with settings from MAPDIGISETUP. To digitize links and nodes (page 1081) Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Digitize drop-down ➤ Digitize. NOTE This command creates drawing objects. To convert the drawing objects into geospatial feature data, see Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357).
PAGE 1640

Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width/ For information on this prompt, look up PLINE command in the help index. Continue to specify linear objects. When you finish, press Enter twice. Digitizing Setup The specified nodes or linear objects are digitized using the settings specified in the Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1617). If you selected this in the Digitize Setup dialog box... Do this... Attach Data Enter the data values for each digitized object.
PAGE 1641

Object Data Type Select Object Datato use data in an object data table in the current drawing. Select Database Link to use data in an external database. Object Data Tables Name If you are using data from an object data table, select the table. Link Template If you are using data from an external database, select the link template associated with that database. To associate databases to link templates, use the Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) (page 1683).
PAGE 1642

Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Digitize drop-down ➤ Digitize Setup. NOTE This process creates drawing objects. To convert the drawing objects into geospatial feature data, see Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357). Object Type Select whether to digitize nodes (points or blocks) or linear objects (polylines). Attach Data Attach object data to the digitized objects. Click Data To Attach to select the data source and location.
PAGE 1643

Object Snap To End Snap the location of the node object to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc, line, mline, polyline segment or ray, or the closest corner of a trace, solid, or 3D face. For more information about the OSNAP command, see the AutoCAD help. Linear Object Settings Specify settings for the linear objects that are created during the digitizing process. Create on Layer Specify the layer for new linear objects. To select from a list of layers in the drawing set, click Layers.
PAGE 1644

NOTE This process creates drawing objects. To convert the drawing objects into geospatial feature data, see Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357). Link Template To edit an entry, highlight it, enter new value in the Column Value box, and press Enter. When you finish updating values for an object, click OK. To attach no additional data to the current object, click Cancel.
PAGE 1645

Display Manager Dialog Boxes 22 MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (Display Library command) Use this command to turn on and off the display of the Display Library palette. MAPDISPLAYMANAGER (Display Manager command) Use this command to load a display map, update the display, or turn on and off the stylization of maps. Respond to the prompts: Display Manager [?/Load/Update/Stylization/eXit] Do one of the following: Enter ? to display the current settings for the Display Manager. Enter l to load a display map.
PAGE 1646

Alter Block Insertion dialog box Use this dialog box to control how blocks are inserted for a specific range of entities or for a specific value in a theme. To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181) In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
PAGE 1647

In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial features, see Theming Features (page 1165). Linetype Select a line type to represent the data values or click to go to the Select Linetype dialog box. Layer Select a layer for the new lines, or click to go to the Layer Properties Manager dialog box. Width Specify the width of the polylines in the thematic map.
PAGE 1648

Alter Lineweight dialog box Use this dialog box to select a lineweight for a specific range of entities or for a specific value in a theme. To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181) In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
PAGE 1649

In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial features, see Theming Features (page 1165). Define Hatch dialog box Use this dialog box to control the addition of hatching for a specific range of entities or for a specific value in a theme. To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181) In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
PAGE 1650

For standard-scale hatch patterns (those that do not have an AR- prefix), the density of the hatching varies according to the hatch scale and plot scale you use, as shown in the following table and figure Plot Scale Hatch Scale Result 1:2000 1 to 500 Solid 2000 Lines clearly visible 15000 Sparse, occasional lines 20000 No hatch or one line only 1:10000 1 to 2500 10000 Lines clearly visible 75000 Sparse, occasional lines 100000 No hatch or one line only Solid You can use solid fills at a
PAGE 1651

Layer Select a layer for the new text, or click to go to the Layer Manager dialog box. Insert Point Select the point on objects to create new text. The default is labelpt. Justification Select the justification (left, right, center, middle) for text created for the thematic map. The default is center. Color Specify the color of the text or click to go to the Select Color dialog box. Height Specify the height of the text. Angle Specify the angle to rotate text created for the theme.
PAGE 1652

In the map, select the text feature, right-click it, and click Edit Text Instance. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To annotate geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091). Style changes made in this dialog box supersede the base style of the annotation layer. To revert to the base style, you must remove the style overrides.
PAGE 1653

New Scale dialog box Use this dialog box to create a new scale. To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181) In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To define scale ranges for geospatial features, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643). Range of Values dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the source of thematic data and partition it into ranges.
PAGE 1654

Normalize By Enter a value or an expression if you want to normalize the data values relative to some other data value. Click Expression dialog box. to display the Choose Data Read Data Reads the data from the data source according to the expression you defined. Data Ranges area Group Value By Select a method for partitioning data values. Optimal The optimal method groups data values based upon a determination of the natural breaks in the data.
PAGE 1655

Use Thousands Separator Adds a punctuation mark to separate the thousands in values such as population data. Find Ranges Divides the data into ranges according to the parameters you entered. Ranges Area This area displays the data divided into ranges according to the parameters you entered. Notes About Precision When numeric data is read into the AutoCAD Map 3D as part of thematic mapping, it is stored as an eight byte floating point number.
PAGE 1656

To bring in drawing objects from AutoCAD layers in the current drawing (page 356) To bring in drawing objects based on topology (page 367) To add a raster image to the map (page 440) To add a point cloud to your mapIn the Display Manager, click Data Add Point Cloud Data From Index F... (page 376) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To work with geospatial feature layers in the Display Manager, see Overview of the Display Manager (page 634).
PAGE 1657

Source Drawing Scope dialog box Use this dialog box to specify which drawings to include in the query. To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data (page 364) To bring in drawing objects based on location (page 359) To bring in drawing objects based on object properties (page 362) To create a drive alias (page 161) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Attach. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1658

NOTE This functionality applies only to features. To style drawing objects, see Creating a Style (page 658). Style Label dialog box Use this dialog box to add and style labels for features. To label features (page 1093) In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Edit Style. NOTE This functionality applies only to features. To add labels to drawing objects, see Overview of Annotation (page 1100). Create A Label Select the check box to turn on the labels.
PAGE 1659

Size Context Select Device Space to specify label widths and heights in screen units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters. Select Map Space to specify label widths and heights in Mapping Coordinate System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers. Units Select the type of units to use. Size Enter the text size or specify the size using an expression.
PAGE 1660

Rotation Do one of the following: ■ Enter the amount to rotate the text. ■ Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle in the box. Click OK. ■ Click Expression. Specify the rotation using an expression. For more information, see Using the Expression Builder (page 1555). NOTE Horizontal and vertical alignment settings are not available for area layers. Only the vertical alignment setting is available for line layers.
PAGE 1661

composite line by clicking the up and down arrows. Click Reset To Single Line to style a single line. Units (Device Space) Select the type of units to measure line thickness. Lines are specified in Device Space units. Thickness Specify polyline thickness. Select 0 thickness to draw the line as thinly as possible. Color Select a color. Pattern Select a pattern. Style Point dialog box Use this dialog box to specify symbols to represent and display point features.
PAGE 1662

Size Context Select Device Space to specify label widths and heights in screen units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters. Select Map Space to specify label widths and heights in Mapping Coordinate System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers. Units Select the type of units to use. Width Enter the symbol width or specify the width using an expression.
PAGE 1663

Style Polygon dialog box Use this dialog box to create styles for polygon geometry. To apply styles to areas (page 650) In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Edit Style. NOTE This functionality applies only to features. To style drawing objects, see Creating a Style (page 658). Apply Fill To The Area Apply Fill To The Area Select this check box to fill polygons. NOTE If you are creating a theme, this check box does not appear.
PAGE 1664

NOTE In polygons with transparent backgrounds, the colors you see on the map may differ from the colors displayed in the Preview frame because the Preview frame uses a white background, which may differ from the color beneath the transparent objects in your map. Background Color Range For themes, instead of a single background color, select the first and last color for the background. Intermediate colors are interpolated automatically.
PAGE 1665

■ Map Space. Symbol widths and heights are in Mapping Coordinate System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers. Units Specify the units for the annotation layer. Text Type Select one of the following: ■ Plain—Formats annotation text uniformly using the settings specified for the layer in this dialog box. The text has no formatting information itself. ■ Mtext—Formats annotation text as multiline.
PAGE 1666

Vertical Alignment Specify the vertical alignment of the text. Click the expression to edit it. Click Delete Expression to choose a value from a drop-down list. Rotation Specify the rotation of the text. Click the expression to edit it. Click Delete Expression to choose a value from a drop-down list. Preview Displays a preview of the text with the specified styles applied.
PAGE 1667

Values Displays either the Thematic Values dialog box (page 1644) or the Range of Values dialog box (page 1629), where you specify the data source to use for the values and the specific values to use. Thematic Details Specify the properties to style and the styles for each range or value in this theme. Table Select ways to style the objects. ■ In the column heading, select the check boxes for the properties to style. ■ Click a cell in a style column to edit the style for a specific value.
PAGE 1668

Thematic Values dialog box Use this dialog box (from the Thematic Mapping dialog box (page 1642)) to specify the source of thematic data and then select one or more discrete values from that data. To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181) In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial features, see Theming Features (page 1165). Data Values area Obtain From .
PAGE 1669

Theme dialog box Use this dialog box to create a theme for a feature source layer, based on a range of conditions. The title of the dialog box changes, depending on the type of geometry in the feature you are theming. To create a theme for a feature layer (page 1168) In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Edit Style. NOTE This functionality applies only to geospatial features. To theme drawing objects, see Overview of Theming Drawing Data (page 1176). A theme is a collection of rules.
PAGE 1670

Replace Existing Rules Specify whether new ranges replace existing rules (ranges) or are added before or after existing rules. Theme The Polygons/Lines/Points Select the Theme The Polygons/Lines/Pointscheck box to use a different style for each rule of the theme. The first rule uses the From style and the last rule uses the To style. Styles are interpolated across the range. Style Range .
PAGE 1671

Editing Maps Dialog Boxes 23 ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command) Use this command to fill a closed polyline with a color. To fill a closed polyline with a solid-looking hatch (page 939) NOTE This command is for drawing objects only. To style polygonal geospatial features, see Styling Area Features (page 650). Respond to the prompts: Select/: Enter s to select individual objects, or l to fill all objects on a layer.
PAGE 1672

ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command) Use this command to get two or more data sets from different sources to align geographically: for example, when stretching a new subdivision map into a preexisting parcel map. To rubber sheet two maps (page 935) Click Tools tab ➤ Map Edit panel ➤ Rubber Sheet. WARNING Use rubber sheeting only when it is absolutely necessary because it can severely compromise the accuracy of your data. NOTE This command is for drawing objects only.
PAGE 1673

When selecting points for rubber sheeting, select points in order around the perimeter of the object or region to be rubber sheeted. correct incorrect The selected points are treated as the vertices of a polygon, so you will get better results if you select the points sequentially around the perimeter. ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) Use this command to move, rotate, and scale a single object or a group of objects.
PAGE 1674

Select objects: Use any AutoCAD selection method to select the objects you want to transform. If you chose Layer, enter the names of the layers you want to transform. You can use “wild-card characters” such as * and ? to select a set of layers. First source point: Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates of the point. First destination point: Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates of the point.
PAGE 1675

MAPCOGO The MAPCOGO command calls the COGO Input dialog box (page 1668), which allows you to create points using coordinate geometry data. To create a point using the COGO Input dialog box (page 1028) MAPFEATUREMERGE NOTE This command must be used with at least one feature. Use this command to merge features and assign feature property values for resulting features.
PAGE 1676

New Create a new feature ID for the merged feature. MAPFEATURESPLIT Use this command to split geospatial features and assign feature property values for resulting features. When you split a feature, the resulting feature property values are determined by rules you specify in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669). You can set defaults for the split prompts in the Feature Editing Options dialog box (page 1929).
PAGE 1677

Generate new feature ID or use existing [New/Existing] : Specify whether you want the new feature to use the existing feature ID or a new one. Would you like to Draw or Select the line for split? [Select/Draw]: Select or draw a split line. If you use a polyline as your split line, make sure it intersects with feature geometry you are splitting. You can also used a closed polyline.
PAGE 1678

■ BREAK ■ TRIM Even when MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES is set to Yes, the following default rules are applied when splitting or merging features. For more information about these rules, see Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669) Property Type Default Split Rule Default Merge Rule String Copy First Selected Integer (Int) Copy Sum Double Copy Sum MAPLINESTRINGCREATE Use this command to create a new LineString geospatial feature on a layer that contains LineString feature data.
PAGE 1679

Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]: Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already created one arc, you have the option to close the LineString. For more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help. Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn tangent to that arc segment.
PAGE 1680

Open Removes the closing segment of the polyline. The polyline is considered closed unless you open it using the Open option. If the LineString is open the first option is Closed. Join Joins two open LineStrings into one. The ends must be touching. Select objects: Select the two LineStrings to be joined. Edit Vertex Marks the first vertex of the LineString by drawing an X on the screen. If you have specified a tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in that direction.
PAGE 1681

Specify start point Specify a starting point for the first LineString. Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo] Specify the next point or enter an option. LineString/eXit : Create another LineString or exit the command. Next Point Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated. Arc Adds arc segments to the polyline. Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]: Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option.
PAGE 1682

MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT Use this command to edit a MultiLineString geospatial feature. To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705) NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To edit linear drawing objects, see Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727). The MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command. For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in the AutoCAD Help.
PAGE 1683

Undo Undoes the last step in the MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT operation. Exit Ends the MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT operation. MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE Use this command to create a new MultiPoint geospatial feature on a layer that contains point feature data. A MultiPoint feature is a set of points that behave as one feature. When you complete the first point you are prompted to begin another one until you have created the set.
PAGE 1684

Add Adds a new point to the MultiPoint feature. For more information, see MAPPOINTCREATE (page 1663). Delete Deletes a point from the MultiPoint feature. Move Moves a point in the MultiPoint feature. Select Objects: Select the object to move. Specify base point: Specify a base point for the Move operation. Specify second point: Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the selected points are to be moved and in what direction.
PAGE 1685

NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To create drawing objects, see Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727) and Working with Polygon Objects (page 954). The MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE command is based on the PLINE command. For more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help. Respond to the prompts: Specify start point: Specify a starting point for the MultiPolygon. Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]: Specify the next point or enter an option.
PAGE 1686

Exit Ends the MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE command. MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT Use this command to edit a MultiPolygon feature. NOTE You cannot perform edits that would create a non-planar polygon. Every ring of a polygon must be planar and all parts and all rings must be in the same plane. To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705) NOTE This command is for geospatial features only.
PAGE 1687

Select objects: Select the polygon to move. Specify base point: Specify a base point for the Move operation. Specify second point: Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the selected polygons are to be moved and in what direction. Edit Edits a polygon in the MultiPolygon. For more information, see MAPPOLYGONEDIT (page 1665). Undo Undoes the last step in the MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT operation.
PAGE 1688

NOTE You cannot create a non-planar polygon. Every ring of a polygon must be planar and all parts and all rings must be in the same plane. The MAPPOLYGONCREATE command is based on the PLINE command. For more information about the prompts, see PLINE. To create a new Polygon or MultiPolygon feature (page 689) NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To create drawing objects, see Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727) and Working with Polygon Objects (page 954). Respond to the prompts.
PAGE 1689

Ring Creates a polygon inside a polygon. This is considered a hole. Additional rings are islands. Repeats the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command. Exit Ends the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command. MAPPOLYGONEDIT Use this command to edit a polygon geospatial feature. NOTE You cannot perform edits that would create a non-planar polygon. Every ring of a polygon must be planar and all parts and all rings must be in the same plane.
PAGE 1690

Specify base point: Specify a base point for the Move operation. Specify second point: Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the selected polygons are to be moved and in what direction. Edit Edits a vertex on the outer ring or an island or hole. For more information, see MAPLINESTRINGEDIT (page 1655). Undo Undoes the last step in the MAPPOLYGONEDIT operation. Exit Ends the MAPPOLYGONEDIT operation.
PAGE 1691

After Boundaries Specify what to use as the boundary. Use Save Back Extents Of Active Source Drawings Use the save back extents specified by the drawing settings for the current drawing. To change the save back extents, use the Drawing Settings dialog box. In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set. In the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1918), click Drawing Settings. Select Boundaries Use existing objects as the boundary. Click Select to select the objects to use.
PAGE 1692

Skip Topology Objects Protect topology data. Objects with topology data are not broken. Retain Object Data Save object data from the original object. The data is duplicated on each new piece. COGO Input dialog box The COGO Input dialog box allows you to create points using coordinate geometry data. It also allows you to run an inverse report to determine the relationship between two points. To create a point using the COGO Input dialog box (page 1028) Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ COGO Input.
PAGE 1693

■ Inverse Report: An inverse report gives you information about the relationship between two points. ■ Orthogonal/Offset: specify a point using distance and offset from an existing line. Input Enter the required input for your chosen routine. Calculate Calculates the point based on the selected coordinate geometry routine and input. Result Displays the coordinates of the new point. Zoom to the created point in the drawing window. Report For Inverse Report only: view the results of the inverse report.
PAGE 1694

■ Join option of PEDIT ■ BREAK ■ TRIM To create split/merge rules using expressions In the Data Table, click Options ➤ Set Split And Merge Rules. Click Feature Edit tab ➤ Split/Merge panel ➤ Merge Feature. Click Feature Edit tab ➤ Split/Merge panel ➤ Split Feature. NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To split polygonal drawing objects, see Splitting Polygon Objects (page 968). Feature Properties Click a property to see its attributes and set its rules.
PAGE 1695

■ Expression. Specify an expression. ■ Proportional. Distribute the property values proportionally into each new feature based on the numeric value in the Based On field. Expression Specify a custom calculation. Enter the expression for the calculation, or click to use the Split Rule Expression dialog box. This option is displayed when the Split Rule is set to Calculation or when the selected property is a string. For more information, see Overview of Expressions for Geospatial Features.
PAGE 1696

■ Standard Deviation. Use the standard deviation of the merged features. ■ Sum. Use the sum of the values of the merged features. Expression Specify a custom expression. Enter the expression, or click to use the Split Rule Expression dialog box. This option is displayed when the Merge Rule is set to Calculation or when the selected property is a string. For more information, see Overview of Expressions for Geospatial Features.
PAGE 1697

Trim Inside / Trim Outside And a trim boundary... Trim Inside looks like this... And Trim Outside looks like this... Boundary Specify what to use as the boundary. Reference Last Query Boundary Use the last spatial boundary that was referenced in a query. Select Boundary Use an existing object as the boundary. Click Select to select a closed polyline or circle for the boundary. Define Boundary Use selected points to specify the boundary. Click Define to select at least three points for the boundary.
PAGE 1698

Filter On Layers Trim only objects on selected layers. Click Layers to select from the layers in the current drawing. If circle objects cross the selected boundary, they are converted to arcs before they are trimmed. Trim Method Set rules for the trim operation. Trim Inside/Outside Boundary Specify whether to trim all objects inside the specified boundary and cut a hole in the drawing, or whether to trim all objects outside the boundary and create a neat border. Skip Topology Objects Protect topology data.
PAGE 1699

External Databases Dialog Boxes 24 Associate Database Versions dialog box Use this dialog box to set options related to database versions and file extensions. To associate database versions with files extensions (page 243) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ angle-arrow. NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
PAGE 1700

Always Use Select this option if you akways use one type of database. When you drop a database file onto the Map Explorer, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the specified version of the database software. For example, if all your dBASE files are in dBASE III format, select Always Use, and then select dBASE III from the list. If you have files in both dBASE III and dBASE IV format, select Always Prompt under dBASE/FoxPro. For files created with Excel 95, select the Excel 7.0 driver.
PAGE 1701

Use the Borders tab to specify borders for the selected column. Use the Align tab to specify text alignment for the selected column. Font tab Font Select a font from the list of fonts installed on your system. Row height adjusts automatically for the font size. Outline Select a font style. Available styles are determined by the selected font. Size Select a font size. Available sizes are determined by the selected font. Effects Select Strikeout to print hyphens through the text.
PAGE 1702

Borders tab Border Click in a box to select a border for the Left, Right, Top, or Bottom of each cell in the column. The border uses the currently selected line type. Type Click a line type to select it. Color Select a color for the border. Align tab Horizontal Align text on the left of the cell, the right of the cell, or in the horizontal center of the cell. Select Standard to right-align numeric fields and left-align all other fields.
PAGE 1703

NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). Scroll through the list, select the value you want, and click OK. The new value is inserted into the Value field. Configure Data Source dialog box Use this dialog box to enter a name for a new data source or select an existing data source from the list.
PAGE 1704

Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ ➤ Connect To External Records. Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ ➤ Disconnect From Ex- ternal Records. NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of Joins (page 507). These data sources are attached to the current drawing but are currently disconnected. Select data sources from the list. Click Connect.
PAGE 1705

AutoCAD Map 3D reads each selected object and creates a new record in the external database table. If an object has multiple records from the object data table, AutoCAD Map 3D creates multiple records in the external database table. AutoCAD Map 3D also generates a database link to connect the object to the record in the new database table. ■ Use object data in your drawing that matches information in an external database table and automatically create links based on the matched information.
PAGE 1706

Select Automatically Use all objects, unless Filter On Layers is selected. Select Manually Select individual objects. Click Select to pick them in the map. Filter On Layers Search all layers, or click Layers to select from a list of AutoCAD layers in the current drawing. Define Link Template dialog box (MAPOD2ASE) Use this dialog box to specify the table name for the new database table and to define the link template that identifies the database table.
PAGE 1707

Link Template Specify a unique link template name. Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) Use this dialog box to define the location of a table and the columns to use as key columns for a link template. To convert object data to a linked database table (page 534) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ Define Link Template. NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with drawing objects.
PAGE 1708

Source dialog box Use this dialog box to view all data sources attached to the current drawing. To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane (page 209) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ Attach Data Source. NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of Joins (page 507). Select the data sources. Click Detach.
PAGE 1709

Header/Footer dialog box Use this dialog box to define the header and footer for a Data View report. To specify the header and footer (page 1476) In the Data View: File ➤ Header and Footer NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). Select the Header or Footer tab and enter the text. To change the font, select a cell and click Font.
PAGE 1710

First Page No. Enter the starting page number. Additional pages are numbered consecutively. Link Template Properties dialog box Use this dialog box to change the width of the Column Name or Data Type columns. To edit the database path in a link template (page 539) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ ➤ Edit Link Template Properties. NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with drawing objects.
PAGE 1711

Margins Margin dimensions are in centimeters if your Windows system-wide measurement system is set to Metric, in inches if it is set to U.S. To view or set the measurement system, from the Windows Control Panel choose Regional Settings ➤ Number tab ➤ Measurement System. Left Enter the distance from the left edge of the paper to the beginning of each line. Right Enter the distance from the right edge of the paper to the end of the printable area.
PAGE 1712

First Rows, Then Columns Print tiles from left to right by rows, top row first. First Columns, Then Rows Print tiles from top to bottom by columns, left column first. Center on Page Vertical Center the table between the specified top and bottom margins. Horizontal Center the table between the specified left and right margins. Select Database Version dialog box Use this dialog box to select the database to use with this file from the list of available databases.
PAGE 1713

Select Existing Link Template dialog box Use this dialog box to select the appropriate link template, specify the key fields in the object data to use, and then select a database validation option. To open a linked database table (page 527) At the Command prompt, enter mapviewlink. NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
PAGE 1714

Select Link Template dialog box Use this dialog box to select the appropriate data source and then select the link template. To open a linked database table (page 527) At the Command prompt, enter mapviewlink. NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
PAGE 1715

Select Query dialog box Use this dialog box to select the query whose records you want to view. To open a table using the Task Pane (page 1053) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ ➤ Execute Query. NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of Joins (page 507). Select the appropriate data source and then select the query.
PAGE 1716

NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of Joins (page 507). Select the appropriate data source and then select the table. Data Source Select from data sources currently attached and connected to the current drawing. Table Select from tables in the selected data source. Sort dialog box Use this dialog box to sort the Data View.
PAGE 1717

Sort By Click the down arrow and select the column in the table to sort by. Columns with binary or user-defined data types are not listed. Ascending Sort from the beginning of the alphabet, the lowest number, or the earliest date. Descending Sort from the end of the alphabet, the highest number, or the latest date. Table Filter dialog box Use this dialog box to select records from the database table.
PAGE 1718

Ungroup Delete the parentheses from the selected line and from the matching ending or beginning line of the group. Delete Delete the selected condition. Clear All Delete all conditions. Where Condition area Use the Where Condition area to edit an existing condition in the filter or to add a new condition. And Specify that both conditions must be met for the object to be included in the query. Or Specify that either condition can be met for the object to be included in the query.
PAGE 1719

Operator Description < The value of the selected column is less than the value you enter in the Value box. <= The value of the selected column is less than or equal to the value you enter in the Value box. <> The value of the selected column is not equal to the value you enter in the Value box. IN The selected column is linked to the object and contains the specified value. If you specify multiple values, separate each value with a comma. Enclose values in single quotes, for example, '1','2','3'.
PAGE 1720

Table Filter History dialog box Use this dialog box to manage the filters you previously defined for this table. To use a SQL filter in the Data View (page 1231) In the Data View: Records ➤ SQL Filter NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To use a filter, select it in the list and click OK, or double-click the filter.
PAGE 1721

Name View the name of the selected table or query. Structure View the column name and column type for each column. Zoom Scale dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the percentage of the display area that highlighted objects will fill. To set other Data View highlighting options (page 1227) In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Zoom Scale NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects.
PAGE 1722

1698
PAGE 1723

Import Export Dialog Boxes 25 Attribute Data dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the attribute data to import for the selected input layer. This is sometimes called a theme, level, or file. To specify the data to import (page 426) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Import From Files. NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
PAGE 1724

For a new object data table name, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a new object data table with fields that match the fields you're importing. To change these defaults, click Select Fields. For an existing object data table, incoming fields are imported into object data fields with the same name by default. If no object data field exists with the same name, the incoming field is not imported. To change these defaults, click Select Fields.
PAGE 1725

Select Fields Select fields to import from the source drawing. If you select only key fields, they are imported as link data, and the database table is not updated. Create Link Only Import link data only. Links are maintained from the imported objects to their appropriate row in the table, but no changes are made to the database table. If you import only the key field, this option is automatically selected.
PAGE 1726

You can map incoming attribute data to target data fields in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing using both the Data and Object Class columns. This may result in mapping two different incoming data fields to the same target data field. Before proceeding with the import, you must resolve such conflicts.
PAGE 1727

Use Data Resolve all conflicts using the Data Input Field definitions. OK Accept the current settings and return to the Import dialog box. Coordinate System Translation dialog box This dialog box was used to convert the file from one coordinate system to another. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
PAGE 1728

Define Link Template dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) This dialog box was used to define a new link template when importing an external map file into AutoCAD Map 3D format. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands. To import data from other formats (page 381) To import from Arc/INFO (page 396) To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401) To import SHP data (page 399) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Import From Files.
PAGE 1729

NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617). If you have previously saved your settings in this dialog box, click Load to reload those settings. To save the current settings for use later or to use in a script, click Save.
PAGE 1730

Select Polygon Topology To Export Name Select the polygon topology to convert to polygon objects and export. These objects are in addition to any objects selected above. Group Complex Polygons Group nested polygons into a single balanced polygon. Each nested polygon must have a centroid. If you do not select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D will create separate polygons, one for each centroid. Preview Filtered Selection See which objects will be exported. Objects that will be exported are highlighted.
PAGE 1731

To map drawing properties to feature class properties, click Class field. in the Feature Geometry Select the geometry data to export for each drawing property. Click in the appropriate field, then click the down arrow. For pre-existing classes, this field displays the geometry type already associated with that class. Show Schema Names Display the schemas of the feature class to which you are mapping your data. Data Tab Data To include data with the exported objects, select the data fields to export.
PAGE 1732

Output Field Enter a name for the field in the output file for the associated field. Output field names can use any alpha-numeric character and the underscore symbol ("_"). Create Unique Key Field Create a unique value for each exported object. You can specify a name for this field. The unique ID numbers increment within a single AutoCAD Map 3D session, but restart when you restart AutoCAD Map 3D.
PAGE 1733

Additional Notes ■ AutoCAD Map 3D exports original object properties regardless of any map stylizations, except for some text. Text entities created by text stylizations are exported. To avoid exporting text entities, turn off any text stylization before exporting your data. To export stylized drawing objects, first save the stylizations to a linked output drawing, and then export the linked objects. You can export stylized feature layers using Display Manager.
PAGE 1734

Units Displays information about a Project’s units of measure. Click in a field to edit the measurement unit information. Constrained fields will displayed valid options in a drop-down list. Coordinate System Assignment Enter the coordinate system code for your new Survey Data Store. Click to select the coordinate system from a list. Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box Use this dialog box to specify how to map attribute data from the incoming file to object classes in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing.
PAGE 1735

CATEGORY:TABLE.FIELD Where CATEGORY Type of data, for example "OD" for object data, or "LT" for link template (linked external database). TABLE Object data table name or database table name. FIELD Data field name. Import dialog box Use this dialog box to specify options and settings for imported files.
PAGE 1736

field to all other layers, right-click in the field. Click one of the Paste To All Layers options. When pasting into Object Class fields, the object class name and data mappings are pasted separately, and if data mapping conflicts are detected, the pasted data mappings options will not be available. Current Drawing Coordinate System Displays the global coordinate system for the current drawing. To change this coordinate system, or to assign a coordinate system, click .
PAGE 1737

■ If the coordinate system assigned to the current drawing differs from the coordinate system specified in the Input Coordinate System column, AutoCAD Map 3D will perform a reverse transformation to determine the correct coordinate space (area) for the incoming data. Import Properties Table Input Layer Select the check box for an input layer name to import objects from that layer. All layers for the selected file or folder are listed.
PAGE 1738

Data Click to specify a name for the object data table or link template to use for incoming data. Select the incoming fields to include in the object data table. Data is imported only if it is associated with an imported object. If no imported objects are associated with the incoming data, the table is not created. Points Select ACAD_POINT or a block name from the list to use for point objects. To create text or get block names from incoming data, click the data field.
PAGE 1739

Import Data Options dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) This dialog box was used to specify how objects and data in the import file are imported into AutoCAD Map 3D. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands. To import data from other formats (page 381) To import from Arc/INFO (page 396) To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401) To import SHP data (page 399) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Import From Files. Proceed Convert the selected file.
PAGE 1740

Import Data Elements Area Ignore Data Elements Ignore attribute data in the import file (other than data that is used in layer and block name mapping). Select this option if you do not want to convert the attribute data to object data or create links to SQL tables. Only the graphical objects in the file will be converted. Map Data Elements To Object Data Convert the attribute data in the import file to object data.
PAGE 1741

Select Formatting Select the format of the source data using the Format drop-down list. Formats describe the layout of the data in your source files using the following convention: ■ P is point ID ■ E is Easting, or longitudinal values ■ N is Northing or latitudinal values ■ Z is elevation values ■ D is description Make sure that you select the correct format plus delimiter type (comma or space) for your data source.
PAGE 1742

On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, click Data ➤ Import LandXML. NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405). LandXML Reports for Coordinate System Displays any coordinate system information associated with the LandXML file you are importing.
PAGE 1743

Layer Mapping dialog box (Import) Use this dialog box to specify a target layer in the current drawing for the selected layer in the incoming file. This is sometimes called a schema, level, or file. To specify an AutoCAD layer during import (page 419) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Import From Files. NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
PAGE 1744

Link Template to Export dialog box This dialog box was used to select the link template to use in the export operation. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands. To export drawing objects to MicroStation Design (DGN) (page 1438) To export to MapInfo MIF/MID (page 1432) To export drawing objects to SHP (page 1428) To export drawing objects to ESRI Arc/INFO (page 1421) In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export.
PAGE 1745

Control Data Element area Select the data element to use to determine the target block. Values Available list Displays all the values in the import file for the selected data element. Target Block Name area Select a block name. To load a block, click Load. >> Move the selected values from the Values Available list to the Values Assigned list for the selected block name. << Remove the selected values from the selected block name and return them to the Values Available list.
PAGE 1746

To map a value to a layer, select the value in the Values Available list and select a layer from the Target Layer list. Click >>. Control Data Element area Select the data element to use to determine the target layer. Values Available list Displays all the values in the import file for the selected data element. Target Layer area Select a layer. To create a new layer, click New. >> Move the selected values from the Values Available list to the Values Assigned list for the selected layer.
PAGE 1747

Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Import From Files. Database Link Method area Specify whether to link objects to an existing database table or to create a new database table and link objects to the new table. When the file is imported, each object in the import file is linked to the record in the external database table with the matching key column value. Or a new table is created using the values from the data elements, and links are created to the new table.
PAGE 1748

In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export. Proceed When you have set options, click Proceed to display the Map Export Options dialog box, where you can specify how to export graphics and data. OK Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current import options. Export File area Format Select the format to export to. Name Enter a name and location for the new file or directory.
PAGE 1749

Filter On Layers Specify the layers to search. The default is all layers. To select from a list of layers in the current drawing, click Layers. Map Export Options dialog box This dialog box was used to specify how objects and data in the current drawing are exported. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
PAGE 1750

Export Data Elements area No Data Mapping Export only graphical objects. No data is exported. Map Object Data To Data Element Export object data for each object. Click Data to display the Object Data Table dialog box where you can select the object data table to export. Map SQL Data To Data Element Export data from an external database that is linked to the objects. Click SQL to display the Link Template To Export dialog box, where you can select the link template that defines the external table.
PAGE 1751

In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export. NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617). New Property Data Type is available for only three AutoCAD properties: .COLOR, LINETYPE, and LINEWEIGHT. Data Type Select the data type for the new class property from the drop-down list.
PAGE 1752

Select Attributes Select attributes to map to this feature class only. Entries in this dialog box include both the global attributes selected from the Export dialog box and the attributes that apply to this feature class only. Property Value Mapping Use this dialog box to map specific drawing attribute properties to specific feature class properties when you export to a geospatial format. for example, you could map the color RED to the string CLAY.
PAGE 1753

Select Attributes dialog box Use this dialog box to select attributes for Map Export. To export drawing objects to other file formats (page 1408) In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export. NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617). Expression Check the attributes you wish to export in the tree view.
PAGE 1754

NOTE If a SHP file is located on a read-only drive or directory, you cannot import the file if the name contains any of the following characters: pound sign (#), exclamation point (!), comma (,), or accent grave (`). To import the file, either rename the file or move it to a directory to which you have write access. When you have set options, click Proceed to display the Import Data Options dialog box, where you can specify how to import graphics and data.
PAGE 1755

In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Map Data Transfer panel ➤ Map 3D Export. Click the down arrow to select from a list of object data tables in the current drawing. You can select only one object data table. To export data from multiple tables, repeat the export command for each table. Object Data Table dialog box (Import) This dialog box was used to select the object data table to import data into. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
PAGE 1756

Object Data/External Database Mapping dialog box Use these dialog boxes to specify which fields from the incoming file should be mapped to fields in an object data table or external database when you import. To specify the data to import (page 426) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Import From Files. NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
PAGE 1757

Point Mapping dialog box Use this dialog box to specify how to import points for the selected layer. This is sometimes called a schema, level, or file. To specify how to import points (page 428) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Import From Files. NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
PAGE 1758

Design File Input Settings Use this dialog box to set options when you import data from Microstation Design. Options differ for importing DGN7 or DGN 8, and the order of the items in the dialog may also change by version. To import DGN files (page 409) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Import From Files. NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
PAGE 1759

Coordinate Units Master/Sub Select Master or Sub to specify which of these units in the DGN 7 file matches the default unit in the AutoCAD Map 3D map. Each DGN 7 file defines a UOR (unit of resolution); in addition, it can define Sub units and Master units. For example, if the default unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D map is meters, and meters are the Sub unit in the imported file, select Sub.
PAGE 1760

Create As Points Expand the contents of the DGN cells into points instead of blocks, maintaining the cell grouping structure. Reference Files Ignore Ignore all external reference files (xrefs) attached to the source data set. Create DWG Read all external reference files (xrefs) attached to the source data set. If the reference file has nested references, they are also imported, but circular references are not. If you select this option, specify a location for the folder for these files.
PAGE 1761

Seed File Select the seed file, which controls whether or not the output DGN file is two-dimensional or three-dimensional, sets the coordinate units, sets global origin, and more. For DGN version 7, you must use a version 7 DGN seed file. Override Global Origin (DGN 7 only) Override the global origin setting in the seed file. Specify the global origin to use. Compute Parameters (DGN 7 only) Override all seed file settings and have AutoCAD Map 3D calculate the settings for you.
PAGE 1762

1738
PAGE 1763

Managing Data Dialog Boxes 26 Schema Editor Use the Schema Editor to view or change settings for an entire schema hierarchy: schemas, feature classes, and properties. To create a schema (page 598) To edit a schema (page 612) In Map Explorer, select the feature source (page 2063) in the connection tree (at the top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 1764

Import Schema Import an XML schema that you exported, and use it to define a new schema for another data store. This is useful for creating multiple data stores based on the same schema Export Schema Export the selected schema as an XML file to share a schema you created in the Schema Editor with other AutoCAD Map 3D or GIS-software users; to back up a schema you created in the Schema Editor as an XML file; or to save your work in progress if the original data source or directory becomes unavailable.
PAGE 1765

Feature Class Settings Name Enter the feature class name that will appear in the Schema tree. It must follow the naming rules of the provider. Description Enter an optional description of the feature class. Type Select Feature Class for a class with associated geometry. Select Non-feature Class for non-spatial data that can be used as a standalone or contained class.
PAGE 1766

receive an auto-generated, unique identifier. If you do not specify an auto-generated integer for this property, you must manually enter a unique identifier for each new feature that uses it. Specify Unique Constraint(s) And The Order Specify the criteria features must meet in order to be added to this feature class. Enter a constraint for this feature class in the Constraints box and click New to apply it. Create additional constraints if necessary. Use the arrow buttons to reorder the constraints.
PAGE 1767

whereas Oracle supports XY, XYZ, XYZM, and XYM points. The default is XY. Additionally, it can have attributes that describe elevation and measure: HasElevation for Z and HasMeasure for M. A feature class has one main geometry property, but can have additional geometry properties. A geometry property is associated with a spatial context. All instances of a geometric property must have the same ordinate dimension.
PAGE 1768

■ The Decimal data type actually uses a Double data type. For this reason, many providers will not check the number of decimal places when the data is checked in. Bulk Copy Use Bulk Copy to copy a Display Manager layer or a feature source. Bulk Copy uses the current definition of the layer (including any filters you applied, any joins you created, and any calculated properties). For feature sources, you can specify a subset based on specified schemas, feature classes, or properties.
PAGE 1769

(instead of a check) in a check box means that only some of that element’s children are selected. Calculated fields are appended after the native properties. If there are joined fields, they are grouped under a node representing the join. If there are multiple joins, they appear as they do in the Manage Layer Data dialog box (page 1607). To Connection Name Select a feature source in the top list as the destination feature source.
PAGE 1770

Insert Errors Select this option to continue Bulk Copy if there is an error inserting an object. Objects that fail are skipped. Errors can occur if there are any anomalies in the object data being copied.
PAGE 1771

Schema Mapping Load/Save To save the current settings in an XML mapping file, click Save. Click Load to open a saved mapping file. NOTE Before loading a mapping file, connect to the source and destination feature sources. Copy Now Copy the data for the specified schema elements. Bulk Copy reports warnings and errors depending on the data formats of the two feature sources, and the copying options you selected. Click View Log to see details (page 626).
PAGE 1772

Data store coordinate system Enter the coordinate system code for the new data store. If you don’t know the code, click to select a coordinate system. In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category. Select from a list of available coordinate systems. Click Properties to view the properties of the selected coordinate system. Click OK. Choose a coordinate system that both the provider and AutoCAD Map 3D support.
PAGE 1773

For more information about versions, see Managing Versions (page 723). To create a new version (page 725) To activate a version (page 725) To commit changes back to the data store (page 726) To discard a version (page 726) In Map Explorer, right-click a connection that supports versioning and click Manage Versions. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. To link external attribute data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
PAGE 1774

creation time. Right-click any version entry to add, activate, merge, or drop it. Resolve Feature Conflicts dialog box Use this dialog box to specify how to handle changed objects when the object has been changed in both the parent and the child version. To commit changes back to the data store (page 726) In Map Explorer, right-click the feature source and click Manage Versions. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 1775

Metadata Dialog Boxes 27 Metadata Viewer Use the Metadata Viewer to view metadata for the current drawing or for other resources. To view metadata (page 1487) In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
PAGE 1776

■ Specify the metadata stylesheet ■ Display additional metadata that is not part of the standard (FGDC or ISO) specified in the Metadata Options dialog box Metadata Viewer Toolbar Use the Metadata Viewer toolbar to perform the following actions.
PAGE 1777

Folder Shortcut Use the Folder Shortcut tree view to display metadata for other files on your local machine or on a server. If you add or remove files from a folder that you uploaded to the Folder Shortcut tree view, right-click in the tree view, and click Refresh. Add Create and view metadata for additional files. Remove Remove files you added to the Folder Shortcut tree view. Metadata Tab Display all the metadata related to the selected data source.
PAGE 1778

Metadata Editor Edit and update metadata. To edit metadata (page 1499) In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata. Metadata Editor Toolbar Use the Metadata Editor toolbar to perform the following actions: Toolbar Button Action Apply a template (page 1492) to your metadata. Update (page ?) fields with values from the current data source. Audit (page ?) metadata for compliance with the selected metadata standard.
PAGE 1779

Expand fields and field groups. Collapse fields and field groups. Metadata Fields Enter metadata in the fields. A description and additional information are displayed in the bottom area of the Metadata Editor when a field name or field is selected. Required fields are marked with a placeholder. Some fields accept only certain types of data.
PAGE 1780

Attribute Editor Edit ISO element attributes. The title and fields of the Attribute Editor change, depending on the attribute. To enter or edit metadata manually (page 1499) In the Metadata Editor, right-click an element field name and select Edit Attribute. Metadata Options dialog box To set metadata options (page 241) To import a template (page 1492) To export a template (page 1496) To remove a template (page 1497) (page 1503) Using Metadata Templates (page 1491) In the Display Manager, select a layer.
PAGE 1781

Rename Rename the selected metadata template. Remove Remove the selected metadata template. Preference Tab Latitude/Longitude Precision For latitude and longitude, set the number of digits to display after the decimal point. The default is 6. Auto Update Update metadata as soon as the data source is updated (or as soon as the metadata is reconnected to its updated data source).
PAGE 1782

In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata. Select The Source Data Type For The Exported Metadata Selected items Export metadata only for the items selected in the Metadata Viewer (page 1751) . All items in Select Feature Source to export metadata for all features in the selected source. Select Object Class to export metadata for all objects in the selected class. Select both to include all features and objects.
PAGE 1783

Use the Citation Information Editor to enter information about published geospatial data using the United States FGDC CSDGM Standard (page 2063) field definitions. To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506) In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata. The Citation Information Editor has the following sections: General Information Title Enter a title. The NOAA Coastal Services Center suggests including a topic, time period, and place.
PAGE 1784

■ HHMMSSSSZ Edition Enter the version of the publication. Geospatial data presentation form Specify the format or media used to present the data. Select an option from the drop-down list or enter an FGDC-approved alternative. If you enter an alternative, it is saved in the current field but is not added to the list. Other citation details Enter additional information to help users access and use your data. Online linkage Specify the URL of the online resource where the data is published.
PAGE 1785

FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 8.2 Publication date pubdate Date/time 8.3 Publication time pubtime Date/time 8.5 Edition edition String 8.6 Geospatial data presentation form geoform String 8.9 Other citation details othercit String 8.10 Online linkage onlink URL 8.71 Series name sername String 8.72 Issue ID issue String 8.81 Publication place pubplace String 8.82 Publisher publish String 8.
PAGE 1786

In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata. FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 9.1 Single date/time sngdate Compound 9.1.1 Calendar date caldate Date 9.1.2 Time of day time Time 9.2 Multiple dates/times mdattim Compound 9.3 Range of dates/times rngdates Compound 9.3.1 Beginning date begdate Date 9.3.2 Beginning time begtime Time 9.3.3 Ending date enddate Date 9.3.
PAGE 1787

The requirements for individual elements and compound elements (page 2057) assume you will include contact information in your metadata. It is mandatory if you include contact information. FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 10.1 Primary contact cntperp Select one of two choices 10.1.1 Person name cntper String 10.1.2 Organization cntorg String 10.3 Contact position cntpos String 10.4.1 Address type addrtype Menu choice 10.4.2 Address address String 10.4.
PAGE 1788

Spatial Data Organization Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box when you click in the field. Access the Spatial Data Organization Information Editor from the Metadata Editor (page 1754). Describe the methods you used to represent spatial information in the data set, and how the data is organized, including direct and indirect spatial references.
PAGE 1789

Point and vector object information Specify the type of vector or non-gridded point objects used in the data set, and how many there are. If the direct spatial reference method is either Point or Vector, select whether you use SDTS terms or VPF terms.
PAGE 1790

VPF topology level Indicate how completely the topology is represented in the data set. This field becomes available if you select VPF terms. These levels are defined in the following publication: Department of Defense, 1992, Vector Product Format (MIL-STD-600006): Philadelphia, Department of Defense, Defense Printing Service Detachment Office. The reference to the VPF is used only as a name for the method used to describe the point and vector objects.
PAGE 1791

Row count Enter the number of object rows along the Y-axis of the raster. Column count Enter the number of object rows along the X-axis of the raster. If you selected Point, Pixel, or Grid Cell and the data is three-dimensional, complete the Vertical Count field. Vertical count Enter the number of objects along the vertical Z-axis. FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 3.1 Indirect spatial reference indspref String 3.2 Direct spatial reference method direct Menu choice 3.
PAGE 1792

FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 3.4 Raster object information rastinfo Compound 3.4.1 Raster object type rasttype String 3.4.2 Row count rowcount Integer 3.4.3 Column count colcount Integer 3.4.4 Vertical count vrtcount Integer Horizontal Coordinate System Definition Editor (FGDC Metadata) NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box when you click in the field.
PAGE 1793

FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 4.1.1.2 Longitude resolution longres Real number 4.1.1.3 Geographic coordinate units geogunit Menu choice 4.1.2 Planar planar Compound 4.1.2.1.1 Map projection name mapprojn Menu choice 4.1.2.1.23.1 Standard parallel stdparll Real number 4.1.2.1.23.2 Longitude of central meridian longcm Real number 4.1.2.1.23.3 Latitude of projection origin latprjo Real number 4.1.2.1.23.4 False easting feast Real number 4.1.2.1.23.
PAGE 1794

FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 4.1.2.1.23.11.1 Azimuthal angle azimangl Real number 4.1.2.1.23.11.2 Azimuth measure point longitude azimptl Real number 4.1.2.1.23.12 Oblique line point obqlpt Compound 4.1.2.1.23.12.1 Oblique line latitude obqllat Real number 4.1.2.1.23.12.2 Oblique line longitude obqllong Real number 4.1.2.1.23.13 Straight vertical longitude from pole svlong Real number 4.1.2.1.23.14 Scale factor at projection origin sfprjorg Real number 4.1.
PAGE 1795

FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 4.1.2.2.2.3 Universal polar stereographic (UPS) ups Compound 4.1.2.2.2.3.1 UPS zone identifier upszone Menu choice 4.1.2.2.4 State plane coordinate system (SPCS) spcs Compound 4.1.2.2.4.1 SPCS zone identifier spcszone String 4.1.2.2.5 ARC coordinate system arcsys Compound 4.1.2.2.5.1 ARC system zone identifier arczone Integer 4.1.2.2.6 Other grid system’s definition othergrd String 4.1.2.3 Local planar localp Compound 4.1.2.
PAGE 1796

FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 4.1.2.4.2.1 Abscissa resolution absres Real number 4.1.2.4.2.2 Ordinate resolution ordres Real number 4.1.2.4.3 Distance and bearing distbrep Real number 4.1.2.4.3.1 Distance resolution distres Real number 4.1.2.4.3.2 Bearing resolution bearres Real number 4.1.2.4.3.3 Bearing units bearunit Menu choice 4.1.2.4.3.4 Bearing reference direction bearrefd Menu choice 4.1.2.4.3.5 Bearing reference meridian bearrefm Menu choice 4.1.
PAGE 1797

FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 4.1.4.4 Denominator of flattening ratio denflat Real number Attribute Domain Values Editor (FGDC Metadata) NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box when you click in the field. To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506) In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata. FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 5.1.2.4 Attribute domain values attrdomv Choose one of four 5.1.2.4.
PAGE 1798

FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 5.1.2.4.2.2 Range domain maximum rdommax String 5.1.2.4.2.3 Attribute units of measure attrunit String 5.1.2.4.2.4 Attribute measurement resolution attrmres Real 5.1.2.4.3 Codeset domain codesetd Compound 5.1.2.4.3.1 Codeset name codestn String 5.1.2.4.3.2 Codeset resource codesets String 5.1.2.4.
PAGE 1799

FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 6.4.5 Turnaround turnaround String 6.4 Standard order process stdorder Choose one of two 6.4.1 Non-digital form option nondig String 6.4.2.1.1 Format name formname Menu choice 6.4.2.1.4 Specification formspec String 6.4.2.1.2 Format version number formvern String 6.4.2.1.3 Format version date formverd Date 6.4.2.1.7 Transfer size transize Real number 6.4.2.2.1 Online option collection onlinopt Compound 6.4.2.2.1.
PAGE 1800

FGDC Field ID Field Title Short Name Data Type 6.4.2.2.1.1.2.5 Parity parity Menu choice 6.4.2.2.1.1.2.6 Compression support compress Menu choice 6.4.2.2.1.1.2.7 Dialup telephone dialtel String 6.4.2.2.1.1.2.8 Dialup file name dialfile String 6.4.2.2.1.2 Access instructions accinstr String 6.4.2.2.1.3 Online computer and operating system oncomp String 6.4.2.2.2 Offline option collection offoptn Compound 6.4.2.2.2.1 Offline media offmedia Menu choice 6.4.2.2.2.2.
PAGE 1801

The Citation Editor (ISO Metadata) Enter metadata for the Citation compound element To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506) In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
PAGE 1802

1778
PAGE 1803

Object Classification Dialog Boxes 28 MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects command) Use this command to select all drawing objects that were classified with specific object classes. To select objects in your current map, based on their object class (page 993) Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Select Classified. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1804

Objects classified with the specified object classes are selected. MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified Objects command) Use this command to select all drawing objects that have not been classified. To select objects in your current map, based on their object class (page 993) Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Select Unclassified. Unclassified objects are selected. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1805

definition file, and then attach a different object class definition file that does not include a definition for this object class. Undefined objects are selected. Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box The object class definition file includes the set of object classes you will use with this drawing. NOTE If the FILEDIA variable is set to 0, then this dialog box is not displayed and you can type the name of the file that you want to insert on the command line.
PAGE 1806

Classified Property List dialog box Use this dialog box to review the properties included in this object class definition and the settings for those properties. To define an object class (page 120) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Object Class panel ➤ Define. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551).
PAGE 1807

the default value for the property. If you clear this option, objects with out-of-range values are not classified. Exclude Objects... Does not classify objects that have another object class already assigned. If you clear this option, the existing object class is removed and the new one is assigned. Classify Objects dialog box Apply the specified object class to the selected drawing objects.
PAGE 1808

Click Map Setup tab ➤ Object Class panel ➤ Define. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551). Click Add below the List Of Colors following your selection. All colors listed in the List Of Colors are valid colors for this object class. Color Range Allow Any Color Accepts any color as valid for this object class.
PAGE 1809

Define Object Classification dialog box Use this dialog box to create a new object class definition or edit an existing definition. To define an object class (page 120) To set up object classification (page ?) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Object Class panel ➤ Define. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551).
PAGE 1810

Class Settings (page 1788) Feature Source Settings (page 1788) Applies To Object Types Specifies the object types that may be tagged with this definition. Available object types are determined by the base class, if there is one, and the selected example objects. TIP Select the most specific object type that applies to all objects in this object class. For example, if all the objects will be circles, select AcDbCircle.
PAGE 1811

In each case, the value for the property must fall within this range. For many properties, such as color, lineweight, line type, plot style, and layer, you can select from a list of available values. To display the list, click on the value you want to change. Click [...] to display a dialog where you can specify the range. When specifying the range values, keep these points in mind: ■ To enter a list of values for the range, separate each value with a comma, for example, 15,25,35, or Paved,Gravel,Dirt.
PAGE 1812

The new property appears in the Properties palette and can be edited in the same way as other properties. Show List Displays the Classified Property List dialog box (page 1782), which lists all the selected properties and their attribute settings. This is a convenient way to check your properties before you save the definition. Class Settings Show Object Class In Map Explorer Displays the object class name in Map Explorer. When this option is cleared, this object class name is hidden in Map Explorer.
PAGE 1813

Layer Range Editor dialog box Use this dialog box to specify which AutoCAD layers to allow for this object class. To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 125) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Object Class panel ➤ Define. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551). You can choose from a list of all AutoCAD layers in the current drawing.
PAGE 1814

You can choose from a list of all linetypes in the current drawing. Linetype Range Allow Any Linetype Accepts any linetype as valid for this object class. Choose Specific Linetypes Accepts only specific linetypes for this object class. In the Linetype list, select the linetypes to include. Lineweight Range Editor dialog box Use this dialog box to specify which lineweights to allow for this object class.
PAGE 1815

Click Map Setup tab ➤ Object Class panel ➤ New Definition. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551). The object class definition file includes information on how to create each of the object classes you defined. Only definitions in the object class definition file attached to a drawing can be assigned to objects in the drawing or used to create new objects.
PAGE 1816

NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551). Property Heading Category Specify a category for the new property. Property Name Specify a name for the new property. When you close this dialog box, the new property will appear in the Properties List of the Define Object Classification dialog box.
PAGE 1817

Object Data Dialog Boxes 29 Attach Object Data dialog box Use this dialog box to view the fields in the table and to view or edit the values for those fields. To attach data to an object (page 1064) Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data. NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing objects.
PAGE 1818

Attach/Detach Object Data dialog box Use this dialog box to add data to an object data table and attach that data to an object, or to detach existing data from an object. To attach data to an object (page 1064) Click Create tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data. NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing objects.
PAGE 1819

If the box is not selected, the object will have two values assigned for the data fields in the table. Select the box when you want only one set of values attached to the object, as when specifying a pipe diameter or a desk height. Clear the box when the object can have multiple sets of values assigned to it, as when specifying software installed on a computer or types of plants in a landscape section.
PAGE 1820

■ To change a value, enter a new value in the box and press Enter. You must have Edit Drawing privileges to edit object data. See User Administration dialog box (page 1934) Table View all tables with data attached to the selected object. Select a table to view or edit. Object Data Field/Value View the field values for the selected object. If the object has more than one record from the selected table, use Next, Prior, First, and Last to view the other records.
PAGE 1821

Rename Table dialog box Use this dialog box to rename the selected table. To modify an object data table (page 203) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Attribute Data panel ➤ Define Object Data. NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing objects. To see information about a feature source or attribute data you use with a feature source, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125) and Overview of Joins (page 507). The table name cannot include spaces.
PAGE 1822

At the Command prompt, enter mapviewlink. NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing objects. To see information about a feature source or attribute data you use with a feature source, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125) and Overview of Joins (page 507). Method area Select the method for setting key fields. Reference Existing Fields Use existing fields as key fields. If you select this option, select the fields to use in the Existing Fields area.
PAGE 1823

Other Dialog Boxes 30 ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command) Use this command to specify a new label point for an object. An object's label point is used as the reference point when you add text to an object during property alteration. By default, the label point is the centroid of the object. Use this command to specify a different label point. Respond to the prompts: Select object: Use any object selection method. Pick new text location : Enter new X and Y coordinates, separated by a comma.
PAGE 1824

Browse/Search dialog box Use this dialog box to display preview images of drawings, open drawings, and search for files. Use the browser to search for files across multiple directories on a single drive or on multiple drives. The Browse tab displays small bitmap images of drawings in the specified directory. You can sort the preview images by file type. Browse tab File Name The name of the currently selected drawing. Directories The names of the directories on the current drive.
PAGE 1825

File Types Select the types of files to search for. Date Filter Search forward or backward from the specified time or date. Time Enter the time from which the system searches forward or backward. Date Enter the date from which the system searches. The specified date must be 1/1/80 or later. Search Location Specify which drives and paths the system searches. Drive View all currently attached drives. All Drives View all local hard drives, including removable and network drives. Path View directories.
PAGE 1826

If the closed object has holes, the centroid will be placed in the center of the enclosed area, regardless of whether it falls within a hole or not. For a 'figure eight' polygon, AutoCAD Map 3D will create one centroid. Create Centroids In Select the polylines or polygons for which you want to create centroids. All Closed Objects Create centroids for all polygons and closed polylines. Selected Only Create centroids only for selected polygons and polylines.
PAGE 1827

Object Data To use data in an object data table, select Object Data. Select the field from the Object Data Fields list. To view fields in a different table, select the table from the Tables list. Database Link To use data in link data stored on an object, select Database Link. Select the column from the Key Columns list. To view columns in a different link template, select the link template from the list.
PAGE 1828

■ To delete all the fields in the list, click Delete All. Field Definition Change information about an existing field or specify information for a new field. To change information about an existing field, select its name in the Object Data Fields list. Information about the field appears in the Field Definition area. Change any information. Click Update. To add a new field, enter a new name in the Field Name box. Enter information about the field. Click Add.
PAGE 1829

Default Specify a default value for the data field. The value must match the data type you selected above. Enter the value you will use most often when you assign this data field to an object. Before you modify a table ■ All source drawings that use the table should be attached and active. If a drawing is not attached and active, the table definition will not be updated for that drawing.
PAGE 1830

If two source drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate. To view Field Definition information for a field, select the field. Field Definition Displays the values for the selected field. Field Name The name of the field. Data Type The type of information that can be entered in the field. Description The description assigned to the field. Default The default value assigned to the field. To change any values, click Modify.
PAGE 1831

Before you delete a table ■ All source drawings that use the table should be attached and active. If a drawing is not attached and active, the object data from the table is not removed from that drawing. ■ Do not perform a Draw mode query. If you have already performed a Draw mode query since you opened the current drawing, you must save the objects back to their source drawings or close the current drawing and reopen it. This dialog box displays information about the tables in your drawing.
PAGE 1832

Select a linkage type. Set options for that type. After you click OK, you are prompted to select the blocks, text, enclosed blocks, or enclosed text. NOTE You cannot create links to objects on layers that are locked, frozen, or turned off. Block If you are creating links to blocks or enclosed blocks, select the name of the block. Keys and Tags For each key field in the link template, select a tag from the block attribute. You can assign a tag to only one key field.
PAGE 1833

Create Database Links Create links to an external database table. Select a Database Validation option to specify whether to link only to existing records or to create new records. Linkage Type Select a linkage type. After you click OK, you are prompted to select the blocks, text, enclosed blocks, or enclosed text. Blocks Create links from block attribute data. The links are created on the blocks themselves. Text Create links from text. The link data is stored on the text object.
PAGE 1834

Related procedures: ■ To attach data to objects automatically (page 1067) ■ To link records to objects using text or block attribute data automatically (page 532) New Layer dialog box The new layer name may not contain any of the following characters. <>/\:?*|,="`" Related procedures: ■ To import SDF 2 files (page 389) ■ To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 887) Select dialog box ■ To select an item, click the item. ■ To select a group of items, click the first one.
PAGE 1835

Select Data dialog box - Query This dialog box lists data in the current drawing. Select the type of data to include: Attribute The Attribute Tags list displays the attributes for the current block. To see the attribute tags for a different block, select the block from the Block list. Object Data The Object Data Fields list displays the data fields for the current table. To see the fields for a different table, select the table from the Table list.
PAGE 1836

Select the file names of drawings to attach. Click Add. You can change the drive or folder and continue to add files to the Selected Drawings list. When you finish, click OK. Look In Select a drive alias from the list. AutoCAD Map 3D creates a drive alias for drive C. You must create drive aliases for all other drives that you use. If the drive or folder you want is not listed, click Create/Edit Aliases to display the Drive Alias Administration dialog box where you define a new drive alias.
PAGE 1837

When you finish selecting classes, click OK. Select Classified Objects dialog box Select the objects you want by clicking them. When you finish selecting, click OK. Select Layer dialog box Select the layer you want by clicking it Click OK. Select Layers dialog box Select the layers you want by clicking them. Select Property dialog box Select the property and click OK.
PAGE 1838

Select Table Dialog Box (MAPIMPORT: Object Data) This dialog box was used to select an object data table from the list of all object data tables in the current drawing during an import procedure. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
PAGE 1839

In most cases, the Link Templates list includes only link templates for active source drawings. If the link template you want is not listed, be sure it is defined in the source drawing, and the appropriate data source is attached and connected. If you are using a command that involves topology, the Link Templates list includes only link templates for the drawing where the topology is loaded.
PAGE 1840

1816
PAGE 1841

Polygon Object Dialog Boxes 31 MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON (Convert Polylines to Polygons command) Use this command to convert an existing closed polyline to a polygon. To convert polylines to polygons (page 971) Respond to the prompts: Select objects: Select the polylines to convert. Press Enter. NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to features from a feature source. Each closed polyline in the selection set is converted into a polygon.
PAGE 1842

MAPUSEMPOLYGON Use this command to change the default setting for how polygon are imported. To change the default setting for importing polygons (page 978) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to features from a feature source. Respond to the prompts: Enter new value for MAPUSEMPOLYGON: Do one of the following: ■ Enter ON to turn on the use of mpolygons. Polygons imported into AutoCAD Map 3D are created using the polygon object.
PAGE 1843

Select polygon: Use any object selection method. Enter an option [Add/Delete/Move/Edit/disConnect/Boundary type/Fill/Rebalance/eXit]: Enter the letter of the option you want. Add Enter a to add a boundary to the polygon. Respond to the prompt: Select new boundary: Select the object to use as the new boundary. The object can be a polygon, rectangle, circle, or another mpolygon. The new boundary is added to the polygon. Delete Enter d to delete a boundary from the polygon.
PAGE 1844

Enter a node editing option [Next/Previous/Remove/Insert/Move/eXit]: Enter the letter of the option you want. ■ Enter n to move to the next node. ■ Enter p to move to the previous node. ■ Enter r to remove the current node. You cannot remove a node if the resulting new line would cross another boundary in the current polygon. ■ Enter i to insert a node before the current node. Note that you cannot insert a node if the resulting new line would cross another boundary in the current polygon.
PAGE 1845

Rebalance Enter r to rebalance the polygon. The polygon is rebalanced so the nesting order follows an alternating outer/inner/outer order. Undo Enter u to undo the last action. eXit Enter x to exit the mapmpedit command. MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command) Use this command to split an existing polygon object into two new polygon objects. The original polygon object is deleted. To split a polygon object (page 969) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1846

If the polygon has internal boundaries, your split line must not cross one of the internal boundaries, nor can it touch one of the vertices of an internal boundary. This split is allowed. This split is not allowed because it crosses an internal boundary. This split is not allowed because it touches one of the vertices of the internal boundary. You can choose to copy data from the original mpolygon to the two new mpolygons, or you can delete the data.
PAGE 1847

Select Enter s to select an existing polyline to use as the dividing line. Respond to the prompts: Select objects: Select the polyline you want. When you finish selecting polylines, press Enter. Would you like to copy data from the original mpolygon to the split mpolygons? [Yes/No]: Do one of the following: ■ Enter y to copy object data or external database links from the original mpolygon to both of the new mpolygons. ■ Enter n to delete the data.
PAGE 1848

Copy Object Data From Centroid Copy object data from the topology polygons to the new polygon objects. Copy Database Links From Centroid Copy database links from the polygons to the new mpolygon objects. Polygon Fill Properties dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the fill color and pattern to use for polygon objects. You can choose from a variety of colors including true colors and colors from imported color books.
PAGE 1849

Pattern Name Select from the available predefined patterns. AutoCAD Map 3D stores the selected pattern in the HPNAME system variable. The Pattern Name option is available only if you set Pattern Type to Predefined. Click preview images for all predefined patterns at once. to display Angle Specify an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current UCS. Scale Expand or contract a predefined or custom pattern.
PAGE 1850

Centered Specify a gradient configuration that is symmetrical. If this option is not selected, the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left, creating the illusion of a light source to the left of the object. Angle Specify the angle of the gradient fill. The specified angle is relative to the current UCS. Gradient Patterns Select one of the nine fixed patterns for gradient fills. For more information on setting hatch options, see the AutoCAD help.
PAGE 1851

Printing and Publishing Dialog Boxes 32 Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the data to use to create or edit a map book (page 2067). To create a map book (page 1390) To edit map book settings (page 1396) On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New ➤ Map Book. Expand a node in the left pane of the dialog box to specify the necessary information on the right Source node Create a map book from a display or model space.
PAGE 1852

Sheet Template node Click Settings to select a template file and layout to use. Indicate whether to include a title block and adjacent sheet links. (You can include these only if you defined placeholders for them.) By default, the scale factor is 1, meaning a scale ratio of 1:1. If you include a title block, specify its name. If it isn’t in the list, click to find it. If you include adjacent sheet links, specify the name of the file that represents the adjacent sheet.
PAGE 1853

■ Click Sequential for custom tiling schemes. This option numbers only the tiles you specified in your custom tiling scheme. Specify the order to go in and the increment between tile numbers. ■ Click Data Driven to choose an expression for your naming scheme based on data in the map. Key node If you defined a keyview viewport, optionally specify what to display in it. If you select Linked Drawing or External Reference, specify the drawing or file to display in this viewport.
PAGE 1854

Layout Placeholders Select the viewport or element to identify. Select Placeholders In your layout, select the viewport or element that corresponds to the item you selected in the Layout Placeholders list. Map Book Properties dialog box Use this dialog box to view basic properties of a map book (page 2067). To view map book or tile properties (page 1399) On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, right-click the map book name. Click Properties.
PAGE 1855

Tile Properties dialog box Use this dialog box to view basic properties of a map book (page 2067) tile. To view map book or tile properties (page 1399) On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, right-click a tile name. Click Properties. NOTE These properties are strings used as field values in sheets. They do not change the actual properties of the tile. For example, if you change a property in this dialog box, the corresponding tile property does not change.
PAGE 1856

Map Information dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the types of information to include when publishing to DWF (page 2061)™. To publish attribute data to DWF (page 1367) In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab ➤ Export To DWF/PDF panel ➤ DWF/PDF Options (MAPDWFOPTIONS). Publish Map Information Select this option to include checked items in the list in the publish operation.
PAGE 1857

Plot Map Set dialog boxes The Plot Map Set functionality has been replaced with the Map Books feature. While you can continue to use your existing map plot sets, we recommend that you import your plot sets into map books. To import a plot map set (page 1392) On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New ➤ Map Book From Plot Set.
PAGE 1858

1834
PAGE 1859

Query Dialog Boxes 33 NOTE Query functionality applies only to drawing objects. Alternate Font dialog box Use this dialog box to specify a different font for the queried drawing object. Use these procedures to bring drawing objects into your map (page 354) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query. The font specified for a queried drawing object cannot be found. Select an alternate font to use. Change Category dialog box Use this dialog box to assign queries to categories.
PAGE 1860

Current Category displays the name of the category the query is currently assigned to. (If you are changing the category for multiple queries, this area may be blank.) Select a category from the New Category list, and click OK. The query is reassigned to the new category. You can assign a query to only one category. Data Condition dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to create or modify a data condition in a query.
PAGE 1861

■ To search data in an object data table, select Object Data. Select a table from the Tables list. Select the object data field. If two source drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate. ■ To search data in a block attribute, select Attribute. Select a block from the Blocks list. Select the attribute tag.
PAGE 1862

To enter a value that includes a comma, such as an RGB color or a Colorbook color, enclose the value in double quotes, for example, "255,255,255" or "PANTONE(R) process coated,PANTONE Process Cyan C". Define New Category dialog box Use this dialog box to create a new category in the Query Library. To add a category to the query library (page 182) Click Create tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ Library. Enter a new name in the New Category Name box. Click OK. Category names cannot contain any spaces.
PAGE 1863

OK Save dialog box settings without executing. Click OK to create an element for the Display Manager. NOTE You can set several query options. See the Query tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908). Current Query This area shows the conditions in your current query. You can edit, group, or delete the conditions. Current Query List View all conditions in the current query. If conditions have been grouped, the group is indented and enclosed within parentheses.
PAGE 1864

Clear Query Delete all conditions in the list. Clearing the query does not remove settings from the Set Property Alterations dialog box or from the Output Report Options dialog box. Query type Use this area to create conditions for your query. And/Or/Not options Determine how the condition is combined with other conditions. And specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included in the query. Or specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included in the query.
PAGE 1865

For example, if you are trying to determine the best location for a new park and you have linked data from a table containing information about the households, you can search for all parcels where the household has young children. NOTE Before you execute a query with a SQL condition, be sure the appropriate data source is attached and connected. Query mode Specify the type of query to run. If you are creating an element for the Display Manager, Draw is the only available option.
PAGE 1866

If you are creating a element for a display map, not all of the options are available. Alter Properties check box Determines whether the query executes the property alteration. If this is not selected, property alterations are ignored when you execute the query. Alter Properties button Display the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1863), where you specify how to modify objects that are found by the query.
PAGE 1867

Use this dialog box to create, rename, or delete range tables. To create a range table (page 1272) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query. A range table specifies a range of actions to take depending on the actual value of object data or properties associated with drawing objects. ■ For property alteration, specify different alterations for a property depending on the value of the property.
PAGE 1868

Current Range Table Definition area Use this area to view, edit, or delete rows in the range table. Current Range Table Definition list View all rows in the current range table. To edit or delete a row, select the row and click Edit or Delete. Edit Copy the selected row to the Condition section of the dialog box, where you can modify it. When you finish modifying the condition, click Add To List to update the row in the Current Range Table Definition list. Delete Delete the selected row.
PAGE 1869

Operator list Select an operator from the list. Operator Description = The value of the selected property or data is equal to the value you enter the Value box. > The value of the selected property or data is greater than the value you enter the Value box. >= The value of the selected property or data is greater than or equal to the value you enter the Value box. < The value of the selected property or data is less than the value you enter the Value box.
PAGE 1870

Define Text dialog box Use this dialog box to specify text to add to all drawing objects found by the query. To add text to retrieved drawing objects (page 1278) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query. Text Value Specify the text to add. Enter the text, or choose a variable by clicking Expression. ■ If you enter text in the box, that text is added to each object. ■ If you choose a variable, the text for each object is based on the value of the variable.
PAGE 1871

Justification Specify the justification for the text. The list displays options for center, middle, and right, or combinations of these with top (T), middle (M), and bottom (B). Text Style Enter a text style, or click Styles to select from a list of styles in the active drawings. Layer Enter a layer for the text, or click Layers to select from a list of layers in the active drawings. If you enter a new layer name, the layer is created. To easily hide or delete text, insert it on its own layer.
PAGE 1872

specify the hatch pattern. If you leave the box empty, AutoCAD Map 3D uses a solid fill. The box displays the selected hatch option. ISO hatch patterns are not displayed. Scale Specify a scale for the pattern. A small scale creates a smaller pattern and takes longer to display and print. Rotation Enter the rotation. Enter 0 for no rotation. For example, enter 90 to rotate objects 90 degrees in the current direction. (Use the DDUNITS command to view or change the current direction.
PAGE 1873

Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query. The definition of the loaded query appears in the Define Query dialog box. Depending on the options you specified when you saved the query, it may change the active drawings or load property alteration settings. You can modify the query or click Execute Query to execute the query. Category list Select a category to save your query in. Use categories to organize queries.
PAGE 1874

you can specify if their location is determined by their area or their boundary. See the Query tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908). Location Coordinates View the coordinates for the current location condition. Define < View your current drawing, where you can specify the points to define the boundary. Show < View the boundary of the condition you are editing. To change the colors used to display the boundaries, use the Query tab on the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box.
PAGE 1875

Point Retrieve all areas that surround a selected point. Click Define to select the point. Coordinates of Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the point, or select the point. Polygon Retrieve all objects in a defined polygon. The polygon can be any shape, but cannot cross or touch itself. If you do not close the polygon, AutoCAD Map 3D connects the final point to the first point to create a closed polygon. Select a selection type. Click Define to define the polygon.
PAGE 1876

their bounding box or their insertion point. See AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908). Polyline Mode If you select a polyline boundary, select the mode to define the polyline border. Polygon Close the polyline to create a polygon. If the polyline contains arcs, AutoCAD Map 3D connects the ends of the arcs with a straight line. Fence Retrieve all objects that cross the polyline. Buffer Fence Retrieve all objects within a specified distance from the polyline.
PAGE 1877

Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query. An output report lists information about drawing objects that were found by a query of an attached drawing file. This information can include properties (such as layer, color, or object type), data attached to the object, or data linked to the object from an external database. You set up expressions to limit the objects found to those that match specific criteria.
PAGE 1878

Expression Display the Expression dialog box (page 1807), which lists all drawing object properties, object classes, object data, and external data in the drawing you are querying. Range list View the current range table. To see a list of all range tables defined in the drawing you are querying, click the down arrow. Ranges Display the Define Range Table dialog box (page 1842), where you can create a new range table. Add Add the current expression to the Report Template list.
PAGE 1879

transformation, check this option to have the report query evaluate the transformed objects. If you do not select this option, the report query evaluates only the untransformed objects in the drawing. Property Condition dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to create or modify a property condition in a query. To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties (page 1244) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query.
PAGE 1880

Object Type Retrieve objects based on their type. To select from a list of types in the active drawings, click Values. If an object type, does not appear on the list, it may be a custom object. To add a custom object to the list, run a command that will load the object's dbx. NOTE To specify a polyline object type, enter 2Dpolyline or 3Dpolyline. Group Retrieve objects based on the groups they are members of. To select from a list of groups in the active drawings, click Values.
PAGE 1881

If the option is not selected, the query returns only objects tagged with the selected object class. Lineweight Retrieve objects based on their lineweight. To select from a list of lineweights, click Values. Plotstyle Retrieve objects based on their plot style. To select from a list of plot styles, click Values. Operator list Select an operator from the list. = The value of the selected property or data is equal to the value you enter the Value box.
PAGE 1882

Values Display a list of values defined for the property in any of the active drawings attached to this drawing. Select values from the list. NOTE For topology queries, some of the options are different. For more information on querying a topology, see To query a topology (page 1353). Query Library Administration dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1883

You can remove a category only if it has no queries assigned to it. To delete a category that still has queries in it, you must first delete the queries or assign them to new categories (by clicking Category). Available Queries Delete queries or assign them to new categories. Available Queries list View all queries in the current category. To view additional queries, select a different category from the Category list. Delete Delete the selected queries. Select All Highlight all queries in the list.
PAGE 1884

Description box Specify a query description. File Name box If the query is external, specify the path and file name for the file where the query is stored. Query Type list Specify internal (the query is stored with the current drawing) or external (the query is saved in a separate file). Add Add the query to the Available Queries list for the current category. Update Update the existing query in the Available Queries list.
PAGE 1885

Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query. The Current Range Table Name area shows the current name for the range table. Enter a new name in the New Range Table Name box. NOTE If you have any queries that use the current table name, edit those queries to use the new table name. Run Library Query dialog box Use this dialog box to run a query you saved to the Query Library. To run a query from the Query Library (page 178) Click Create tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ Run. Select a query from the query library.
PAGE 1886

Save Current Query dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to save your current query. Once a query is saved, you can run it again later. To save a query (page 177) Click Create tab ➤ Object Query panel ➤ Library. Category List Select a category to save your query in. Use categories to organize queries. (When you run a query, you first select a category, and then see all the queries in that category.
PAGE 1887

Keep Reference In Library If you save the query to an external file, select this check box to list the query description along with other queries in this drawing's query library. Save List of Active Drawings If this box is selected, the saved query specifies which drawings in the drawing set will be active when the query is executed. If the box is not selected, the query searches whatever drawings are active when you execute the query.
PAGE 1888

Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query. You can alter object properties such as color, layer, block name, or thickness, or you can add text to objects. In addition, you can create a range table that modifies objects in different ways based on where they fall in a range of values. Property alteration is a fast way to modify a group of objects. For example, make objects stand out in their source drawings by adding color or hatch, move a group of objects to a new layer, or add informational text.
PAGE 1889

Text Display the Define Text dialog box, where you specify text to add, and its height, insertion point, justification, text style, layer, color, and rotation. Hatch Display the Hatch Options dialog box, where you specify the hatch to add. Expression area Use this area to create or modify an expression that defines how you want to alter a property on objects that are found by the query. To modify an existing expression, select it in the Current Property Alterations list. Click Edit.
PAGE 1890

SQL Condition History dialog box Use this dialog box to copy a condition to your current SQL query. To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data (page 1253) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Define Query. This dialog box lists the SQL conditions specified in this drawing. Each line includes the link template and the condition. To copy a condition from this list to your current SQL query, select the condition. Click OK. Clear History Remove all SQL conditions from the list.
PAGE 1891

To create a SQL condition, specify the link template. Specify the column to check and the value for the column. Build a SQL condition using this dialog box, or type a condition by choosing Type It. Current SQL Condition area (SQL Link Condition) This area displays the current SQL condition. You can add, delete, or edit any line in the condition. Current SQL Condition list View the current SQL condition. If lines in the condition have been grouped, the group is indented.
PAGE 1892

And specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included in the query. Or specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included in the query. And Not specifies that the first condition must be met and the second condition must not be met for the object to be included in the query. Or Not specifies that either the first conditions can be met or the second condition cannot be met for the object to be included in the query. Column list Select a column from the list.
PAGE 1893

Operator Description LIKE The value of the selected property or data contains the value you enter in the Value box. Applies to string (character) data types only. Use the percent sign (%) as a wild-card character. For example, to retrieve all objects that have a value starting with B, choose the LIKE operator and enter B% in the Value box. For information on the wild-card characters supported by your database system, refer to the documentation for your database system software.
PAGE 1894

History Display the SQL Condition History dialog box (page 1866), where you select from a list of SQL conditions you previously added. Type It Display the Type SQL Condition dialog box (page 1870), where you enter your SQL condition. Type SQL Condition dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to create or modify a SQL condition, if you are familiar with SQL.
PAGE 1895

SQL Condition Syntax SQL has a strict grammatical structure and syntax. Here are some rules to follow when you define SQL statements. ■ Character values (data type CHAR) must be enclosed in single quotation marks ('XXX'). ■ If the column has a data type of string or data, enclose the column name in double quotes. If the column has a numeric data type, do not enclose the column name in double quotes. ■ Database values are case sensitive, but field (column) names are not.
PAGE 1896

1872
PAGE 1897

Raster Image Dialog Boxes 34 MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command) Use this command to turn on or off the display of frames. To display image frames (page 495) NOTE This option does not affect images you inserted with Data Connect. See Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437) Image Correlation dialog box Use this dialog box to correlate an image within the drawing when you insert it.
PAGE 1898

Correlation Source list Select a correlation source for the image. If a resource or world file exists for the image, it is in this list. Insertion Point area View the insertion point (X, Y, and Z coordinates) for the lower-left corner of the image frame. On the Source tab, this information is in the units specified in the Units area at the bottom of the tab. On the Insertion tab, this information is in current drawing units.
PAGE 1899

Image Information dialog box Use this dialog box to view data about the selected images in your drawing. To display the Image Information dialog box (page 475) Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Information. File area View the image name, location, file type, size, and date it was created and modified. Image area View the image density, depth, width, height, and color type. Object area View the linetype and layer of the image frame.
PAGE 1900

if it is unnamed or a copy, is listed. To indicate copies, the dialog box numbers them in the following format: imagename:1, imagename:2. The images are listed in display order. The image at the top of the list is displayed on top and drawn last. To modify the image display order, click an image name and drag it up or down in the list. Image The name of the image file. File The full path name for the image file. Layer The layer on which the image is located. Created The date that the file was created.
PAGE 1901

NOTE You can change the size and position of this dialog box. Any changes you make will be retained in future sessions. Image Management Layout dialog box Use this dialog box to control which topic columns are displayed and the order in which they are displayed in the Image Management dialog box. To display the Image Management dialog box (page 474) Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ Image Management. Image Topics list Select or clear the check box next to a topic to display or remove that topic column.
PAGE 1902

List of images View each image you inserted into the drawing. Selected images are highlighted. Click an image name to select or deselect it. Select All Click to select all the images in your drawing. Select None Click to remove all selected images from the selection set. Insert Image dialog box Use this dialog box to insert raster images whose formats are not supported by Data Connect (page 437) To insert a raster image (page 460) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Insert An Image.
PAGE 1903

display. (To display the image later, select the image frame. Right-click the image frame ➤ Image ➤ Show Image.) If this option is not selected, the image is loaded into memory and displayed as it is inserted. Modify Correlation Display the Image Correlation dialog box (page 1873) when you click Open. The Image Correlation dialog box lets you review and modify the correlation settings for the image. This option is not available if multiple images are selected.
PAGE 1904

Paths Use the Paths tab to set the directory for resource files. Resource files store information about an image insertion point, scale, rotation, and density. Resource files have the same base name as the raster image with an .res extension. Resource File Directory Specify the directory where AutoCAD Map 3D searches for resource files. Click to locate a directory. This directory applies only to resource (.res) files and not to other correlation sources.
PAGE 1905

Image Detach Preferences Ask Before Detach Have AutoCAD Map 3D prompt you to detach an image if there are no more frames in the drawing that reference the image. Always Detach Automatically detach an image when you erase the image frames. Never Detach Keep the image attached, even if you erase the frames. Shift + Left Click Shift + Left Click Image Select Enable selection of images by placing your cursor over them and clicking the left mouse button while pressing Shift.
PAGE 1906

Scale Enter a default numeric scaling factor for images. For example, to make the image twice as large, enter 2 in the Scale box. Density Density Type a default density (or resolution) for images. You should set the this value to the most common density value at which your images are scanned. Insertion Point and Density Units list Select the default insertion point and density units for the images. For example, a common North American scanning resolution is 300 dpi (300 dots per inch).
PAGE 1907

Default Restore the memory setting to the default RAM amount, 25% of the total physical memory. MB, KB, and Bytes Specify the units (megabytes, kilobytes, or bytes) for defining the Memory Limit. Transparency Color dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the color that should appear transparent in the image. To change the color that is transparent (page 500) Click Insert tab ➤ Image panel ➤ angle-arrow. NOTE This option does not affect images you inserted with Data Connect.
PAGE 1908

1884
PAGE 1909

Saving Objects Dialog Boxes 35 ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set command) Use this command to unlock selected locked objects in the current drawing and remove them from the save set. To remove objects from the save set and unlock the objects (page 759) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Remove Objects From Save Set. NOTE This command affects drawing objects only. For information about saving changes to geospatial feature data, see Updating Edits Automatically (page 698).
PAGE 1910

Objects that are locked in their source drawings are unlocked so that other users can edit them. They are removed from the list to be saved back to source drawings. Any changes made to the objects in the current drawing still exist in the drawing. To save these changes to a new file, click AutoCAD Drawing. ➤ Save As ➤ Objects that were erased from the current drawing remain erased from the drawing, but they will not be erased from source drawings.
PAGE 1911

If an object is on a locked layer in the source drawing, you cannot add it to the save set. If you are working in paper space, you cannot add objects to the save set. Objects in the save set are saved to source drawings when you use the Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1887) command. ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command) Use this command to highlight all objects in the current drawing that are marked to be saved to source drawings.
PAGE 1912

If you are saving new objects, specify the source drawings to save objects to and the method used to save objects. Queried objects are saved back to their original layer in their original source drawing. You must have Edit Drawing privileges to save objects to source drawings. See the User Administration dialog box (page 1934). Status area View the number of queried objects and the number of newly created objects that are in the save set. Save Queried Objects Save queried objects to source drawings.
PAGE 1913

Selective Specify which objects to save and which drawings to save them in. Objects are saved to the same layer as they are on in the current drawing. If the source drawing does not have a layer of the same name, one is created. This method applies to all objects, so you cannot specify other save back methods after this one. Drawings to Save New Objects to list Specify which drawings to save objects to. If you use the Selective method, AutoCAD Map 3D prompts for the objects to save to each selected drawing.
PAGE 1914

1890
PAGE 1915

Survey Dialog Boxes 36 New Data Store dialog box Use the New Data Store dialog box to create a specialized data store for survey data. To create a survey data store (page 1000) On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, click Data ➤ New Survey Data Store. NOTE This dialog box creates a specialized survey data store only. To create other types of geospatial data stores, see Creating a Data Store (page 586).
PAGE 1916

Project Properties dialog box Use the Project Properties dialog box to view and edit properties for a project in the Survey Data Store. To view or edit project properties (page 1002) On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, right-click a project ➤ Properties. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial survey data only. Click the Categorized View button to view project properties by category. Click the Alphabetized View button to view project properties in alphabetical order.
PAGE 1917

Survey Properties dialog box Use the Survey Properties dialog box to view information about a specific survey in a Survey Data Store. To view or edit survey properties (page 1004) On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, right-click a survey ➤ Properties. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial survey data only. Click the Categorized View button to view survey properties by category. Click the Alphabetized View button to view survey properties in alphabetical order.
PAGE 1918

Point Group Properties dialog box Use the Point Group Properties dialog box to view information about a point group in a Survey Data Store. To view or edit point group properties (page 1005) On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, right-click a point group ➤ Properties. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial survey data only. Click the Categorized View button to view point group properties by category. Click the Alphabetized View button to view point group properties in alphabetical order.
PAGE 1919

On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, right-click a survey ➤ Properties. In the Survey Properties palette, click the Field Notes entry. NOTE This functionality is for geospatial survey data only. Field Notes View and edit the field notes for a survey. Create Surface dialog box Use this dialog box to create raster surfaces from survey data. To create a surface from a source filesurface:create surface from fileIn the Toolbased Ribbon Works...
PAGE 1920

Click to move source data up the order list. If you have not specified a coordinate system for your map, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the first valid coordinate system in the source data list. Formatting Select Format Select the format of the source data.
PAGE 1921

Destination Output File Name Enter the save name and location of the GeoTIFF file. Click to a save location. to browse Layer Name Enter a name for the new Display Manager raster layer. Source Data dialog box Use this dialog box to select the data connection source for creating a surface. You must first connect to your data using Data Connect. For FDO data, only point and line data are supported. Surface features such as parcels are not supported, and will not appear in this dialog box.
PAGE 1922

Create Group Create a merge group to assign multiple source files to a single output file. Remove From Group Remove a file from a merge group. The file remains in the Point Cloud Manager. Remove Group Remove a merge group from the Point Cloud Manager. Files that are in the merge group remain in the Point Cloud Manager. Remove File Remove a file from the Point Cloud Manager. Cancel Processing Cancel the current conversion process. Source Display the name of the source file or merge group.
PAGE 1923

Click Create tab ➤ 3D Surface panel ➤ Create From Point Cloud. Add File Add a point cloud data store (.isd) file to the Surface Manager for processing. Create Group Create a merge group to assign multiple source files to a single surface. Remove From Group Remove a file from a merge group. The file remains in the Surface Manager. Remove Group Remove a merge group from the Surface Manager. Files that are in the merge group remain in the Surface Manager. Remove File Remove a file from the Surface Manager.
PAGE 1924

Filter Point Cloud dialog box Use the Filter Point Cloud dialog box to filter your LiDAR or point cloud data by classification, elevation, intensity, or location on your map. To filter point cloud dataIn the Display Manager, right-click a point cloud layer and select Filter ... (page 1025) Click Create tab ➤ Point Cloud panel ➤ Create Index Filter By Select a filter type from the drop-down list. You can filter by classification, elevation, intensity, or location on your map.
PAGE 1925

Grid Parameters dialog box Use the Grid Parameters dialog box to specify the surface type, name, save location, resolution, and gap filling parameters for a surface. To create a surface from a point cloudIn the Display Manager, right-click a point cloud layer and se... (page 1022) Click Create tab ➤ 3D Surface panel ➤ Create From Point Cloud. Surface Type Specify whether AutoCAD Map 3D creates a GeoTIFF or ESRI ASC surface. File Name The name and save location of your surface file.
PAGE 1926

Point Cloud Style dialog box Use the Point Cloud Style dialog box to style your point cloud data based on classification, elevation, or LiDAR intensity value. To style point data by classificationIn the Display Manager, right-click the point cloud layer to st... (page 677) Click Point Cloud tab ➤ Style panel ➤ Set Style. Classification Tab Classification AutoCAD Map 3D assigns a default color to each point class. To change the color for a point class, select a new color from the drop-down list.
PAGE 1927

Number of Rules Enter the number of rules for the intensity scale range. The default number of rules is five. Rules are distributed evenly over the range of intensity data in your point cloud. Style Range The From and To values for the colors in your style range. To change a color for your style range, select a new color from the drop-down list. If you do not see the color that you want in the drop-down list, click More Colors. The Select Color dialog box appears.
PAGE 1928

1904
PAGE 1929

Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes 37 MAPABOUT (About AutoCAD Map 3D command) Use this command to display the About AutoCAD Map 3D screen, which shows the version number and date of AutoCAD Map 3D. MAPAUTOCHECKOUT Use this command to specify whether or not geospatial features are automatically checked out when edited. To check out features automatically (page 696) In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Feature Edit tab ➤ Edit Set panel ➤ Auto Checkout.
PAGE 1930

MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command) Use this command to dock or undock the Task Pane. Use these techniques for the Task pane Double-click the title bar (floating) or the double bar at the top of the pane (docked). MAPEDITSETAUTO Use this command to specify whether or not edits to features are automatically reflected in the feature source. NOTE You cannot undo this operation.
PAGE 1931

Feature Editing Options dialog box (page 1929) These settings determine how you work with your data.
PAGE 1932

MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command) Use this command to hide or show the Task Pane. To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session (page 221) In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Map Task Pane. MAPWSREFRESH Use this command to refresh the Task Pane. This is sometimes necessary if Map Explorer does not reflect your recent changes to the drawing or if the icons in the Display Manager need to be refreshed.
PAGE 1933

Current Drawing (page 1909) Query (page 1911) Save Back (page 1913) Data Source (page 1914) Multi-User (page 1915) System (page 1916) Coordinate Systems tab (page 1916) Task Pane Specify Task Pane options. Map Explorer Categories To Display Select the categories to display in Map Explorer. When you turn off the display of the category, all functionality associated with the category is still available. TIP To reduce screen clutter, turn off the display of categories you don’t use.
PAGE 1934

NOTE These options affect attached drawings only. For information about changing the coordinate system for geospatial data, see Changing Coordinate Systems (page 311). Adjust Sizes And Scales - For Changes In Units Specify whether the units used in the coordinate system of an attached drawing are scaled to the units used in the coordinate system of the current drawing. For example, if an attached drawing uses meters and the current drawing uses U.S.
PAGE 1935

AutoCAD Map 3D does not rotate text and blocks with a zero rotation value even if there is a convergence angle. This option is not available if For Map Distortion under Adjust Rotations is not selected. Adjust Elevations Adjust the elevation (Z axis) of objects when you select For Changes In Units and For Map Distortion under Adjust Sizes And Scales. Data Source Options Specify drawing-specific data source options. NOTE These options affect data stores linked to drawing objects only.
PAGE 1936

AutoCAD Map 3D clears this selection set and replaces it with your new selection.) If your query finds a large number of objects, this feature can take time. If you do not need to put the objects into a selection set, clear this check box to save time during queries. Create Associative Hatch Objects Specify whether AutoCAD Map 3D creates associative hatch objects for hatch objects created by the ADEFILLPOLYG, ADEQUERY (using alter properties), MAPTOPOQUERY, and MAPTHEMATIC (using fill) commands.
PAGE 1937

Reference Entire Bounding Area For Objects Specify whether Location queries reference the entire bounding area of hatch, solid, and raster objects or only the bounding edge. (The bounding edge for raster objects is the clipping boundary.) When you select this option, a hatch boundary is treated as an area. If the query location is on any part of the hatch object, even if it touches only a hatch boundary, the whole hatch object (the hatch and the hatch boundary) is included in the selection.
PAGE 1938

Save Set Set options for adding objects to the save set. Save Back To Source Drawings Specify the behavior of objects when you save them back to their source drawings. Redefine Block Definitions On Save Back Save changes to block definitions back to attached drawings. Redefine Layer Definitions On Save Back Save changes to layer definitions back to attached drawings. Redefine Text Style Definitions On Save Back Save changes to text style definitions back to attached drawings.
PAGE 1939

Open In Read-Only Mode Open the Data View in read-only mode. When this option is selected, you cannot edit data in the Data View. Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing Save all formatting changes, such as column width, font, color, or borders, that you make in the Data View. Keep On Top Specify whether the Data View window remains on top of all other windows, even when it is not the active window.
PAGE 1940

System If you enabled Force User Login on the Multi User tab, you must log in as a Superuser to edit System options. Log File Options Use the System tab to specify system settings. Log files keep track of error messages and other AutoCAD Map 3D system messages. If the log file is active, it is updated each time you use AutoCAD Map 3D. To save space on your disk, you can delete or archive the log file and start a new one.
PAGE 1941

Ignore Definitions Have the program ignore coordinate system definitions when opening drawing files. Prompt User To Add Definitions to Dictionaries Have the program prompt you for action when opening drawing files that contain coordinate system definitions.
PAGE 1942

Input Units Settings Set the units for coordinate geometry input. Linear Units are US Feet, International Feet, Meters, or Chains. Angle Formats are Decimal Degrees, Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, Grads, Radians, and Surveyor’s Units. Azimuth Measurements Define Bearings Relative To North Select this option if bearings in your map are relative to North. Define Bearings Relative to South Select this option if bearings in your map are relative to South.
PAGE 1943

The first column specifies if the drawing is active. Only active drawings are searched during queries. ■ Yes indicates the drawing is active. ■ Locked indicates the drawing is inactive, and you have locks on objects in the drawing. ■ No indicates the drawing is inactive. If the drawing has a description assigned to it, that description appears in the list instead of the file name. For information on how to assign a description to a drawing, see Drawing Settings dialog box.
PAGE 1944

Filter Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter. When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is not displayed, even if it matches the filter. To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box (page 1922), you can create separate filters for file names and descriptions.
PAGE 1945

To display information in the Locks area, click User List. Active Drawings Use this area to see which drawings currently have locks. Active Drawings list View all attached active drawings for the current drawing. ■ To display information about locked objects in a drawing, select the drawing in the list. Click User List. The area at the bottom of the screen updates to show the names of users who have locks on objects in the drawing, and the number of objects they have locked.
PAGE 1946

User Name list View all users who have locks on objects in the selected drawings. The Number Of Objects Locked column shows how many locked objects each user has. To update this list, select an active drawing. Click User List. Select All Highlight all drawings in the list. Clear All Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list. Remove Locks Unlock objects locked by the selected users. Be careful not to unlock objects that other users are currently editing, as this may cause work to be lost.
PAGE 1947

To display all drawings, enter *\*.dwg in the File Name box. To display all descriptions, enter * in the Description box. Drawing Settings dialog box Use this dialog box to change the drawing description, specify simple transformation settings, or define save back extents. To create a drawing description (page 166) To set transformation options (page 169) To set save back extents (page 170) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Define Drawing Set. NOTE These options affect drawing objects only.
PAGE 1948

Drawing Description box Enter a new description for the selected drawing. Descriptions make it easy for you to remember what is in a drawing. If a description is assigned to the drawing, it appears in the drawing list instead of the file name. Simple Transformation area Specify the transformation of objects in the source drawing as they are brought into the current drawing. AutoCAD Map 3D stores this information with the current drawing. The source drawing does not change.
PAGE 1949

Enter a real number. For example, enter 2 to double the size of objects, or enter .5 to halve the size of objects. Rotation box Specify the rotation of objects from the source drawing to the current drawing. Enter an angle. For example, enter 90 to rotate objects 90 degrees in the current direction. (To view or change the current direction, open the source drawing and use the DDUNITS command.) Offset (X,Y) box Specify the offset of objects from the source drawing to the current drawing.
PAGE 1950

zoom drawing extents, click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Zoom drop-down ➤ Extents. Show < Display the current save back extents in the current drawing. Save back extents are indicated by a dotted line. NOTE This shows only the extents displayed in the current window. To view the extents for the entire drawing, zoom to drawing extents before starting this command. To zoom drawing extents, click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Zoom drop-down ➤ Extents.
PAGE 1951

Active Drawings list View all the active attached drawings in the current drawing. ■ Use Select All to select all drawings. ■ Use Clear All to remove the highlighting from all items. ■ Use Filter to filter the list of drawings. Filter Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter. When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
PAGE 1952

Drive Alias Administration dialog box AutoCAD Map 3D creates a drive alias for drive C. You must create drive aliases for all other drives that you use. To create a drive alias (page 161) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Define Drawing Set. NOTE This option is for attached drawings only. For information about connecting to geospatial feature data, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
PAGE 1953

Feature Editing Options dialog box Use this dialog box to set options for automatically checking out features and updating feature sources, whether features are checked out as drawing objects or geospatial features, how to split polygonal features, and how often you are prompted to check in features. To specify Feature Edit Options (page 240) MAPFEATUREEDITTOOLS (page 1906) NOTE These options are for geospatial feature data only.
PAGE 1954

This setting determines the way you work with your data.
PAGE 1955

line for the split or selecting an existing line or polygon within the feature to define the split. If you do not select this option, all prompts will appear, but the default values for the prompts will be what you specify in this dialog box. Other Options Specify whether or not you are prompted to check in features and how often. Prompt To Check In Every Specify that you will be prompted to check in features at intervals of the specified value.
PAGE 1956

Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ ➤ Drawing Maintenance. NOTE This option is for drawing object data only. For information about filtering geospatial feature data, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216). Indexes speed up queries, but they add to the size of your source drawings. If size is an issue, create indexes for just the types of queries you perform most often. For example, if you mostly perform queries based on location, create just a location index.
PAGE 1957

NOTE To check if a source drawing has an index created, select the drawing in the Drawing Maintenance dialog box. Click Drawing Index to display the Index Maintenance dialog box. If the source drawing contains a usable index, the check box for that index is not selected. If the drawing does not contain an index, or if the index is out of date, the check box for the index is selected. Remove Object Data Index dialog box Use this dialog box to remove object data fields from an index.
PAGE 1958

Undefined Alias Referenced dialog box Use this dialog box to resolve problems with undefined drive aliases. To attach drawings (page 154) Click Home tab ➤ Data panel ➤ ➤ Define Drawing Set. NOTE This option is for attached drawings only. For information about connecting to geospatial feature data, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). The drawing you are activating or attaching has an alias assigned to it that is not defined. ■ To attach this drawing without defining an alias, click Skip.
PAGE 1959

■ To modify a user, select the name and change information in the User Profile section. Click Update. User List View all users set up for AutoCAD Map 3D. Login Name box Specify the login name for the user. ■ Each login name must be unique. ■ Login names are not case-sensitive. ■ The login name cannot contain spaces or any of the following characters. "/\[];:|=,+?<> Password box Specify the password for the user. ■ Passwords are case-sensitive. ■ Passwords cannot contain spaces.
PAGE 1960

Edit Drawing Let the user edit objects and save them back to source drawings. If this option is not selected, the user can edit objects but cannot save them back to source drawings. Draw Query Let the user execute Draw mode queries, which copy objects into the current drawing. If this option is not selected, users can do Preview and Report mode queries only. User Information dialog box This dialog box displays information about the current AutoCAD Map 3D user.
PAGE 1961

Draw Query Let the user execute Draw mode queries, which copy objects into the current drawing. If this option is not selected, users can do Preview and Report mode queries only. User Login dialog box Log in to AutoCAD Map 3D on this computer. If you do not know your login name or password, check with your system administrator To log in to AutoCAD Map 3D (page 142) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ ➤ User Login.
PAGE 1962

1938
PAGE 1963

Topology Dialog Boxes 38 NOTE Topology functionality applies only to drawing objects. MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this command to edit the direction of a selected linear object in an existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
PAGE 1964

Use this command to edit the direct resistance of a selected link or node in an existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information. To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology (page 875) Respond to the prompts: Enter topology name (? for list) : Enter the name of the topology for which you want to modify resistance. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?. Edit resistance of (Links/Nodes) : Enter L for Links or N for Nodes.
PAGE 1965

Enter new reverse resistance <1.000>: Enter a new value. MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link command) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the old command for adding a link to a topology. The new command is MAPAL. Use this command to add a link to an existing network or polygon topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
PAGE 1966

A topology must have a node at the end points of all link objects. This node is part of the topology data structure and is assigned a topology ID. However, a node can be implicit (referenced in the topology data structure) or explicit (a physical object in the drawing). Use the MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command) (page 1944) or MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command) (page 1947) command to create a new node. When you add a link to a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a node when necessary.
PAGE 1967

Select object: Use any selection method to select the object to delete. MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link command) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this command to edit a link in an existing network or polygon topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information. To reposition a node at the end point of a link (page 863) Respond to the prompts: Enter topology name (? for list) : Enter the name of the topology to modify.
PAGE 1968

MAPRL Respond to the prompts: Enter topology name (? for list) : Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?. Select link to edit: Use any selection method to select the object whose direction you want to reverse. MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. When you modify a link using standard editing commands, the topology information associated with the link is not updated.
PAGE 1969

WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the old command for adding a node to a topology. The new command is MAPAN. Use this command to add a an existing block or point to a topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information. To create a node on an existing link (page 878) MAPAN Respond to the prompts: Enter topology name (? for list) : Enter the name of the topology to add the node to. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
PAGE 1970

Use this command to delete a node from an existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information. To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 889) MAPDN Respond to the prompts: Enter topology name (? for list) : Enter the name of the topology to delete the node from. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?. Select node to delete: Use any selection method to select the node to delete. If the node has only one link, choose whether to delete the dangling link.
PAGE 1971

Select node to update: Use any selection method to select the object to edit. Specify new insertion point: Enter the coordinates of a point or select a point onscreen. If a node already exists in the new location, you are prompted to delete one of the nodes. The node is moved to the new location, and all associated links move their endpoints. MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases.
PAGE 1972

MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this command to have the topology relationship data on the node updated. To update a topology (page 892) When you modify a node using standard editing commands, the topology data associated with the node is not updated. (If you modified the node using an AutoCAD Map 3D topology command, such as MAPNODEDIT, the topology data was updated automatically and you do not need to use this command.
PAGE 1973

Respond to the prompts: Enter topology name (? for list) : Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?. Select objects: Enter the coordinates of a point or select a point on screen. The point must be in a defined area that does not currently contain a centroid. MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology Polygon command) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases.
PAGE 1974

Use this command to have the topology data on the polygon updated. To update a topology (page 892) When you modify a polygon using standard editing commands, the topology data associated with the polygon is not updated. (If you modified the polygon using an AutoCAD Map 3D topology command, such as MAPPOLYADD, AutoCAD Map 3D updated the topology for you.) Respond to the prompts: Enter topology name (? for list) : Enter the name of the topology to modify.
PAGE 1975

AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOEDIT NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to confirm the change to an object shared by multiple topologies. To edit a topology (page 854) MAPTOPOEDIT The object you are modifying is referenced by more than one topology. If you modify the object in the selected topology, the other topologies may be invalid. You must To update a topology (page 892) the other topologies.
PAGE 1976

drawings or detach them from their source drawings before you can rename any topology. ■ Be sure the Create Backup File Of Source Drawing option is not selected on the Save Back tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908). You cannot undo this rename operation using the UNDO command. Centroid Objects dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to select the centroids to include when you create a topology.
PAGE 1977

Layer Filters box Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the topology. Enter an asterisk (*) to search all layers. To select from a list of layers, click Layers. Block Filters box Specify which blocks to search for objects to be used for the topology. ■ To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*). ■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks. ■ To select point objects, enter ACAD_POINT.
PAGE 1978

Topology Name Name box Select the topology you want. The list displays topologies loaded from the current drawing. If the topology you want is not listed, click Load and load it. Type Displays the type of the selected topology. Description Displays the description of the selected topology. Number of Polygons Referenced Displays the number of polygons referenced by the selected topology. If the topology is loaded as partial, this is the number of polygons in the partial subset.
PAGE 1979

Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to create node objects at the endpoint of links when you create a network topology. To create a network topology (page 831) Click Create tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ New. Create New Nodes Specify whether or not to create nodes in the current object to complete the topology. (Nodes are optional.
PAGE 1980

Finish Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the topology and click Finish. Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to select the links for a network topology. To create a network topology (page 831) Click Create tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ New. Select the links to include in the topology. You can select all links in the map or select them manually.
PAGE 1981

Object Classes Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) link selection to a subset of links, in which you include only the links that are in the specified object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology. Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
PAGE 1982

Select All Include all nodes that meet the filter criteria. Select Manually Include only the nodes that you manually select in the map. Click Select Objects to select the nodes. Only nodes that meet the filter criteria will be selected. Layers Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are on the specified layers. This filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects.
PAGE 1983

Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to select the nodes to include in a node topology. To create a node topology (page 827) Click Create tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ New. You can select all nodes in the map or select them manually. You can also filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are on specified layers, are of specified block types, or in specified object classes.
PAGE 1984

Object Classes Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are in the specified object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology. Back Display the previous dialog box in the list. Next Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
PAGE 1985

Layer Specify the layer on which to place the new centroids. Enter a layer name or click the down arrow to select from a list of layers in the drawing set. If a layer you want is not listed, it may be frozen or locked. Point Object for Centroid Creation Specify the block to use to represent the new centroids. To create centroids using an existing block, click the down arrow and select the name of the block from the list. To use a point instead of a block, select ACAD_POINT.
PAGE 1986

Create New Nodes Specify whether nodes that are not present in the current object selection should be created to complete the topology. (Explicit nodes are optional.) Layer If new nodes are created, specify on which layer they should be placed. You can specify a new layer or click the down arrow to select from a list of layers in the drawing set. Point Object for Node Creation If new nodes are created, specify what block to use to create them.
PAGE 1987

Use this dialog box to select the point and block objects to use as centroids for the polygons. To create a polygon topology (page 836) Click Create tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ New. Each polygon in a polygon topology has a centroid, which is a point or block element within the polygon, and contains information about the area it encloses. Centroid information is stored as object data and saved with the map.
PAGE 1988

Object Classes Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) object selection to a subset of objects, in which you include only the objects that are in the specified object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology. Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
PAGE 1989

Link information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each link is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you use a topology command. Select All Include all links that meet the filter criteria. Select Manually Include only the links that you manually select in the map. Click the Select Objects to select the links. Only links that meet the filter criteria will be selected.
PAGE 1990

When you create a polygon topology, use this dialog box to select the nodes you want to be part of the topology. To create a polygon topology (page 836) Click Create tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ New. Nodes are useful when performing some types of analysis. You can select all nodes in the map or select them manually. You can also filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are on specified layers, are of specified block types, or in specified object classes.
PAGE 1991

Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology. Back Display the previous dialog box in the list. Next Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box (page 1961). Finish Create the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available after you enter a valid, unique name for the topology.
PAGE 1992

Highlight Errors Highlight errors in red (nodes or centroids are highlighted with a red X). To remove the highlighting, use the REDRAW, REGEN, or SAVE command. Mark Errors With Blocks Mark errors with blocks of the shape and color you specify below. To remove a marker block, select it and then press Delete. Marker Size Specify the marker size as a percent of the screen size. A value between 3% and 7% is usually suitable.
PAGE 1993

Next Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list. Finish Create the topology using the current settings. Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to select the type of topology to create and to specify the topology name and description. To create a polygon topology (page 836) Click Create tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ New.
PAGE 1994

■ Network topologies involve linear objects, and can have nodes where linear objects connect. In addition, linear objects can have direction or resistance. Some examples of network topologies are a water distribution network, a river network, or a street network. ■ Polygon topologies involve polygons that define areas. Some examples of polygon topologies are city blocks, land parcels, and political boundaries. Topology Name Enter a unique name for the topology.
PAGE 1995

Finish Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the topology and click Finish. Create Topology Warning dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to indicate whether you want to continue creating the topology. To create a polygon topology (page 836) Click Create tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ New. You selected 25,000 links for your topology. Creating a topology of this size may take longer to create.
PAGE 1996

Click Map Setup tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ Delete. When you delete a topology, the topology relationship data is automatically deleted from objects referenced by the selected topology. Select Delete Geometry to delete the referenced objects from the current drawing. You can delete a topology under the following conditions: ■ It was loaded from source and all objects were created at load. ■ It was loaded from the current drawing and completed.
PAGE 1997

Use this dialog box to edit the direction of a selected linear object in an existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information. To specify the direction for a link (page 847) MAPEDITDIR MAPRL Direction box Select the direction for the link from the list and click OK. You can choose Bi-Directional, From -> To , or To -> From. Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 1998

WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the old command for editing geometry, direction, and resistance in a topology. There are several new commands for editing topologies, such as MAPAN, MAPDL, MAPMP. For a complete list, see Editing Topologies (page 851). Use this dialog box to modify objects in a topology without damaging the topology relationship data.
PAGE 1999

Link Objects Polygon Objects Node Objects MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction of Topology Link command) (page 1943) MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology Node command) (page 1945) MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command) (page 1944) MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command) (page 1948) MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) (page 1939) MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command) (page 1939) MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command) (page 1939) MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command) (page 1940) Link Objects
PAGE 2000

Filter Selected Objects If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored. Layer Filters box Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the topology. Enter an asterisk (*) to search all layers. To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
PAGE 2001

Click Analyze tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Load Topology. Topology Location options Select whether to load a topology that is in a source drawing or in the current drawing. Name Select the topology to load. If the list does not display the topology you want, be sure you have selected the correct in the Topology Location area. The list of topology names comes from the object data tables. These tables may exist in the current drawing but the topology objects may only exist in the source drawings.
PAGE 2002

Load Topology From Source Drawing dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog to set options when loading a topology from a source drawing. To load a topology (page 907) Click Analyze tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Load Topology. Topology Objects Create Topology Objects When Loaded If the selected topology is from a source drawing, select this check box to copy the topology objects into the current drawing as the topology is loaded.
PAGE 2003

Click Analyze tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Network Analysis. When you choose points, AutoCAD Map 3D locates the closest node to the point you select. ■ Shortest path — Specify a starting point and ending point. ■ Best route — Specify a starting point and one or more visit points. ■ Flood trace — Specify a start point only. Start Point Select a start point. Click Select Point to select a point in the map. Press Enter to return to this dialog box.
PAGE 2004

Save Save the current settings so you can use them again. Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis. Back Display the previous dialog box. Next Display the Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog box (page 1981). Finish Perform the network analysis using the current settings. For a shortest path trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point and an end point. For a flood trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point.
PAGE 2005

Create Topology Create a new topology using the results of the analysis. Name Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters. Description Enter a description for the new topology. Load Use settings that you previously saved. Save Save the current settings so you can use them again. Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis. Back Display the previous dialog box.
PAGE 2006

Use this dialog box to specify how to determine resistance for links and nodes and to specify how to determine the direction of link objects for the network analysis. To perform a shortest path trace (page 1326) To perform a best route analysis (page 1330) To perform a flood trace (page 1334) Click Analyze tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Network Analysis. Direction Specify how to determine the direction of link objects for the analysis.
PAGE 2007

■ Link Reverse Resistance — Specify the resistance in the opposite direction along a link. If you leave the box blank, the length of the line (.LENGTH) is used. ■ Node Resistance — Specify the resistance to cross the node, for example, resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a road network. If you leave the box blank, zero (0) is used. ■ Specify a minimum and maximum resistance for the trace.
PAGE 2008

Click Analyze tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Network Analysis. Shortest Path Calculates the optimal route between two nodes. For example, you could find the shortest distance between an accident site and a hospital. A path trace between the start and end points must have a total resistance of more than the minimum and less than the maximum. Best Route Finds the optimal route from a start point, to one or more intermediate points, and back to the start point.
PAGE 2009

Load Use settings that you previously saved. Save Save the current settings so you can use them again. Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis. Back Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list. Next Click to display the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box (page 1978). Finish Perform the network analysis using the current settings. For a shortest path trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point and an end point.
PAGE 2010

Click Create tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ New. Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you use a topology command. Select Automatically/Manually options ■ Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and filter criteria. ■ Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click Select < to select objects.
PAGE 2011

Create Using box If new nodes or centriods are created, specify what block to use to create them. ■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks. ■ To create nodes or centroids as a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT. Node Objects dialog box (Node topology) NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to select the nodes to include in the topology when you create a topology.
PAGE 2012

To select from a list of layers, click Layers. Block Filters box Specify which blocks to search for objects to be used for the topology. ■ To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*). ■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks. ■ To select point objects, enter ACAD_POINT. Rename Topology dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to rename a topology.
PAGE 2013

New Name Enter a new name for the topology. Names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters. Names cannot contain spaces. New Description Enter a description for the topology. Select Data dialog box - Topology Overlay NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To perform an overlay analysis for geospatial feature data, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
PAGE 2014

Destination Data Area Specify a table name and description for the new object data table that will be created for the result topology. A table name cannot include spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric character. The table name must be unique. Available Fields/Columns List Lists the fields in the selected object data table or the selected external database. To add fields or columns to the new object data table, select them from the list. Click >>.
PAGE 2015

Point Object for Node Creation Specify the block used to represent nodes. ■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the down arrow. ■ To create nodes from a block saved as a DWG file, click [...] and select the file you want to use. ■ To create nodes as a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT. Finish Creates the buffer using the current settings after you specify the buffer distance and enter a valid topology name.
PAGE 2016

Name Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters. Description Enter a description for the new topology. Layer Specify a layer for the new topology. To select from a list of layers in the current drawing, click the down arrow. To create a new layer, type the name in the box. NOTE Do not specify a locked layer.
PAGE 2017

Click Analyze tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Object Buffer. A buffer is a zone that is drawn around a topology. Using a buffer, you can easily identify objects within a specified offset of elements in node, network, and polygon topologies. Buffer Distance Enter distance from the object to the buffer. The buffer will extend the specified distance from the objects. To create a buffer inside an existing polygon, enter a negative value for the buffer offset.
PAGE 2018

Topology Dissolve - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to specify the block to use to create nodes and centroids in the resulting dissolve topology. To dissolve a composite topology (page 1343) Click Analyze tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Dissolve. Point Object for Centroid Creation Specify the block used to represent centroids. ■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the down arrow.
PAGE 2019

Finish Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name. Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to specify whether or not to create new nodes at the endpoints of links where they are missing in the resulting dissolve topology. If so, you specify the block to use to create the nodes.
PAGE 2020

Finish Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name. Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to specify settings for viewing the resulting dissolve topology onscreen. To dissolve a composite topology (page 1343) Click Analyze tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Dissolve.
PAGE 2021

Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve. Back Display the previous dialog box. Next Click to display the Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box (page 1997). Finish Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name. Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
PAGE 2022

Object Data Field Select a field from the list of fields in the selected table. To add a new field, click Define. Define Click to add a new object data field. Finish Dissolves the topology using the current settings after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name. Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to select the data on which to base the dissolve.
PAGE 2023

Any two adjacent polygons or connected lines that have the same value for this field are combined into a single polygon or line. Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve. Back Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list. Next Click to display the Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box (page 1996). Finish Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
PAGE 2024

Source Overlay Result ■ Union – Areas that appear in either the source or the overlay topologies are in the result topology. Source Overlay Result ■ Identity – The result topology includes areas that appear in the source topology and areas in the overlay topology that are within the source topology boundary. Source Overlay Result ■ Erase – The result topology includes areas that appear in the source topology except where it is covered by the overlay topology.
PAGE 2025

■ Clip – The result topology includes areas that appear in the source topology except where they are outside the boundary of the overlay topology. The source topology is clipped to the outer boundary of the overlay topology. Source Overlay Result ■ Paste – The overlay topology is "pasted" on the source topology. The result topology includes the overlay topology and any areas of the source topology that extend beyond the boundaries of the overlay topology.
PAGE 2026

Finish Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology name for the resulting topology. Topology Overlay Analysis - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To do an overlay analysis for geospatial feature data, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
PAGE 2027

Load Use settings that you previously saved. Save Save the current settings so you can use them again. Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay. Back Display the previous dialog box. Next Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list. Finish Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology name for the resulting topology.
PAGE 2028

Point Object for Node Creation Specify the block used to represent nodes. ■ To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down arrow and select a block from the list. ■ To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block. ■ To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT. Load Use settings that you previously saved. Save Save the current settings so you can use them again.
PAGE 2029

Click Analyze tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Object Overlay. You can specify the name, description, and layer for the new topology. Highlight Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified in the Color. Color Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis in the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map, at the Command prompt, enter redrawall. Name Enter a unique name for the new topology.
PAGE 2030

Finish Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology name for the resulting topology. Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To do an overlay analysis for geospatial feature data, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309). Use this dialog box to select the data to attach to the result topology when performing a topology overlay.
PAGE 2031

New Table Description Enter a description for the new object data table in the resulting topology. Load Use settings that you previously saved. Save Save the current settings so you can use them again. Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay. Back Display the previous dialog box. Next Click to display the next dialog box. Next is disabled if your source topology is a node topology. Finish Perform the topology overlay using the current settings.
PAGE 2032

Load Use settings that you previously saved. Save Save the current settings so you can use them again. Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay. Back Display the previous dialog box. Next Click to display the Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Topology dialog box (page 2004). Finish Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology name for the resulting topology.
PAGE 2033

None Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, but no topology data is created. Temporary Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and the topology data is loaded into memory. This data is not saved to the objects. You can use a temporary topology with the following commands: Buffer, Dissolve, Overlay, Trace, Unload, Rename, Statistics, and Delete. You cannot edit a temporary topology. As soon as you close the current drawing, the temporary topology is removed from memory.
PAGE 2034

■ You can base topology property queries on polygon values of Area, Length, Perimeter, and Direction. Linear objects also have predefined object data for Direct Resistance and Direction. ■ Property alterations work differently with polygon topologies. ■ For Report mode, additional dot variables, .TOPONAME, and .TOPOTYPE, are available for topology queries. The dot variables .DRAWING, AREA, and .PERIMETER yield different results in topology queries.
PAGE 2035

Click Map Setup tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ Rename. without an asterisk. Specify a name Permanent Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and a new topology is created. Topology Selection dialog box NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Use this dialog box to select a topology. To load a topology (page 907) To unload a topology (page 908) To audit, recreate, or complete a topology (page 920) To delete a topology (page 926) Click Analyze tab ➤ Drawing Object panel ➤ Load Topology.
PAGE 2036

Click Map Setup tab ➤ Topology panel ➤ Statistics. Selected Topology area Name Displays the name of the current topology. Description Displays the description of the topology. Type Displays the type of topology. Topologies can be Node, Network, or Polygon. Extents area This area displays the coordinates of the lower-left corner and upper-right corner of the bounding rectangle for the selected topology.
PAGE 2037

Viewing Dialog Boxes 39 Quick View Drawings dialog box Use this dialog box to select drawings to include in the Quick View. To view objects in source drawings (page 746) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Quick View Drawings. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To bring geospatial feature data into your map, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305). Quick View displays all objects in the selected active source drawings. You can zoom and pan, but you cannot edit the objects.
PAGE 2038

Filters Displays the Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box, where you can create or change the filters for file names and descriptions. Zoom to the Extents of Selected Drawings Zoom the current drawing to the extents of the selected source drawings. Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box Use this dialog box to zoom to the extents of a set of drawings. To zoom to the extents of selected drawings (page 745) Click Map Setup tab ➤ Map panel ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
PAGE 2039

To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box (page 1922), you can create separate filters for file names and descriptions. Define Document View dialog box Use this dialog box to define a document view to view external documents attached to an object. At the Command prompt, enter adedefdocview. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To see database information linked to geospatial features, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
PAGE 2040

Name Enter a name for a new document view. Names cannot contain spaces. Description Enter a description for the document view. Expression Enter information on where to find the name of the document associated with an object: ■ If the name of the associated document is stored in an object data table, click Expression and select the table and field that contains the document name.
PAGE 2041

For example, if you are creating a view for a Word document, enter the path and file name for the Word program file. If you are unsure of the location, click [...] to search your directories and locate the application file. Launch Method Select a launch method. ■ Select Default if the application specified for Command Line is a Windows application. ■ Select User if the application specified for Command Line is an ARX application. Enter the name of the viewing function.
PAGE 2042

Current Key View Definition List Display the drawing window width conditions defined in this drawing. Edit Copy the selected condition to the bottom of the screen, where you can change the width and add or remove layers. Delete Delete the selected condition. Clear List Delete all conditions. Width > box Enter the width to define. The width is the distance across the drawing window as measured in drawing units. The more you zoom in, the smaller this number is.
PAGE 2043

Document View dialog box More than one document is associated with the object you selected. Select the document type you want from the list. Click View. At the Command prompt, enter adedocview. NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. Select Document View list Lists the document types for this object. Select a document type. Click View to start the associated application and view the associated document. Select Object Select a new object and view its associated documents.
PAGE 2044

Zoom Extents Zoom to the extents of all active drawings, showing only the key layers for that magnification. Zoom Out Zoom out .8x, showing only the key layers for that magnification. Pan Pan the current view using one of these methods: Displacement At the first prompt, specify the displacement. At the second prompt, press Enter. The drawing moves by the amount you specified. Points At the first prompt, specify a point. At the second prompt, specify a new point.
PAGE 2045

Workflow Designer 40 MAPWORKFLOWOPEN Opens the specified saved workflow for the current map. Open workflows appear in the list in the Workflow panel on the Tools tab. Workflows in this list are available to run or edit. To create a workflow (page 287) MAPWORKFLOWRUN Runs the specified workflow. You must save the current workflow to run it. If the workflow has already been saved, you must open it to run it. To open a workflow, click its name in the list in the Workflow panel on the Tools tab.
PAGE 2046

Workflow Designer Use the Workflow Designer to create or edit a workflow. The name of the current workflow appears in the title bar. To edit a workflow (page 284) To create a workflow (page 287) Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. Workspace Controls The tools at the top of the Workflow Designer control the appearance of the design space. They provide clipboard functions for activities, and let you open, save, and print workflows. New Create a workflow definition. Open Open an existing workflow.
PAGE 2047

session. However, you cannot undo changes to parameter settings in input editors. Cut/Copy/Paste Use a workflow clipboard to cut, copy, and paste activities. You can copy an activity from one workflow and paste it into another workflow. Run Run the current workflow. If you have unsaved changes, you are prompted to save them. Running a workflow from within Workflow Designer validates each step. A green check mark appears if the activity is successful.
PAGE 2048

Workflow Activities Double-click an activity box to see its parameters. Each activity box displays the following: ■ An icon indicating whether it is a command, a layer, a description, or a link to another workflow. ■ The activity title (by default, the name of the activity in the Activities Panel). All activities have an optional Display Name property. If you change that property, the new name appears. ■ Parameters. To change the parameters, double-click the activity box or click ■ .
PAGE 2049

Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes Use the workflow activity input dialog boxes to specify or change the parameters for a workflow activity. To edit a workflow (page 284) To create a workflow (page 287) Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. The Workflow Designer includes activity dialog boxes for the following activities. For detailed information about utility activities, see the Windows Workflow Foundation documentation. Utility Activities Insert activities that are not AutoCAD Map 3D-specific.
PAGE 2050

Parallel Activities that enclose sets of serial activities. Each set can run independently of the other. For example, when adding connection activities, add them inside a parallel activity. That way, if one connection fails, others can still execute. Prompt User Specifies a Yes/No dialog box to display at this point in the run-time workflow. For example, you can create a prompt whose title bar reads “Warning,” and contains the text: “The workflow will now convert your SHP files to SDF format.
PAGE 2051

■ Change Feature Layer Symbol (page 2031): Sets the styling parameters for the specified feature layer. ■ Change Group Properties (page 2033): Changes the visibility, name, and parent group of a specified group in the Display Manager. ■ Connect To Data Store (page 2034): Connects to the specified data store but does not add data to the map. For an overlay that specifies feature classes, rather than layers, this activity is sufficient (you do not have to create a layer).
PAGE 2052

■ Remove Map: Deletes the specified display map from the current map file. ■ Rename Map: Specifies a different name for the specified display map. ■ Run AutoCAD Command (page 2046): Executes any AutoCAD command-line instruction supported by AutoCAD Map 3D. If the command requires a selection set or displays a dialog box, the workflow pauses (during run time) to allow for selection or input. ■ Run Workflow (page 2047): Invokes another workflow at this point in the current workflow.
PAGE 2053

Optional Parameters ■ Display Name: Enter a title for this activity. ■ Feature Class: Click activity. and select a feature class or layer from a preceding NOTE For WMS feature sources, feature classes are displayed as WMS_Schema:0 0, WMS_Schema:0 1, and so on, rather than with descriptive names. For descriptions of the feature classes, examine the connection information in the Data Connect window ■ Group: Specify a group for this layer to use in Display Manager.
PAGE 2054

Prompt For Parameters At Run Time Select this option to pause for input at run time. Add Map This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) adds the specified display map to the current map file. You can change the display to show the new map. To edit a workflow (page 284) To create a workflow (page 287) Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. The output of this activity is a Display Manager map name. Name Enter a name for this map. Optional Parameters ■ Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
PAGE 2055

This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent activities. However, it can change a layer or group name, which can affect subsequent activities. Name Enter the name of the layer to change. Visible Specify whether to make the layer visible or not, or to leave its visibility unchanged. Name Specify the name of the layer. Group Move the layer into a different parent group, or select No Change to leave it in the current one.
PAGE 2056

Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent activities. Layer Name Enter the name of the layer to change. To see the current values for this layer (if it is already in the map), click Current Values. Style Point If the geometry of this layer is a point, specify and style the point symbol that represents it in Display Manager.
PAGE 2057

Change Group Properties This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) changes the visibility, name, and parent group of a specified group in the Display Manager. For information about groups, see Organizing Layers in Your Map (page 300). To edit a workflow (page 284) To create a workflow (page 287) Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent activities. However, it can change the group name, which can affect subsequent activities.
PAGE 2058

Connect To Data Store This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) connects to the specified data store but does not add data to the map. For an overlay that specifies feature classes, rather than layers, this activity is sufficient (you do not have to create a layer). NOTE The parameters vary according to the type of data store you connect to. For example, a database requires login information, while a file requires a file name.
PAGE 2059

Data Store Enter the data store name for this service. For Oracle and MySQL data stores, you can display all data stores if desired. Version Enter the version of the data store to connect to. Other Database Data Stores For more information about these options, see Bringing In Features from Oracle (page 312), Bringing In Features from SQL Server (page 323), Bringing In Features from SQL Server Spatial (page 326), and Bringing In Features from MySQL (page 332).
PAGE 2060

WMS Data Stores For more information about these options, see Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445). Server Name Or URL Enter or navigate to the server where this data store is located, or enter its URL. Version Choose a supported version from the list. WFS Data Stores For more information about these options, see Bringing In Features from WFS (page 346). Server Name Enter or navigate to the server where this data store is located.
PAGE 2061

Selection Set Specify the feature to base the buffer analysis on. Distance Specify the buffer distance or prompt for a distance when the workflow is run. Unit Specify the measurement unit for the distance. Save To SDF To save the resulting buffer layer as an SDF file, specify a name and location for the file. Merge Results Select from the following: ■ No Merging: Overlapping buffers are not merged. The number of resulting buffers is equal to the number of features being buffered.
PAGE 2062

This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent activities. Source Type Specify how to select the features whose attributes you will display. You can display an entire feature source or a selection set. If you choose to select by feature source, specify the connection ID and a feature class name for that feature source. If you choose to select by selection set, indicate which features to select. Optional Parameters ■ Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
PAGE 2063

Prompt For Parameters At Run Time Select this option to pause for input at run time. List Current Connections This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) lists the names of connections in the current map. You cannot specify parameters for this activity, other than a Display Name. To edit a workflow (page 284) To create a workflow (page 287) Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. The output of this activity is the Connection IDs for all current connections.
PAGE 2064

Optional Parameters ■ Display Name: Enter a title for this activity. Prompt For Parameters At Run Time Select this option to pause for input at run time. List Feature Layer Properties This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) lists the name of the specified layer in Display Manager, as well as any group it belongs to. To edit a workflow (page 284) To create a workflow (page 287) Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit.
PAGE 2065

and styles the layer correctly. For information about layer files, see Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers (page 651). To edit a workflow (page 284) To create a workflow (page 287) Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. The output of this activity is a Display Manager layer that displays the specified .layer file. File Name Enter the name of the .layeror browse to it. Optional Parameters ■ Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
PAGE 2066

Data Type Specify whether the overlay compares feature classes or Display Manager layers. Both the source and overlay must be the same type (you cannot compare a feature class to a layer). Source/Overlay If you select Layers as the Data Type, select the Source Layer and Overlay Layer. These layers are the output of preceding Add Feature Layer activities. If you select Feature Classes as the Data Type select a Source Feature Class ID (the output of a preceding activity).
PAGE 2067

■ ■ Length : Set the minimum distance at which two nodes or vertices of a line or polygon are treated as separate points. The default value is determined from the spatial context for the sources. Output Properties: Specify which properties from the source and (if applicable) overlay inputs are included in the output. “Identifiers Only” writes the primary identifiers to the output. “Non-Identifiers” writes only the non-key attributes (creating auto-generated primary identifiers for the output features).
PAGE 2068

Remove Feature Layer This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) removes the specified feature layer. To edit a workflow (page 284) To create a workflow (page 287) Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent activities. However, the removal of a layer can affect subsequent activities. Layer Name Enter the name of an existing layer, or select a layer created by a previous activity.
PAGE 2069

Optional Parameters ■ Display Name: Enter a title for this activity. Prompt For Parameters At Run Time Select this option to pause for input at run time. Remove Map This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) removes the specified display map. To edit a workflow (page 284) To create a workflow (page 287) Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent activities. However, the removal of a map can affect subsequent activities.
PAGE 2070

Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent activities. However, the removal of a map can affect subsequent activities. Map Enter the name of an existing display map, or select a map created by a previous activity. New Name Enter a new name for the specified map, or select a map created by a previous activity. Optional Parameters ■ Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
PAGE 2071

Optional Parameters ■ Display Name: Enter a title for this activity. ■ Parameters: Enter any parameters for the command, or prompt for them at run time. NOTE If the command displays dialog boxes or requires a selection set, you must provide this input manually at run-time. You cannot automate these responses. Prompt For Parameters At Run Time Select this option to pause for input at run time.
PAGE 2072

Optional Parameters ■ Display Name: Enter a title for this activity. Prompt For Parameters At Run Time Select this option to pause for input at run time. Save Layer File This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) saves a Display Manager layer to a .layer file. You can save layers from all display maps in your map file. For information about layer files, see Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers (page 651).
PAGE 2073

Select Features This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) selects individual features in the current display map. You can select the features by layer, by location, or by prompting for a manual selection at workflow run time. To edit a workflow (page 284) To create a workflow (page 287) Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. The output of this activity is a selection set. Selection Method Choose one of the following: ■ Prompt: The workflow will pause at run time to allow manual selection of features.
PAGE 2074

Switch Map This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) changes the current display to the specified display map. To edit a workflow (page 284) To create a workflow (page 287) Click Tools tab ➤ Workflow panel ➤ Edit. The output of this activity is a new current map. Map Name Enter the name of an existing display map, or a map created by a previous activity. Optional Parameters ■ Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
PAGE 2075

Target Specify what to zoom to: a map, a layer, a selection set, or an extent. Then specify which map, layer, selection set, or extent to zoom to. Optional Parameters ■ Display Name: Enter a title for this activity. Prompt For Parameters At Run Time Select this option to pause for input at run time.
PAGE 2076

2052
PAGE 2077

Programming Interfaces 41 Learn how to use the AutoCAD Map 3D Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), including: ■ ActiveX ■ AutoLISP ■ Feature Data Objects (FDO) ■ Geospatial Platform ■ .NET ■ ObjectARX For more information, click Help > Additional Resources > Developer Help.
PAGE 2078

2054
PAGE 2079

Glossary .layer file Layer definition file. In AutoCAD Map 3D, a file that saves all of the information required to recreate a layer, that is, the references to the source data and the styles that have been applied to it. adjacent sheet block An annotation (page 2055) block used to indicate adjacent tiles. anchor point The location on a drawing object that determines the position of any annotation attached to that object. annotation A way to display related values on a drawing object.
PAGE 2080

auto-generated field (metadata) A type of field in the Metadata feature, the value of which is derived from the data source, and populated automatically by AutoCAD Map 3D. Metadata auto-generation is triggered by selecting the resource in the Metadata Viewer. See also: forced-update field (page 2064) AutoCAD layer A layer in AutoCAD. An AutoCAD layer differs from a map layer you create in Display Manager (page 2060).
PAGE 2081

Cartesian coordinate system A global coordinate system (page 2065) defined using three perpendicular axes (X, Y, and Z) to specify locations in three-dimensional space. Compare with spherical coordinate system (page 2075). cartographic coordinate system A global coordinate system (page 2065) that is referenced directly to an ellipsoid (page 2062). Compare with geodetic coordinate system (page 2064). centroids Points or blocks (page 2056) that are part of a polygon in a drawing topology.
PAGE 2082

conic projection A map projection in which the surface of the Earth is drawn as it would appear if projected on a cone wrapped around the earth. The Lambert Conformal Conic is often used for maps of the continental United States, France, and other countries. constraint In a database, a restriction specified for a certain feature class (page 2063), which is validated when a new feature is added to that class.
PAGE 2083

Data Connect The window you use to connect a geospatial data store (page 2059) to your map. You specify each feature class (page 2063) from that data store to add to your map. data element (metadata) A single piece of data that can be entered directly, as a value in a field. In the Metadata feature, single data elements are expressed as fields to be completed with values defined in the FGDC CSDGM Standard (page 2063). See also: compound element (metadata) (page 2057).
PAGE 2084

discrete data Data that falls into explicit categories. For a feature layer (page 2063) that uses a theme (page 2077), each value is displayed differently. For example, an agricultural thematic map might show each crop in a different color. Compare with continuous data (page 2058). display information A description of the appearance of a drawing object: includes items such as layer, color, hatch pattern, and line type.
PAGE 2085

drawing layer A layer in Display Manager (page 2060) that contains drawing objects from a DWG file. See also AutoCAD layer (page 2056), drawing layer (page 2060), feature layer (page 2063), and surface layer (page 2076). drawing object Objects that exist in a drawing (DWG) file or come from an attached drawing. Compare to features.
PAGE 2086

element (Oracle Spatial database) The basic building block of an Oracle Spatial geometry (Oracle Spatial database) (page 2064). The supported spatial element types are points, line strings, and polygons. For example, elements might model water wells (point clusters), roads (line strings), and county boundaries (polygons). elevation The vertical distance from a datum to a point or object on the surface of the Earth. The datum is generally considered to be at sea level.
PAGE 2087

FDO provider An implementation of the FDO (page 2062) API that provides access to data in a particular data store, such as an Oracle or ArcSDE database, or to a file-based data store, such as SDF or SHP. feature An abstraction of a natural or man-made real world object. A spatial feature has one or more geometric properties. For example, a road feature might be represented by a line, and a hydrant might be represented by a point.
PAGE 2088

flood trace For a network topology (page 2069), a trace that begins at a specified point and traces out in all directions for a specified distance or resistance. forced-update field A type of auto-generated field (metadata) (page 2056) in the Metadata feature, the value of which is required to be derived from the data source within a GIS resource (metadata) (page 2072), according to the rules of the FGDC CSDGM Standard (page 2063). Forced-update fields are updated each time metadata is updated.
PAGE 2089

referenced data. A GIS is used to capture, store, retrieve, analyze, and display spatial data. global coordinate system A method that converts the spherical coordinates of the Earth representing latitude and longitude into an AutoCAD Map 3D drawings Cartesian coordinate system, and accounts for the curvature of the surface of the Earth with a projection.
PAGE 2090

join A relationship that is established between attribute data and feature sources for the purposes of creating a new view of the data or for ad-hoc analysis. JPG2000 An advanced raster image format from Joint Photographics Expert Group, featuring options for lossless compression, wavelet compression, incremental decompression, and support for up to 48-bit color. key column One or more columns in a table whose values are used to uniquely identify a record.
PAGE 2091

link (external databases) The connection between a drawing object and its related database data. The link data is stored on the linked drawing object and contains the name of the link template and the key value used to identify the associated record in the linked table. An object may have more than one link. link (geometry) An element of geometry that connects nodes. In a polygon topology, a link defines a polygon edge.
PAGE 2092

Map Explorer Manages your mapping resources. To view Map Explorer, click its tab in the Task Pane (page 2076). map projection A systematic representation of a spherical body, such as the earth, in a flat (planar) surface. Each map projection has specific properties that make it suitable for specific mapping needs. map query A set of conditions that specify the selection of drawing objects from source drawings.
PAGE 2093

metadata Data about data. In the GIS context, metadata consists of information that describes the essential characteristics of geospatial data sets. See also FGDC CSDGM Standard (page 2063). Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) A Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) projection (page 2078)- and Universal Polar Stereographic (UPS)-based grid reference system (page 2065) used by the United States military and NATO.
PAGE 2094

object data Attribute data attached to an object and stored in the drawing file. Compare with external data (page 2062). OGC Open Geospatial Consortium. A non-profit, international, voluntary consensus standards organization that leads the development of standards for geospatial and location based services. (www.opengeospatial.org) one-to-many join A join in which one record in the primary table corresponds to more than one record in the secondary table.
PAGE 2095

plot template block An AutoCAD block that contains plotting information such as title page text, plot layouts, legend, and other map annotation (page 2055). point cloud A collection of points represented as an AutoCAD object. Point Cloud Manager The main user interface for converting LiDAR data to a point cloud database file format. polygon A polygon is a closed area that stores information about its inner and outer boundaries, and about other polygons nested within it or grouped with it.
PAGE 2096

publish To generate output from a map book. purge To remove all unused object definitions from an open drawing. query A set of executable statements that retrieve specific objects. For example, a layer-based query that displays only the objects on the layers that contain state and district boundaries. See map query (page 2068), topology query (page 2077), and database query (page 2059). Query Library The set of queries saved in a drawing. You can add, delete, and modify queries in the Query Library.
PAGE 2097

rubber sheeting An editing method, used only when necessary, that attempts to correct errors by stretching a map to fit known control points or monuments. rule (for feature themes) A feature theme consists of a collection of rules. Each rule specifies a style and feature label for the features that meet the specified condition. You can add a legend label to provide a description of the condition of a rule.
PAGE 2098

sheet An individual named object in a sheet set that can be published. References a layout. In a DWF file, a plot layout containing a specific view of the original data. sheet set A named collection of sheets and subsets for publishing. sheet subset A named collection of sheets within a sheet set. An individual sheet can only be a member of a single subset. sheet template A drawing file that defines a title block and a layout for use in sheets. Can be specified for sheet sets and sheet subsets.
PAGE 2099

spatial data Information about the location and shape of geographic features, and the relationships between those features. See also feature (page 2063). Spatial Data File See SDF (page 2073). spatial database A database containing information indexed by location. spatial filter A selection of objects that specify which records to display in the active table or query. When a spatial filter is active, the Data View displays only those records linked to selected objects. Compare with SQL filter (page 2075).
PAGE 2100

along the 3D polyline in equal increments that are less than or equal to the supplementing distance. supplementing factors Add vertices along 3D polylines that are long and contain few vertices. The supplementing distance is the maximum distance between vertices. If the distance between vertices is greater than specified, then points are added along the 3D polyline in equal increments that are less than or equal to the supplementing distance.
PAGE 2101

task workflow An overview of the steps to perform common GIS tasks. template file A file that formats another file, such as a text file for saving information from queried objects. See also dot variable (page 2060), query (page 2072), and link template (page 2067). text layer Static text stored as a separate SDF data store, independent from the current map. You can precisely position text on the layer, and style and rotate the text. thematic map See theme (page 2077).
PAGE 2102

transverse cylindrical projection A map projection, in which the surface of the Earth is drawn as it would appear if projected on a cylinder wrapped around the earth in an east-west direction. Compare with cylindrical projection (page 2058). UDL (Universal Data Link) File with.udl extension that includes the name and location of the database table and the software used to create the file. Windows uses a UDL file to identify a data source.
PAGE 2103

weeding factors You can use the weeding factor settings to reduce redundant points along 3D polylines by ignoring vertices that are close together or along a straight line. A larger distance and deflection angle will weed a greater number of points. Distance is an absolute measure and the angle is measured in degrees. The larger the distance value, the greater the number of weeded points. The weeding factors must be less than the supplementing factors.
PAGE 2104

2080
PAGE 2105

Index .bmp files inserting with Raster Extension 455 .ddf files (SDTS format) 413 importing 414 .dgn files 405, 408, 1435 exporting to 1435 importing 405, 408 .dib files inserting with Raster Extension 455 .dpf files 781 .dwg files exporting maps to 1460 .dwk files 227, 730, 735 .dxf files 391 exporting 1459 importing 391 .eoo files exporting 396 importing 396 .gml files 412 exporting to 1429 importing 412 .ini files 249 and drive aliases 161 customizing 264 for import and export 269 .
PAGE 2106

A abstract classes in Schema Editor 1739 acadmap.ini file 161, 249 acadmap.
PAGE 2107

ADEQUERYLIB command 181, 183, 1858 ADEQVIEWDWGS command 747, 2013 ADEREMOBJS command 742, 760, 1885 ADERSHEET command 935, 1648 ADERUNQUERY command 180, 1861 ADERUNXQUERY command 180 ADESAVEOBJS command 742, 749, 754, 756, 1887 ADESELOBJS command 742, 752, 1886 ADESETCRDSYS command 147–148, 1296, 1598 ADESHOWOBJS command 753, 1887 ADETEXTLOC command 937, 1799 ADETRANSFORM command 932, 1649 ADEWHOHASIT command 735 ADEZEXTENTS command 745, 2014 adjacent arrows for map books 1385 aerial imagery purchasing 72 s
PAGE 2108

arcs 776, 1032, 1034, 1036, 1038, 1040, 1042, 1044 converting to polylines during Drawing Cleanup 776 displaying COGO information for 1161 specifying with angle and distance 1032 specifying with azimuth and distance 1042 specifying with bearing and distance 1034 specifying with deflection and distance 1038 specifying with distance and offset 1044 specifying with two bearings 1036 specifying with two distances 1040 ArcSDE 316 adding feature data to maps 319 exporting drawing data to 1423 importing data from
PAGE 2109

linking to drawing objects in maps 1067 overview 27 reports 1473 viewing (video) 27 viewing for features 1125 Attribute Data dialog box 1699 Attribute Domain Values Editor 1773 Attribute Editor (metadata) 1756 auditing metadata 1509 topology 920 Australian coordinate systems 109 changes 110 grid data files 109 AutoCAD Civil 3D 545 bringing data into AutoCAD Map 3D 545 AutoCAD Color Index 1552 AutoCAD commands 701 editing features with 701, 715–716 AutoCAD layers 356, 419, 421 adding drawing objects to maps
PAGE 2110

base object classes 123 base or abstract classes (inheritance) setting in schemas 612 BB 1036 best route analysis 845, 849, 1328, 1330 and direct resistance 849 and direction 845 BIL images inserting with Raster Extension 455 bitonal images inserting with Raster Extension 455 block attributes 532 and queries 1300 finding drawing objects by 1248 linking data to drawing objects in maps 532 linking to drawing objects in maps 1067 variables 1549 Block Mapping dialog box 1701 block names altering drawing objects
PAGE 2111

and coordinate systems 617 and geometry issues 625–626 and SHP files 617 and SQL Server Spatial 617 copying data from one feature source to another 621 copying foreign schemas 621 data types 623 ignoring errors 1744 log files 626 overview 617 video 616–617 widening conversion 623 Bulk Copy (video) 43 Bulk Copy dialog box 1744 Bursa/Wolfe conversion method 94 buying data 62 C caching 722 calculated fields video 1125, 1132 calculated properties and joined data 519 creating 1133 calibration and digitizing map
PAGE 2112

bringing data into AutoCAD Map 3D (video) 9, 43 exporting data to SHP 545 objects supported by AutoCAD Map 3D 543 video 543 classified DWG 988–989 Classified Property List dialog box (object classification) 1782 CLASSIFY command 990 Classify dialog box (object classification) 1782 Classify Objects dialog box 1783 classifying objects 988–989, 993 cleanup 767, 770, 773, 776, 779, 781– 783, 785, 788, 791, 794, 796, 799, 801, 803, 806, 808, 810, 814–815, 819, 838 actions 788 anchoring objects 770 apparent inter
PAGE 2113

using to modify thematic objects 1261 Column dialog box 1676 Column Values dialog box 1678 columns (in database tables) 526, 1058– 1059 for link templates in maps 526 formatting in Data View 1058 hiding or freezing in Data View 1059 combining maps 158 comma-separated files and user locale 1474 exporting from Data Table 1142, 1474 command line 87 inserting images 471 showing by default in geospatial and drawing workspaces 87 commands 1519, 1533 blocked during refedit 1537 changed from previous releases 1519
PAGE 2114

overview 1189 simplifying with Drawing Cleanup 814 video 1189 control points for digitizing 1073 conversion functions 1544 convert DWG data 1405 to other format 1405 Convert DWG To...
PAGE 2115

defining an ellipsoid 95 deleting 98 digitizing points 953 files 113 for current drawing (video) 143 for source drawings 143 GDC files 104 geodetic 149 grid data catalog (GDC) files 103– 104 ignoring in Bulk Copy 1744 latitude and longitude 92 measuring geodetic distance 1153 modifying 98 options 225, 231 overriding with Bulk Copy 621 overview 143 removing from drawings 150, 1296 selecting 590 specifying for export 1405 tracking coordinates 1150 transformation options 231 transforming for a drawing 152 vide
PAGE 2116

features (video) 684, 686, 691 geospatial features 687 linestring features 691 map books 1390 maps 298 metadata 1486 multilinestring features 691 multipoint features 688 multipolygon features 689 network topology 831, 836 node topology 827 point features 688 polygon features 689 polygons in maps 960 properties in schemas 598 query indexes 1294 schemas 598 themes for feature layers 1168 topology 825 workflows 281 crossing linear objects 779, 799, 838 breaking 799, 838 marking for cleanup 779 customizing 84–8
PAGE 2117

highlighting in Data Table 1139 importing 426, 434 joining to features 507 linking to drawing objects in maps 523 migrating 617 modifying object data tables 202 round-trip from DWG and back 1467 samples included with AutoCAD Map 3D 62 saving changes in Data View 1056 viewing for topology 914 viewing with Data View 1048 data access 540–541 extending capabilities 540–541 data attributes for properties in Schema Editor 1739 Data Condition dialog box (drawing queries) 1836 data conditions for queries 1248 editi
PAGE 2118

searching feature data 1207, 1210 selecting data 1212 selecting data with 1131 selecting features 1207, 1210 video 1130, 1136, 1138, 1140–1141 videos 1125 viewing data for all feature classes 1135 viewing feature class data 1135 viewing joined data 1135 viewing non-spatial data 1136 zooming to a view 1141 Data to Attach dialog box 1616 data types supported by OSGeo FDO Provider for SQL Server Spatial 562 when converting with Bulk Copy 623 Data View 526–527, 529, 539, 1048, 1053, 1056, 1222 adding records 10
PAGE 2119

linking records to drawing objects 529 linking to drawing objects in maps 523, 532 navigating in Data View 1048 opening in Data View 1053 opening linked 527 printing from Data View 1475 querying 1053 saving changes 1056 searching 1225 SQL conditions 1253 UDL (Universal Data Link) file for 209, 213 viewing external data 1048 database views accessing from native schemas 603 exposing in AutoCAD Map 3D 603 mapping to feature classes 603, 605 databases 209, 215, 291, 523, 529, 532– 534, 1048, 1056, 1085 adding r
PAGE 2120

Define Link Template dialog box 1682– 1683 Define New Category dialog box (drawing queries) 1838 Define New Object Data Field dialog box 1578 Define New Object Data Table dialog box 1803 Define Object Classification dialog box 1785 Define Object Data dialog box 1805 Define Query dialog box (drawing queries) 1838 Define Range Table dialog box (drawing queries) 1843 Define Text dialog box 1626 Define Text dialog box (drawing queries) 1846 Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box 1918 defining 92, 94–95 coordinate
PAGE 2121

Alter Lineweight 1624 Alter Plotstyle 1624 Alternate Font (drawing queries) 1835 Annotation Delete 1569 Annotation Refresh 1569 Annotation Text 1570 Annotation Update 1571 Assign Global Coordinate System 1598 Associate Database Versions 1675 Attach Object Class Definition File 1781 Attach Object Data 1793 Attach/Detach Object Data 1794 Attribute Data 1699 Attribute Domain Values Editor 1773 Attribute Editor (metadata) 1756 AutoCAD Map Confirmation (drawing topology) 1950–1951 AutoCAD Map Messages 1799 AutoC
PAGE 2122

Define Link Template 1682–1683 Define New Category (drawing queries) 1838 Define New Object Data Field 1578 Define New Object Data Table 1803 Define Object Classification 1785 Define Object Data 1805 Define Query (drawing queries) 1838 Define Range Table (drawing queries) 1843 Define Text 1626 Define Text (drawing queries) 1846 Define/Modify Drawing Set 1918 Delete Topology 1971 Design File Input Settings (Import) 1734 Design File Output Settings (Export) 1736 Detach Data Source 1684 Digitize Setup 1617 Dis
PAGE 2123

Link Template Key Column Entry 1620 Link Template Properties 1686 Load Internal Query (drawing queries) 1848 Load Topology 1976 Load Topology Conflict 1976 Load Topology From Source Drawing 1978 Location Condition (drawing queries) 1849 Manage Joins 1607 Map Book Properties 1830, 1832 Metadata Editor 1754 Metadata Options 1756 Metadata Viewer 1751 Network Topology Analysis Choose Locations 1978 Network Topology Analysis Output 1980 Network Topology Analysis Resistance and Direction 1982 Network Topology Ana
PAGE 2124

Select Drawings to Attach 1811 Select Existing Link Template 1689 Select Feature Classes (Display Manager) 1631 Select Images (Display Manager) 1631 Select Layers (Display Manager) 1631 Select Link Template 1690 Select Link Template Key 1797 Select Link Templates 1690 Select Objects page 1595 Select Plot Set to Convert 1831 Select Query 1691 Select Table 1691 Select Topologies (Display Manager) 1631 Set Property Alterations (drawing queries) 1863 Sort (records) 1692 Source Drawing Scope 1633 Spatial Data Or
PAGE 2125

Workflow Designer activity input 2025 Workflow Designer parameters 2025 Zoom Drawing Extents 2014 Zoom Scale 1697 DIB images inserting with Raster Extension 455 Digital Elevation Model 437, 440–441 adding to maps 437 sample images 63 digital elevation models 1188 adding contour lines 1190 analyzing 1188 applying hillshading 1200 applying vertical exaggeration 1200 changing theme colors 1205 draping vector data on 1193 Digital Terrain Elevation Data 437, 440– 441 adding to maps 437 digital terrain modeling 1
PAGE 2126

thumbnails for layers 300 updating 635 using 641, 654 using layers in MapGuide 2007 1470 video 634, 636 display maps and map files 7 display order 300 controlling in the Display Manager 637 for layers in maps 300 display styles combining 662 controlling display order 637 for drawing layers 660 legend 1117 modifying 663 modifying for scale thresholds 668 referencing 666 saving 665 viewing at all scales 670 displaying 474 angle information 1160 COGO information for lines and arcs 1161 map draw order 637 raste
PAGE 2127

simplifying objects 814 snapping clustered nodes 806 tolerance for 773 using 767 video 727, 766 weeding 819 zero-length objects 815 Drawing Cleanup dialog box 1585, 1587–1588, 1591, 1595 Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box 1593 drawing data 681 combining with feature data for maps 291 overview of editing in AutoCAD Map 3D 681 drawing layers 350, 419 creating themes for 1178, 1181 importing into AutoCAD Map 3D 419 styles for 657 styling with annotation 1186 styling with hatch patterns 1184 styling with ramps 1
PAGE 2128

defining expressions for 1275 defining label point 1280 deleting duplicates 794 digitizing 1073 Display Manager styles for 654 displaying thematically 1261 dissolving pseudo nodes 808 editing for topology 852 editing in map source drawings 748 editing in maps 947 editing in source drawings 163 editing links to external data 537 editing object class data 991 editing object data 1069 editing query conditions 1258 entering geometry when creating 1027 erasing on save back 764 erasing short linear objects 796 ex
PAGE 2129

rotating 931 saving as DXF 1459 saving in AutoCAD Map 3D 738 saving to new drawings 758 saving to source drawings 754, 756 saving to the current map 757 scaling 931 selecting 1219 selecting by properties 1219 selecting for cleanup 770 selecting with object classification 993 sharing 730 simplifying complex objects 814 snapping clustered nodes 806 SQL conditions 1249 SQL queries 1230 styles for 652 styling on import 385 text insertion point 937 transforming 931 trimming at a boundary edge 945 updating for to
PAGE 2130

removing coordinate system assignment 150, 1296 retrieving objects from 1237 rotating source drawings 169 rubber sheeting 934 save back extents 170, 756 saving 738, 751, 1460 saving objects to 757 saving queried objects to 754, 756 scaling source drawings 169 settings 164 sharing 161, 730, 751 stretching 934 tiled 756 tiles 154 topology 822 transforming 169 transforming coordinate system 152 updating 754, 756 user privileges for 83 viewing coordinate systems 151 viewing information 172 viewing locks 735 zoo
PAGE 2131

Edit Direct Resistance dialog box (drawing topology) 1972 Edit Direction dialog box (drawing topology) 1973 Edit Expression dialog box 1574 Edit Object Data dialog box 1795 Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box (drawing topology) 1973 Edit Text Layer dialog box (text layers) 1628 editing 83, 712, 748, 852, 860, 863, 867, 894, 947, 963, 991, 1056, 1069 attached drawings 748 coordinate system categories 101 coordinate systems 98 data in Data View 1056 datums 99 drawing descriptions 166 drawing objects in map sou
PAGE 2132

enlarged map sections 943 EOO files exporting 396 importing 396 EPSG numbers and SRID numbers 590 EPSG values for Web Map Service (WMS) 447 equal distribution 1165 equality functions 1543 ER Mapper images inserting with Raster Extension 455 erase overlay 1309 erasing saved back drawing objects 758 Error Markers dialog box page 1587 errors 767, 782–783, 785 cleaning up 767 correcting automatically 783 correcting in maps 927 correcting interactively 785 correction methods in Drawing Cleanup 782 displaying cle
PAGE 2133

feature data from Data Table (video) 1141 from Data Table 1142, 1474 Geography Markup Language 1429 GML 1429 GML (Geography Markup Language) 1405 layers (video) 1469 layers as SDF (video) 1469 layers from Display Manager 1470 layers to SDF (video) 1376, 1405 line segmentation 269 MapGuide SDF 2 files 1417 MapInfo MIF/MID 401, 1405 MapInfo TAB 1405 maps to DWG format 1460 metadata 1513 MicroStation DGN 1405 MicroStation DGN (in imperial units) 269 multiple layers to a single feature class 1442 mutliple featu
PAGE 2134

zooming to for drawings 745 external data 209, 215, 364, 434, 523, 529, 532, 534, 537, 1048, 1056, 1071, 1085 adding drawing objects to maps by 364 adding text to queried objects 1278 altering drawing objects based on 1270 attaching 209 attaching while digitizing 138, 1085 committing changes in Data View 1056 configuring 213 connecting 215 converting from object data 534 converting object data to 1071 database links 1222 detaching 209 disconnecting 215 editing in Data View 1056 exporting 1405 for drawing ob
PAGE 2135

FDO-enabled data stores and Bulk Copy 617 FDOATTACH command (discontinued) 1533 FDOCONFIGURE command (discontinued) 1533 FDOCONNECT command (discontinued) 1533 FDODETACH command (discontinued) 1533 FDODISASSOCIATE command (discontinued) 1533 FDODISCONNECT command (discontinued) 1533 FDOEDITSETADD command (discontinued) 1533 FDOEDITSETREMOVE command (discontinued) 1533 FDOEDITSETSAVE command (discontinued) 1533 FDOEDITSETSHOW command (discontinued) 1533 FDOLOCKS command 1606 FDOLOCKS command (discontinued) 1
PAGE 2136

ODBC 342 Oracle 312 overview 19, 305 PostGIS 340 PostgreSQL 340 removing highlighting in map 1138 Schema Editor 596 SDF 337 setting up 583 SHP 335 SQLite 330 updating automatically 700 versioning 723, 725 viewing data for all 1135 WFS 346 FEATUREDEF command 122, 124, 126, 1785 features 308, 314, 319, 324, 331, 333, 336, 338, 341, 344, 507, 512, 681, 684, 686–689, 691–692, 694, 696, 698, 700–701, 705, 712, 716– 717, 722, 725, 1008 accessing WFS data 348 adding (video) 9 adding ArcSDE data to maps 319 adding
PAGE 2137

labeling (video) 185–186, 190, 194, 640, 645, 648, 1091, 1096, 1098 loading styles 652 merging 710 overview 551 overview of editing 681 provider capabilities in maps 305 saving styles 652 searching for 1214 selecting 1207 selecting (video) 1130 selecting checked out 694 selecting in Data Table 1131, 1212 selecting with queries 1130 splitting 708 splitting (video) 706 styles for 641 styling (video) 34 theming (video) 37 updating automatically 700 updating geometry 717 versioning 723, 725 viewing attribute da
PAGE 2138

floating screen area for digitizing 132 flood trace analysis 1334 and direct resistance 849 and direction 845 fly through for surfaces 1196 folders drive aliases for 161 fonts setting for export and import 269 For Each activity for workflows 2025 formats for importing data to maps 378 supported for map export 1412 FoxPro attaching database to drawing 209 setting default version 243 frame color 451 specifying for raster images 451 FSD files 1513 functions 1541 arithmetic 1541 conditional 1543 conversion 1544
PAGE 2139

filtering when adding to maps 310 finding 1207, 1210 finding and selecting 1209 finding in Data Table 1212 labeling 1093 loading styles 652 managing 551 overview 551 overview of providers 547 overview of schemas 554 saving styles 652 searching for 1214 selecting 1207 selecting in Data Table 1212 selecting with queries 1130 styles for 641 viewing attribute data 1125 viewing data for 1135 geospatial workspace 84 showing command line by default 87 GeoSpot images inserting with Raster Extension 455 GeoTIFF imag
PAGE 2140

saving to source drawings from maps 761 scaling for drawing layer themes 1176 theming for drawing layers 1176, 1184 Hatch Options dialog box (drawing queries) 1847 Header/Footer dialog box 1685 height altering with queries 1261 and theming 1202 theming surfaces for 1203 HEIGHT variable 1546 help 61 printing 61 hiding Data Table 1127 Data View columns 1059 map books 1398 map status bar 87 Task Pane 221 Highlight Features activity for workflows 2038 highlighting 752, 911 drawing objects linked to external dat
PAGE 2141

Import Data Mapping dialog box 1732 Import dialog box 1711 Import Metadata Options dialog box 1757 Import Old Theme dialog box 1628 importing 269, 377–378, 381, 388–389, 391–392, 396, 399, 401, 404, 408, 410, 413–415, 417–419, 421, 424, 426, 428, 434–435 .ddf files (SDTS format) 414 .gml files 413 .ini file for 269 .shp files 399 .tab files 404 .
PAGE 2142

information 474, 916 for raster images 474 printing using report queries 1477, 1479 specifying type for tables 201 viewing for raster images 474 viewing for source drawings 172 viewing for topology 916 inheritance (base or abstract classes) setting in schemas 612 Insert Annotation dialog box 1574 insert errors ignoring in Bulk Copy 1744 Insert Image dialog box 1878 insertion point 451, 937 for labels 937 for text in maps 937 specifying for raster images (Data Connect) 451 insets for maps 943 installing samp
PAGE 2143

L L74 images adding to maps 437 label point 937, 1280 changing 937 defining 937 defining for drawing objects 1280 specifying while digitizing 138 labeling features 651 features (video) 640, 645, 648 LABELPT variable 937, 1546 labels 937 adding to features (video) 1089, 1091 allowing to obscure points 1097 for contour lines 1191 for features (video) 185–186, 190, 194, 1096, 1098 insertion point 937 on features 1093 on points 1099 Lambert Conformal Conic projection 143 land cover map 840 land use map 840 LAND
PAGE 2144

viewport for map books 1385 legends (video) 185–186, 190, 194 legends(video) 1117 length altering drawing objects based on 1265 finding drawing objects by 1244 LENGTH variable 1546 levels importing 381 library for queries 174, 178 LiDAR ASCII format 1012 data bringing in 374 filtering 1016 importing 374 managing 1015 overview 1012 supported versions 374 file types 1012 LAS file format 1012 LIDAR data 342 and ODBC 342 line features theming 1174 line width 776 assigning for drawing layer themes 1176 for objec
PAGE 2145

linetypes altering drawing objects based on 1265 altering with queries 1261 finding drawing objects by 1244 for drawing layers 660 setting for export and import 269 specifying for digitized objects 138 theming for drawing layers 1176 Lineweight Range Editor dialog box (obejct classification) 1790 lineweights 381 finding drawing objects by 1244 for drawing layers 660 for imported lines 381 setting for export and import 269 theming for drawing layers 1176 link data 434 altering drawing objects based on 1267 i
PAGE 2146

lists for schema property values 599 LizardTech images inserting with Raster Extension 455 Load Internal Query dialog box (drawing queries) 1848 Load Layer File activity for workflows 2041 Load Topology Conflict dialog box 1976 Load Topology dialog box 1976 Load Topology From Source Drawing dialog box 1978 loading 899 feature styles 652 queries 184 schemas 608 topology 899, 907 location 359, 539 adding drawing objects to maps by 359 for source drawings 169 link templates 539 Location Condition dialog box (d
PAGE 2147

publishing to DWF with attributes 1400 publishing to plotter 1402 rebuilding 1391 renaming 1402 saving settings 1394 setting up templates 1385–1386 sheet templates 1386 video 46, 1381 viewing 1397–1398 viewing layouts 1400 viewing properties 1399 viewing tiles 1399 Map Books sample templates 63, 66 map files and data stores 3 and display maps 7 map status bar hiding 87 MAP2SDF command 1419 MAPABOUT command 1905 MAPAL command 881 MAPAN command 879 MAPANBUFFER command 1348 MAPANDISSOLVE command 1345 MAPANNINS
PAGE 2148

MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT command 89 MAPEXPORT command 261, 264, 1410, 1457, 1704 mapexport.ini 269 customizing 264 MAPFDOBUFFERCREATE command 1302, 1306, 1309 MAPFEATUREEDITTOOLS command 1906 MAPFEATUREMERGE command 1651 MAPFEATURESPLIT command 1652 MAPFIGNORESPLITMERGERULES command 1653 MAPFLOOD command (discontinued) 1533 mapforeignfileproperties.ini customizing 264 mapgisoverlay 1309 MapGuide 389 exporting to version 6.
PAGE 2149

MAPNODEDIT 1946 MAPNODINS command (discontinued) 1533, 1947 MAPNODUPD command 892, 1948 MAPOD2ASE command 533–534, 536, 1680, 1689 MAPOPTIONS command 88, 216–218, 222, 226, 228, 230, 232, 237, 239, 244, 246, 249, 743, 765, 1908 MAPOVERLAY command (discontinued) 1533 MAPPLOT command 1364 MAPPOINTCREATE command 1663 MAPPOLYADD command (discontinued) 1533, 1948 MAPPOLYDEL command (discontinued) 1533, 1949 MAPPOLYGONCREATE command 1663 MAPPOLYGONEDIT 705 MAPPOLYGONEDIT command 1665 MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON command
PAGE 2150

registering for digitizing 136 rubber sheeting 932, 934 sample data for AutoCAD Map 3D 62, 71 scale 169, 638 sections 169 sharing 46, 1357, 1460 styles 631 tiling 951 topology 822 transforming 169 transforming coordinate system 152 trimming drawing objects at boundaries 945 MAPSDFIN command 390 MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED command 994, 1779 MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED command 994, 1780 MAPSELECTUNDEFINED command 995, 1780 MAPSHOWGEOM command 903, 912 MAPSHOWTOPO command 903, 912 MAPSTATUSBAR command 89 MAPTOPOADMIN comman
PAGE 2151

creating templates 1492 deactivating templates 1495 default template 1494 deleting records 1505 editing 1499 exporting 1513 exporting templates 1496 free-form fields 1501–1502 Horizontal Coordinate System Definition Editor (FGDC Metadata) 1768 importing 1511 importing templates 1492 ISO 19139 1483 previewing templates 1494 printing 1515 publishing 1515 record navigator 1507 removing templates 1497 renaming templates 1493 samples 63 setting options 1484–1485 setting options for 241 sharing 1510 Spatial Data
PAGE 2152

MrSID images 437 adding with Data Connect 440, 443–444 MTD files 1513 multi-page DWF 1365 multi-polygon and SHP files 572 multi-polygons and SHP files 335, 397 creating 689 Multi-Resolution Seamless Image Database images 437 adding with Data Connect 440 multi-user editing for drawing files (video) 727, 730, 734, 738 video 19 multilinestring features 691 creating 691 multiple features 1444 exporting from AutoCAD Map 3D 1444 multiple user options 216 multipoint features 688 creating 688 multipolygon features
PAGE 2153

creating 827 digitizing objects for 1073 overview 826 nodes (Map Explorer) displaying 221 nodes (topology) 138, 773, 779, 806, 808, 810, 814–815, 827, 860, 863, 870, 875, 878, 889, 892, 953, 1073 adding 878 changing appearance 870 changing resistance in topology 875 clustered 806 creating 827 dangling objects 810 digitizing 138, 1073 digitizing by coordinates 953 dissolving pseudo nodes 808 dissolving psuedo nodes 779 editing 860 explicit 1339 implicit 1339 importing 428 marking for cleanup 779 pseudo 808 q
PAGE 2154

overview 117, 981 privileges 83 removing from drawing objects 989 selecting objects using 993 setting up 118 variables 1551 object data 364, 426, 430, 434–435, 531, 533–534, 826, 829, 833, 887, 913– 914, 1061, 1064, 1066–1067, 1069, 1071, 1080, 1083 adding drawing objects to maps by 364 adding text to queried objects 1278 altering drawing objects based on 1267 and database links 533 and digitizing 1080 and network topology 829 and node topology 826 and polygon topology 833 attaching multiple records 1066 at
PAGE 2155

source drawings 163 options 169, 225, 229, 249, 764, 781, 922 acadmap.ini file 249 acadmap.
PAGE 2156

Overlay Analysis dialog box, Source and Overlay Type 1563 overlay topology 843 to find sliver polygons 843 overlays creating 1316 overview 1309 types 1309 overposting 1097 overshoots 773, 810 and dangling objects 810 tolerance for deleting 773 P Page Setup dialog box 1686 PAGESETUP command 1388 panning surfaces in 3D 1196 paper space and map topology 822 queries in 1235 Paradox attaching database to drawing 209 setting default version 243 Parallel activities for workflows 2025 parameters for Workflow activ
PAGE 2157

bringing in point cloud data 375 creating a Display Manager layer from a point cloud object 375 creating a new data store from filtered point cloud data 1024 creating a point cloud data store 1019 creating a point cloud group in Display Manager 1019 creating surfaces from point cloud data 1021 exporting point cloud data to ASCII format 1451 to LAS format 1451 to SDF format 1451 filtering point cloud data 1024 importing point cloud data 375 index file 1013, 1019 overview 1012–1013 point cloud data store 375,
PAGE 2158

points (geometric) 428, 953 boundary for query location 1241 digitizing by coordinates 953 importing as text 428 query location 1241 points (nodes) 767, 773, 779, 806, 808, 810, 814–815, 827, 850, 860, 870, 875, 878, 889, 892, 953, 1073 adding to topology 878 and topology 827 changing appearance in topology 870 changing resistance in topology 875 cleaning up 767 clustered 806 dangling objects 810 digitizing 1073 digitizing by coordinates 953 editing in topology 860 explicit 1339 implicit 1339 importing as t
PAGE 2159

incomplete in topology 920 inner and outer boundaries 955 merging in topology 867 nested 971, 974 overview of using in maps 955 query location 1241 rebalancing 963 removing from topology 889 slivers 841 splitting 969 splitting in topology 867 topology 836 updating for topology 892 polyline segments 814–815, 819 simplifying 814 weeding 819 zero-length 815 polylines 776, 808, 814–815, 819, 863, 898, 920, 939, 971 and Drawing Cleanup 776 converting 3D to 2D 776 converting drawing objects to 776 converting to p
PAGE 2160

map books 1399 setting identifier (primary key) in schemas 612 setting physical configuration 612 undoing schema changes 615 using as labels 1093 viewing for drawing objects 1146 viewing for features 1127 PROPERTIES command 992 Properties palette and Display Manager 1124 drawing attributes 1146 editing feature data 718 property alteration 1296 adding hatch to objects 1283 adding text to objects 1278 based on external data 1270 based on object data 1267 based on object properties 1265 modifying 1286 overview
PAGE 2161

issues with hatch 1300 joining conditions 1258 library 174, 178 link data conditions 1248 loading 184 location and buffer (video) 1302, 1306 location conditions 1241 model space 1235 modes 1288 modifying property alterations 1286 object data conditions 1248 operators 1256 options 245 overview 1235 paper space 1235 precedence of conditions 1256 Preview mode 1287–1288, 1290 previewing 1290 privileges for 83 problem solving 1300 property conditions 1244 Report mode 1287–1288, 1477, 1479 rerunning 178 running 1
PAGE 2162

raster images 291, 437, 440–442, 449– 451, 453–455, 465, 468, 471, 473– 475, 478–479, 481–482, 485–490, 493–494, 496, 498–499, 501, 503– 504 2D 444 adding contour lines 1190 adding to maps 437 adding with Data Connect 440, 442 adjusting brightness 673 adjusting contrast 673 analyzing 1188 and maps 291 and REGEN 459 and transparency 449 changing transparency 450 displaying extents 674 displaying in color or greyscale 674 exporting drawing objects to 1465 formats not supported by Data Connect 453–455, 459, 46
PAGE 2163

relational database tables 342 and feature classes 342 setting up users for AutoCAD Map 3D 584 relational databases setting up users for AutoCAD Map 3D 585 releasing locks for drawing objects 736 Remove Connection activity for workflows 2043 Remove Feature Layer activity for workflows 2044 Remove Group activity for workflows 2044–2045 Remove Highlighting activity for workflows 2038 Remove Object Data Index dialog box 1933 removing coordinate system assignment 150 Rename Category dialog box (drawing queries)
PAGE 2164

Run Workflow activity for workflows 2047 running workflows 278 S sample data downloading 63 for AutoCAD Map 3D 62 on product CDs 63 symbol libraries 70 SANGLE variable 1546 satellite imagery purchasing 72 samples 63 save back 761, 764 improving performance 1296 options 764 problem-solving 761 save back extents 170, 756 resetting 170 using to save drawing objects 756 viewing 170 Save Current Query dialog box (drawing queries) 1862 Save Features dialog box 1608 Save Layer File activity for workflows 2048 Sav
PAGE 2165

and OSGeo FDO Provider for SQL Server Spatial 610 backing up schemas 608 base classes 612 constraints 612 creating schemas 598 deleting schemas 614 editing schemas 612 enabling long transactions 612 exporting schemas 608 identifier properties (primary key) 612 importing schemas 608 overview 596 physical configuration 612 undoing schema changes 615 versioning 612 viewing schemas 609 Schema Editor dialog box 1739 schemas 608 and Bulk Copy 1744 appending feature classes (video) 610 appending feature classes to
PAGE 2166

Select Actions dialog box page 1588 Select Alias dialog box 1933 Select Coordinate System dialog box 1609 Select Data dialog box 1811 Select Data dialog box (drawing topology) 1989 Select Database Version dialog box 1688 Select Display Element dialog box 1631 Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box 1599 Select Drawings to Attach dialog box 1811 Select Existing Link Template dialog box 1689 Select Feature Classes dialog box (Display Manager) 1631 Select Features activity for workflows 2049 Sel
PAGE 2167

schemas 572 working with data 574 SID images inserting with Raster Extension 455 SIF files exporting 1417 SIZE variable 1546 SL King Provider 540 sliver polygons 839, 841, 843 finding when creating topology 843 finding when overlaying topologies 843 removing 839 slope 1162 and theming 1202 displaying 1162 theming surfaces for 1203 snapping nodes 806 soil drawings samples 63 solid fill 939 adding to closed polylines 939 Sort dialog box (records) 1692 Source Data dialog box 1897 Source Drawing Scope dialog bo
PAGE 2168

SPOT images inserting with Raster Extension 455 SQL Condition History dialog box (drawing queries) 1866 SQL conditions 364 dates 1253 editing 1258 for drawing queries 1249 maximum number in history list 225 operators 1253 quotation marks 1253 selecting drawing objects for maps by 364 strings 1253 troubleshooting 1253 SQL Expression dialog box (link templates) 1814 SQL Link Condition dialog box (drawing queries) 1866 SQL links index 1294 SQL queries for drawing data in Data View 1231 for drawing objects 1230
PAGE 2169

for maps 631 for points 646 modifying for drawing layers 663 referencing 666 saving in library 665 stylesheets for metadata 1489 styling and scale ranges (video) 643, 648 drawing objects on import 385 features (video) 3, 7, 34 using themes (video) 1163 Superuser 83, 142, 202, 227, 730, 733, 736 default password 142 forcing user login 227 logging in as 142 modifying object data tables 202 options 227 releasing locks 736 setting up privileges 83 turning on object locking 730, 733 surface connecting to raster
PAGE 2170

survey points 342, 1003–1008 and ODBC 342 assigning survey points to point groups 1006 creating geospatial features from survey points 1008 creating survey points 1006 creating survey points using coordinate geometry 1006 deleting survey points 1007 exporting to a LandXML file 1471 importing ASCII point data 373 importing LandXML data 371 point groups 1003–1005 removing survey points from a point group 1007 viewing survey point data in the points table 1008 viewing survey points 1008 SWIDTH variable 1546 Sw
PAGE 2171

attaching multiple records to drawing objects 1066 attaching records to drawing objects 1064 attaching to drawing objects automatically 1067 converting to database tables 534 creating 201 creating while digitizing 1083 deleting 202 displaying as text 435 editing 202, 1069 exporting 1405 for network topology 831 for node topology 827 for polygon topology 836 importing 426, 434 modifying fields 202 renaming 202 viewing for topology 914 tablet for digitizing 130, 132 TABLET mode 1080 and digitizing¶ 1080 TAG v
PAGE 2172

texture maps 1192 TGA images inserting with Raster Extension 455 Thematic Mapping dialog box 1642 thematic maps legend 1117 Thematic Values dialog box 1644 Theme dialog box (features) 1645 themes based on height, slope, or aspect 1202 by layer type 1163 changing colors for 1205 creating for drawing layers 1176, 1181 creating for feature layers 1168 distribution methods 1165 for drawing data 1178 methods to use 1165 ranges for (video) 1165 transparency 1172, 1174–1175 using for analysis 1163 video 1163, 1165
PAGE 2173

dissolving 1343 dividing polygons 867 editing 852, 860, 873 editing partial 894 editing polygons 867 errors 920 exporting 1458 flood trace 1334 highlighting objects 911 islands 920 land cover map 840 land use map 840 left-right relationships 836 links 831 loading 899, 907 managing 899 merging polygons 867 network topology 829, 831 node topology 827 object data for 913 object data stored for best route 1328 overlay analysis (video) 1336 overlaying 1339 overview 822 polygon topology 836 profiles for 922 pseud
PAGE 2174

using coordinate system for attached drawing 1150 transactions long (versioning) 612 transforming 931 coordinates 225, 231 drawing objects in maps 931 entire source drawing 169 transparency and styles 650 and themes 1172, 1174–1175 for polygon features (video) 1171 for raster images 449 for Task Pane 221 in themes 1171 video 640 Transparency Color dialog box (Insert Image command) 1883 transparent commands 1027–1028 using 1028 Transverse Mercator projection 143 Trim Objects at Boundary dialog box 1672 trimm
PAGE 2175

User Credentials dialog box 1610 User Information dialog box 1936 user interface in AutoCAD Map 3D 85 User Login dialog box 1937 users 83 database and AutoCAD Map 3D 585 rights 83 valid usernames 83 V validation and SQL Server Spatial 326 variables 937, 1541, 1546 AutoLISP 1551 block attributes 1549 dot variables 1546 LABELPT 937 object class properties 1551 object data 1549 SQL 1549 vector data 1193 draping on 3D surfaces 1193 purchasing 72 Vector Markup Language (VML) files exporting 1405 exporting to 14
PAGE 2176

copying data between data stores 616–617 creating data stores 582, 586, 594 creating features 684, 686, 691 creating features from AutoCAD objects 19 creating SDF files 43 Data Table 1125, 1130, 1136, 1138, 1140–1141 deleting properties from schemas 594, 610 Display Manager 634, 636 draping layers on surfaces 1187, 1192 draw order 634, 636 drawing cleanup 727, 766 editing features 684, 701, 721 editing features in a database 19 exporting current map to DWG 1405 exporting DWG data to GIS 628 exporting DWG to
PAGE 2177

theming features 7, 37 theming polygons 1171 topologies 1319 topology 822, 899, 906 using 3D view 1187, 1192, 1194 vertical exaggeration 1187, 1199 viewing attribute data for features 27 viewing the contents of SDF files 1453 zooming to features 1140 View Query Statement dialog box 1610 viewing 474, 746, 914, 916, 1048 coordinate system assignment 151 database tables 1048 drawing objects in attached drawings for maps 746 external data for drawing objects 1048 in 3D 1196 map book properties 1399 map book til
PAGE 2178

While activities for workflows 2025 Who Has It Information dialog box 1889 widening conversion and Bulk Copy 623 width altering with queries 1261 digitizing 138 wild-card characters 1537 using in dialog boxes 1537 using in expressions 1553 windows finding all objects in 1241 Windows authentication and SQL Server Spatial 326 WKT and coordinate systems 590 WMS video 305, 437, 445 WMS (Web Map Service) adding images to maps 437, 447 adding surfaces to maps 441 adding with Data Connect 440 metadata for 1486 pro
PAGE 2179

for object class definitions 129 importing as schemas 608 xrefs 157 and drawings 157 querying 1300 XSCALE variable 1546 Y YSCALE variable 1546 Z Z dimensions 562, 610 zero-length objects 815 identifying and removing 815 Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box 2014 Zoom Scale dialog box 1697 Zoom To Extents activity for workflows 2050 zooming 745 Display Manager 670 surfaces in 3D 1196 to drawing extents 745 to raster image extents 674 using Data Table 1141 zooming to features video 1140 ZSCALE variable 1546 I
PAGE 2180

2156